You are on page 1of 484

53-001A8-F00/E

Issue 1, September 1999
SRA L/7...38
LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM
INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL
(ITMN)
Manual
Volume: 1/1 code: 911-292/02B4000
Equipment code:
- 732-001/7, 8, 10, 13, 15
- 732-001/18, 23, 26, 38
- 732-021/7, 8, 10, 13, 15
- 732-021/18, 23, 26, 38
Approved by:
Responsible for Instruction Manual Department
Signature: Date: 04/11/99
Manual printed:
SRA L/7...38
LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO
SYSTEM
INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL
(ITMN)
Volume: 1/1 911-292/02B4000
SRA L/7...38
LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO
SYSTEM
INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL
(ITMN)
Volume: 1/1 911-292/02B4000
SRA L/7...38
LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO
SYSTEM
INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL
(ITMN)
Volume: 1/1 911-292/02B4000
SRA L/7...38
LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM
INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL
(ITMN)
Volume: 1/1 911-292/02B4000
SRA L/7...38
LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM
INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL
(ITMN)
Volume: 1/1 911-292/02B4000
SRA L/7...38
LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM
INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL
(ITMN)
Volume: 1/1 911-292/02B4000
D.45 D.55
D.25
D.30
D.20
SRA L Index of manual
53-001A8-I00/E
Issue 1, September 1999 1/2
Index of Manual
Frontispiece 53-001A8-F00/E
Handbook status 53-001A8-R00/E
Index 53-001A8-I00/E
Section 1: INTRODUCTION
Foreword 53-001A8-P00/E
Safety rules and use precautions 53-001A8-150/E
Section 2: DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT
General information 53-001A8-100/E
Technical characteristics 53-001A8-101/E
Equipment composition 53-001A8-102/E
Control and check devices 53-001A8-103/E
Use of the service telephone channel 53-001A8-104/E
Section 3: INSTALLATION
Equipment installation 53-001A8-200/E
Section 4: HARDWARE PREPARATION
Presettings 53-001A8-500/E
External connections 53-001A8-201/E
Connector assembling 53-001A8-202/E
Section 5: ACTIVATION
Activation 53-001A8-501/E
Use of POE 53-001A8-300/E
Section 6: MAINTENANCE
Periodical check and equipment functioning check 53-001A8-301/E
Troubleshooting 53-001A8-502/E
Replacement procedures 53-001A8-302/E
Section 7: SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Symbols and abbreviations 53-001A8-151/E
Index of manual SRA L
53-001A8-I00/E
2/2 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE<
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Handbook status
53-001A8-R00/E
Issue 1, September 1999 1/2
The following table shows the status of the documents composing this handbook.
Type of change:
N = new M = modified A = cancelled
The column "Modified pages" shows only pages which have been modified, whereas the indication "Issue/Date"
has to be changed on all pages of the documentation, even if they have not been modified.
Document Code Issue/Date
Type of
change
Modified pages
Frontispiece 53-001A8-F00/E 1/09/99 N
Handbook status 53-001A8-R00/E 1/09/99 N
Index of manual 53-001A8-I00/E 1/09/99 N
Foreword 53-001A8-P00/E 1/09/99 N
Safety rules and use precautions 53-001A8-150/E 1/09/99 N
General information 53-001A8-100/E 1/09/99 N
Technical characteristics 53-001A8-101/E 1/09/99 N
Equipment composition 53-001A8-102/E 1/09/99 N
Control and check devices 53-001A8-103/E 1/09/99 N
Use of the service telephone channel 53-001A8-104/E 1/09/99 N
Equipment installation 53-001A8-200/E 1/09/99 N
Presettings 53-001A8-500/E 1/09/99 N
External connections 53-001A8-201/E 1/09/99 N
Connector assembling 53-001A8-202/E 1/09/99 N
Activation 53-001A8-501/E 1/09/99 N
Use of POE 53-001A8-300/E 1/09/99 N
HANDBOOK STATUS
– Up-date: Issue 1, September 1999
– Previous:
Handbook status SRA L
53-001A8-R00/E
2/2 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
Document Code Issue/Date
Type of
change
Modified pages
Periodical check and equipment
functioning check 53-001A8-301/E 1/09/99 N
Troubleshooting 53-001A8-502/E 1/09/99 N
Replacement procedures 53-001A8-302/E 1/09/99 N
Symbols and abbreviations 53-001A8-151/E 1/09/99 N
SRA L Index of manual
53-001A8-I00/E
Issue 1, September 1999 1/2
Index of Manual
Frontispiece 53-001A8-F00/E
Handbook status 53-001A8-R00/E
Index 53-001A8-I00/E
Section 1: INTRODUCTION
Foreword 53-001A8-P00/E
Safety rules and use precautions 53-001A8-150/E
Section 2: DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT
General information 53-001A8-100/E
Technical characteristics 53-001A8-101/E
Equipment composition 53-001A8-102/E
Control and check devices 53-001A8-103/E
Use of the service telephone channel 53-001A8-104/E
Section 3: INSTALLATION
Equipment installation 53-001A8-200/E
Section 4: HARDWARE PREPARATION
Presettings 53-001A8-500/E
External connections 53-001A8-201/E
Connector assembling 53-001A8-202/E
Section 5: ACTIVATION
Activation 53-001A8-501/E
Use of POE 53-001A8-300/E
Section 6: MAINTENANCE
Periodical check and equipment functioning check 53-001A8-301/E
Troubleshooting 53-001A8-502/E
Replacement procedures 53-001A8-302/E
Section 7: SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Symbols and abbreviations 53-001A8-151/E
Index of manual SRA L
53-001A8-I00/E
2/2 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE<
BLANK PAGE
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Safety rules and use precautions
53-001A8-150/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Safety rules and use precautions SRA L
53-001A8-150/E
2/6 Issue 1, September 1999
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Safety rules and use precautions
53-001A8-150/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/6
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 SAFETY RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1 Electrical safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 Dangerous materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.3 External operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 ESDS PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Safety rules and use precautions SRA L
53-001A1-150/E
4/6 Issue 1, September 1999
1 GENERAL
This document contains all the safety rules and the use precautions to be followed
during operations on the equipment to avoid injuries to personnel and/or damages to the
equipment components.
2 SAFETY RULES
The equipment complies with the 89/336/EEC European specification.
The equipment is prearranged for supplying from station batteries (-48 to -60 VDC
± 20%); then follow the on force specifications for low voltage supplied equipment's.
2.1 Electrical safety
The equipment complies with the EN 60950/A3 safety specifications (1995).
The equipment must be installed, started up, managed and repaired only by properly
trained personnel.
If the equipment is supplied at 60 VDC, according to the allowed tolerances (±20%),
voltages exceeding the safety limits defined by the EN 60950/IEC 950 safety rule, can
be present inside the equipment.
The following plate defines the points where such a danger is present.
– Before supplying the equipment, it is necessary to complete the wiring of the
connections to the protection ground, the insertion of all the units and/or modules
provided for the requested configuration and also the connection of all the
necessary connectors.
– The connection to the protection ground must not be removed or damaged.
– The equipment supplying system must be provided with a sectioning device
upstream the connector.
– Before disconnecting the connectors, check that the supply has been removed by
means of the sectioning device installed upstream.
SRA L Safety rules and use precautions
53-001A1-150/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/6
2.2 Dangerous materials
For the elimination at the end of life, this equipment is inside the 160202 class (other
electronic material out of order) of the EUROPEAN CATALOGUE OF WASTES defined
with CEE/CEEA/CECA decision Nr. 3 of 20-12-1993 published on the European
Community Off. News. Nr. L5 of 1994.
Inside this product, some materials can be present that must not be exposed to flames
or to high temperatures. Such conditions can cause toxic fumes that must not absolutely
be inhaled.
Some metallic elements, necessary for the EMC shielding, content beryllium. Then it is
necessary to pay high attention during the use of such elements to avoid their breakage
or abrasion.
2.3 External operations
Some other operations involving danger conditions are the ones executed outside
during the equipment installation and starting up phase.
During the execution of such operations, it is necessary to follow strictly the safety rules
listed here below:
– During installation, while the antenna and/or the external supporting-frame for rod
are lifted, it is strictly forbidden to stay or to pass in the underlying area. Such an
area must be properly restricted or signalled according to the on force rules.
– For the external operations to be executed on the antenna, on the frame and on
the ODU, all the necessary safety rules against accidental fallings of the operators
must be respected, according to the on force rules. For example, it is necessary to
use protection fences and belts.
– During the equipment starting up phase, the operators must not be in front of the
antenna.
DANGER – If one of the above mentioned safety rules is not respected,
some injuries to the personnel can be caused.
Safety rules and use precautions SRA L
53-001A1-150/E
6/6 Issue 1, September 1999
3 ESDS PRECAUTIONS
The ESDS (Electro Static Discharge Sensitive) electronic devices can be partially or
permanently damaged by the static electricity that is commonly present in the operating
environment.
The main ESDS devices are:
– CMOS components
– Large Scale Integration components in MOS technology
– SAW (Surface Acoustic Wave) components
– Operational amplifiers with MOS/FET inputs
– MOS/FET components and arrays
– Microwave semiconductors and microcircuits at frequencies > 1 GHz
Modules containing ESDS devices are identified by following adhesive labels:
In order avoid any damage while handling the modules, the user should wear an
antistatic elastic bracelet, grounded by means a spiral cord.
Those modules that are mounted on the equipment (faulty or spare parts) shall be stores
in their original antistatic package marked by the labels above shown.
FINE
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
2/34 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
BLANK PAGE
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/34
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 IDU architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.2 ODU architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3 IDU-ODU INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.1 Radio signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2 IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.3 ODU power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
4 PHYSICAL INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.1 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.2 Tributary signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.3 User channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.4 V bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.5 PC channel (F interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
4.6 Q channel (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.7 D channel (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.8 Alarm and remote control external lines (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
4.9 EOW expansion channel (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.10 Handset (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
4.11 Monitoring of received RF power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
5 LOOP-BACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
6 CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
7 PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
7.1 RX protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
7.2 TX protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.2.1 TX protection in (1+1) configuration at frequency diversity. . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
7.2.2 TX protection in (1+1) Hot-Standby configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
7.3 Hardware protection logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
7.4 Hitless protection logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
4/34 Issue 1, September 1999
Illustrations
Fig. 1 SRA L equipment block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fig. 2 IDU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fig. 3 ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Fig. 4 Loop-back functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fig. 5 SRA L equipment: (1+0) configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fig. 6 SRA L equipment: 2×(1+0) configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Fig. 7 SRA L equipment: (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Fig. 8 SRA L equipment: (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Fig. 9 SRA L equipment: (1+1) FD configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fig. 10 SRA L equipment: A/D-RPT configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fig. 11 Protection general diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fig. 12 RX protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Fig. 13 TX protection in frequency diversity configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fig. 14 TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration with RF switch and one
antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fig. 15 TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration with RF switch and
two antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fig. 16 TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration without RF switch and with
one antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fig. 17 TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration without RF switch and with
two antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/34
1 GENERAL
The SRA L family, low-capacity radio systems, is designed both for cellular network
interconnections and for conventional point-to-point radio links.
The main applications of this digital radio system are:
– BTS <-> BTS, BTS <-> BSC, BSC <-> MSC interconnections in cellular networks
– point-to-point links in subscriber distribution networks
– networks pertaining to firms
– emergency and/or provisional links.
The transmission capacity can be:
– 2×2 Mbit/s
– 4×2 Mbit/s
– 8×2 Mbit/s
– 16×2 Mbit/s.
The 2 Mbit/s capacity, having the channel arrangement step like the one of 2×2 Mbit/s
capacity, is derived from 2×2 Mbit/s option. According to the applications, several RF
bands are provided:
– 7 GHz
– 8 GHz
– 10,5 GHz
– 13 GHz
– 15 GHz
– 18 GHz
– 23 GHz
– 26 GHz
– 38 GHz.
2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE
Fig. 1 shows the SRA L equipment block diagram.
The equipment has been realized by physically subdividing it into two assemblies, one
for outdoor installation (ODU) and one for indoor installation (IDU).
This subdivision allows:
– the RF losses, due to the interconnection between ODU and the antenna, to be
minimized
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
6/34 Issue 1, September 1999
– a common IDU, for all the applications to be realized.
According to the configurations, one or two ODUs can be equipped.The connection
between IDU and ODU is made through a single coaxial cable.
It is possible to use antennas with diameter dependently of the hop lenght to be realized.
2.1 IDU architecture
The IDU block diagram is shown in Fig. 2.
The IDU basic version (1+0) consists of:
– a RTM unit (2x2 Mbit/s, 4×2 Mbit/s, 8×2 or 16×2Mbit/s), which includes all the Base
Band processing, the modulation/demodulation functions, IF conversions, the
cable protection and the IDU-ODU auxiliary service channel management
– a 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (75 Ohm unbalanced or 120 Ohm balanced), representing
the equipment physical access of the public network 2 Mbit/s tributary streams
– a Controller unit, including all the control and supervision functions.
Besides, the IDU may include the following units (option):
– an Alarm unit, including all the alarm and remote control interfaces; should the
equipment be utilized in a wide temperature range (-5°to +55°C), the IDU can be
equipped with an Alarm and Fan unit
– EOW unit, for local and remote speech connections between IDU and ODU
– Q-Adapter unit, for the connection to an supervisory center or in alternative, a D
Channel Distributor unit.
All the other IDU configurations (2×(1+0), A/D-RPT, (1+1)) are obtained by duplicating
the RTM unit.
On the back-plane, the IDU is provided with a EEPROM memory, doubled on the
Controller unit (for protection purposes) where all the configuration parameters are
memorized. If available, the backplane EEPROM stores the reference equipment data
used for Controller EEPROM up-grading.
Then, each unit is equipped with a EEPROM memory where the inventory data are
memorized.
The main functions of IDU units are here below set down:
– 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit
It performs the following functions:
• impedance matching of 2 Mbit/s I/O tributaries
• input tributary branching to the two RTM units, should the equipment be in
protected configuration
• tributary protection against fulminations and overloads.
• interfacing of the equipment main supply voltage (from station batteries) with
protections against overvoltages and transients.
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/34
Fig. 1 – SRA L equipment block diagram
(*) Optional
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
8/34 Issue 1, September 1999
– RTM unit
It performs the following functions:
• regeneration of 2 Mbit/s input tributary signals, as per Rec. G.703, and
HDB3 →NRZ conversion of the associated code
• generation of the aggregate frame and multiplexing of input tributary signals
• scrambling and encoding on the aggregate signal
• digital modulation on the aggregate signal and D/A conversion
• conversion of the modulated signal to the 2nd IF TX frequency (320 MHz) and
relevant filtering as per ETSI Rec.
• generation of an auxiliary service channel for the transmission of data
channel, alarms, speech channels, etc., between IDU and ODU
• FSK modulation (6.5 MHz carrier frequency) of the 128 kbit/s auxiliary service
channel and frequency multiplexing with 320 MHz IF main signal
• IF signal amplification to be sent to ODU through the coaxial cable and
protection against fulminations and overloads
• automatic level equalization on the signal from ODU
• differential demodulation with associated Viterbi decoding of 70 MHz IF signal
and consequent demultiplexing of the 2 Mbit/s tributaries from the frame
• demodulation of 5.5 MHz FSK signal carrying the auxiliary service channel
IDU-ODU.
The unit includes all the circuits required for executing a hitless switching function
between two aggregate signals, the equipment being in protected configuration,
and also a DC/DC converter for its own power supply.
– Controller unit
It constitutes the "intelligent" unit of the IDU. It is connected to all the other units
through a data bus managed by a microprocessor and it is enabled to manage all
the expected equipment configurations.
It performs the following functions:
• collection of the alarms and parameters from all the other equipment units and
their transmission to local terminal or a supervisory center
• activation of the commands from a PC or a supervisory center (state
configuration presetting, parameters change, etc.)
• storage of the configuration and data at unit level (code, issue, etc.) and at
system level (bit rate, RF frequencies, etc.)
• collection of the data coming from the Controller units of the other equipments
and from the supervisory center
• routing of the messages addressed to all the other controllers and coming
from a supervisory center.
The unit is equipped with:
• boot software on EPROM
• Management software on flash memories; it is possible to execute its
download from terminal, either local or remote.
The unit includes a DC/DC converter for its own power supply and feeding of the
Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit.
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 9/34
– Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit
It performs the following functions:
• management of the systems alarm and remote control signals
• interfacing of the auxiliary supply voltage
• cooling, through the fan activation, of IDU circuits should an internal high
temperature be detected (Alarm and Fan unit only).
The Alarm and Fan unit comprises a DC/DC converter to feed the fans.
– Q-Adapter unit
The unit function consists in providing a protocol translation between the SRA L
network, using the TCP/IP protocol, and a TMN supervisory center, using a
standard Qx/Q3 protocol. Several utilization configurations are provided of
Q-Adapter unit and different connecting modes to TMN supervisory center.
Alternatively, the Q-Adapter unit allows the connection of the SRA L network to
QD2 management systems, by means of QD2 interface.
The unit is equipped with firmware of EPROM.
The unit comprises a DC/DC converter for its supply voltage and a DC/DC
converter for Ethernet transceiver feeding.
– D Channel Distributor unit
The unit is fully passive and its function consists in providing additional channel
accesses for the Controller unit:
• I/O of two D external channels of the Controller unit.
– EOW unit
The unit function consists in managing a service telephone channel; in particular,
it allows for two stations belonging to the same service network, the following types
of link:
• between any two stations
• between a station and all the other stations
• between a station (IDU) and its external operator post (ODU)
• between two ODUs which could be in conference with the relevant IDUs.
The unit is equipped with firmware on EPROM.
The unit includes a DC/DC converter for its supply voltage and a DC/DC converter
to feed the subscriber line interface circuit.
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
10/34 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 2 – IDU block diagram
(*)Optional
(**)Not present in (1+0) configuration
(***)With Q-Adapter unit only
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 11/34
2.2 ODU architecture
The ODU block diagram is shown in Fig. 3.
From a functional viewpoint, the ODU comprises six modules, an RF Diplexer
connected to the antenna and, for some versions, an RF switch unit.
On customer request, an ODU version is available equipped with a pre-heater module
which extends the lower limit of the working temperature range from -30°C to -50°C.
The main function of ODU modules are here below set down:
– Protection module
It performs the following functions:
• input protection against lightning
• extraction of the DC supply voltage from the IDU-ODU coaxial connecting
cable.
– IF and Distributor module
It performs the following functions:
• it receives and splits the signals coming from the IDU: 320 MHz IF TX
modulated and 6.5 MHz FSK sub-carrier for the service connection
• it transmits the IDU signals: 70 MHz IF RX signal and 5.5 MHz FSK
sub-carrier for the service connection
• checks the amplitude of IF TX signal
• receives RF signals from the Front-End, filters and converts them to 70 MHz
• it includes the narrow band FSK modem for the IDU-ODU auxiliary service
channel and a microcontroller for the commands and data channels
• it includes a microcontroller checking the ODU presettings (frequency
synthesizer, TX output power, hot-standby, etc.) and receives the information
(RX input power, ODU temperature) and the alarms from the several ODU
modules
• it receives the DC voltages from the DC/DC converter and distributes them to
the ODU modules
• it includes the physical interface for the monitoring device for the received
power measuring
– Local Oscillator
It consists of three different parts:
• TX/RX UHF synthesizer
It includes a UHF double frequency synthesizer, defining the UHF TX and RX
frequency, with tolerance always lower than ±3 ppm. It receives the data from
the microcontroller for the programming of the operational TX/RX frequencies
utilized as reference for the locking of the microwave VCO.
• TX VCO
It houses a microwave VCO which transfers the IF TX 320 MHz modulated
frequency, coming from the IF module, through a wideband PLL, in order to
precisely repeat the IF spectrum at the frequency (7...38 GHz), locked to the
reference signal, coming from the dual UHF synthesizer. It sends the
frequency-modulated microwave signal to the RF Transmitter. Besides, it
generates the alarm signals for the fault signaling.
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
12/34 Issue 1, September 1999
• RX VCO
It receives the reference signal from the RX UHF synthesizer.
It includes a microwave VCO which is locked to the reference through a PLL
circuit. It sends the microwave signal to the port of the Front-End module local
oscillator; it also generates the alarm signals for the fault signaling.
• RF Transmitter
It performs the following functions:
• it amplifies the microwave signal coming from the TX VCO up to the desired
power, which can be modified through the microcontroller, and sends the
output signal to the Diplexer; the power amplifier can be disabled through a
squelch command (1+1) H/S configuration
• it generates the alarm signals for the fault signaling.
– Front-End module
It performs the following functions:
• it receives the signal from the Diplexer and amplifies it through two LNA
stages.
• it converts the RF signal to the 1st 1310 MHz intermediate frequency
• it amplifies and filters the converted signal and send it to IF and Distributor
module input
• it generates the alarm signals for the fault signaling.
– Diplexer Filter
The microwave Diplexer Filter includes the wave-guide microwave TX and RX
filters. It connects the TX output and the Front-End input to the antenna, filters the
received and transmitted signals and isolates the receiver from the RF Transmitter.
– DC/DC converter
It performs the following functions:
• it receives the DC voltage from the protection module
• it converts the input DC voltage in the DC voltages required by the different
modules the ODU consists of
• it delivers the generated DC voltages to the IF and Distributor module which
provides to distribute them
• it generates the alarm signals for the fault signaling.
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 13/34
Fig. 3 – ODU block diagram
(*)Present or absent according to versions
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
14/34 Issue 1, September 1999
3 IDU-ODU INTERCONNECTION
The interconnection between IDU and ODU is carried out and consists of a single
bidirectional line carrying a composite signal comprising the radio signal (TX and RX),
an IDU-ODU auxiliary service channel and ODU power supply.
3.1 Radio signal
The IDU-ODU connection, as far as the transmission/reception of the radio signal is
concerned, consists of two IF signals:
– 320 MHz TFM modulated signal from IDU to ODU, for the transmission of the
signal to be transmitted through the radio equipment
– 70 MHz TFM modulated signal from IDU to ODU, for the transmission of the signal
received through the radio equipment.
The use of the 320 MHz and 70 MHz frequencies allows:
– to optimize the IDU-ODU connecting cable length, attenuation and dimension
– to minimize the filtering functions on both IDU and ODU
– to minimize the interferences between the ODU TX and RX sections
– to minimize the interference between the harmonics of the TX IF frequency and the
shifter frequencies
– to obtain the dynamic interval required the AGC circuit both in IDU and ODU.
3.2 IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel
An auxiliary channel connects the IDU and ODU, carrying all the information required
for the correct equipment operation (alarms, data channel, speech channel, etc.). The
service connection between IDU and ODU is realized by means of two FSK modulated
sub-carriers, with 5.5 MHz and 6.5 MHz frequencies.
3.3 ODU power supply
The IDU-ODU interconnection cable also carries the secondary DC voltage for ODU
feeding, supplied by the corresponding IDU RTM unit. This unit also includes soft-start,
current limitation and open cable or short circuit cable alarm circuits.
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 15/34
4 PHYSICAL INTERFACES
4.1 Power supply
The IDU makes available, at the outside, a redundant input line for the connection of the
power supply batteries to the equipment.
4.2 Tributary signals
The IDU makes available, at the outside, 8 or 16 I/O lines for the 2 Mbit/s tributaries as
per G.703, with 75 Ohm unbalanced or 120 Ohm balanced interface.
4.3 User channel
The IDU makes available, at the outside, a 64 kbit/s synchronous data channel (V.11)
for applications defined by the user.
The SRA L system only executes a point-to-point channel carrying and it is absolutely
transparent to the channel contents.
The user channel can be configured in two different modes:
– Contradirectional: clock associated with the input data stream originated by RTM
unit and it is delivered to an external equipment
– Co-directional: clock associated with the input data stream originated by an
external equipment and delivered to RTM unit.
The user channel configuration is an action controlled through software, carried out by
the Controller unit.
4.4 V bus
The IDU makes available at the outside a 128 kbit/s data bus with burst mode (HDLC
frame), for the interconnection of the Controller unit to other Controller units of different
IDU assemblies located in the same site.
Up to 32 Controller units of different IDUs, can be interconnected through a daisy-chain
structure; V bus daisy chain kit or D channel distributor (available only if Q-Adapter is
non equipped) can be used for easy daisy chaining. The interconnection takes place by
means of a 120 Ohm, twisted-pairs cable (max. length 300 m). The V bus cable must be
correctly terminated by two 120 Ohm terminations, mounted at the two ends of the
cable.
4.5 PC channel (F interface)
The IDU makes available, at the outside, a 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous data channel
(standard RS-232C) for the connection to an external PC for the configuration,
presetting and local supervisory functions of the equipment.
During the equipment normal operating conditions, the connection to the service PC is
not required since the PC is only utilized in the setting at work and/or local maintenance
phase.
In the connection to the PC, the IDU is considered as DCE.
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
16/34 Issue 1, September 1999
4.6 Q channel (option)
The IDU makes available, at the outside, a data channel for carrying the TMN
information of a radio sub-network towards a supervision center. This channel is made
available through the Q-Adapter unit; one only Q-Adapter unit is required in a whole SRA
L network.
The Q channel utilizes the Rec.ITU T Q.811 protocol and it is available on two different
electrical interfaces (X.21 and 10BASE2) in order to allow two different types of electrical
connections between the Q-Adapter unit and the supervision center.
In the case of X.21 interface, the IDU is considered as DTE and the connector, located
on IDU, can be configured by the software through the Controller unit.
4.7 D channel (option)
The IDU, when equipped with Q-Adapter Unit, makes available to the outside a 64 kbit/s
synchronous data channel (RS-485), constituting the repetition of internal D channel of
SRA L equipment.
The D channel utilizes a proprietary protocol and it is usually used to ensure the carrying
of the TMN information through one of the 2 Mbit/s streams managed by the SRA L
equipment (the D channel is built-in the 2 Mbit/s stream by means of Add/Drop actions).
By the software, the D channel can be addressed again on the output connector located
on IDU; in such a way, the D channel becomes available to a TMN local operator
(outside to the SRA L equipment) which obviously has to use the proprietary protocol.
In alternative to Q-Adapter Unit, the IDU can be equipped with D Channel Distributor
unit. In this case, the IDU makes available two D channels named "external", managed
by the Controller unit, which allow the connection of different SRA L equipments (e.g.,
SDH) to SRA L network TMN supervision center.
4.8 Alarm and remote control external lines (option)
The IDU is provided with an alarm interface delivering to the outside some signal lines
associated with the three main functions:
– auxiliary supply voltage input port (function not strictly required for IDU standard
operation; if available, the auxiliary supply voltage allows a management of alarm
criteria even should the main power supply be faulty
NOTE – The Q channel is available only if the IDU is equipped with
Q-Adapter unit.
NOTE – The D channel is available only if the IDU is equipped with
Q-Adapter unit or, in alternative with the D Channel Distributor unit.
NOTE – The alarm interface is available only if the IDU is equipped with
Alarm unit or Alarm and Fan unit.
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 17/34
– transparent carrying, through a SRA L radio link, of up to four alarm/command lines
delivered to the outside (e.g., alarm of open door, smoke alarm, switching
commands, etc.)
– sending of six output alarms relevant to the equipment status and of four output
command lines relevant to the local Controller unit.
4.9 EOW expansion channel (option)
The IDU makes available to the outside two EOW channel expansion which can be
utilized to connect the equipment EOW channel to two EOW channels of two radio
equipments located in the same site; these systems, however, must have the same
expansion structure of the EOW channel, utilized by SRA L equipment.
The two channel expansions are of 6-wire type (4-wire speech + E&M signaling) or
4-wire with DTMF.
The EOW channel expansion allows to realize a network with very large daisy-chain
structure, consisting of different equipments which share the same EOW channel; each
equipment has a speech number which is only for the whole network and can be
addressed by other network equipments.
4.10 Handset (option)
The IDU makes available, at the outside, a speech channel in the standard 2-wire
version for the connection to a handset the IDU local operator can use to speak with the
ODU external operator (POE) and/or the operators of the other equipments connected
to the same radio network.
4.11 Monitoring of received RF power
The ODU operator by means of a monitoring device (multimeter - not supplied as part
of the equipment), can measure the received radio signal field.
NOTE – The EOW channel expansions is available only if the IDU is
equipped with EOW unit.
NOTE – The access to the handset is available only if the IDU is equipped
with EOW unit.
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
18/34 Issue 1, September 1999
5 LOOP-BACK
The following loop-back functions (see Fig. 4) are available for test purposes:
– Local Loop-back (A)
Each 2 Mbit/s tributary stream can be looped back on Base Band unit at line
interface level.
– Remote Loop-back (B)
In this case, every tributary stream can be looped back on the remote station. This
type of loop-back, when activated, allows the correct connection between two
stations to be checked.
Fig. 4 – Loop-back functions
6 CONFIGURATIONS
The equipment configuration modes can be:
– single terminal (see Fig. 5): (1+0)
– double terminal (see Fig. 6): 2×(1+0)
– terminal with Hot-standby protection (see Fig. 7 and Fig. 8): (1+1) H/S
– terminal with frequency-diversity or polarization diversity protection (see Fig. 9):
(1+1) FD/PD
– repeater with tributary Add/Drop (see Fig. 10): A/D-RPT.
The single terminal configuration (1+0) needs only one RTM unit and the corresponding
ODU.
All the other configurations need two RTM units and two corresponding ODUs. The
2×(1+0) configuration can only be activated for 2×2 Mbit/s, 4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) and
8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) capacities.
The (1+1) H/S configuration can be realised either with one antenna (see Fig. 7) or with
two antennas (see Fig. 8).
The A/D-RPT configuration allows up to a 100% of the add/drop capacity for 2x2 and
4×2 Mbit/s capacities (2 TFM) and up to 50% of the add-drop capacity for 8×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM). Up to a 100% of the add/drop capacity for 8×2 Mbit/s capacity (4TFM) and up
to 50% of the add-drop capacity for 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM).
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 19/34
Fig. 5 – SRA L equipment: (1+0) configuration
Fig. 6 – SRA L equipment: 2×(1+0) configuration
(*)Optional
(**)With Q-Adapter unit only
(*)Optional
(**)With Q-Adapter unit only
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
20/34 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 7 – SRA L equipment: (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration
Fig. 8 – SRA L equipment: (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration
(*)Optional
(**)With Q-Adapter unit only
(*)Optional
(**)With Q-Adapter unit only
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 21/34
Fig. 9 – SRA L equipment: (1+1) FD configuration
Fig. 10 – SRA L equipment: A/D-RPT configuration
(*)Optional
(**)With Q-Adapter unit only
(*)Optional
(**)With Q-Adapter unit only
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
22/34 Issue 1, September 1999
7 PROTECTION
The SRA L system protection in (1+1) configurations guarantees, when possible,
continuity of the connection between the two radio terminals when the following
conditions occur:
– hardware failure
– link quality degradation.
Fig. 11 shows the SRA L system protection general diagram where A and B substitute
generic hardware RX functions and C and D substitute generic hardware TX functions.
As understandable from the diagram, the system reliability mainly depends on the
reliability of the two terminal elements (splitter and switch). Therefore these elements
are built using simple and passive components, with a high MTBF.
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 23/34
Fig. 11 – Protection general diagram
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
24/34 Issue 1, September 1999
7.1 RX protection
Inside RX the protection is managed by:
– hitless protection logic, it controls the hitless switches of the RTM units
– hardware protection logic, it controls the RX hardware switches of the RTM units.
The hitless switches are driven by a logic based on detected alarms and they allow an
error free protection in the presence of some conditions. Both RX sections receive the
same aggregate signal; this operation assures to the hitless switches the necessary bit
to bit alignment for all the (1+1) configurations.
The hitless switches protect against failures of the RF section and of the A sub-units
while the RX hardware switches protect only against hardware failures of the B
sub-units.
When a unit containing one switch is not supplied, the switch itself switches
automatically on the disabled status in such a way to avoid interferences with the signal
that is passing on the other route.
Fig. 12 shows the RX protection architecture.
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 25/34
Fig. 12 – RX protection
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
26/34 Issue 1, September 1999
7.2 TX protection
Inside TX the protection is managed by the hardware protection logic controlling the TX
hardware switches of the RTM units, the RF switches and the squelch of the RF
transmitters of the ODUs.
When a unit containing one switch is not supplied, the switch itself switches
automatically on the disabled status in such a way to avoid interferences with the signal
that is passing on the other route.
The functioning of the TX hardware protection logic depends on the system
configuration.
7.2.1 TX protection in (1+1) configuration at frequency/polarization
diversity
In (1+1) configuration at frequency/polarization diversity, the protection is realised at
base-band level by means of the TX hardware switches of the RTM units, such switches
forward the same aggregate signal to the RF sections.
This configuration is not equipped with a priority unit. When an alarm occurs, the system
switches from one unit to another one and the new unit remains active also after the
suppression of the alarm causes (irreversible mode).
Fig. 13 shows the architecture of the TX protection in (1+1) configuration at frequency
diversity.
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 27/34
Fig. 13 – TX protection in frequency diversity configuration
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
28/34 Issue 1, September 1999
7.2.2 TX protection in (1+1) Hot-Standby configuration
In (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby, the protection is realised at RF level by means of
the RF switches or by means of the squelch of the RF transmitters. The TX hardware
switches of the RTM unit are not used.
If a local alarm occurs on ODU, the commands for the RF switches and for the squelch
of the RF transmitters are directly generated inside the ODUs.
This configuration provides a main RTM-ODU line that has priority with respect to the
secondary line. If no alarm has occurred or if alarms with equivalent seriousness have
occurred on both lines (reversible mode), the priority line is always active.
The priority depends on the physical position of the RTM units.
When an alarm occurs, the system switches from the main line to the secondary one.
Before executing the switching operation, it is checked the status of the RF transmitter
failure alarm (TX PWR ALM). Such an alarm defines the resetting modes of the
protection logic:
– if the TX PWR ALM alarm is active, the protection logic is in irreversible mode, that
is the secondary line remains operative till when the operator does not force
manually on line the main line (after having executed the removal of the alarm
causes)
– if the TX PWR ALM alarm is deactivated, the protection logic is in reversible mode,
that is the secondary line remains operative till when an alarm is present on the
main line. When the alarm causes are removed, the system switches automatically
on the main line.
In (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby, it is then checked the transmission RF power of the
main line and of the secondary one. The following different cases of TX protection in
Hot-Standby configuration are possible:
– TX protection in (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby with RF switch and one antenna
(refer to Fig. 14)
The protection is realised by means of the RF switches of the ODUs.
In this configuration, the secondary line is coupled to the main one with a
decreasing caused by the coupling loss (set via software CL = 10 dB). The RF
switch open, then, insert an additional decreasing caused by the insertion loss.
– TX protection in (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby with RF switch and two antennas
(refer to Fig. 15)
The protection is realised by means of the RF switches of the ODUs. In this
configuration, no coupling exists between the two lines; the coupling loss is then
null (set via software CL = 0 dB). The RF switch open, then, insert a decreasing
caused by the insertion loss.
– TX protection in (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby without RF switch and with one
antenna (refer to Fig. 16)
The protection is realised by means of the squelch of the RF transmitters of the
ODUs.
In this configuration, the secondary line is coupled to the main one with an
attenuation caused by the coupling loss (set via software CL = 0 dB).
– TX protection in (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby without RF switch and with two
antennas (refer to Fig. 17)
The protection is realised by means of the squelch of the RF transmitters of the
ODUs. In this configuration, no coupling exists between the two lines so it is
inserted a decreasing on the secondary line (set via software CL = 15 dB).
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 29/34
7.3 Hardware protection logic
The hardware protection logic protects the system against hardware failures of the IDU
and of the ODU as in TX as in RX. The RTM unit is doubled in such a way to keep the
system functionality when a unit failure occurs or when the unit has to be replaced for
maintenance. The hardware protection logic creates the following commands:
– HW SW CMD: these commands control at the same time the TX and RX hardware
switches of the RTM units
– RF SW CMD: these commands control the RF switches of the ODUs
– RF SQ CMD: these commands control the squelch of the RF transmitters of the
ODUs.
In (1+1) configuration at frequency diversity, it is used only the HW SW CMD command,
while in (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby the HW SW CMD command is used only in RX
and not in TX. In RX, the protection is realised by means of the control of the RX
switches of the RTM units.
In TX, the protection is realised by means of the control of:
– the TX switches of the RTM units, in case of (1+1) configuration at frequency
diversity
– the RF switches of the ODUs, in case of (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby with RF
switches
– the squelch of the RF transmitters of the ODUs, in case of (1+1) configuration
Hot-Standby without RF switches.
In automatic functioning mode, the hardware protection logic creates the switching
commands according to the following signals:
– Loc TX HW ALM: summarised alarm of the TX sections of the local ODU and of the
local RTM unit
– Rem TX HW ALM: summarised alarm of the TX sections of the remote ODU and
of the remote RTM unit
– Loc RX HW ALM: summarised alarm of the RX section of the local RTM unit
– Rem RX HW ALM: summarised alarm of the RX section of the remote RTM unit
– Loc HW SW CMD: status signal of the local system. This signal comes from the
local logic and it is necessary to have the switching without priority in (1+1)
configuration at frequency diversity
– Rem HW SW CMD: status signal of the remote system. This signal comes from the
remote logic and it is necessary to have the switching without priority in (1+1)
configuration at frequency diversity
– Slot Sense: signal based upon the physical position of the RTM unit. It identifies
the priority level of the unit in case of conflict.
It is possible to force manually the hardware protection logic by means of software
presetting.
The forcing action status can be:
– normality: no forcing action
– RTM unit 1 forced on line
– RTM unit 2 forced on line.
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
30/34 Issue 1, September 1999
7.4 Hitless protection logic
The hitless protection logic allows an error free protection in the RX section.
The logic creates the HL SW CMD commands controlling the hitless switches of the
RTM units.
In automatic functioning mode, the hitless protection logic creates the switching
commands according to the following alarms of the local and remote radio channels:
– Loc ODU ALM: summarised alarm coming from the corresponding ODU
– Loc HL ALM: summarised alarm coming from the local RX hitless section
– Loc DEM ALM: summarised alarm coming from the local IF-DEM section
– Loc HIGH EW ALM: alarm of High Early Warning condition coming from the local
FEC
– Loc LOW EW ALM: alarm of Low Early Warning condition coming from the local
FEC
– Rem HIGH ALM: summarised alarm coming from the remote system; it is the OR
of the ODU ALM, DEM ALM and HL ALM remote alarms
– Rem HIGH EW ALM: alarm of High Early Warning condition coming from the
remote FEC
– Rem LOW EW ALM: alarm of Low Early Warning condition coming from the remote
FEC.
The alarms are subdivided into different classes according to the seriousness level.
In automatic functioning mode, the protection logic allows the passage of the channel
with the least serious alarm.
It is possible to force manually the hitless protection logic by means of:
– the push-button present on the frontal panel of the Controller unit
– the software presetting.
The forcing action status can be:
– normality (no forcing action)
– channel 1 forced on line
– channel 2 forced on line
– channel 1 forced on RTM 1 and channel 2 forced on RTM 2 (only via software).
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 31/34
Fig. 14 – TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration with RF switch and one antenna
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
32/34 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 15 – TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration with RF switch and two antennas
SRA L General information
53-001A8-100/E
Issue 1, September 1999 33/34
Fig. 16 – TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration without RF switch and with one antenna
General information SRA L
53-001A8-100/E
34/34 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
Fig. 17 – TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration without RF switch and with two antennas
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
2/30 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/30
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Transmitter characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.3 Receiver characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.4 Characteristics of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.5 Characteristics of channel auxiliary interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.5.1 PC channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.5.2 V bus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.5.3 User channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.5.4 D Channel2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.5.5 Q Channel3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.5.6 Handset channel5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
2.5.7 EOW expansion channel1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.6 Alarm interface characteristics1). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.7 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
2.7.1 Typical Consumptions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
5 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
6 ANTENNA CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
4/30 Issue 1, September 1999
Illustrations
Fig. 1 Block diagram of TX RF side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fig. 2 Mask of the RF signal for 2×2 Mbit/s capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fig. 3 Mask of the RF signal for 4×2 Mbit/s capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fig. 4 Mask of the RF signal for 8×2 Mbit/s capacity (2TFM & 4TFM). . . . . . . . . . 11
Fig. 5 Mask of the RF signal for 16×2 Mbit/s capacity (4TFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fig. 6 Block diagram of RX RF side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Fig. 7 Shape of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface output signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fig. 8 Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fig. 9 Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU equipped with
Alarm and Fan unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fig. 10 Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Fig. 11 Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU-ODU storage. . . . . . . . . . . 23
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/30
1 GENERAL
In this document, the main electrical, mechanical and environmental characteristics are
set down of the SRA L digital radio equipment.
2 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
2.1 General characteristics
– Modulation format 3CFIT32
1)
or
4 level GTFM (16x2)
– Demodulation differential with Viterbi decoding
– Transmission capacity 2×2 Mbit/s, 4×2 Mbit/s, 8×2, 16×2Mbit/s
– Bit rate of the transmitted
aggregate signal:
• 2×2 Mbit/s 4.864 Mbit/s
• 4×2 Mbit/s 9.728 Mbit/s
• 8×2 Mbit/s 19.456 Mbit/s
• 16×2 Mbit/s 38.912 Mbit/s
– RF band [GHz]:
– Channel arrangement:
• 2×2 Mbit/s 3.5 MHz
• 4×2 Mbit/s 7 MHz
• 8×2 Mbit/s 14 MHz (13.75)
• 16×2 Mbit/s 28 MHz (27.5)
_____________________________
1) The 3CFIT32 modulation format is a proprietary modification of the GTFM format
(Generalized Tamed Frequency Modulation) and it belongs to the CPFSK
(Continuous Phase Frequency Shift Keying) modulation schemes family.
7 GHz 8 GHz 10.5 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz
7.1...7.9. 8.2...8.5 10.5...10.7 12.75...13.25 14.4...15.35
18 GHZ 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
17.7...19.7 21.2...23.6 24.5...26.5 37...39.5
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
6/30 Issue 1, September 1999
– Nominal system gain
(BER = 10
-6
)[dB]
1)
:
_________________________________
1) For equipments in (1+1) Hot-Standby 1 antenna configuration from 2.5 dB to
3.5 dB, depending on RF band, additional loss has to be considered due to the RF
splitters.
7 GHz 8 GHz 10.5 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz
2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 114.5 114.5 110.5 110.5 110
4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 111.5 111.5 107.5 107.5 107
8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 108.5 108.5 104.5 104.5 104
8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 108.5 108.5 104.5 104.5 104
16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 105.5 105.5 101.5 101.5 101
18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 107.5 107 106.5 104.5
4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 104.5 104 103.5 101.5
8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 101.5 101 100.5 98.5
8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 101.5 101 100.5 98.5
16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 98.5 98 97.5 95.5
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/30
– Nominal system gain
(BER = 10
-3
)[dB]
1)
:
_________________________________
1) For equipments in (1+1) Hot-Standby 1 antenna configuration from 2.5 dB to
3.5 dB, depending on RF band, additional loss has to be considered due to the RF
splitters.
7 GHz 8 GHz 10.5 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz
2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 116.5 116.5 112.5 112.5 112
4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 113.5 113.5 109.5 109 109
8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 110.5 110.5 106.5 106 106
8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 110.5 110.5 106.5 106.5 106
16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 107.5 107.5 103.5 103.5 103
18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 109.5 109 108.5 106.5
4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 106.5 106 105.5 103.5
8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 103.5 103 102.5 100.5
8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 103.5 103 102.5 100.5
16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 100.5 100 99.5 97.5
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
8/30 Issue 1, September 1999
Shifter frequency (F
s
) [MHz]:
– Tuning range: see "ODU frequency tables"of document
"Equipment composition"
2.2 Transmitter characteristics
The following characteristics refer to points set down in Fig. 1. Unless otherwise stated,
the RF parameters have to be understood having been measured at point C' and valid
for the temperature range defined in par. 4.
Fig. 1 – Block diagram of TX RF side
– Nominal output power [dBm]:
7 GHz 8 GHz 10.5 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz
±154
±161
±245
±148.5
±126 ±91 ±266 ±315
±336
±420
±490
±644
±714
±728
±120
±340
±1010
±1560
23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
±1008
±1200
±1232
±1008 ±1260
7 GHz 8 GHz 10.5 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz
P
NOM
[dBm] 24 24 20 20 20
18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
P
NOM
[dBm] 18 18 18 17
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 9/30
– Output power regulation [dB]:
– Output power
squelched condition mode ≤ -50 dBm in 1MHz BW up to
21.2 GHz
≤ -30 dBm in 1MHz BW from
21.2 GHz to110 GHz
– TX frequency tolerance ±3 ppm
– Tuning step 250 kHz
– Output signal spectral
power density:
• 2×2 Mbit/s see mask of Fig. 2
• 4×2 Mbit/s see mask of Fig. 3
• 8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM & 4TFM) see mask of Fig. 4
• 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) see mask of Fig. 5
– External spurious emission according to ITU-R SM 329 Rec. SM 329
– Return loss ≥ 15 dB
____________
1) Varying the the attenuation, the tolerance changes, with linear function.
7 GHz 8 GHz 10.5
GHz
13 GHz
Attenuation value [dBm]: 0...24 0...24 0...24 0...24
Accuracy [dB]
1)
0...±2 0...±2 0...±2 0...±2
15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
Attenuation value [dBm]: 0...24 0...24 0...24 0...20 0...20
Accuracy [dB]
1)
0...±2 0...±2 0...±2 0...±2 0...±2
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
10/30 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 2 – Mask of the RF signal for 2×2 Mbit/s capacity
Fig. 3 – Mask of the RF signal for 4×2 Mbit/s capacity
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 11/30
Fig. 4 – Mask of the RF signal for 8×2 Mbit/s capacity (2TFM & 4TFM)
Fig. 5 – Mask of the RF signal for 16×2 Mbit/s capacity (4TFM)
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
12/30 Issue 1, September 1999
2.3 Receiver characteristics
The following characteristics refer to the points set down in Fig. 6. Unless otherwise
stated, the RF parameters have to be understood as measures at point C and valid for
the temperature range defined in par. 4.
Fig. 6 – Block diagram of RX RF side
– Max. input power for
BER = 10
-10
-20 dBm
– Max. input power to prevent from
permanent damaging -10 dBm
– 1°IF RX frequency 1310 MHz
– 2°IF RX frequency 70 MHz
– Image rejection ≥ 90 dB
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 13/30
– Nominal threshold
(at 25°C, BER=10
-6
) [dBm]:
7 GHz 8 GHz 10.5 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz
2×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM)
-90.5 -90.5 -90.5 -90.5 -90
4×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM)
-87.5 -87.5 -87.5 -87.5 -87
8×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM)
-84.5 -84.5 -84.5 -84.5 -84
8×2 Mbit/s
(4TFM)
-84.5 -84.5 -84.5 -84.5 -84
16×2 Mbit/s
(4TFM)
-81.5 -81.5 -81.5 -81.5 -81
18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
2×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM)
-89.5 -89 -88.5 -87.5
4×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM)
-86.5 -86 -85.5 -84.5
8×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM
-83.5 -83 -82.5 -81.5
8×2 Mbit/s
(4TFM)
-83.5 -83 -82.5 -81.5
16×2 Mbit/s
(4TFM)
-80.5 -80 -79.5 -78.5
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
14/30 Issue 1, September 1999
– Nominal threshold (at 25°C, BER=10
-3
) [dBm]:
7 GHz 8 GHz 10.5 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz
2×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM)
-92.5 -92.5 -92.5 -92.5 -92
4×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM)
-89.5 -89.5 -89.5 -89.5 -89
8×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM
-86.5 -86.5 -86.5 -86.5 -86
8×2 Mbit/s
(4TFM)
-86.5 -86.5 -86.5 -86.5 -86
16×2 Mbit/s
(4TFM)
-83.5 -83.5 -83.5 -83.5 -83
18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
2×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM)
-91.5 -91 -90.5 -82.5
4×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM)
-88.5 -88 -87.5 -84.5
8×2 Mbit/s
(2TFM
-85.5 -85 -84.5 -81.5
8×2 Mbit/s
(4TFM)
-85.5 -85 -84.5 -81.5
16×2 Mbit/s
(4TFM)
82.5 -82 -81.5 -78.5
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 15/30
– Background BER
1)
≤ 10
-11
– Sensitivity with co-channel
interference
2)
S/I ≥ 23 dB
– Sensitivity with adjacent
channel interference
(single step)
2) 3)
S/I ≥ 0 dB
– Sensitivity with spurious CW
interference
4)
S/CW ≥ -30 dB
___________
1) Min. recording time: 48 hours for 2×2 Mbit/s (max. 10 errors), 24 hours for
4×2 Mbit/s (max. 10 errors), 12 hours for 8×2 Mbit/s (max. 10 errors).
2) For a receiver working at BER threshold 10
-6
in absence of interferer signals, the
introduction of a single interfering signal does not cause a decrease of the
threshold level greater than 1 dB. The measurement point is B.
3) The single step spacings of adjacent channels are:
- 2×2 Mbit/s: 3.5 MHz
- 4×2 Mbit/s: 7 MHz
- 8×2 Mbit/s: 14 MHz (13.75 MHz)
- 16×2 Mbit/s: 28 MHz (27.5 MHz)
4) For a receiver working at BER threshold 10
-6
, the introduction of a CW interfering
signal on every frequency in the range 0.3 to 60 GHz, excluding the side
frequencies of the wanted frequency up to twice the channel spacing, shall not
result in a BER greater than 10
-5
.
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
16/30 Issue 1, September 1999
2.4 Characteristics of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface
The tributary interface can be at 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm.
– Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ± 50 ppm
– Code HDB3
– Pulse shape see Fig. 7
– Load impedance 75 Ohm o 120 Ohm
– Nominal peak voltage of
a mark (pulse):
• 75 Ohm 2.37 V
• 120 Ohm 3 V
– Nominal peak voltage of
a "space" (no pulse)
• 75 Ohm 0 ± 0.237 V
• 120 Ohm 0 ± 0.3 V
– Nominal pulse length 244 ns
– Max. peak-to-peak jitter of
RX AIS signal ≤ 5°
– Output return loss ≥ 10 dB,
for f = 51.2 to 3072 kHz
– Input return loss:
• f = 51 to 102 kHz ≥ 18 dB
• f = 102 to 2048 kHz ≥ 24 dB
• f = 2048 to 3072 kHz ≥ 20 dB
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 17/30
Fig. 7 – Shape of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface output signal
2.5 Characteristics of channel auxiliary interfaces
2.5.1 PC channel
– Channel type 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous data channel
– Electrical interface
1)
RS-232C
_________________
1) The IDU is considered as DCE.
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
18/30 Issue 1, September 1999
2.5.2 V bus
– Channel type 128 kbit/s data bus with burst mode
(HDLC frame)
– Electrical interface proprietary
2.5.3 User channel
– Channel type
1)
64 kbit/s synchronous data channel
– Interfaccia elettrica V.11
2.5.4 D Channel
2)
– Channel type 64 kbit/s synchronous data channel
– Electrical interface RS-485
2.5.5 Q Channel
3)
– Protocol Rec. ITU T Q.811
– Electrical interface
4)
X.21 or Ethernet IEEE 802-3
(10 BASE2)
2.5.6 Handset channel
5)
– Number of expansions 2
Speech channel characteristics
– Connection type 2-wires
– Input impedance 375 Ohm nominal
– Nominal load impedance 600 Ohm balanced
– Nominal input level (TX) 0 dBr
– Nominal output level (RX) -4 dBr ± 1 dB or -7 dBr ± 1 dB
– Return loss as to 600 Ohm load 18 dB (300 to 3400 Hz)
– Supply voltage output -25 V ± 2 V
– Loop current (OFF-HOOK) ≥ 20 mA nominal
(loop resistance 0 to 600 Ohm)
_____________
1) The user channel can be configured (by software) as codirectional or
counter-directional.
2) Channel available only if the IDU is equipped with Q-Adapter unit or in alternative
D Channel Distributor unit.
3) Channel available only if the IDU is equipped with Q-Adapter unit.
4) The Q-Adapter unit makes available both interfaces. Should interface X.21 be
utilized, the SRA L equipment is considered as DTE.
5) Channel available only if the IDU is equipped with EOW unit.
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 19/30
2.5.7 EOW expansion channel
1)
– Number of expansions 2
Speech signal characteristics
– Connection type 4-wires (TX+RX)
– Input/output impedance 600 Ohm balanced
– Nominal input level -10 dBr
– Nominal output level -10 dBr ± 1 dB
– Return loss with 600 Ohm load ≥ 14 dB (300 to 3400 Hz)
– Absolute group delay at min.
group delay frequency
(with -10 dBm0 input power) ≤ 600 µs
– Idle channel noise (input/output port
terminated at nominal impedance) ≤ -65 dBm0p
– Single frequency noise ≤ -50 dBm0p
– Isolation between input/output port
(f ≤ 100 kHz) ≥ 25 dB
E&M-wire circuits common characteristics
– Operation type disconnected loop
– Activation condition ground/open circuit
– Signalling frequency 10 Hz ± 2 Hz o 20 Hz ± 2 Hz
– Duty cycle 50%/50% o 60%/40%
– M-wire equivalent circuit:
• Open circuit (-3 V to +2 V) battery with ≥ 60 kOhm
series resistance
• Closed circuit (-3 V to +2 V) battery with ≥ 200 Ohm
series resistance
– E-wire circuit characteristics:
• R(ON) max. ≤ 30 Ohm
• Residual voltage in closed
conditions ≤ -2 V
• Nominal current delivered in
closed 50 mA
• Max. delivered current 80 mA ≤ I
source
≤ 100 mA
• Sinking current in open
conditions -200 µA ≤ I
sink
≤ 0 A
• Continuous applied voltage ≤ -72 V
___________
1) Channel available only if the IDU is equipped with EOW unit.
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
20/30 Issue 1, September 1999
2.6 Alarm interface characteristics
1)
– Input ports
The following two states can be taken by each port of the input line:
• Grounded input
The port detects this condition should the input line be connected to a DC
voltage generator in the range from -3 V to +2 V through a 0 to 200 Ohm
resistance. The input port current fluctuation ranges between 1 and 15 mA.
No sinking current is present at input port.
• Open input
The port detects this condition should the input line be connected to a DC
voltage generator in the range from -3 V to + 2 V through a ≥ 60 kOhm
resistance.
Every input port can be directly connected to every output port.
– Output ports
The following two states can be taken by each port of the output line:
• Open output
The equivalent input resistance to local ground is ≥ 1 MOhm; should a -75 V
voltage be applied to the output port in open state, the max. sinking current
is ≤ 0.1 mA.
• Grounded output
The equivalent input resistance to the local ground is ≤ 25 Ohm for a ≤ 40 mA
sinking current.
The output port ground is connected to +V AUX voltage which, can be
connected to IDU internal ground by a jumper.
2.7 Power supply characteristics
– Power supply voltage -38.4 V to -72 V from station batteries
– Max. permitted inverse continuous
voltage 100 V
– Max. load current
(at -48 VDC nominal input voltage) ≤ 2 A
≤ 5 A with ODU pre-heather (-50°C option)
2.7.1 Typical Consumptions
– IDU full equipped 46.5 W
– ODU 18 W
– ODU with operating preheater 85 W
_____________
1) Interface available only if the IDU is equipped with the Alarm unit or Alarm and Fan
unit.
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 21/30
3 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS
The IDU can be arranged for the location, by means of two different supporting brackets,
in standard ETSI or 19" racks.
The IDU mechanical characteristics are:
– height 2 U (standard 19")
– width 450 mm
– depth 240 mm
– weight (full equipped) 6 kg
The ODU is arranged for pole mounting. On customer request, it can be delivered with
antenna.
The ODU mechanical characteristics are:
– height 119.4 mm
– width 266 mm
– depth 266 mm
– weight 6 kg
4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
The equipment complies with ETSI ETS 300 019 Rec. (Feb. 1992). IDU meets the
following ETSI classes:
– Transport ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3
– Stationary utilization ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.2
the temperature/humidity characteristics excepted, for which the climatic diagram of
Fig. 8 is valid.
For applications requiring, as far as the IDU is concerned, a wide temperature range, an
optional unit provided with fans can be utilized (Alarm and Fan unit)
In this case, the above ETSI classes are still valid, the temperature/humidity
characteristics excepted, for which the climatic diagram of Fig. 9 is valid.
ODU meets the following ETSI classes:
– Transport ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2.3
– Stationary utilization ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 4.1
the temperature/humidity characteristics excepted, for which the climatic diagram of Fig.
10 is valid.
As far as the storage conditions are concerned, IDU and ODU meet ETSI ETS
300-019-1-1 REC. Class 1.2, the temperature/humidity characteristics excepted, for
which the climatic diagram of Fig. 11 is valid.
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
22/30 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 8 – Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU
Fig. 9 – Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU equipped with
Alarm and Fan unit
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 23/30
Fig. 10 –Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for ODU
Fig. 11 –Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU-ODU storage
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
24/30 Issue 1, September 1999
5 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
The equipment complies with the requirements of ETSI ETS 300-385 Rec.,namely:
– Radiation emission as per EN55022, Class B
– Immunity against electrostatic discharges as per IEC 801-2, Class 4
– Immunity against fast electric transients/bursts as per IEC 802-4, Class 3, criterion
1
– Immunity against fluctuations as per IEC 1000-4-5, Class 2, criterion 2.
6 ANTENNA CHARACTERISTICS
– The antenna (optional) is available in the following different diameters, according
to hop length:
– 120 cm diam. antenna (standard antenna)
– 60 cm diam. antenna (slim antenna)
– 30 cm diam. antenna (slim antenna)
– 24 cm diam. antenna (slim antenna)
Every antenna type is equipped with single polarization center hub; the polarization
change takes place by rotating the center hub by 90°. Every antenna is directly
connected to the relevant antenna-ODU supporting frame.
The main antenna characteristics follow:
– Ambient temperature range -50 to +60°C
– Relative humidity 0 ÷ 100%
– Max. wind speed with assured
operation 115 km/h
– Max. wind speed with assured
antenna integrity 200 km/h
– Mounting pole mount, for 50 to 115 mm diam.
– Fine adjustment:
• Azimuth ±7°
• Elevation -5°÷ +50°o +5°÷ -50°
• Crossed polarization optimization ±5°
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 25/30
– Frequency range [MHz]:
– 120 cm reflector:
7 GHz 8 GHz 10.5 GHz 13 GHz
7125
to
7900
8275
to
8500
10500
to
10700
12700
to
13250
15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
14400
to
15350
17700
to
19700
21200
to
23600
24500
to
26500
37000
to
40000
7 GHz 8 GHz 10.5
GHz
Gain ≥ 36.5
dBi
at
7515
MHz
≥ 37.5
dBi
at
8387.5
MHz
≥ 40.2
dBi
at
10600
MHz
Front to back
ratio
≥ 64 dB
180°±
80°
≥ 64 dB
180°±
80°
≥ 65 dB
180°±
80°
Crossed
polarization
discrimination
≥ 32 dB ≥ 32 dB ≥ 34 dB
HPBW ≤ 2°24' ≤ 2°12' ≤ 1°31'
V.S.W.R. ≤1.17:1
(≥ 22.0
dB)
≤1.17:1
(≥ 22.0
dB)
≤1.17:1
(≥ 22.0
dB)
Wave-guide
type
WR112
(R84)
WR112
(R84)
WR90
(R100)
Weight ((1+0)
antenna and
supporting
frame)
65 kg 65 kg 65 kg
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
26/30 Issue 1, September 1999
– 120 cm reflector:
13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz
Gain ≥ 41.6
dBi
at
12975
MHz
≥ 42.5
dBi
at
14875
MHz
≥ 44.5
dBi
at
18700
MHz
≥ 46.2
dBi
at
22400
MHz
Front to back ratio ≥ 67 dB
180°±
80°
≥ 70 dB
180°±
60°
≥ 66 dB
180°±
60°
≥ 72 dB
180°±
60°
Crossed
polarization
discrimination
≥ 32 dB ≥ 32 dB ≥ 32 dB ≥ 32 dB
HPBW ≤ 1°20' ≤ 1°12' ≤ 1° ≤ 0°48'
V.S.W.R. ≤ 1.17:1
(≥ 22.0
dB)
≤ 1.17:1
(≥ 22.0
dB)
≤ 1.17:1
(≥ 22.0
dB)
≤ 1.17:1
(≥ 22.0
dB)
Wave-guide type WR75
(R120)
WR62
(R140)
WR42
(R220)
WR42
(R220)
Weight ((1+0)
antenna and
supporting frame)
65 kg 65 kg 65 kg 65 kg
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 27/30
– 60 cm reflector:
10.5
GHz
13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz
Gain ≥ 34.5
dBi
at
10600
MHz
≥ 36.4
dBi
at
12975
MHz
≥ 36.9
dBi
at
14875
MHz
≥ 38.9
dBi
at
18700
MHz
≥ 40.3
dBi
at
22400
MHz
Front to back ratio ≥ 60 dB
180°±
80°
≥ 62 dB
180°±
80°
≥ 64 dB
180°±
80°
≥ 66 dB
180°±
80°
≥ 66 dB
180°±
80°
Crossed
polarization
discrimination
≥ 34 dB ≥ 35 dB ≥ 35 dB ≥ 35 dB ≥ 32 dB
HPBW ≤ 2°50' ≤ 2°32' ≤ 2°15' ≤ 1°54' ≤ 1°36'
V.S.W.R. ≤ 1.17:1
(≥ 22
dB)
≤ 1.17:1
(≥ 22
dB)
≤ 1.2:1
(≥ 20.8
dB)
≤ 1.2:1
(≥ 20.8
dB)
≤ 1.2:1
(≥ 20.8
dB)
Wave-guide type WR90
(R100)
WR75
(R120)
WR62
(R140)
WR42
(R220)
WR42
(R220)
Weight ((1+0)
antenna and
supporting frame)
28 kg 28 kg 28 kg 28 kg 28 kg
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
28/30 Issue 1, September 1999
– 60 cm reflector:
26 GHz 38 GHz
Gain ≥ 40.9
dBi
at
25500
MHz
≥ 44.5
dBi
at
38500
MHz
Front to back ratio ≥ 66 dB
180°±
80°
≥ 62 dB
180°±
80°
Crossed
polarization
discrimination
≥ 32 dB ≥ 32 dB
HPBW ≤ 1°24' ≤ 1°
V.S.W.R. ≤ 1.2:1
(≥ 20.8
dB)
≤ 1.2:1
(≥ 20.8
dB)
Wave-guide type WR42
(R220)
WR28
(R320)
Weight ((1+0)
antenna and
supporting frame)
28 kg 28 kg
SRA L Technical characteristics
53-001A8-101/E
Issue 1, September 1999 29/30
– 30 cm reflector:
15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
Gain ≥ 31.5
dBi
at 14875
MHz
≥ 33.7
dBi at
18700
MHz
≥ 35.4
dBi
at 22400
MHz
≥ 36.3
dBi at
25500
MHz
≥ 39.9
dBi at
38500
MHz
Front to
back ratio
≥ 52 dB
180°±
20°
≥ 54 dB
180°±
20°
≥ 61 dB
180°±
20°
≥ 62 dB
180°±
70°
≥ 64 dB
180°±
80°
Crossed
polarization
discrimination
≥ 32 dB ≥ 32 dB ≥ 32 dB ≥ 32 dB ≥ 32 dB
HPBW ≤ 4° ≤ 3°30' ≤ 2°45' ≤ 2°25' ≤ 1°35'
V.S.W.R. ≤ 1.2:1
(≥ 20.8
dB)
≤ 1.2:1
(≥ 20.8
dB)
≤ 1.2:1
(≥ 20.8
dB)
≤ 1.2:1
(≥ 20.8
dB)
≤ 1.2:1
(≥ 20.8
dB)
Wave-guide type WR62
(R140)
WR42
(R220)
WR42
(R220)
WR42
(R220)
WR28
(R320)
Weight ((1+0)
antenna and
supporting
frame)
11 kg 11 kg 11 kg 11 kg 11 kg
Technical characteristics SRA L
53-001A8-101/E
30/30 Issue 1, September 1999
– 24 cm reflector:
FINE
23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
Gain ≥ 30.8
dBi
at 22400
MHz
≥ 32.3
dBi at
25500
MHz
≥ 36.1
dBi at
38500
MHz
Front to
back ratio
≥ 57 dB
180°±
70°
≥ 58 dB
180°±
70°
≥ 62 dB
180°±
70°
Crossed
polarization
discrimination
≥ 34 dB ≥ 32 dB ≥ 32 dB
HPBW ≤ 4°10' ≤ 3°40' ≤ 2°50'
V.S.W.R. ≤ 1.17:1
(≥ 22.0
dB)
≤ 1.17:1
(≥ 22.0
dB)
≤ 1.17:1
(≥ 22.0
dB)
Wave-guide type WR42
(R220)
WR42
(R220)
WR28
(R320)
Weight ((1+0)
antenna and
supporting
frame)
9 kg 9 kg 9 kg
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
2/70 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/70
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2 COMPOSITION OF SRA L EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 System configurations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2 Composition of SRA L equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.1 Composition of SRA L/7 eq., P/N 732-001/07
and P/N 732-021/07 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.2 Composition of SRA L/8 eq., P/N 732-001/08
and P/N 732-021/08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.2.3 Composition of SRA L/10 eq., P/N 732-001/10
and P/N 732-021/10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.2.4 Composition of SRA L/13 eq, P/N 732-001/13
and P/N 732-021/13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
2.2.5 Composition of SRA L/15 eq., P/N 732-001/15
and P/N 732-021/15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2.6 Composition of SRA L/18 eq., P/N 732-001/18
and P/N 732-021/18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2.2.7 Composition of SRA L/23 eq., P/N 732-001/23
and P/N 732-021/23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.2.8 Composition of SRA L/26 eq., P/N 732-001/26
and P/N 732-021/26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
2.2.9 Composition of SRA L/38 eq., P/N 732-001/38
and P/N 732-021/38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3 IDU COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
4 ODU IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
4/70 Issue1, September 1999
Illustrations
Fig. 1 (1+0) integrated system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fig. 2 (1+0) not integrated system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 3 2×(1+0) or A/D-RPT integrated system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fig. 4 2×(1+0) or A/D-RPT not integrated system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fig. 5 (1+1) integrated system with 2 antennas, single polarization . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fig. 6 (1+1) not integrated system with 2 antennas, single polarization . . . . . . . . 32
Fig. 7 (1+1) not integrated system with 1 antenna, single polarization . . . . . . . . . 33
Fig. 8 (1+1) not integrated system with 1 antenna, double polarization. . . . . . . . . 34
Fig. 9 IDU composition (P/N 732-101/11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Fig. 10 IDU composition (P/N 732-101/01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/70
Tables
Tab. 1 System configurations for SRA L eq. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Tab. 2 SRA L/7 eq. in (1+0) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Tab. 3 SRA L/7 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,
(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Tab. 4 SRA L/7 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and
(1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Tab. 5 SRA L/8 eq. in (1+0) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Tab. 6 SRA L/8 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,
(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tab. 7 SRA L/8 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tab. 8 SRA L/10 eq. in (1+0) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Tab. 9 SRA L/10 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,
(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Tab. 10 SRA L/10 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Tab. 11 SRA L/13 eq. in (1+0) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Tab. 12 SRA L/13 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,
(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Tab. 13 SRA L/13 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Tab. 14 SRA L/15 eq. in (1+0) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Tab. 15 SRA L/15 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tab. 16 SRA L/15 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tab. 17 SRA L/18 eq. in (1+0) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Tab. 18 SRA L/18 eq. in 2×(1+0),
A/D-RPT, (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration. . . 20
Tab. 19 SRA L/18 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Tab. 20 SRA L/23 eq. in (1+0) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Tab. 21 SRA L/23 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT, (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Tab. 22 SRA L/23 in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Tab. 23 SRA L/26 eq. in (1+0) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tab. 24 SRA L/26 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT, (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tab. 25 SRA L/26 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tab. 26 SRA L/38 eq. in (1+0) configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
6/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 27 SRA L/38 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,
(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tab. 28 SRA L/38 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tab. 29 IDU composition P/N 732-101/11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Tab. 30 IDU composition P/N 732-101/01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Tab. 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/7B,7C -
P/N 732-221/7B,7C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Tab. 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Tab. 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Tab. 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Tab. 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tab. 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Tab. 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Tab. 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tab. 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Tab. 32 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/08B,08C -
P/N 732-221/08B,08C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Tab. 32 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/08B,08C -
P/N 732-221/08B,08C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tab. 32 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/08B,08C -
P/N 732-221/08B,08C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tab. 32 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/08B,08C -
P/N 732-221/08B,08C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Tab. 33 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/10B,10C -
P/N 732-221/10B,10C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Tab. 33 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/10B,10C -
P/N 732-221/10B,10C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Tab. 34 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/13B,13C - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
P/N 732-221/13B,13C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tab. 35 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/15B,15C -
P/N 732-221/15B,15C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Tab. 36 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/15B,15C -
732-221/15B,15C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Tab. 37 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/15B,15C -
732-221/15B,15C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/70
Tab. 37 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/15B,15C -
732-221/15B,15C (continue). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Tab. 37 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/15B,15C -
732-221/15B,15C (continue). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Tab. 38 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/18B,18C -
732-221/18B,18C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Tab. 39 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/18B,18C -
732-221/18B,18C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Tab. 39 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/18B,18C -
732-221/18B,18C (continue). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Tab. 39 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/18B,18C -
732-221/18B,18C (continue). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Tab. 39 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/18B,18C -
732-221/18B,18C (continue). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Tab. 40 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/23B, 23C -
732-221/23B, 23C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Tab. 40 ODU frequency P/N 732-201/23B, 23C -
732-221/23B, 23C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Tab. 41 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/26B, 26C -
732-221/26B, 26C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Tab. 42 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/38B, 38C -
P/N 732-221/38B, 38C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 8/70
1 GENERAL
This document lists and shows the "main parts" the SRA L equipment consists of "Main
parts" are those autonomous units, from a structural viewpoint, which form part of the
SRA L equipment assemblies and are extractable from the assemblies themselves.
The SRA L equipment, comprises an indoor assembly (IDU), arranged for being
installed in a 19" or ETSI rack, and one or two outdoor assemblies (ODU); upon request,
the equipment is delivered with the antenna (one or two, according to the configuration).
The ODU and the antenna are arranged for mounting on a special supporting frame
fixed to the pole.
Two possible installation modes of the antenna-ODU assembly are possible:
– integrated mode: ODU and antenna installed on the same supporting frame and
directly connected
– separated mode: ODU and antenna installed on two different supporting frames
and connected through connection in wave-guide.
The connection between the indoor (IDU) assy. and the outdoor (ODU) assy. is carried
out by means of a coaxial cable.
2 COMPOSITION OF SRA L EQUIPMENT
2.1 System configurations
For the SRA L equipment the configurations (system type) are provided as listed in
Tab. 1 and shown in Fig. 1, to Fig. 8.
Tab. 1 - System configurations for SRA L eq.
System type Denomination Ref.
(1+0) (1+0) System Fig. 1 and Fig. 2
2×(1+0)
A/D-RPT
2×(1+0) System or
Add/Drop repeater
Fig. 3 and Fig. 4
(1+1) H/S 2 antennas
(1+1) FD 2 antennas
(1+1) PD 2 antennas
(1+1) System 2 antennas, single
polarization
Fig. 5 and Fig. 6
(1+1) FD 1 antenna
(1+1) H/S 1 antenna
(1+1) System 1 antenna, single
polarization
Fig. 7
(1+1) H/S 1 antenna
(1+1) FD 1 antenna
(1+1) PD 1 antenna
(1+1) System 1 antenna, double
polarization
Fig. 8
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
9/70 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2 Composition of SRA L equipment
2.2.1 Composition of SRA L/7 eq., P/N 732-001/07
and P/N 732-021/07
In Tab. 2, Tab. 3 and 4, the SRA L/7 equipment composition (7.1 to 7.9 GHz) is set down
for the different provided configurations.
Tab. 2 - SRA L/7 eq. in (1+0) configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/7C, 732-221/07C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
1,2
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
1 732-201/07B,07C
732-221/07B,07C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 1 601-400/53 2
E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/47 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 10/70
Tab. 3 - SRA L/7 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,
(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/7C, 732-221/07C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Tab. 4 - SRA L/7 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and
(1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame
are delivered
3. The P/N 732-201/7C, 732-221/07C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
3,4,5,6
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/07B, 07C
732-221/07B, 07C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 2 601-400/53 2
D/E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/47 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
Ref. Fig.
7,8
Denomination Q.ty Code Note
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/07B, 07C
732-221/07B, 07C
1,3
C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 1 601-400/53 2
E ODU supporting frame for (1+1)
FD
ODU supporting frame for (1+1)
H/S
1
534-108/38
534-108/31
1
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
11/70 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2.2 Composition of SRA L/8 eq., P/N 732-001/08
and P/N 732-021/08
In Tab. 5, Tab. 6 and Tab. 7, the SRA L/8 equipment composition (8.2 to 8.5GHz) is set
down for the different provided configurations.
Tab. 5 - SRA L/8 eq. in (1+0) configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/08C, 732-221/08C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
1,2
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
1 732-201/08B, 08C
732-221/08B, 08C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 1 601-400/53 2
E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/47 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 12/70
Tab. 6 - SRA L/8 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,
(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/08C, 732-221/08C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Tab. 7 - SRA L/8 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame
are delivered
3. The P/N 732-201/08C, 732-221/08C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
3,4,5,6
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/08B, 08C
732-221/08B, 08C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 2 601-400/53 2
D/E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/47 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
Ref. Fig.
7,8
Denomination Q.ty Code Note
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/08B,08C
732-221/08B,08C
1,3
C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 1 601-400/53 2
E ODU supporting frame for (1+1)
FD
ODU supporting frame for (1+1)
H/S
1
534-108/39
534-108/32
1
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
13/70 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2.3 Composition of SRA L/10 eq., P/N 732-001/10
and P/N 732-021/10
In Tab. 8, Tab. 9 and Tab. 10, the SRA L/10 eq. composition (10.5 to 10.7GHz) is set
down for the different provided configurations.
Tab. 8 - SRA L/10 eq. in (1+0) configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/10C, 732-221/10C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
1,2
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
1 732-201/10B,10C
732-221/10B,10C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm
Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
1 601-400/41
601-400/38
1,2
E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/48 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 14/70
Tab. 9 - SRA L/10 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,
(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/10C, 732-221/10C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Tab. 10 - SRA L/10 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame
are delivered
3. The P/N 732-201/10C, 732-221/10C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
3,4,5,6
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/10B,10C
732-221/10B,10C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 2 601-400/38 2
D/E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/48
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
Ref. Fig.
8
Denomination Q.ty Code Note
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/10B, 10C
732-221/10B, 10C
1,3
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 1 601-400/38 2
E ODU supporting frame for (1+1)
H/S
1 534-108/40 1
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
15/70 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2.4 Composition of SRA L/13 eq, P/N 732-001/13
and P/N 732-021/13
In Tab. 11, Tab. 12 and Tab. 13, the SRA L/13 equipment composition (12.75 to 13.25
GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations.
Tab. 11 - SRA L/13 eq. in (1+0) configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/13C, 732-221/13C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
1,2
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
1 732-201/13B, 13C
732-221/13B, 13C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm
Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
1 601-400/42
601-400/32
601-400/31
1,2
E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/49 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 16/70
Tab. 12 - SRA L/13 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,
(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/13C, 732-221/13C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Tab. 13 - SRA L/13 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame
are delivered
3. The P/N 732-201/13C, 732-221/13C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. fig.
3,4,5,6
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/13B, 13C
732-221/13B, 13C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm
Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
2 601-400/42
601-400/32
601-400/31
1,2
D/E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/49 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
Ref. Fig.
8
Denomination Q.ty Code Note
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/13B, 13C
732-221/13B, 13C
1,3
C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm
Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
1 601-400/42
601-400/32
601-400/31
1,2
E ODU supporting frame for (1+1)
H/S
2 534-108/41
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
17/70 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2.5 Composition of SRA L/15 eq., P/N 732-001/15
and P/N 732-021/15
In Tab. 14, Tab. 15 and Tab. 16, the SRA L/15 equipment composition (14.5 to
15.35GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations.
Tab. 14 - SRA L/15 eq. in (1+0) configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/15C, 732-221/15C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
1,2
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
1 732-201/15B, 15C
732-221/15B, 15C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm
Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
1 601-400/43
601-403/01
601-402/01
1,2
E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/50 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 18/70
Tab. 15 - SRA L/15 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/15C, 732-221/15C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C)
Tab. 16 - SRA L/15 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame
are delivered
3. The P/N 732-201/15C, 732-221/15C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
3,4,5,6
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/15B, 15C
732-221/15B, 15C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
2 601-403/01
601-402/01
1,2
D/E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/50 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
Ref. Fig.
8
Denomination Q.ty Code Note
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/15B, 15C
732-221/15B, 15C
1,3
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 1 601-403/01 2
E ODU supporting frame for (1+1)
H/S
1 534-108/42
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
19/70 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2.6 Composition of SRA L/18 eq., P/N 732-001/18
and P/N 732-021/18
In Tab. 17, Tab. 18 and Tab. 19, the SRA L/18 equipment composition
(17.7 to 19.7 GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations.
Tab. 17 - SRA L/18 eq. in (1+0) configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/18C, 732-221/18C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C)
Ref. Fig.
1,2
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
1 732-201/18B, 18C
732-221/18B, 18C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
1 601-403/02
601-402/02
1,2
E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/51 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
4
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 20/70
Tab. 18 - SRA L/18 eq. in 2×(1+0),
A/D-RPT, (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/18C, 732-221/18C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Tab. 19 - SRA L/18 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame
are delivered
3. The P/N 732-201/18C, 732-221/18C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref.
Fig.
3,4,5,6
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/18B, 18C
732-221/18B, 18C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
2 601-403/02
601-402/02
1,2
E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/51 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
Ref. Fig.
8
Denomination Q.ty Code Note
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/18B, 18C
732-221/18B, 18C
1
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
2 601-403/02
601-402/02
1,2
E ODU supporting frame for (1+1)
H/S
1 534-108/43 1
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
21/70 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2.7 Composition of SRA L/23 eq., P/N 732-001/23
and P/N 732-021/23
In Tab. 20, Tab. 21 and Tab. 22, the SRA L/23 equipment composition
(21.2 to 23.6 GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations.
Tab. 20 - SRA L/23 eq. in (1+0) configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/23C, 732-221/23C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
1,2
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
1 732-201/23B, 23C
732-221/23B, 23C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
Antenna ∅ = 24 cm
1 601-403/03
601-402/03
601-401/01
1,2
E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/52 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 22/70
Tab. 21 - SRA L/23 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT, (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/23C, 732-221/23C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Tab. 22 - SRA L/23 in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame
are delivered
3. The P/N 732-201/23C, 732-221/23C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref.
3,4,5,6
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/23B, 23C
732-221/23B, 23C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
Antenna ∅ = 24 cm
2 601-403/03
601-402/03
601-401/01
1,2
D/E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/52 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
Ref. Fig.
8
Denomination Q.ty Code Note
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/23B, 23C
732-221/23B, 23C
1,3
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
2 601-403/03
601-402/03
1,2
E ODU supporting frame for (1+1)
H/S
1 534-108/44
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
23/70 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2.8 Composition of SRA L/26 eq., P/N 732-001/26
and P/N 732-021/26
In Tab. 23, Tab. 24 and Tab. 25, the SRA L/26 equipment composition
(24.5 to 26.5GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations.
Tab. 23 - SRA L/26 eq. in (1+0) configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/26C, 732-221/26C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
1,2
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
1 732-201/26B,26C
732-221/26B,26C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
Antenna ∅ = 24 cm
1 601-403/04
601-402/04
601-401/02
1,2
E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/53 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 24/70
Tab. 24 - SRA L/26 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT, (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/26C, 732-221/26C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Tab. 25 - SRA L/26 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame
are delivered
3. The P/N 732-201/26C, 732-221/26C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
3,4,5,6
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/26B,26C
732-221/26B,26C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
Antenna ∅ = 24 cm
2 601-403/04
601-402/04
601-401/02
1,2
E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/53 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
Ref. Fig.
8
Denomination Q.ty Code Note
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/26B,26C
732-221/26B,26C
1,3
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
1 601-403/04
601-402/04
1,2
E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/45
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
25/70 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2.9 Composition of SRA L/38 eq., P/N 732-001/38
and P/N 732-021/38
In Tab. 26, Tab. 27 and Tab. 28, the SRA L/38 equipment composition
(37.5 to 39.5 GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations.
Tab. 26 - SRA L/38 eq. in (1+0) configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/38C, 732-221/38C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
1,2
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
1 732-201/38B,38C
732-221/38B,38C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
Antenna ∅ = 24 cm
1 601-403/06
601-402/06
601-401/04
1,2
E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/55 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 26/70
Tab. 27 - SRA L/38 eq. in 2×(1+0), A/D-RPT,
(1+1) FD, (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting
frame are delivered.
3. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated
installation.
4. The P/N 732-201/38C, 732-221/38C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Tab. 28 - SRA L/38 eq. in (1+1) FD, (1+1) PD
and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration
1. P/N in alternative.
2. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame
are delivered
3. The P/N 732-201/38C, 732-221/38C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for
operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).
Ref. Fig.
3,4,5,6
Denomination Q.ty P/N Notes
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/38B,38C
732-221/38B,38C
1,4
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
Antenna ∅ = 24 cm
2 601-403/06
601-402/06
601-401/04
1,2
E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/55 3
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
3
Ref. Fig.
8
Denomination Q.ty Code Note
A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM)
Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM)
1 732-101/01
732-101/11
1
B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM)
Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM)
2 732-201/38B, 38C
732-221/38B, 38C
1,3
C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm
Antenna ∅ = 30 cm
Antenna ∅ = 24 cm
1 601-403/06
601-402/06
601-401/04
1,2
E ODU supporting frame for (1+1)
H/S
1 534-108/46
G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting
cable
2 See doc. "Equipment
installation"
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
27/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 1 - (1+0) integrated system
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 28/70
Fig. 2 - (1+0) not integrated system
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
29/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 3 - 2×(1+0) or A/D-RPT integrated system
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 30/70
Fig. 4 - 2×(1+0) or A/D-RPT not integrated system
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
31/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 5 - (1+1) integrated system with 2 antennas, singIe poIarization
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 32/70
Fig. 6 - (1+1) not integrated system with 2 antennas, singIe poIarization
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
33/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 7 - (1+1) not integrated system with 1 antenna, singIe poIarization
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 34/70
Fig. 8 - (1+1) not integrated system with 1 antenna, doubIe poIarization
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
35/70 Issue 1, September 1999
3 IDU COMPOSITION
The IDU assy. - P/N 732-101/11 (4 TFM modulation) and P/N 732-101/01 (2 TFM
modulation) - consist of a wired sub-rack - P/N 628-586/04, P/N 628-586/01 - where all
the plug-in units are housed.
The sub-rack is delivered with two types of brackets to allow to be secured to 19" or ETSI
racks. The IDU composition is set down in Tab. 30, Tab. 29, with reference to Fig. 9. and
Fig. 10
Tab. 29 - IDU composition P/N 732-101/11
1. P/N in alternative each other.
2. Unit not equipped in (1+0) configuration; in this configuration a special cover is
installed (P/N 332-308/41).
3. Units provided with pre-installed software; the last three characters of the code
("XXX") identify the unit software downloaded by the factory before shipment of the
unit (see OMN Manual).
4. Optional unit and handset; should the unit not be installed, a special cover (P/N
332-308/43) is delivered.
5. Q-Adapter units and D Channel Distributor unit are optional units in alternative
each other; should the unit not be installed, a special cover (P/N 332-308/42) is
delivered.
6. Alarm unit and Alarm and Fan unit are optional units in alternative each other; the
Alarm and Fan unit (P/N 614-041/11) has to be installed only for application where
a wide working temperature range is expected (-5°to +55°C).
7. The 612-314/15E units can be used as spare parts of 614-314/15 ones. the reverse
is not allowed.
Ref. Fig.
10
Denomination P/N Notes
A Wired sub-rack 628-586/04
B
RTM 16×2 Mbit/s unit 612-314/15
612-314/15E
1, 7
C
RTM 16×2 Mbit/s unit 612-314/15
612-314/15E
1, 2, 7
D Controller unit 634-001/68_XXX 3
E
16x2 Mbit/s 75/120 Ohm Tributary
unit
612-404/11
1
F EOW unit 612-910/21 4
Handset 634-901/03 4
G
Q-Adapter unit 634-001/69_XXX 3,5
D channel distributor 615-105/08 5
H
Alarm unit
Alarm and Fan unit
614-041/01
614-041/11
6
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 36/70
Tab. 30 - IDU composition P/N 732-101/01
1. P/N in alternative each other.
2. Unit not equipped in (1+0) configuration; in this configuration a special cover is
installed (P/N 332-308/41).
3. Units provided with pre-installed software; the last three characters of the code
("XXX") identify the unit software (see OMN Manual). The P/N 634-001/69 can be
used as spare part of the previous P/N 634-001/66, which is no more available.
4. Optional unit and handset; should the unit not be installed, a special cover (P/N
332-308/43) is delivered.
5. Q-Adapter units and D Channel Distributor unit are optional units in alternative
each other; should the unit not be installed, a special cover (P/N 332-308/42) is
delivered.
6. Alarm unit and Alarm and Fan unit are optional units in alternative each other; the
Alarm and Fan unit (P/N 614-041/11) has to be installed only for application where
a wide working temperature range is expected (-5°to +55°C).
7. The unit 612-404/01 can be used as spare part of the previous P/N 612-404/04 and
vice-versa (P/N 612-404/04 is no more available for new orders; replaced by
612-404/01).
8. The unit 634-001/68 replaces the previous code 634-001/65 which is no more
available. The two units are completely equivalent, and can be used as spare parts
each other.
9. The unit 612-314/03 (612-314/13) can be used as spare part of previous codes
612-314/01, 02 (612-314/11,12), which are no more available.
10. The P/N 612-910/21 replaces the previous P/N 612-910/20, which is no more
available. The new unit can be used as spare part of the previous one and
vice-versa.
11. P/N 612-404/02 is available only for failed units replacement or in-field
maintenance of past orders. It is no more available for future orders.
Ref. Fig.
11
Denomination P/N Notes
A Wired sub-rack 628-586/01
B
RTM 4×2 Mbit/s unit
RTM 8×2 Mbit/s unit
612-314/03
612-314/13
1,9
C
RTM 4×2 Mbit/s unit
RTM 8×2 Mbit/s unit
612-314/03
612-314/13
1,2,9
D Controller unit 634-001/68_XXX 3,8
E
2 Mbit/s 75/120 Ohm Tributary unit 612-404/01
612-404/02
7,11
F EOW unit 612-910/21 4,10
Handset 634-901/03 4
G
Q-Adapter unit 634-001/69_XXX 3,5
D channel distributor 615-105/08 5
H
Alarm unit
Alarm and Fan unit
614-041/01
614-041/11
6
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
37/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 9 - IDU composition (P/N 732-101/11)
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 38/70
Fig. 10 - IDU composition (P/N 732-101/01)
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
39/70 Issue 1, September 1999
4 ODU IDENTIFICATION
The ODU assy. comprises a hermetic container, arranged for pole fixing, inside which
both RF modules (depending of the operating range) and IF and power supply modules
(common in all RF range) are housed.
Adjustment and composition of ODU RF units depend on the working RF frequency
range. Besides, the ODU assy. can be set with or without pre-heater.
The ODU is available in the following versions:
– P/N 732-201/XXB: ODU without pre-heater
(2 TFM modulation)
– P/N 732-221/XXB: ODU without pre-heater
(4 TFM modulation)
– P/N 732-201/XXC: ODU with pre-heater
(2 TFM modulation)
– P/N 732-221/XXC: ODU with pre-heater
(4 TFM modulation)
The ODU versions (732-201/XXC and 732-221/XXC ) arranged with pre-heater have to
be utilized when an extended operating temperature range is required (from -50°C to
+55°C).
The ODU identification P/N comprises two field: the first one (11 characters) is the
equipment P/N, the second one (3 characters) is the customizing encoding, concerning
the RF frequency (operating frequency band within the whole RF range).
In Tab. 31, to Tab. 42 the frequency tables are shown.
NOTE - ODU P/Ns defined above repIace the previous P/Ns 732-201/XX and
can be used as spare parts of those P/Ns where POE connection to
IDU EOW is not required (see POE description). The onIy reIevant
difference between the two ODU versions is that the new ones
provide simpIer POE connector, which doesn`t permit phone caIIs
between IDU (EOW unit) and ODU.
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 40/70
Tab. 31 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/7B,7C -
P/N 732-221/7B,7C)
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/07B001
732-201/07C001
732-221/07B001
732-221/07C001
7428...7463
7428...7463
7582...7617
7582...7617
+154
732-201/07B002
732-201/07C002
732-221/07B002
732-221/07C002
7582...7617
7582...7617
7428...7463
7428...7463
-154
732-201/07B003
732-201/07C003
732-221/07B003
732-221/07C003
7449...7484
7435...7470
7603...7638
7589...7624
+154
732-201/07B004
732-201/07C004
732-221/07B004
732-221/07C004
7603...7638
7589...7624
7449...7484
7435...7470
-154
732-201/07B005
732-201/07C005
732-221/07B005
732-221/07C005
7470...7505
7442...7477
7624...7659
7596...7631
+154
732-201/07B006
732-201/07C006
732-221/07B006
732-221/07C006
7624...7659
7596...7631
7470...7505
7442...7477
-154
732-201/07B007
732-201/07C007
732-221/07B007
732-221/07C007
7491...7526
7499...7484
7645...7680
7603...7638
+154
732-201/07B008
732-201/07C008
732-221/07B008
732-221/07C008
7645...7680
7603...7638
7491...7526
7449...7484
-154
732-201/07B009
732-201/07C009
732-221/07B009
732-221/07C009
7512...7547
7456...7491
7666...7701
7610...7645
+154
732-201/07B010
732-201/07C010
732-221/07B010
732-221/07C010
7666...7701
7610...7645
7512...7547
7456...7491
-154
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
41/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 31 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue)
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/07B011
732-201/07C011
732-221/07B011
732-221/07C011
7533...7568
7463...7498
7687...7722
7617...7652
+154
732-201/07B012
732-201/07C012
732-221/07B012
732-221/07C012
7687...7722
7617...7652
7533...7568
7463...7498
-154
732-221/07B013
732-221/07C013
7470...7505 7624...7659
+154
732-221/07B014
732-221/07C014
7624...7659 7470...7505 -154
732-221/07B015
732-221/07C015
7477...7512 7631...7666 +154
732-221/07B016
732-221/07C016
7631...7666 7477...7512 -154
732-221/07B017
732-221/07C017
7484...7519 7638...7673 +154
732-221/07B018
732-221/07C018
7638...7673 7484...7519 -154
732-221/07B019
732-221/07C019
7491...7526 7645...7680 +154
732-221/07B020
732-221/07C020
7645...7680 7491...7526 -154
732-221/07B021
732-221/07C021
7498...7533 7652...7687 +154
732-221/07B022
732-221/07C022
7652...7687 7498...7533
-154
732-221/07B023
732-221/07C023
7505...7540 7659...7694 +154
732-221/07B024
732-221/07C024
7659...7694 7505...7540 -154
732-221/07B025
732-221/07C025
7512...7547 7666...7701 +154
732-221/07B026
732-221/07C026
7666...7701 7512...7547 -154
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 42/70
Tab. 31 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue)
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-221/07B027
732-221/07C027
7519...7554 7673...7708 +154
732-221/07B028
732-221/07C028
7673...7708 7519...7554 -154
732-221/07B029
732-221/07C029
7526...7561 7680...7715 +154
732-221/07B030
732-221/07C030
7680...7715 7526...7561 -154
732-221/07B031
732-221/07C031
7533...7568 7687...7722 +154
732-221/07B032
732-221/07C032
7687...7722 7533...7568 -154
732-201/07B101
732-201/07C101
732-221/07B101
732-221/07C101
7124.5...7159.5
7124.5...7159.5
7285.5...7320.5
7285.5...7320.5
+161
732-201/07B102
732-201/07C102
732-221/07B102
732-221/07C102
7285.5...7320.5
7285.5...7320.5
7124.5...7159.5
7124.5...7159.5
-161
732-201/07B103
732-201/07C103
732-221/07B103
732-221/07C103
7145.5...7180.5
7131.5...7166.5
7306.5...7341.5
7292.5...7327.5
+161
732-201/07B104
732-201/07C104
732-221/07B104
732-221/07C104
7306.5...7341.5
7292.5...7327.5
7145.5...7180.5
7131.5...7166.5
-161
732-201/07B105
732-201/07C105
732-221/07B105
732-221/07C105
7166.5...7201.5
7138.5...7173.5
7327.5...7362.5
7299.5...7334.5
+161
732-201/07B106
732-201/07C106
732-221/07B106
732-221/07C106
7327.5...7362.5
7299.5...7334.5
7166.5...7201.5
7138.5...7173.5
-161
732-201/07B107
732-201/07C107
732-221/07B107
732-221/07C107
7187.5...7222.5
7145.5...7180.5
7348.5...7383.5
7306.5...7341.5
+161
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
43/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 31 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue)
732-201/07B108
732-201/07C108
732-221/07B108
732-221/07C108
7348.5...7383.5
7306.5...7341.5
7187.5...7222.5
7145.5...7180.5
-161
732-201/07B109
732-201/07C109
732-221/07B109
732-221/07C109
7208.5...7243.5
7152.5...7187.5
7369.5...7404.5
7313.5...7348.5
+161
732-201/07B110
732-201/07C110
732-221/07B110
732-221/07C110
7369.5...7404.5
7313.5...7348.5
7208.5...7243.5
7152.5...7187.5
-161
732-201/07B111
732-201/07C111
732-221/07B111
732-221/07C111
7229.5...7264.5
7159.5...7194.5
7390.5...7425.5
7320.5...7355.5
+161
732-201/07B112
732-201/07C112
732-221/07B112
732-221/07C112
7390.5...7425.5
7320.5...7355.5
7229.5...7264.5
7159.5...7194.5
-161
732-201/07B113
732-201/07C113
732-221/07B113
732-221/07C113
7424.5...7459.5
7166.5...7201.5
7585.5...7620.5
7327.5...7362.5
+161
732-201/07B114
732-201/07C114
732-221/07B114
732-221/07C114
7585.5...7620.5
7327.5...7362.5
7424.5...7459.5
7166.5...7201.5
-161
732-201/07B115
732-201/07C115
732-221/07B115
732-221/07C115
7445.5...7480.5
7173.5...7208.5
7606.5...7641.5
7334.5...7369.5
+161
732-201/07B116
732-201/07C116
732-221/07B116
732-221/07C116
7606.5...7641.5
7334.5...7369.5
7445.5...7480.5
7173.5...7208.5
-161
732-201/07B117
732-201/07C117
732-221/07B117
732-221/07C117
7466.5...7501.5
7180.5...7215.5
7627.5...7662.5
7341.5...7376.5
+161
732-201/07B118
732-201/07C118
732-221/07B118
732-221/07C118
7627.5...7662.5
7341.5...7376.5
7466.5...7501.5
7180.5...7215.5
-161
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 44/70
Tab. 31 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue)
732-201/07B119
732-201/07C119
732-221/07B119
732-221/07C119
7487.5...7522.5
7187.5...7222.5
7648.5...7683.5
7348.5...7383.5
+161
732-201/07B120
732-201/07C120
732-221/07B120
732-221/07C120
7648.5...7683.5
7348.5...7383.5
7487.5...7522.5
7487.5...7522.5
-161
732-201/07B121
732-201/07C121
732-221/07B121
732-221/07C121
7508.5...7543.5
7194.5...7229.5
7669.5...7704.5
7355.5...7390.5
+161
732-201/07B122
732-201/07C122
732-221/07B122
732-221/07C122
7669.5...7704.5
7355.5...7390.5
7508.5...7543.5
7194.5...7229.5
-161
732-201/07B123
732-201/07C123
732-221/07B123
732-221/07C123
7529.5...7564.5
7201.5...7236.5
7690.5...7725.5
7362.5...7397.5
+161
732-201/07B124
732-201/07C124
732-221/07B124
732-221/07C124
7690.5...7725.5
7362.5...7397.5
7529.5...7564.5
7201.5...7236.5
-161
732-221/07B125
732-221/07C125
7208.5...7243.5 7369.5...7404.5 +161
732-221/07B126
732-221/07C126
7369.5...7404.5 7208.5...7243.5 -161
732-221/07B127
732-221/07C127
7215.5...7250.5 7376.5...7411.5 +161
732-221/07B128
732-221/07C128
7376.5...7411.5 7215.5...7250.5 -161
732-221/07B129
732-221/07C129
7222.5...7257.5 7383.5...7418.5 +161
732-221/07B130
732-221/07C130
7383.5...7418.5 7222.5...7257.5 -161
732-221/07B131
732-221/07C131
7229.5...7264.5 7390.5...7425.5 +161
732-221/07B132
732-221/07C132
7390.5...7425.5 7229.5...7264.5 -161
732-221/07B133
732-221/07C133
7424.5...7459.5 7585.5....7620.5 +161
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
45/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 31 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue)
732-221/07B134
732-221/07C134
7585.5...7620.5 7424.5...7459.5 -161
732-221/07B135
732-221/07C135
7431.5...7466.5 7592.5...7627.5 +161
732-221/07B136
732-221/07C136
7592.5...7627.5 7431.5...7466.5 -161
732-221/07B137
732-221/07C137
7438.5...7473.5 7599.5...7634.5
+161
732-221/07B138
732-221/07C138
7599.5...7634.5 7438.5...7473.5 -161
732-221/07B139
732-221/07C139
7445.5...7480.5 7606.5...7641.5 +161
732-221/07B140
732-221/07C140
7606.5...7641.5 7445.5...7480.5 -161
732-221/07B141
732-221/07C141
7452.5...7487.5 7613.5...7648.5 +161
732-221/07B142
732-221/07C142
7613.5...7648.5 7452.5...7487.5 -161
732-221/07B143
732-221/07C143
7459.5...7494.5 7620.5...7655.5 +161
732-221/07B144
732-221/07C144
7620.5...7655.5 7459.5...7494.5 -161
732-221/07B145
732-221/07C145
7466.5...7501.5 7627.5...7662.5 +161
732-221/07B146
732-221/07C146
7627.5...7662.5 7466.5...7501.5 -161
732-221/07B147
732-221/07C147
7473.5...7508.5 7634.5...7669.5 +161
732-221/07B148
732-221/07C148
7634.5...7669.5 7473.5...7508.5 -161
732-221/07B149
732-221/07C149
7480.5...7515.5 7641.5...7676.5 +161
732-221/07B150
732-221/07C150
7641.5...7676.5 7480.5...7515.5 -161
732-221/07B151
732-221/07C151
7478.5...7522.5 7648.5...7683.5 +161
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 46/70
Tab. 31 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue)
732-221/07B154
732-221/07C154
7655.5...7690.5 7494.5...7529.5
-161
732-221/07B155
732-221/07C155
7501.5...7536.5 7662.5...7697.5 +161
732-221/07B156
732-221/07C156
7662.5...7697.5 7501.5...7536.5 -161
732-221/07B157
732-221/07C157
7508.5...7543.5 7669.5...7704.5 +161
732-221/07B158
732-221/07C158
7669.5...7704.5 7508.5...7543.5 -161
732-221/07B159
732-221/07C159
7515.5...7550.5 7676.5...7711.5 +161
732-221/07B160
732-221/07C160
7676.5...7711.5 7515.5...7550.5 -161
732-221/07B161
732-221/07C161
7522.5...7557.5 7683.5...7718.5 +161
732-221/07B162
732-221/07C162
7683.5...7718.5 7522.5...7557.5 -161
732-221/07B163
732-221/07C163
7529.5...7564.5 7690.5...7725.5 +161
732-221/07B164
732-221/07C164
7690.5...7725.5 7529.5...7564.5 -161
732-201/07B201
732-201/07C201
732-221/07B201
732-221/07C201
7428...7484
7428...7484
7673...7729
7673...7729
+245
732-201/07B202
732-201/07C202
732-221/07B202
732-221/07C202
7673...7729
7673...7729
7428...7484
7428...7484
-245
732-201/07B203
732-201/07C203
732-221/07B203
732-221/07C203
7470...7526
7456...7512
7715...7771
7701...7757
+245
732-201/07B204
732-201/07C204
732-221/07B204
732-221/07C204
7715...7771
7701...7757
7470...7526
7456...7512
-245
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
47/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 31 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue)
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/07B205
732-201/07C205
732-221/07B205
732-221/07C205
7512...7568
7484...7540
7757...7813
7729...7785
+245
732-201/07B206
732-201/07C206
732-221/07B206
732-221/07C206
7757...7813
7729...7785
7512...7568
7484...7540
-245
732-201/07B207
732-201/07C207
732-221/07B207
732-221/07C207
7554...7610
7512...7568
7799...7855
7757...7813
+245
732-201/07B208
732-201/07C208
732-221/07B208
732-221/07C208
7799...7855
7757...7813
7554...7610
7512...7568
-245
732-201/07B209
732-201/07C209
732-221/07B209
732-221/07C209
7596...7652
7540...7596
7841...7897
7785...7841
+245
732-201/07B210
732-201/07C210
732-221/07B210
732-221/07C210
7841...7897
7785...7841
7596...7652
7540...7596
-245
732-221/07B211
732-221/07C211
7568...7624 7813...7869 +245
732-221/07B212
732-221/07C212
7813...7869 7568...7624 -245
732-221/07B213
732-221/07C213
7596...7652 7841...7897 +245
732-221/07B214
732-221/07C214
7841...7897 7596...7652 -245
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 48/70
Tab. 31 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/07B,07C -
P/N 732-221/07B,07C (continue)
732-201/07B301
732-201/07C301
732-221/07B301
732-221/07C301
7750...7785
7750...7785
7898.5...7933.5
7898.5...7933.5
+148.5
732-201/07B302
732-201/07C302
732-221/07B302
732-221/07C302
7898.5...7933.5
7898.5...7933.5
7750...7785
7750...7785
-148.5
732-201/07B303
732-201/07C303
732-221/07B303
732-221/07C303
7771...7806
7757...7792
7919.5...7954.5
7905.5...7940.5
+148.5
732-201/07B304
732-201/07C304
732-221/07B304
732-221/07C304
7919.5...7954.5
7905.5...7940.5
7771...7806
7757...7792
-148.5
732-201/07B305
732-201/07C305
732-221/07B305
732-221/07C305
7791.5...7826.5
7764...7799
7940...7975
7912.5...7947.5 +148.5
732-201/07B306
732-201/07C306
732-221/07B306
732-221/07C306
7940...7975
7912.5...7947.5
7791.5...7826.5
7764...7799
-148.5
732-221/07B307
732-221/07C307
7771...7806 7919.5...7954.5 +148.5
732-221/07B308
732-221/07C308
7919.5...7954.5 7771...7806 -148.5
732-221/07B309
732-221/07C309
7778...7813 7926.5...7961.5 +148.5
732-221/07B310
732-221/07C310
7926.5...7961.5 7778...7813 -148.5
732-221/07B311
732-221/07C311
7785...7820 7933.5...7968.5 +148.5
732-221/07B312
732-221/07C312
7933.5...7968.5 7785...7820 -148.5
732-221/07B313
732-221/07C313
7792...7826.5 7940.5...7975 +148.5
732-221/07B314
732-221/07C314
7940.5...7975 7792...7826.5 -148.5
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
49/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 32 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/08B,08C -
P/N 732-221/08B,08C
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/08B001
732-201/08C001
732-221/08B001
732-221/08C001
8275.5...8303.5
8275.5...8310.5
8401.5...8429.5
8401.5...8436.5
+126
732-201/08B002
732-201/08C002
732-221/08B002
732-221/08C002
8401.5...8429.5
8401.5...8436.5
8275.5...8303.5
8275.5...8310.5
-126
732-201/08B003
732-201/08C003
732-221/08B003
732-221/08C003
8289.5...8317.5
8282.5...8317.5
8415.5...8443.5
8408.5...8443.5
+126
732-201/08B004
732-201/08C004
732-221/08B004
732-221/08C004
8415.5...8443.5
8408.5...8443.5
8289.5...8317.5
8282.5...8317.5
-126
732-201/08B005
732-201/08C005
732-221/08B005
732-221/08C005
8303.5...8331.5
8289.5...8324.5
8429.5...8457.5
8415.5...8450.5
+126
732-201/08B006
732-201/08C006
732-221/08B006
732-221/08C006
8429,5...8457,5
8415.5...8450.5
8303,5...8331,5
8289.5...8324.5
-126
732-201/08B007
732-201/08C007
732-221/08B007
732-221/08C007
8317.5...8345.5
8296.5...8331.5
8443.5...8471.5
8422.5...8457.5
+126
732-201/08B008
732-201/08C008
732-221/08B008
732-221/08C008
8443.5...8471.5
8422.5...8457.5
8317.5...8345.5
8296.5...8331.5
-126
732-201/08B009
732-201/08C009
732-221/08B009
732-221/08C009
8331.5...8359.5
8303.5...8338.5
8457.5...8485.5
8429.5...8464.5
+126
732-201/08B010
732-201/08C010
732-221/08B010
732-221/08C010
8457.5...8485.5
8429.5...8464.5
8331.5...8359.5
8303.5...8338.5
-126
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 50/70
Tab. 32 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/08B,08C -
P/N 732-221/08B,08C (continue)
732-201/08B011
732-201/08C011
732-221/08B011
732-221/08C011
8345.5...8373.5
8310.5...8345.5
8471.5...8499.5
8436.5...8471.5
+126
732-201/08B012
732-201/08C012
732-221/08B012
732-221/08C012
8471.5...8499.5
8436.5...8471.5
8345.5...8373.5
8310.5...8345.5
-126
732-221/08B013
732-221/08C013
8317.5...8352.5 8443.5...8478.5 +126
732-221/08B014
732-221/08C014
8443.5...8478.5 8317.5...8352.5 -126
732-221/08B015
732-221/08C015
8324.5...8359.5 8450.5...8485.5 +126
732-221/08B016
732-221/08C016
8450.5...8485.5 8324.5...8359.5 -126
732-221/08B017
732-221/08C017
8331.5...8366.5 8457.5...8492.5 +126
732-221/08B018
732-221/08C018
8457.5...8492.5 8331.5...8366.5 -126
732-221/08B019
732-221/08C019
8352.5...8373.5 8464.5...8499.5 +126
732-221/08B020
732-221/08C020
8464.5...8499.5 8352.5...8373.5 -126
732-221/08B
732-221/08C
8324.5...8359.5 8450.5...8485.5 +126
732-221/08B
732-221/08C
8450.5...8485.5 8324.5...8359.5 -126
732-221/08B
732-221/08C
8331.5...8366.5 8457.5...8492.5 +126
732-221/08B
732-221/08C
8457.5...8492.5 8331.5...8366.5 -126
732-221/08B
732-221/08C
8352.5...8373.5 8464.5...8499.5 +126
732-221/08B
732-221/08C
8464.5...8499.5 8352.5...8373.5 -126
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
51/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 32 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/08B,08C -
P/N 732-221/08B,08C (continue)
732-201/08B011
732-201/08C011
732-221/08B011
732-221/08C011
8345.5...8373.5
8310.5...8345.5
8471.5...8499.5
8436.5...8471.5
+126
732-201/08B012
732-201/08C012
732-221/08B012
732-221/08C012
8471.5...8499.5
8436.5...8471.5
8345.5...8373.5
8310.5...8345.5
-126
732-221/08B013
732-221/08C013
8317.5...8352.5 8443.5...8478.5 +126
732-221/08B014
732-221/08C014
8443.5...8478.5 8317.5...8352.5 -126
732-221/08B015
732-221/08C015
8324.5...8359.5 8450.5...8485.5 +126
732-221/08B016
732-221/08C016
8450.5...8485.5 8324.5...8359.5 -126
732-221/08B017
732-221/08C017
8331.5...8366.5 8457.5...8492.5 +126
732-221/08B018
732-221/08C018
8457.5...8492.5 8331.5...8366.5 -126
732-221/08B019
732-221/08C019
8352.5...8373.5 8464.5...8499.5 +126
732-221/08B020
732-221/08C020
8464.5...8499.5 8352.5...8373.5 -126
732-221/08B101
732-221/08C101
8275.5...8310.5 8394.5...8429.5 +119
732-221/08B102
732-221/08C102
8394.5...8429.5 8275.5...8310.5 -119
732-221/08B103
732-221/08C103
8282.5...8366.5 8401.5...8436.5 +119
732-221/08B104
732-221/08C104
8401.5...8436.5 8282.5...8317.5 -119
732-221/08B105
732-221/08C105
8289.5...8324.5 8408.5...8443.5 +119
732-221/08B106
732-221/08C106
8408.5...8499.5 8289.5...8324.5 -119
732-221/08B107
732-221/08C107
8296.5...8331.5 8415.5...8450.5 +119
732-221/08B108
732-221/08C108
8415.5...8450.5 8296.5...8331.5 -119
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 52/70
Tab. 32 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/08B,08C -
P/N 732-221/08B,08C (continue)
732-221/08B109
732-221/08C109
8303.5...8338.5 8422.5...8457.5 +119
732-221/08B110
732-221/08C110
8442.5...8457.5 8303.5...8338.5 -119
732-221/08B111
732-221/08C111
8310.5...8345.5 8429.5...8464.5 +119
732-221/08B112
732-221/08C112
8429.5...8464.5 8310.5...8345.5 -119
732-221/08B113
732-221/08C113
8317.5...8352.5 8436.5...8471.5 +119
732-221/08B114
732-221/08C114
8436.5...8471.5 8317.5...8352.5 -119
732-221/08B115
732-221/08C115
8324.5...8359.5 8443.5...8478.5 +119
732-221/08B116
732-221/08C116
8443.5...8478.5 8324.5...8359.5 -119
732-221/08B117
732-221/08C117
8331.5...8366.5 8450.5...8485.5 +119
732-221/08B118
732-221/08C118
8450.5...8485.5 8331.5...8366.5 -119
732-221/08B119
732-221/08C119
8338.5...8373.5 8457.5...8492.5 +119
732-221/08B120
732-221/08C120
8457.5...8492.5 8338.5...8373.5 -119
732-221/08B121
732-221/08C121
8352.5...8373.5 8464.5...8499.5 +119
732-221/08B122
732-221/08C122
8464.5...84990.5 8345.5...8380.5 -119
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
53/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 33 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/10B,10C -
P/N 732-221/10B,10C
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/10B001
732-201/10C001
732-221/10B001
732-221/10C001
10497...10525
10497...10532
10588...10616
10588...10623
+91
732-201/10B002
732-201/10C002
732-221/10B002
732-221/10C002
10588...10616
10588...10623
10497...10525
10497...10532
-91
732-201/10B003
732-201/10C003
732-201/10B003
732-201/10C003
10511...10539
10504...10539
10602...10630
10595...10630
+91
732-201/10B004
732-201/10C004
732-221/10B004
732-221/10C004
10602...10630
10595...10630
10511...10539
10504...10539
-91
732-201/10B005
732-201/10C005
732-221/10B005
732-221/10C005
10525...10553
10511...10546
10616...10644
10602...10637
+91
732-201/10B006
732-201/10C006
732-221/10B006
732-221/10C006
10616...10644
10602...10637
10525...10553
10511...10546
-91
732-201/10B007
732-201/10C007
732-221/10B007
732-221/10C007
10539...10567
10518...10553
10630...10658
10609...10644
+91
732-201/10B008
732-201/10C008
732-201/10B008
732-201/10C008
10630...10658
10609...10644
10539...10567
10518...10533
-91
732-201/10B009
732-201/10C009
732-221/10B009
732-221/10C009
10553...10581
10525...10560
10644...10672
10616...10651
+91
732-201/10B010
732-201/10C010
732-221/10B010
732-221/10C010
10644...10672
10616...10651
10553...10581
10525...10560
-91
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 54/70
Tab. 33 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/10B,10C -
P/N 732-221/10B,10C (continue)
732-201/10B011
732-201/10C011
732-221/10B011
732-221/10C011
10567...10595
10532...10567
10658...10686
10623...10658
+91
732-201/10B012
732-201/10C012
732-221/10B012
732-221/10C012
10658...10686
10623...10658
10567...10595
10532...10567
-91
732-221/10B013
732-221/10C013
10539...10574 10630...10665 +91
732-221/10B014
732-221/10C014
10630...10665 10539...10574 -91
732-221/10B015
732-221/10C015
10546...10581 10637...10672 +91
732-221/10B016
732-221/10C016
10637...10672 10546...10581 -91
732-221/10B017
732-221/10C017
10553...10588 10644...10679 +91
732-221/10B018
732-221/10C018
10644...10679 10553...10588 -91
732-221/10B019
732-221/10C019
10560...10595 10651...10686 +91
732-221/10B020
732-221/10C020
10651...10686 10560...10595 -91
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
55/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 34 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/13B,13C -
P/N 732-221/13B,13C
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/13B001
732-201/13C001
732-221/13B001
732-221/13C001
12750...12814
12750...12814
13016...13080
13016...13080
+266
732-201/13B002
732-201/13C002
732-221/13B002
732-221/13C002
13016...13080
13016...13080
12750...12814
12750...12814
-266
732-201/13B003
732-201/13C003
732-221/13B003
732-221/13C003
12807...12871
12784...12848
13073...13137
13050...13114
+266
732-201/13B004
732-201/13C004
732-221/13B004
732-221/13C004
13073...13137
13050...13114
12807...12871
12784...12848
-266
732-201/13B005
732-201/13C005
732-221/13B005
732-221/13C005
12864...12928
12818...12882
13130...13194
13084...13148
+266
732-201/13B006
732-201/13C006
732-221/13B006
732-221/13C006
13130...13194
13084...13148
12807...12871
12818...12882
-266
732-201/13B007
732-201/13C007
732-221/13B007
732-221/13C007
12921...12984
12852...12916
13187...13250
13118...13182
+266
732-201/13B008
732-201/13C008
732-221/13B008
732-221/13C008
13187...13250
13118...13182
12921...12984
12852...12916
-266
732-221/13B009
732-221/13C009
12886...12950 13152...13216 +266
732-221/13B010
732-221/13C010
13152...13216 12886...12950 -266
732-221/13B011
732-221/13C011
12920...12984 13186...13250 +266
732-221/13B012
732-221/13C012
13186...13250 12920...12984 -266
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 56/70
Tab. 35 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/15B,15C -
P/N 732-221/15B,15C
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/15B001
732-201/15C001
732-221/15B001
732-221/15C001
14595...14679
14595...14679
14931...15015
14931...15015
+336
732-201/15B002
732-201/15C002
732-221/15B002
732-221/15C002
14931...15015
14931...15015
14595...14679
14595...14679
-336
732-201/15B003
732-201/15C003
732-221/15B003
732-221/15C003
14672...14756
14642-14726
15008...15092
14978...15062
+336
732-201/15B004
732-201/15C004
732-221/15B004
732-221/15C004
15008...15092
14978...15062
14672...14756
14642...14726
-336
732-201/15B005
732-201/15C005
732-201/15B005
732-201/15C005
14749...14833
14689...14773
15085...15169
15025...15109
+336
732-201/15B006
732-201/15C006
732-221/15B006
732-221/15C006
15085...15169
15025...15109
14749...14833
14689...14773
-336
732-201/15B007
732-201/15C007
732-221/15B007
732-221/15C007
14826...14910
14736...14820
15162...15246
15072...15156
+336
732-201/15B008
732-201/15C008
732-221/15B008
732-221/15C008
15162...15246
15072...15156
14826...14910
14736...14820
-336
732-221/15B009
732-221/15C009
14783...14867 15119...15203 +336
732-221/15B010
732-221/15C010
15119...15203 14783...14867 -336
732-221/15B011
732-221/15C011
14826...14910 15162...15246 +336
732-221/15B012
732-221/15C012
15162...15246 14826...14910 -336
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
57/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 36 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/15B,15C -
732-221/15B,15C
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/15B101
732-201/15C101
732-221/15B101
732-221/15C101
14500...14615
14500...14615
14920...15035
14920...15035
+420
732-201/15B102
732-201/15C102
732-221/15B102
732-221/15C102
14920...15035
14920...15035
14500...14615
14500...14615
-420
732-201/15B103
732-201/15C103
732-221/15B103
732-221/15C103
14608...14723
14579...14694
15028...15143
14999...15114
+420
732-201/15B104
732-201/15A104
732-221/15B104
732-221/15C104
15028...15143
14999...15114
14608...14723
14579...14694
-420
732-201/15B105
732-201/15C105
732-221/15B105
732-221/15C105
14716...14831
14658...14773
15136...15251
15078...15193
+420
732-201/15B106
732-201/15C106
732-221/15B106
732-221/15C106
15136...15251
15078...15193
14716...14831
14658...14773
-420
732-201/15B107
732-201/15C107
732-221/15B107
732-221/15C107
14824...14930
14737...14852
15244...15350
15157...15272
+420
732-201/15B108
732-201/15C108
732-221/15B108
732-221/15C108
15244...15350
15157...15272
14824...14930
14737...14852
-420
732-221/15B109
732-221/15C109
14815...14930 15235...15350 +420
732-221/15B110
732-221/15C110
15235...15350 14815...14930 -420
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 58/70
Tab. 37 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/15B,15C -
732-221/15B,15C
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/15B201
732-201/15C201
732-221/15B201
732-221/15C201
14500...14620
14500...14620
15144...15264
15144...15264
+644
732-201/15B202
732-201/15C202
732-221/15B202
732-221/15C202
15144...15264
15144...15264
14500...14620
14500...14620
-644
732-201/15B301
732-201/15C301
732-221/15B301
732-221/15C301
14504...14631
14504...14631
15218...15345
15218...15345
+714
732-201/15B302
732-201/15C302
732-221/15B302
732-221/15C302
15218...15345
15218...15345
14504...14631
14504...14631
-714
732-201/15B401
732-201/15C401
732-221/15B401
732-221/15C401
14501...14620
14501...14620
15229...15348
15229...15348
+728
732-201/15B402
732-201/15C402
732-201/15B402
732-201/15C402
15229...15348
15229...15348
14501...14620
14501...14620
-728
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
59/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 37 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/15B,15C -
732-221/15B,15C (continue)
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/15B501
732-201/15C501
732-221/15B501
732-221/15C501
14403...14522
14403...14522
14893...15012
14893...15012
+490
732-201/15B502
732-201/15C502
732-221/15B502
732-221/15C502
14893...15012
14893...15012
14403...14522
14403...14522
-490
732-201/15B503
732-201/15C503
732-221/15B503
732-221/15C503
14515...14634
14487...14606
15005...15124
14977...15096
+490
732-201/15B504
732-201/15C504
732-221/15B504
732-221/15C504
15005...15124
14977...15096
14515...14634
14487...14606
-490
732-201/15B505
732-201/15C505
732-221/15B505
732-221/15C505
14627...14746
14571...14690
15117...15236
15061...15180
+490
732-201/15B506
732-201/15C506
732-221/15B506
732-221/15C506
15117...15236
15061...15180
14627...14746
14571...14690
-490
732-201/15B507
732-201/15C507
732-221/15B507
732-221/15C507
14739...14858
14655...14774
15229...15348
15145...15264
+490
732-201/15B508
732-201/15C508
732-221/15B508
732-221/15C508
15229...15348
15145...15264
14739...14858
14655...14774
-490
732-221/15B509
732-221/15C509
14739...14858 15229...15348 +490
732-221/15B510
732-221/15C510
15229...15348 14739...14858 -490
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 60/70
Tab. 37 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/15B,15C -
732-221/15B,15C (continue)
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/15B601
732-201/15C601
732-221/15B601
732-221/15C601
14626...14704
14626...14706
14941...15019
14941...15021
+315
732-201/15B602
732-201/15C602
732-221/15B602
732-221/15C602
14941...15019
14941...15021
14626...14704
14626...14705
-315
732-201/15B603
732-201/15C603
732-221/15B603
732-221/15C603
14696...14774
14678...14758
15011...15089
14993...15073
+315
732-201/15B604
732-201/15C604
732-221/15B604
732-221/15C604
15011...15089
14993...15073
15081...15159
14678...14758
-315
732-201/15B605
732-201/15C605
732-221/15B605
732-221/15C605
14766...14844
14730...14810
14696...14774
15045...15125
+315
732-201/15B606
732-201/15C606
732-221/15B606
732-221/15C606
15081...15159
15045...15125
14766...14884
14730...14810
-315
732-201/15B607
732-201/15C607
732-221/15B607
732-221/15C607
14836...14914
14782...14862
15151...15229
15097...15177
+315
732-201/15B608
732-201/15C608
732-221/15B608
732-221/15C608
15151...15229
15097...15177
14836...14914
14782...14862
-315
732-221/15B609
732-221/15C609
14834...14914 15149...15229 +315
732-221/15B610
732-221/15C610
15149...15229 14834...14914 -315
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
61/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 38 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/18B,18C -
732-221/18B,18C
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/18B001
732-201/18C001
732-221/18B001
732-221/18C001
18575...18663
18575...18663
18915...19003
18915...19003
+340
732-201/18B002
732-201/18C002
732-221/18B002
732-221/18C002
18915...19003
18915...19003
18575...18663
18575...18663
-340
732-201/18B003
732-201/18C003
732-221/18B003
732-221/18C003
18656...18744
18629...18717
18996...19084
18969...19057
+340
732-201/18B004
732-201/18C004
732-221/18B004
732-221/18C004
18996...19084
18969...19057
18656...18744
18629...18717
-340
732-201/18B005
732-201/18C005
732-221/18B005
732-221/18C005
18737...18825
18683...18771
19077...19165
19023...19111
+340
732-201/18B006
732-201/18C006
732-221/18B006
732-221/18C006
19077...19165
19023...19111
18737...18825
18683...18771
-340
732-221/18B007
732-221/18C007
18737...18825 19077...19165 +340
732-221/18B008
732-221/18C008
19077...19165 18737...18825 -340
732-201/18B101
732-201/18C101
732-221/18B101
732-221/18C101
17700...17956
17700...17956
18710...18966
18710...18966
+1010
732-201/18B102
732-201/18C102
732-221/18B102
732-221/18C102
18710...18966
18710...18966
17700...17956
17700...17956
-1010
732-201/18B103
732-201/18C103
732-221/18B103
732-221/18C103
17947...18202
17883.5...18139.5
18957...19212
18893.5...19149.5
+1010
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 62/70
Tab. 39 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/18B,18C -
732-221/18B,18C
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/18B104
732-201/18C104
732-221/18B104
732-221/18C104
18957...19212
18893.5...19149.5
17947...18202
17883.5...18139.5
-1010
732-201/18B105
732-201/18C105
732-221/18B105
732-221/18C105
18195...18449
18067...18323
19205...19459
19077...19333
+1010
732-201/18B106
732-201/18C106
732-221/18B106
732-221/18C106
19205...19459
19077...19333
18195...18449
18067...18323
-1010
732-201/18B107
732-201/18C107
732-221/18B107
732-221/18C107
18442...18690
18250.5...18506.5
19452...19700
19260.5...19516.5
+1010
732-201/18B108
732-201/18C108
732-221/18B108
732-221/18C108
19452...19700
19260.5...19516.5
18442...18690
18250.5...18506.5
-1010
732-201/18B201
732-201/18C201
732-221/18B201
732-221/18C201
18579...18611
18579...18613
18699...18731
18699...18733
+120
732-201/18B202
732-201/18C202
732-221/18B202
732-221/18C202
18699...18731
18699...18733
18579...18611
18579...18613
-120
732-201/18B203
732-201/18C203
732-221/18B203
732-221/18C203
18597...18629
18586...18619
18717...18749
18705...18739
+120
732-201/18B204
732-201/18C204
732-221/18B204
732-221/18C204
18717...18749
18705...18739
18597...18629
18586...18619
-120
732-201/18B205
732-201/18C205
732-221/18B205
732-221/18C205
18615...18647
18591...18625
18735...18767
18711...18745
+120
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
63/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 39 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/18B,18C -
732-221/18B,18C (continue)
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/18B206
732-201/18C206
732-221/18B206
732-221/18C206
18735...18767
18711...18745
18615...18647
18591...18625
-120
732-201/18B207
732-201/18C207
732-221/18B207
732-221/18C207
18633...18665
18597...18631
18753...18785
18717...18751
+120
732-201/18B208
732-201/18C208
732-221/18B208
732-221/18C208
18753...18785
18717...18751
18633...18665
18597...18631
-120
732-201/18B209
732-201/18C209
732-221/18B209
732-221/18C209
18651...18683
18603...18637
18771...18803
18723...18757
+120
732-201/18B210
732-201/18C210
732-221/18B210
732-221/18C210
18771...18803
18723...18757
18651...18683
18603...18637
-120
732-201/18B211
732-201/18C211
732-221/18B211
732-221/18C211
18669...18701
18609...18643
18789...18821
18729...18763
+120
732-201/18B212
732-201/18C212
732-221/18B212
732-221/18C212
18789...18821
18729...18763
18669...18701
18609...18643
-120
732-221/18B213
732-221/18C213
18615...18649 18735...18769 +120
732-221/18B214
732-221/18C214
18735...18769 18615...18649 -120
732-221/18B215
732-221/18C215
18621...18655 18741...18775 +120
732-221/18B216
732-221/18C216
18741...18775 18621...18655 -120
732-221/18B217
732-221/18C217
18627...18661 18747...18781 +120
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 64/70
Tab. 39 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/18B,18C -
732-221/18B,18C (continue)
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-221/18B218
732-221/18C218
18747...18781 18627...18661 -120
732-221/18B219
732-221/18C219
18633...18667 18753...18787 +120
732-221/18B220
732-221/18C220
18753...18787 18633...18667 -120
732-221/18B221
732-221/18C221
18639...18673 18759...18793 +120
732-221/18B222
732-221/18C222
18759...18793 18639...18673 -120
732-221/18B223
732-221/18C223
18645...18679 18765...18799 +120
732-221/18B224
732-221/18C224
18765...18799 18645...18679 -120
732-221/18B225
732-221/18C225
18651...18685 18771...18805 +120
732-221/18B226
732-221/18C226
18771...18805 18651...18685 -120
732-221/18B227
732-221/18C227
18657...18691 18777...18811 +120
732-221/18B228
732-221/18C228
18777...18811 18657...18691 -120
732-221/18B229
732-221/18C229
18663...18697 18783...18817 +120
732-221/18B230
732-221/18C230
18783...18817 18663...18697 -120
732-221/18B231
732-221/18C231
18669...18703 18789...18823 +120
732-221/18B232
732-221/18C232
18789...18823 18669...18703 -120
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
65/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 39 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/18B,18C -
732-221/18B,18C (continue)
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/18B301
732-201/18C301
732-221/18B301
732-221/18C301
17706...17927
17706...17934
19266...19487
19266...19494
+1560
732-201/18B302
732-201/18C302
732-221/18B302
732-221/18C302
19266...19487
19266...19494
17706...17927
17706...17934
-1560
732-201/18B303
732-201/18C303
732-221/18B303
732-221/18C303
17927...18134
17906...18134
19487...19694
19466...19694
+1560
732-201/18B304
732-201/18C304
732-221/18B304
732-221/18C304
19487...19694
19466...19694
17927...18134
17906...18134
-1560
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 66/70
Tab. 40 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/23B, 23C -
732-221/23B, 23C
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/23B001
732-201/23C001
732-221/23B001
732-221/23C001
22000...22294
22000...22314
23008...23302
23008...23322
+1008
732-201/23B002
732-201/23C002
732-221/23B002
732-221/23C002
23008...23302
23008...23322
22000...22294
22000...22314
-1008
732-201/23B003
732-201/23C003
732-221/23B003
732-221/23C003
22287...22600
22286...22600
23295...23608
23294...23608
+1008
732-201/23B004
732-201/23C004
732-221/23B004
732-221/23C004
23295...23608
23294...23608
22287...22600
22286...22600
-1008
732-201/23B101
732-201/23C101
732-221/23B101
732-221/23C101
21200...21494
21200...21513
22432...22726
22432...22745
+1232
732-201/23B102
732-201/23C102
732-221/23B102
732-221/23C102
22432...22726
22432...22745
21200...21494
21200...21513
-1232
732-201/23B103
732-201/23C103
732-221/23B103
732-221/23C103
21487...21781
21485...21798
22719...23013
22717...23030
+1232
732-201/23B104
732-201/23C104
732-221/23B104
732-221/23C104
22719...23013
22717...23030
21487...21781
21485...21798
-1232
732-201/23B105
732-201/23C105
732-221/23B105
732-221/23C105
21774...22082
21770...22083
23006...23314
23002...23315
+1232
732-201/23B106
732-201/23C106
732-221/23B106
732-221/23C106
23006...23314
23002...23315
21774...22082
21770...22083
-1232
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
67/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 40 - ODU frequency P/N 732-201/23B, 23C -
732-221/23B, 23C (continue)
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/23B107
732-201/23C107
732-221/23B107
732-221/23C107
22075...22369
22055...22368
23307...23601
23287...23600
+1232
732-201/23B108
732-201/23C108
732-221/23B108
732-221/23C108
23307...23601
23287...23600
22075...22369
22055...22368
-1232
732-201/23B201
732-201/23C201
732-221/23B201
732-221/23C201
21200...21515
21200...21521
22400...22715
22400...22721
+1200
732-201/23B202
732-201/23C202
732-221/23B202
732-221/23C202
22400...22715
22400...22721
21200...21515
21200...21521
-1200
732-201/23B203
732-201/23C203
732-221/23B203
732-221/23C203
21497...21809
21493...21814
22697...23009
22693...23014
+1200
732-201/23B204
732-201/23C204
732-221/23B204
732-221/23C204
22697...23009
22693...23014
21497...21809
21493...21814
-1200
732-201/23B205
732-201/23C205
732-221/23B205
732-221/23C205
21780...22102
21786...22107
22980...23302
22986...23307
+1200
732-201/23B206
732-201/23C206
732-221/23B206
732-221/23C206
22980...23302
22986...23307
21780...22102
21786...22107
-1200
732-201/23B207
732-201/23C207
732-221/23B207
732-221/23C207
22074...22404
22079...22400
23274...23600
23279...23600
+1200
732-201/23B208
732-201/23C208
732-221/23B208
732-221/23C208
23274...23600
23279...23600
22074...22404
22079...22400
-1200
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 68/70
Tab. 41 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/26B, 26C -
732-221/26B, 26C
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/26B001
732-201/26C001
732-221/26B001
732-221/26C001
24549...24857
24549...24867
25557...25865
25557...25875
+1008
732-201/26B002
732-201/26C002
732-221/26B002
732-221/26C002
25557...25865
25557...25875
24549...24857
24549...24867
-1008
732-201/26B003
732-201/26C003
732-221/26B003
732-221/26C003
24843...25144
24839...25157
25851...26152
25847...26165
+1008
732-201/26B004
732-201/26C004
732-221/26B004
732-221/26C004
25851...26152
25847...26165
24843...25144
24839...25157
-1008
732-201/26B005
732-201/26C005
732-221/26B005
732-221/26C005
25130...25445
25129...25445
26138...26453
26137...26453
+1008
732-201/26B006
732-201/26C006
732-221/26B006
732-221/26C006
26138...26453
26137...26453
25130...25445
25129...25445
-1008
Equipment composition SRA L
53-001A8-102/E
69/70 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 42 - ODU frequency tabIe P/N 732-201/38B, 38C -
P/N 732-221/38B, 38C
ODU P/N
Freq. RX
(MHz)
Freq. TX
(MHz)
Shifter
freq.
(MHz)
732-201/38B001
732-201/38C001
732-221/38B001
732-221/38C001
37058...37438
37058...37450
38318...38698
38318...38710
+1260
732-201/38B002
732-201/38C002
732-221/38B002
732-221/38C002
38318...38698
38318...38710
37058...37438
37058...37450
-1260
732-201/38B003
732-201/38C003
732-221/38B003
732-221/38C003
37431...37811
37422...37814
38691...39071
38682...39074
+1260
732-201/38B004
732-201/38C004
732-221/38B004
732-221/38C004
38691...39071
38682...39074
37431...37811
37422...37814
-1260
732-201/38B005
732-201/38C005
732-221/38B005
732-221/38C005
37798...38178
37786...38178
39058...39438
39046...39438
+1260
732-201/38B006
732-201/38C006
732-221/38B006
732-221/38C006
39058...39438
39046...39438
37798...38178
37786...38178
-1260
SRA L Equipment composition
53-001A8-102/E
Issue 1, September 1999 70/70
FINE
BLANK PAGE
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Control and check devices
53-001A8-103/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Control and check devices SRA L
53-001A8-103/E
2/14 Issue 1, September 1999
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Control and check devices
53-001A8-103/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/14
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2 CONTROL AND CHECK DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1 LEDs and display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.1 LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.1.2 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2 Switches and push-buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2.1 Power-on switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.2.2 Push-buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3 OPERATING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1 Equipment switching-on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.2 RX channel automatic/manual selection in protected configuration . . . . . . 12
3.3 Alarm storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.4 ODU restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.5 Use of the service telephone channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Control and check devices SRA L
53-001A8-103/E
4/14 Issue 1, September 1999
Illustrations
Fig. 1 IDU front view (fully equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SRA L Control and check devices
53-001A8-103/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/14
Tables
Tab. 1 IDU LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Tab. 2 IDU push-buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Control and check devices SRA L
53-001A8-103/E
6/14 Issue 1, September 1999
1 GENERAL
This document describes all the operational procedures that can be carried out by
means of the control and check devices located on IDU front panel.
The equipment operation is almost fully automatic: consequently, the only operational
procedures on the equipment are:
– equipment turning on/off
– automatic/manual selection of the radio channel ((1+1) configurations only)
– alarm storage
– ODU restart
– use of the service telephone channel (should IDU be equipped with EOW unit).
The equipment configuration and control are carried out via software through a PC either
in local mode or in remote one. In local mode, it is necessary to connect the PC to “PC”
connector of the Controller unit.
The PC connection to the equipment can also be made the equipment being active.
Fig. 1 shows the IDU front panel where all the control and check devices are located.
SRA L Control and check devices
53-001A8-103/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/14
Fig. 1 – IDU front view (fully equipped)
(*) Optional
(**) Not present in case of (1+0) configuration
P/N 732-101/01
P/N 732-101/11
Control and check devices SRA L
53-001A8-103/E
8/14 Issue 1, September 1999
2 CONTROL AND CHECK DEVICES
2.1 LEDs and display
2.1.1 LED
In Tab. 1, with reference to Fig. 1, the LEDs are described, located on IDU front panel.
2.1.2 Display
On RTM unit front panel (see Fig. 1), a 2-digit display is located, identified by wording
"RCV FIELD", for the displaying (in dBm) of the RF signal level present at the input of
the corresponding ODU assy..
The displayed value on "RCV FIELD" display of RTM unit ranges between -91 dBm
(min. received power) and -30 dBm (max. received power) with nominal indication
accuracy. Should the received power be below the minimum threshold, number "-99" is
displayed. Instead, should the received power exceeds the maximum threshold, the
value power indication accurancy makes worse since the ODU RX RF chain saturates
and so prevents the equipment damaging limiting the signal level. Up to real received
signal power -20 dBm the equipments works correctly with BER ≤ 10
-10
.
2.2 Switches and push-buttons
2.2.1 Power-on switch
This switch, named POWER ON/OFF, is located on 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit front panel
(see Fig. 1) and it is used to turn on (position ON) or off (position OFF) the whole SRA
L equipment (IDU and ODU).
2.2.2 Push-buttons
In Tab. 2, with reference to Fig. 1, all the push-buttons, located on IDU, are described.
SRA L Control and check devices
53-001A8-103/E
Issue 1, September 1999 9/14
Tab. 1 – IDU LEDs
Unit LED acronym Colour Description
RTM

\
RED Unit internal general alarm; an alarm is active the origin of
which is inside RTM unit.
ODU ALM RED ODU general alarm; an alarm is active inside ODU.
OPEN CABLE RED IF cable underload; the current load on IF interface is too
low. The possible causes are: cable interruption/
disconnection, ODU absence/open circuit.
ODU OVL RED IF cable overload; the current load on IF interface is too
high. The possible cause is: ODU cable short-circuit.
ON LINE GREEN Indicates which RTM unit is operating in (1+1)
configuration. In (1+0) configuration, the LED is always on.
In 2×(1+0) configuration, both LEDs of two RTM units are
on.
CH1 YELLOW Channel 1 currently utilized; the unit is currently operating
by utilizing the channel 1.
CH2 YELLOW Channel 2 currently utilized; the unit is currently operating
by utilizing the channel 2.
ALIGN GREEN Hitless switching operational; the hitless elastic memory is
aligned and, consequently, the hitless switching can
operate (signifiant only in (1+1) configuration).
BER RED High BER; an error rate is detected of the whole radio
channel higher than the 10
-3
limit.
CONTROLLER

\
RED Unit internal general alarm; an alarm is active the origin of
which is inside the Controller unit.
ABN YELLOW Radio system abnormal operation; the SRA L system is in
test or manual/software forcing condition (e.g., the
loop-back is active).
URG RED Urgent alarm active; one of the "urgent" alarms of the
equipment is active.
NURG RED Not urgent alarm active; one of the "not urgent" alarms of
the equipment is active.
IND YELLOW Indicative alarm; an alarm is active the origin of which is
probably due to a cause external to the local equipment
(e.g. AIS for backing input signal).
INT RED Internal alarm active; an alarm is active ("urgent" or "not
urgent") the cause of which is inside the local equipment
(IDU or ODU).
MEM RED Acknowledgement active; the equipment alarm status has
been acknowledged and LED "∑" has been reset.
(continue)
Control and check devices SRA L
53-001A8-103/E
10/14 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 1 – IDU LEDs (continue)
Unit LED acronym Colour Description
CONTROLLER
∑ RED Summary alarm; one of the equipment alarms is present
or became active after the last acknowledgement.
CH1 RED Channel 1 forced on line (automatic selection criteria
excluded and hitless RX switch forced on 1).
CH2 RED Channel 2 forced on line (automatic selection criteria
excluded and hitless RX switch forced on 2).
EOW

\
RED General alarm inside the unit; an alarm is active the origin
of which is inside EOW unit.
LINE 1 GREEN The EOW channel,for the sub-network 1 is currently
available (see doc. "Use of the service telephone
channel").
LINE 2 GREEN The EOW channel,for the sub-network 2 is currently
available (see doc. "Use of the service telephone
channel").
ODU GREEN The EOW channel is currently available only for the ODU
of the sub-networks for 2 according to "LINE 1" or "LINE 2"
LED is lighting up.
BUSY GREEN EOW channel busy; the EOW channel is currently used by
an operator.
CONF GREEN Conference mode active; the EOW channel of the radio
sub-system is currently utilized in conference mode.
Q-ADAPTER

\
RED General alarm inside the unit; an alarm is active the origin
of which is inside the Q-Adapter unit.
OS LINK GREEN The connection towards supervisory center is active; the
communication channel is active between the Q-Adapter
unit and the TMN supervisory center.
ALARM/
ALARM AND
FAN

\
RED General alarm inside the unit; an alarm is active the origin
of which is inside the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit.
TEMP YELLOW Temperature alarm; the IDU inside temperature exceeds
the max. permitted limit (+70°C).
2 Mbit/s
TRIBUTARY
- GREEN Equipment turned-on; the equipment supply voltage has
been applied through "POWER" switch.
SRA L Control and check devices
53-001A8-103/E
Issue 1, September 1999 11/14
Tab. 2 – IDU push-buttons
(*) Only available for P/N 732-101/01. For P/N 732-101/11, automatic ODU power supply reconnection is
continuously performed every 15 sec (approx), after a short circuit condition is detected at IF interface.
Unit Acronym Description
RTM
ODU RESTART
(*)
Momentary type push-button; if pressed longer than 50 ms, it
determines the forced restart of ODU power supply. The ODU power
supply control circuit is located in the BB-MODEM unit and it sees to cut
the supply voltage to ODU should an excessive current load be
detected for more than 20 ms; after a delay of 50 ms, a trial is
automatically executed to restore the ODU power supply. Should the
overload condition subsist, the power is definitely cut.
The ODU power supply can be only restored by pressing "ODU
RESTART" push-button or by turning off and then turning on the
SRA L equipment (by means of "POWER ON/OFF" switch). Both the
methods reset the overload detection function but they have different
restoring times, due to the automatic start-up procedure following the
SRA L equipment turning-on by means of "POWER" switch.
CONTROLLER
MEM Momentary type push-button; if pressed longer than 50 ms, it
determines the current alarm status acknowledgement. "MEM" and
"RIEP" lines of "ALARMS" connector are utilized to provide a general
information concerning the SRA L equipment operating status. "RIEP"
line is active if at least one of equipment alarms is active. This condition
can be acknowledged by pressing push-button "MEM"; this causes the
"MEM" line activation and "RIEP" line deactivation. In this way, "RIEP"
line can be used to signal the activation of any alarm of SRA L
equipment after the last storage.
SEL 3-position toggle type push-button: channel 1 forced on line (LED "CH1"
ON), channel 2 forced on line (LED "CH2" ON), on line channel
automatic selection (no LEDs ON). The push-button allows to force the
hitless RX protection logic. For the (1+1) protected configuration, two
channels are simultaneously available but one at a time only is utilized
(the on line channel). In the case of automatic channel selection, the
choice of the on line channel is based on the alarm status of the two
channels. By "SEL" push-button, the automatic selection criteria can be
excluded and one of the two channels can be manually forced on line,
independently of the alarm status.
The current presetting of "SEL" push-button is signaled by the green
LEDs "CH1" and "CH2" of the Controller unit (see Tab. 1).
EOW
ODU CALL Momentary type push-button; when pressed, it causes the activation of
POE ringing bell signaling to the external operator that a telephone call
is active from IDU to ODU.
SEL 3-position toggle type push-button: radio sub-network 1 connected to
local EOW channel; radio sub-network 2 connected to local EOW
channel; local EOW channel connected to ODUs.
The push-button is operational in 2×(1+0) configuration only while, in all
the other configurations, its actuation has no influence.
Only an EOW at a time is available on IDU front panel: "SEL"
push-button is used to select the line currently connected to EOW
channel of the local radio equipment. The current status of the
push-button is signaled by three LEDs "LINE 1", "LINE 2" and ODU
located on EOW unit (see Tab. 1).
Control and check devices SRA L
53-001A8-103/E
12/14 Issue 1, September 1999
3 OPERATING PROCEDURES
3.1 Equipment switching-on/off
The equipment switching-on is controlled by setting to ON the lever switch "POWER
ON/OFF" of the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit and by checking the relevant green LED turns on,
signaling the equipment supply voltage is applied and correct.
The equipment switching-off is controlled by setting to OFF the lever switch "POWER
ON/OFF" and by checking the relevant signaling green LED turns off.
3.2 RX channel automatic/manual selection in protected
configuration
By push-button "SEL" of the Controller unit, it is possible to force manually, in the case
of (1+1) configuration, the hitless RX protection logic.
The "SEL" push-button has no influence in all other system configurations (2×(1+0),
(1+0), A/D-RPT). The "SEL" push-button is a 3-position toggle type:
– channel automatic selection (normal condition)
– manual forcing on line of channel 1
– manual forcing on line of channel 2.
In the case of automatic selection, the green LEDs "CH1" and "CH2" are off; in the case
of manual selection, the green LED ("CH1" or "CH2"), corresponding to the channel
forced on line, is lit.
3.3 Alarm storage
By pressing "MEM" push-button of the Controller unit, it is possible to store the current
summarized alarm status (red LED "∑" on).
By pressing the "MEM" push-button, the yellow LED "MEM", on the Controller unit, turns
on and red LED "∑" turns off; this last LED turns on again should a new equipment alarm
occur after the last storage.
NOTE – Before switching-on the equipment, the main power supply line
from the station battery has to be energized in this case the
following LEDs of the control unit are on: “INT”, “URG” and "∑".
SRA L Control and check devices
53-001A8-103/E
Issue 1, September 1999 13/14
3.4 ODU restart (*)
In condition of permanent ODU overload, signaled by the lighting up of LED "ODU OVL",
on the corresponding RTM unit the ODU power supply is automatically switched off.
To restore the ODU power supply, "ODU RESTART" push-button, of the corresponding
RTM unit, has to be pressed.
3.5 Use of the service telephone channel
The service telephone channel is available only if the IDU is equipped with EOW unit.
For the use of the service telephone channel, the allotted DTMF handset has to be
connected to the special jack BANTAM type, located on EOW unit front panel (see Fig.
1).
The operational functions relevant to the service telephone channel are performed
through the DTMF handset and the relevant command/check devices on EOW unit front
panel (see Tab. 1 and Tab. 2).
As far as the use procedure is concerned of the service telephone channel, refer to the
relevant document ("Use of the service telephone channel").
(*) Only available for P/N 732-101/01. For P/N 732-101/11, automatic ODU power
supply reconnection is continuously performed every 15 sec (approx), after a
short circuit condition is detected at IF interface.
Control and check devices SRA L
53-001A8-103/E
14/14 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
BLANK PAGE
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Use of the service telephone channel
53-001A8-104/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Use of the service telephone channel SRA L
53-001A8-104/E
2/16 Issue 1, September 1999
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Use of the service telephone channel
53-001A8-104/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/16
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2 COMPOSITION OF THE SERVICE
TELEPHONE CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3 USE OF THE SERVICE TELEPHONE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.1 Connection type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
3.2 Access modes to the service network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.3 Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
3.3.1 Line seizure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3.2 Selective call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3.3.2.1 Inclusion function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.3.2.2 Multiple selective call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.3.3 Omnibus call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.3.4 Local call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.4 DTMF signaling codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.5 Control and call tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.6 EOW unit alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Use of the service telephone channel SRA L
53-001A8-104/E
4/16 Issue 1, September 1999
Illustrations
Fig. 1 Principle diagram of the service telephone channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Fig. 2 EOW unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fig. 3 DTFM handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fig. 4 DTMF handset connection to EOW unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SRA L Use of the service telephone channel
53-001A8-104/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/16
Tables
Tab. 1 POL LEDs of area indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Tab. 2 POL LEDs upon multiple selective call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Tab. 3 POL LEDs upon omnibus call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Use of the service telephone channel SRA L
53-001A8-104/E
6/16 Issue 1, September 1999
1 GENERAL
This document gives the instruction for the use of the service telephone channel
installed in the SRA L radio system digital low capacity.
The service telephone allows the access to the service speech channel of SRA L system
by using byte EOW inside the Base Band frame.
On one side, the service telephone interfaces the keyboard handset with DTMF (Dual
Tone Multi Frequency) signaling type and, on the other side, the association, branching,
switching and restitution circuits of the speech and signaling signal.
The principle diagram of the service telephone channel is shown in Fig. 1.
The EOW unit includes the following devices:
– conversion and branching
– conversation
– DTMF and E&M signaling
– management of the local communication from/to ODU.
In the systems where two separate multiplexing sections (side 1 and side 2) are
available, the operator post gets access to side 1 EOW byte and side 2 EOW byte
without being necessary to duplicate the unit.
In relation with a generic equipment, the speech signal can be addressed to the line
aggregate, to the Local Operator Post (POL), to the 4-wire + E&M extension output and
to ODU user.
All the performances of the service telephone channel are kept also in absence of the
network controller unit.
Fig. 1 – Principle diagram of the service telephone channel
SRA L Use of the service telephone channel
53-001A8-104/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/16
2 COMPOSITION OF THE SERVICE
TELEPHONE CHANNEL
The service telephone channel comprises:
– EOW unit (Engineering Order Wire), P/N 612-901/21 (see Fig. 2) (*)
– DTMF handset, P/N 634-901/02 (see Fig. 3).
EOW unit is arranged for installation to IDU; Fig. 4 shows the location of EOW unit in
IDU sub-rack. The DTMF hand set is provided with a 2 m long extension.
Fig. 2 – EOW unit front view
Fig. 3 – DTFM handset
(*) For P/N 732-101/01, the P/N 612-901/21 replaces the P/N 612-901/20
previously used. The new P/N can be used as spare part of the old one and
vice-versa.
Use of the service telephone channel SRA L
53-001A8-104/E
8/16 Issue 1, September 1999
3 USE OF THE SERVICE TELEPHONE SET
3.1 Connection type
The involved sections are those of line and the local ones towards ODU and they are
distinguished each other both as speech and as signaling.
The IDU user gets access to the service telephone channel through the 2-wire standard
telephone interface, using the jack BANTAM, located on the EOW front panel (see Fig.
4).
The ODU user gets access to the service telephone channel by means of a dedicated
portable system (POE), through which it can carry out the utmost part of the executable
functions even if the associated IDU post is unmanned (see document "Use of POE").
The service telephone set allows the following connection types for stations belonging
to the same service network:
– between any two stations
– between a station and all the other ones
– between a station (IDU) and its external operator post (ODU) (*)
– between two ODUs in conference with the corresponding IDU (*).
Two telephone service extensions are available (4-wire interface + E&M) for the line
telephone channel.
Fig. 4 – DTMF handset connection to EOW unit
(*) IDU-ODU and ODU-IDU calls are possible only if ODU P/N is 732-201/XX
ODU P/N 732-201/XXB, C are not connected to EOW.
SRA L Use of the service telephone channel
53-001A8-104/E
Issue 1, September 1999 9/16
3.2 Access modes to the service network
Two different calling areas are available:
– an area relevant to the multiplexing section of the aggregate signal (line area)
– an area relevant to the connection section with ODU (local area). *
The POL, if free, is connected in automatic mode to the calling section upon receiving
the call.
In call phase, the service area choice is manually performed, by means of "SEL"
push-button (see Fig. 2).
This selection, that can be carried out the handset being hung-up, is signaled by LEDs
(see Tab. 2).
Tab. 1 – POL LEDs of area indication
ON = LED steady lit; OFF = LED off
3.3 Call
The service channel provides a calling system on line with signaling in band (DTMF
type, as per CCITT Rec. Q.23) and a dedicated calling system to the local area. The
following operational actions are possible:
– selective and omnibus call on line
– multiple selective call (max. 3 users), executable only from IDU
– dedicated call to/from ODU with/without line area seizure.
The EOW unit (see Fig. 2) is provided with the required devices for the call generation,
sending, reception and detection.
The call sending takes place through the handset keyboard towards the line area,
through push-button "ODU-CALL" towards the local area.
(*) IDU-ODU and ODU-IDU calls are possible only if ODU P/N is 732-201/XX
ODU P/N 732-201/XXB, C are not connected to EOW.
Selection
LED
LINE1
LED
LINE2
LED
ODU
NOTES
Line 1
((2+0) system)
ON OFF OFF ODU 1 in conference on line 1
Line 2
((2+0) system)
OFF ON OFF ODU 2 in conference on line 2
Line 1 and 2
((1+1) system)
ON ON OFF ODU 1 and ODU 2 in conference on
line
ODU 1
((2+0) system)
ON OFF ON Upon unhooking, seizure to ODU 1
takes place but not towards line 1
ODU 2
((2+0) system)
OFF ON ON Upon unhooking, seizure to ODU 2
takes place but not towards line 2
Use of the service telephone channel SRA L
53-001A8-104/E
10/16 Issue 1, September 1999
The address assignment is the same for IDU user and ODU user of every single station,
and can be realized both locally (through the PC) and by the management center
(through the Q interface).
The possible address include the digit pairs ranging between "10" and "99"; the digit
pairs ranging between "01" and "09" are reserved to the manager for external
addressing functions to the POL.
To maintain the compatibility towards PDH networks of the previous generation (which
can be interfaced through 4-wire + E&M extensions), the symbol "*" has to precede the
station digits relevant to those equipments.
The same procedures has to be carried out should the interface be wanted to networks
equipped with POLs, using numbering systems with more than two digits.
3.3.1 Line seizure
The seizure of the line area by IDU user takes place automatically at handset
unhooking. In this conditions, the ODU is set to conference mode and the ODU user gets
the speech inclusion upon unhooking. The IDU user receives, the line being free, the
free tone or, otherwise, the busy tone.
In the first case, the LED "BUSY" turns on in all the stations and the other users receives
the busy tone upon unhooking.
If, within 30 s ± 5%, the calling user does not select any user, the line is automatically
disengaged and LED "BUSY" turns off on all POLs: the calling user, in this case,
receives the busy tone and, in order to make a new call, it must release the line
previously selected and seize it again.
In the case of automatic disengagement of the line, it is in any case possible to address
a call to the user having previously seized the line, even if the handset has not been
hung-up. In this case, the called user, for answering, must hang-up and unhook the
handset. The local area seizure (towards ODU) takes place automatically upon
unhooking by the user which does not receive, in this case, the control tone as far as the
ODU status is concerned.
Should an user be engaged in an area (line or local) and want to seize another area, it
must release the line previously seized (hanging-up the handset), perform the selection
by push-button "SEL" and then the seizure.
The line seizure end takes place when the calling or called user hangs up the handset;
the other one receives the busy tone.
The line seizure end, by one user at least, allows the reception of the call of both the
users to be enabled.
3.3.2 Selective call
In the case of selective call, the call itself can be addressed to any user of the line by
dialing a pre-fixed digit pair ranging from "10" and "99", by means of the DTMF handset,
both from IDU and ODU.
Each service telephone, after the reception of the first digit pair, inhibits the knowledge
of further numeric digits.
The dialing having been made, the calling user receives the "call control" tone from the
called user. The reception of the call causes, on the operator post of the called user, the
activation of the ringing bell and the blinking of "BUSY" LED.
The unhooking by the called user causes:
– the sending of the answer code on line
SRA L Use of the service telephone channel
53-001A8-104/E
Issue 1, September 1999 11/16
– locally, the deactivation of the ringing bell, of the sending of the call control tone
and the steady lighting-up of LED "BUSY"
– the activation of the speech connection.
If, within a time ranging between 60 s ± 5% the calling user does not receive the answer
code from the called user, the seizure end code is generated with the extinction of all
"BUSY" LEDs, reception of the busy tone and deactivation of the ringing bell of the
called user; the calling user, however, is enabled to the reception of calls.
The calling user has to release and seize again the line to be able to call again.
The line seizure end, by one user at least, allows the reception of the call of both the
users to be enabled.
The reception of the answer code by the calling user causes:
– the inhibition of the 60 s timer
– the activation of the speech connection.
The line seizure end takes place when the calling or called user hooks on the handset:
the other user will receive the busy tone.
The line seizure end, by one user at least, allows the reception of the call of both the
users to be enabled.
Should the POL of an IDU user, being in local conversation to ODU, be reached by an
omnibus call coming from the line, it will store this condition by having the line LED
blinking.
On the next hanging-up, the user, now considered free, can manually select the line to
insert in the omnibus conversation.
Some special functions are provided which are executable by the IDU user only; the
inclusion function and the multiple selective call.
3.3.2.1 Inclusion function
A selective call between two users of the line must be confidential. However, an IDU
user, not engaged in that call, can perform the speech bidirectional insertion in the
conversation in progress by keeping push-button "SEL" pressed; its insertion is signaled
on line by a permanent inclusion tone its insertion is signaled on line by a permanent
inclusion tone so that the reservedness of the selective conversation.
The exclusion from the insertion occurs on releasing the push-button or on hanging-up
the handset.
The inclusion of the external operator in a conversation involving the internal post and
vice versa is always possible; in such a case, the inclusion tone is not generated.
Use of the service telephone channel SRA L
53-001A8-104/E
12/16 Issue 1, September 1999
3.3.2.2 Multiple selective call
During a selective conversation between two users, one of them can make another call
to a third user thus performing the function of multiple selective call.
By pressing and releasing the push-button "SEL", it locally enables the lighting up of
LED "CONF" and send on line the presetting code relevant to the multiple selective call
(DTMF "D" code).
The speech connection between the two users is provisionally interrupted until the
emission of the second dialing digit.
Besides, the calling user, after having preset the line for the multiple selective call, can
annul it before the third user answers, by pressing and releasing push-button "SEL".
At digit or answer time-out expiring, the calling user automatically sends on line the "C"
code (which takes also the function of annulment of call and of presetting to the multiple
selective call), bringing back the line in the condition of selective conversation in
progress.
If, during the multiple selective conversation, one of the two users of the original
selective call should press and release push-button "SEL" (sending of DTMF "D" code),
this will annul the added conversation by bringing the line back to the presetting
condition to the multiple selective call (this in order to limit to three the maximum number
of users).
The evolution of POL LED, in the case of selective and multiple selective call, is shown
in Tab. 2.
Tab. 2 – POL LEDs upon multiple selective call
BL = LED blinking; ON = LED on; OFF = LED off
Situation and status
Calling user Called user
answering
Called user not
answering
BUSY
(green)
CONF
(yellow)
BUSY
(green)
CONF
(yellow)
BUSY
(green)
CONF
(yellow)
1 Line seizure ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
2 Selective call ON OFF LAMP OFF ON OFF
3 Answer to selective call ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
4 Inclusion in selective call ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
5 Presetting to added call ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
6 End of dialing added call ON ON ON OFF LAMP OFF
7 Answer to added call ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
8 Hanging-up of added user ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
9 Hanging-up of calling user OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
10 Hanging-up of called user OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
SRA L Use of the service telephone channel
53-001A8-104/E
Issue 1, September 1999 13/16
3.3.3 Omnibus call
In the case of omnibus call, the call can be addressed to all the users of the chosen
service area by dialing, with DTMF handset, the fixed number "00".
The dialing having been made, the calling user receives the call control tone, locally
generated.
Should the call reach a station already engaged on a local area, it will not generate the
busy tone.
The reception of the call automatically connects all the free POLs to the line with the
blinking of LEDs "BUSY" and "CONF" and the activation of the ringing bell.
On the POLs, engaged in local area, the omnibus call status in progress is signaled by
the blinking of area led and the ringing bell is not activated.
If within a time ranging between 60 s ± 5% no called user answers, the local deactivation
of the ringing bell takes place as well as the steady lighting up of LEDs "BUSY" and the
permanent blinking of LEDs "CONF".
Besides, the calling user generates the seizure end code of the line (the LEDs turn off),
receives the busy tone but it is enabled to call reception; to make a call, the user must
hang-up the handset and seize again the line.
The unhooking of at least one of the called users causes:
– locally, the deactivation of the ringing bell, the steady lighting-up of "BUSY" LED
(only in the station having answered to the call) and the sending to the calling user
of the answer code
– the activation of the speech connection.
The reception of the answer code by the calling user causes locally:
– the interruption of the local "call control" tone generation
– the interruption of 60 s timer
– the activation of speech connection.
On all the connected LOPs, which have not answered to the call, LED "BUSY" and
"CONF" continue blinking and the ringing bell will be kept active for 60 s ± 5% starting
form the call beginning.
On the POLs which are not connected because engaged on a local area, the ringing bell
is not activated but the line led will blink until the end of the conversation.
On expiring of the mentioned time, the ringing bells will be locally deactivated on all the
connected POLs that have not answered to the call and LEDs "BUSY" will light steady
and LEDs "CONF" will blink.
The LED evolution on IDU, in the case of omnibus call, is shown in Tab. 3.
Use of the service telephone channel SRA L
53-001A8-104/E
14/16 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 3 – POL LEDs upon omnibus call
BL = LED blinking; ON = LED on; OFF = LED off
3.3.4 Local call
The local call is the one between the IDU and ODU users and viceversa without
involving the line.
An user performing a selective call from the line destined to the equipment engaged in
a local call or conversation receives, in this case, the busy tone.
The local call from IDU to ODU is made, after selecting the local area, by pressing the
dedicated call push-button "ODU CALL" and by waiting the speech inclusion of the ODU
user which does not send the call control tone.
On ODU equipment, the ringing bell is activated for all the time the push-button is
pressed.
The local call from ODU to IDU is made by pressing the call push-button located on POE
and by waiting the speech inclusion of IDU user which do not send the call control tone.
Instead, the ODU user automatically obtains the speech inclusion on unhooking the
handset if the IDU user is already engaged in a conversation towards the line area.
At the end of the conversation, the actual annulment of the conversation is obtained on
IDU user hanging-up, being impossible to point out the ODU user handset status by the
controller of EOW unit.
Situation and status
Calling user Called user
answering
Called user not
answering
BUSY
(green)
CONF
(yellow)
BUSY
(green)
CONF
(yellow)
BUSY
(green)
CONF
(yellow)
1 Line seizure ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF
2 Omnibus call ON OFF LAMP LAMP LAMP LAMP
3 T < 60 sec
An answer at least
ON OFF ON LAMP LAMP LAMP
4 T < 60 sec
Inclusion of called user
ON OFF ON ON LAMP LAMP
5 T > 60 sec
An answer at least
ON OFF ON LAMP ON LAMP
6 T > 60 sec
Inclusion of called user
ON OFF ON ON ON LAMP
7 Exclusion of included user ON OFF ON LAMP ON LAMP
8 Hanging-up of calling user ON OFF ON LAMP ON LAMP
9 Hanging-up of called user OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
SRA L Use of the service telephone channel
53-001A8-104/E
Issue 1, September 1999 15/16
3.4 DTMF signaling codes
The DTMF codes sent on line complies with CCITT Rec. Q.22 and Q.23.
EOW unit is able to generate and knowledge A, B, C and D DTMF codes to perform the
following functions:
– DTMF A code:
line seizure
– DTMF B code:
line seizure end or line reset
– DTMF C code:
answer to call and reset of the call and of the presetting to multiple selective call
– TMF D code:
presetting to multiple selective call and clearance of the added conversation in
progress.
3.5 Control and call tones
The control and call tones have the following characteristics:
– free tone: continuous 450 Hz tone
– busy tone: 450 Hz tone with 0.2 s signal and 0.2 s pause times
– control tone: 450 Hz with of 0.8 s signal and 2.4 s pause times
– inclusion tone: 450 Hz with of 0.2 - 0.2 - 0.2 - 1 s signal and pause times
– ringing bell command for the selective and multiple selective call: 0.8 s signal and
2.4 s pause times
– ringing bell command for omnibus call: 0.8 s signal and 0.8 s pause times
– ringing bell command for local call: manual signal time for calls from IDU to ODU
or 0.8 s signal and 0.8 s pause times for cells from ODU to IDU.
3.6 EOW unit alarm
EOW unit is provided with a red LED signaling that the unit is defective or is in a self-test
phase at turning-on.
The unit has to be considered defective even when it does not answer to the
interrogations of the main controller.
Use of the service telephone channel SRA L
53-001A8-104/E
16/16 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
BLANK PAGE
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
2/96 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/96
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2 ∅20/30 cm SLIM ANTENNA INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1 ∅20/30 cm slim antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2 Pole mounting of antenna support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.3 Antenna installation offset left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.4 Antenna installation offset right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.5 Overall size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.6 O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.7 Polarization adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.8 View with ODU 1+0 integrated system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
2.9 Elevation and azimuth adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3 ∅60 cm SLIM ANTENNA INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.1 ∅60 cm slim antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.2 Antenna for offset left side (standard delivery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.3 Antenna for offset right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.4 Pole mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.5 Overall size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.6 O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.7 Polarization adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3.8 View with ODU 1+0 integrated system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
3.9 Elevation and azimuth adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
4 ∅30/60 cm STANDARD ANTENNA INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.1 ∅30/60 cm standard antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
4.2 Antenna for offset left side (standard delivery) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.3 Antenna for offset right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.4 Pole mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.5 Overal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
4.6 O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
4.7 Polarization adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
4.8 View with ODU 1+0 integrated system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
4.9 Elevation and azimuth adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5 ∅1.2 m STANDARD ANTENNA INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.1 ∅1.2m standard antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.2 Antenna assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.3 Polarization plane adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
5.4 Strutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6 1+0 SLIM NOT INTEGRATED SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
6.1 Solution with flexible waveguide “vertical” polarization (standard) . . . . . . . 43
6.2 Solution with flexible waveguide “horizontal” polarization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
6.3 Slim 1+0 frame and flexible waveguide versions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
6.4 Frame arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
6.5 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
6.6 O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
4/96 Issue 1, September 1999
6.7 Overall size, slim 1+0 frame with ∅20/30 slim antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
6.8 Overall size, slim 1+0 with ∅60 cm slim antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
7 1+0 NOT INTEGRATED STANDARD SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
7.1 Solution with flexible waveguide “vertical” polarization (standard). . . . . . . . 51
7.2 Solution with flexible wave guide “horizontal” polarization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
7.3 Standard 1+0 frame and flexible wave guide versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
7.4 Frame arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7.5 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
7.6 O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
8 1+1 FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
8.1 Solution with flexible wave guide “vertical” polarization (standard) . . . . . . . 57
8.2 Solution with flexible waveguide “horizontal” polarization (optional) . . . . . . 58
8.3 1+1 frame and flexible waveguide versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
8.4 Frame arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
8.5 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
8.6 O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
8.7 Overall size, 1+1 frame with ∅20/30 cm antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
8.8 Overall size. 1 + 1 frame with ∅ 60 cm antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
9 NOT-INTEGRATED SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
9.1 Solution with elliptical waveguide “Vertical” polarization (standard). . . . . . . 65
9.2 Solution with elliptical waveguide “Horizontal” polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
9.3 Elliptical flexible waveguide and connector/accessory versions . . . . . . . . . 67
10 OUTDOOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
10.1 Assembly on support frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
10.2 ODU dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
10.3 Outdoor assembly versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
10.4 “Vertical” polarization application (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
10.5 “Horizontal” polarization application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
10.6 “Rx field measure” connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
11 1/4” COAXIAL CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
11.1 Tipical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
11.2 Connection on ODU side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
11.3 Grounding connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
11.4 Fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
11.4.1 Fixing for Andrew cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
11.4.2 Fixing for RFS-Kabelmetal cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
11.5 Rack assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
11.6 Andrew and RFS-Kabelmetal sets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
11.7 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
12 IDU INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
12.1 Installation accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
12.2 IDU sub-rack arrangement for ETSI rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
12.3 IDU sub-rack arrangement for 19" rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
12.4 IDU installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/96
13 INSTALLATION OF IDU OPTIONAL UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
6/96 Issue 1, September 1999
Tables
Tab. 1 Fixing kit code 332-308/34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/96
1 GENERAL
In this document all the operations are described, required for the mechanical
installation of SRA L equipments.
2 ∅20/30 cm SLIM ANTENNA INSTALLATION
2.1 ∅20/30 cm slim antennas
FREQUENCY
BAND
(GHz)
ANTENNA
DIAMETER
(cm)
P/N FEEDER
FLANGE
15 30 601-402/01 PBR 140
18 30 601-402/02 PBR 220
23 20
30
601-401/01
601-402/03
PBR 220
26 20
30
601-401/02
601-402/04
PBR 220
38 20
30
601-401/04
601-402/06
PBR 320
CAUTION – During the installation, while lifting the antenna and/or the
outdoor pole supporting frame, it is strictly forbidden to stand
or transit in the area below; the area has to be suitably
delimited or signaled according to regulations in force.
– For the operations to be realized outside on antenna, frame,
ODU, all the required safeties, according to the regulations in
force, against accidental falls of the operators have to be
observed like the presence ot railings, safety bolts, etc.
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
8/96 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2 Pole mounting of antenna support
"ATTENTION" – INSTALL FIRST THE SAFETY COLLAR
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 9/96
2.3 Antenna installation offset left side
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
10/96 Issue 1, September 1999
2.4 Antenna installation offset right side
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 11/96
2.5 Overall size
THE DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS (mm)
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
12/96 Issue 1, September 1999
2.6 O-rings
(*) THE O-RINGS ARE SUPPLIED WITH THE ANTENNA
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 13/96
2.7 Polarization adjustment
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
14/96 Issue 1, September 1999
2.8 View with ODU 1+0 integrated system
FOR THE ODU INSTALLATION SEE PAR. 10
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 15/96
2.9 Elevation and azimuth adjustment
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
16/96 Issue 1, September 1999
3 ∅60 cm SLIM ANTENNA INSTALLATION
3.1 ∅60 cm slim antennas
FREQUENCY
BAND
(GHz)
P/N FEEDER
FLANGE
15 601-403/01 PBR 140
18 601-403/02 PBR 220
23 601-403/03 PBR 220
26 601-403/04 PBR 220
38 601-403/06 PBR 320
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 17/96
3.2 Antenna for offset left side (standard delivery)
WHEN IS REQUEST THE OFFSET RIGHT SIDE, SEE PAR. 3.2
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
18/96 Issue 1, September 1999
3.3 Antenna for offset right side
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 19/96
3.4 Pole mounting
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
20/96 Issue 1, September 1999
3.5 Overall size
THE DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS (mm)
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 21/96
3.6 O-rings
(*) THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH THE ANTENNA
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
22/96 Issue 1, September 1999
3.7 Polarization adjustment
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 23/96
3.8 View with ODU 1+0 integrated system
FOR THE ODU INSTALLATION REFERS TO PAR. 10
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
24/96 Issue 1, September 1999
3.9 Elevation and azimuth adjustment
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 25/96
4 ∅30/60 cm STANDARD ANTENNA
INSTALLATION
4.1 ∅30/60 cm standard antennas
FREQUENCY
BAND
(GHz)
ANTENNA
DIAMETER
(cm)
P/N FEEDER
FLANGE
10.5 60 601-400/38 PBR 100
13 30
60
601-400/31
601-400/32
PBR 120
15 30
60
601-400/26
601-400/25
PBR 140
18 30
60
601-400/28
601-400/27
PBR 220
23 30
60
601-400/33
601-400/34
PBR 220
26 30
60
601-400/35
601-400/44
PBR 220
38 30
60
601-400/29
601-400/46
PBR 320
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
26/96 Issue 1, September 1999
4.2 Antenna for offset left side (standard delivery)
WHEN IS REQUEST THE OFFSET RIGHT SIDE, SEE PAR. 4.3
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 27/96
4.3 Antenna for offset right side
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
28/96 Issue 1, September 1999
4.4 Pole mounting
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 29/96
4.5 Overal size
THE DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS (mm)
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
30/96 Issue 1, September 1999
4.6 O-rings
(*) THE RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH THE ANTENNA
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 31/96
4.7 Polarization adjustment
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
32/96 Issue 1, September 1999
4.8 View with ODU 1+0 integrated system
FOR THE ODU INSTALLATION REFERS TO PAR. 10
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 33/96
4.9 Elevation and azimuth adjustment
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
34/96 Issue 1, September 1999
5 ∅1.2 m STANDARD ANTENNA
INSTALLATION
5.1 ∅1.2m standard antennas
FREQUENCY
BAND
(GHz)
P/N FEEDER
FLANGE
7 601-400/53 PDR 84
8 601-400/53 PDR 84
10.5 601-400/41 PBR 100
13 601-400/42 PBR 120
15 601-400/43 PBR 140
18 601-400/51 PBR 220
23 601-400/52 PBR 220
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 35/96
5.2 Antenna assembling
Place the antenna reflector on a flat surface and separate the reflector rim from the
ground by means of 3 lugs (A).
Install the 4 threaded rods M20 following the sequence indication of (B).
Install the frame having care to pIace the hole for ground connection towards "down".
NOTE – The threaded rods shall be screwed in for at least 30mm.
A
B
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
36/96 Issue 1, September 1999
Install the feed following the sequence indication of (D) and keeping the antenna
reflector as shown in (C).
The conductive ring (see item 2) is already glued to the feed flange.
(1) Flat head screw 3x10
(2) Conductive ring
(3) Feed
(4) O-ring
(5) (6) (7) M6 Nut, washer, spring washer
(8) Feed support
(9) Knurled screw M6
(10) Ground connection
C
D
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 37/96
The radome can be found in its carton pipe.
Place all the pulling items consisting of hooks, washers, springs and V-shaped rods
(item 6 of (E)) into the corresponding holes available on the L-shaped aluminium ring
(item 7) as shown in (E).
Place the fabric over the antenna aperture and insert the V-shaped rods into the eyelets
available on the radome.
Hook the pulling items to the V-shaped rods and gradually screw-in the nuts having
cared to distribute the pulling force among the pulling items. The radome can be fully
stretched as the spring length is reduced by about 1/3 of its free length.
E
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
38/96 Issue 1, September 1999
Insert the collar pos. (1) on the pole. Lift the antenna with balancing rope near the pole
and fasten it with U-bolts pos. (2).
Fasten the strut to the frame and to the tower.
WARNING – The bolts fixing the strut pos. (3) to the frame and the tower
must be loosened.
CAUTION – Apply the pressurization gradually to reach the specified
value.
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 39/96
5.3 Polarization plane adjustment
For polarization plane adjustment, loosen the 6 nuts (see item 1), turn the feed clockwise
or counterwise together with the device till the best position is reached, then tighten the
above 6 nuts.
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
40/96 Issue 1, September 1999
Azimuth coarse adjustment (±20°)
Untighten the nuts of the U-bolts pos. (2).
Move manually the antenna until the received signal is maximized. Tighten the nuts.
During the alignment let loose the nuts of the lateral strut pos. (3).
Zenith fine adjustment (±20°)
Tighten manually (do not lock) the spherical joints of the adjustment rods pos. (D) (C).
Unscrew completely the joints of the rod pos. (A). Screw unscrew alternatively the joints
of the rod pos. (B) until the Rx signal is maximized.
Tighten manually nuts pos. (B) (C) (D).
Azimuth fine adjustment (±5°)
Tighten manually the joints of the rods pos. (B) (D)
(Do not lock)
Unscrew completely the joints of the rod pos. (A).
Screw unscrew alternatively the joints of the rod pos. (C) until the Rx signal is
maximized.
Lock all the nuts.
CAUTION – For antenna panning use three threaded bars only, the fourth
one must be loose all the time. It must be fastened just at the
end of the steering operation.
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 41/96
Clockwise Adjustment
Tighten manually (do not lock) the spherical joints of the adjustment rods pos. (A) (C).
Unscrew completely the joints of the rod pos. (B). Screw the joints of the rod pos. (D)
until the Rx signal is maximized.
Lock all the nuts.
Counter Clockwise Adjustment
Tighten manually (do not lock) the spherical joints of the adjustment rods pos. (B)(D).
Unscrew completely the joints of the rod pos. (A). Screw the joints of the rod pos.(C) until
the Rx signal is maximized.
Lock all the nuts.
NOTE – With zenith adjustment of ±20° the procedure for azimuth
adjustment is the following:
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
42/96 Issue 1, September 1999
5.4 Strutting
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm)
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 43/96
6 1+0 SLIM NOT INTEGRATED SYSTEM
6.1 Solution with flexible waveguide “vertical”
polarization (standard)
(*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. 6.3
(**) THIS POLE FIXING IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE L = 1 Mt ONLY
(***) THESE BENDS ARE INCLUDED IN THE SLIM 1+0 FRAME
FOR THE OVERALL SIZE SEE PAR. 6.7 AND PAR. 6.8.
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
44/96 Issue 1, September 1999
6.2 Solution with flexible waveguide “horizontal” polarization
(*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE par. 6.3
(**) THIS POLE FIXING IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE L = 1 Mt ONLY
(***) THESE BENDS ARE INCLUDED IN THE SLIM 1+0 FRAME
FOR THE OVERALL SIZE SEE PAR. 6.7 AND PAR. 6.8.
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 45/96
6.3 Slim 1+0 frame and flexible waveguide versions
• THIS FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS
DIAMETERS UP TO 1.2 m, OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE) DIAMETERS
UP TO 4 ft
•• THIS FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS
DIAMETERS AFTER 1.2 m, OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE) DIAMETERS
AFTER 4 ft
••• THIS TWIST IS OPTIONAL, USED FOR “HORIZONTAL” POLARIZATION
APPLICATION
FREQUENCY
BAND
(GHz)
P/N
SLIM 1+0
FRAME
P/N
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
(L. = 600 mm) •
P/N
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE KIT
(L. = 1000 mm) • •
P/N
TWIST
• • •
7 534-108/47 504-692/71
(UDR-PDR 84)
597-523/95
(UDR-PDR 84)
504-631/21
(UDR-PDR 84)
8 534-108/47 504-692/71
(UDR-PDR 84)
597-523/95
(UDR-PDR 84)
504-631/21
(UDR-PDR 84)
10.5 534-108/48 504-719/62
(UBR-PBR 100)
597-523/96
(UBR-PBR 100)
504-656/51K
(UBR-PBR
100)
13 534-108/49 504-719/54
(UBR-PBR 120)
597-523/97
(UBR-PBR 120)
504-656/52K
(UBR-PBR
120)
15 534-108/50 504-719/56
(UBR-PBR 140)
597-523/98
(UBR-PBR 140)
504-656/53K
(UBR-PBR
140)
18 534-108/51 504-719/58
(UBR-PBR 220)
597-523/99
(UBR-PBR 220)
504-656/54K
(UBR-PBR
220)
23 534-108/52 504-719/58
(UBR-PBR 220)
597-523/99
(UBR-PBR 220)
504-656/54K
(UBR-PBR
220)
26 534-108/53 504-719/58
(UBR-PBR 220)
597-523/99
(UBR-PBR 220)
504-656/54K
(UBR-PBR
220)
38 534-108/55 504-719/64
(UBR-PBR 320)
504-656/55K
(UBR-PBR
320)
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
46/96 Issue 1, September 1999
6.4 Frame arrangement
"ATTENTION" – INSTALL FIRST THE SAFETY COLLAR
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 47/96
6.5 Dimensions
OVERALL DIMENSION INCLUDING ODU
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm)
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
48/96 Issue 1, September 1999
6.6 O-rings
(*) THE O-RING ARE DELIVERED WITH SLIM 1+0 FRAME
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 49/96
6.7 Overall size, slim 1+0 frame with ∅20/30 slim antenna
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm)
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
50/96 Issue 1, September 1999
6.8 Overall size, slim 1+0 with ∅60 cm slim antenna
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm)
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 51/96
7 1+0 NOT INTEGRATED STANDARD SYSTEM
7.1 Solution with flexible waveguide “vertical” polarization
(standard)
(*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. 7.3
(**) THIS POLE FIXING FOR WAVEGUIDE IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE L=1000 mm ONLY
(***) THESE ACCESSORIES ARE INCLUDED IN THE STANDARD 1+0 FRAME
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
52/96 Issue 1, September 1999
7.2 Solution with flexible wave guide “horizontal” polarization
(*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. 7.3
(**) THIS POLE FIXING FOR WAVEGUIDE IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE L=1000 mm ONLY
(***) THESE ACCESSORIES ARE INCLUDED IN THE STANDARD 1+0 FRAME
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 53/96
7.3 Standard 1+0 frame and flexible wave guide versions
• THIS FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS
DIAMETERS UP TO 1.2m, OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE)
DIAMETERS UP TO 4 ft.
•• THIS FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS
DIAMETERS AFTER 1.2m, OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE)
DIAMETERS AFTER 4 ft.
••• THIS TWIST IS OPTIONAL, IS USED FOR THE “HORIZONTAL”
POLARIZATION ONLY
FREQUENCY
BAND
(GHz)
P/N
STANDARD
1+0 FRAME
P/N
FLEXIBLE WAVE
GUIDE
(L. = 600 mm) •
P/N
FLEXIBLE WAVE
GUIDE KIT
(L. = 1000 mm) • •
P/N
TWIST
• • •
7 534-108/29 504-692/71
(UBR-PBR 84)
597-523/95
(UBR-PBR 84)
504-631/21
(UBR-PBR 84)
8 534-108/30 504-692/71
(UBR-PBR 84)
597-523/95
(UBR-PBR 84)
504-631/21
(UBR-PBR 84)
10.5 534-108/23 504-719/62
(UBR-PBR 100)
597-523/96
(UBR-PBR 100)
504-656/51K
(UBR-PBR 100)
13 534-108/11 504-719/54
(UBR-PBR 120)
597-523/97
(UBR-PBR 120)
504-656/52K
(UBR-PBR 120)
15 534-108/13 504-719/56
(UBR-PBR 140)
597-523/98
(UBR-PBR 140)
504-656/53K
(UBR-PBR 140)
18 534-108/15 504-719/58
(UBR-PBR 220)
597-523/99
(UBR-PBR 220)
504-656/54K
(UBR-PBR 220)
23 534-108/17 504-719/58
(UBR-PBR 220)
597-523/99
(UBR-PBR 220)
504-656/54K
(UBR-PBR 220)
26 534-108/19 504-719/58
(UBR-PBR 220)
597-523/99
(UBR-PBR 220)
504-656/54K
(UBR-PBR 220)
38 534-108/21 504-719/64
(UBR-PBR 320)
504-656/55K
(UBR-PBR 320)
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
54/96 Issue 1, September 1999
7.4 Frame arrangement
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 55/96
7.5 Dimensions
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm)
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
56/96 Issue 1, September 1999
7.6 O-rings
(*) THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH STANDARD 1+0 FRAME
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 57/96
8 1+1 FRAME
8.1 Solution with flexible wave guide “vertical” polarization
(standard)
(*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. 8.3
(**) THIS POLE FIXING IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE L=1 mt ONLY
(***) THIS BEND IS INCLUDED IN THE 1+1 FRAME
FOR THE OVERALL SIZE SEE PAR. 8.7 AND PAR. 8.8
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
58/96 Issue 1, September 1999
8.2 Solution with flexible waveguide “horizontal” polarization
(optional)
(*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. 8.3
(**) THIS POLE FIXING IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE L=1 mt ONLY
(***) THIS BEND IS INCLUDED IN THE 1+1 FRAME
FOR THE POLE ENGUMBERED SEE PAR. 8.7 AND PAR. 8.8
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 59/96
8.3 1+1 frame and flexible waveguide versions
• THIS FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS
DIAMETERS UP TO 1.2 m, OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE)
DIAMETERS UP TO 4 ft
• • THIS FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS
DIAMETERS AFTER 1.2 m, OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE)
DIAMETERS AFTER 4 ft
• • • THIS TWIST IS OPTIONAL, USED FOR “HORIZONTAL”
POLARIZATION APPLICATION
FREQUENCY
BAND
(GHz)
P/N
1+1
FREQUENCY
DIV.TY
FRAME
P/N
1+1
HOT-STANDBY
FRAME
P/N
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE
(L. = 600 mm)

P/N
FLEXIBLE
WAVEGUIDE KIT
(L. = 1000 mm)
• •
P/N
TWIST
• • •
7 534-108/38 534-108/31 504-692/71
(UDR-PDR 84)
597-523/95
(UDR-PDR 84)
504-631/21
(UDR-PDR 84)
8 534-108/39 534-108/32 504-692/71
(UDR-PDR 84)
597-523/95
(UDR-PDR 84)
504-631/21
(UDR-PDR 84)
10.5 534-108/40 504-719/62
(UBR-PBR 100)
597-523/96
(UBR-PBR 100)
504-656/51K
(UBR-PBR 100)
13 534-108/41 504-719/54
(UBR-PBR 120)
597-523/97
(UBR-PBR 120)
504-656/52K
(UBR-PBR 120)
15 534-108/42 504-719/56
(UBR-PBR 140)
597-523/98
(UBR-PBR 140)
504-656/53K
(UBR-PBR 140)
18 534-108/43 504-719/58
(UBR-PBR 220)
597-523/99
(UBR-PBR 220)
504-656/54K
(UBR-PBR 220)
23 534-108/44 504-719/58
(UBR-PBR 220)
597-523/99
(UBR-PBR 220)
504-656/54K
(UBR-PBR 220)
26 534-108/45 504-719/58
(UBR-PBR 220)
597-523/99
(UBR-PBR 220)
504-656/54K
(UBR-PBR 220)
38 534-108/46 504-719/64
(UBR-PBR 320)
504-656/55K
(UBR-PBR 320)
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
60/96 Issue 1, September 1999
8.4 Frame arrangement
"ATTENTION" – INSTALL FIRST THE SAFETY COLLAR
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 61/96
8.5 Dimensions
OVERALL DIMENSION INCLUDING ODU’S
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm)
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
62/96 Issue 1, September 1999
8.6 O-rings
(*) THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH 1+1 FRAME
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 63/96
8.7 Overall size, 1+1 frame with ∅20/30 cm antenna
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm)
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
64/96 Issue 1, September 1999
8.8 Overall size. 1 + 1 frame with ∅ 60 cm antenna
DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm)
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 65/96
9 NOT-INTEGRATED SYSTEM
9.1 Solution with elliptical waveguide “Vertical” polarization
(standard)
(*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. 9.3
(**) THESE ACCESORIES ARE INCLUDED IN THE ODU SUPPORTING FRAME
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
66/96 Issue 1, September 1999
9.2 Solution with elliptical waveguide “Horizontal”
polarization
(*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. 9.3
(**) THESE ACCESORIES ARE INCLUDED IN THE ODU SUPPORTING FRAME
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 67/96
9.3 Elliptical flexible waveguide and connector/accessory
versions
– 7 GHz
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-750)
CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-778SR)
OPTIONAL, USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
1a
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 64-71) 127-042/05 Mt. NOTE 1-2
1b ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 77-71W)
IN EMISSION
Mt.
NOTE 1-3
2
ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) 165-005/84 N° NOTE 1
3a
WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) 165-005/69 N° NOTE 1-2
3b WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) 165-005/70 N°
NOTE 1-3
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
a WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR EWP 64-71
(PDR 84)
IN EMISSION
N° 2
NOTE 2
b WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR EWP 77-71W
(PDR 84)
504-237/87 N° 2
NOTE 3
c
PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UDR-UDR
84)
308-005/16 N° 1
d GROUNDING KIT 333-031/73 N° 2
e
WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT 332-005/21 N° 3
f UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 62)
165-005/19 N° 3
g1 RUBBER BUSH (∅ 62)
IN EMISSION N° 3
g2 RUBBER BUSH (∅ 62)
332-202/87 N° 3
A TWIST (UDR-PDR 84) 504-631/21 N° 1
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
68/96 Issue 1, September 1999
– 8 GHz
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-758)
CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-779SR)
OPTIONAL, USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY
NOTE 1 = QUANTITY TO BE DEFINED AS PER PLANT REQUIREMENTS
NOTE 2 = FOR 7.1-7.4 GHz (SHIFTER 161 MHz) and 7.4-7.7 GHz (SHIFTER 154 MHz)
CHANNELINGS
NOTE 3 = FOR 7.4-7.9 GHz (SHIFTER 245 MHz) and 7.7-7 (SHIFTER 148.5 MHz)
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
1
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 77-77) 127-042/06 Mt.
NOTE 1
2
ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) 165-005/84 N°
NOTE 1
3
WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) 165-005/70 N°
NOTE 1
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
a
WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PDR 84) 504-237/87 N° 2
b
PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UDR-UDR
84)
308-005/16 N° 1
c
GROUNDING KIT 333-031/73 N° 2
d
WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT 332-005/21 N° 3
e
UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅62) 165-005/19 N° 3
f
RUBBER BUSH (∅ 62) 332-202/87 N° 3
A TWIST (UDR-PDR 84) 504-631/21 N° 1
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 69/96
– 10 GHz
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-762)
CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-780SR)
OPTIONAL, USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
1
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 90-107) 127-042/07 Mt.
NOTE 1
2
ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) 165-005/84 N°
NOTE 1
3
WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) 165-005/71 N°
NOTE 1
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
a
WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 100) 504-238/27 N° 2
b
PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR
100)
308-005/23 N° 1
c
GROUNDING KIT 333-031/74 N° 2
d
WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT 332-005/21 N° 3
e
UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 38)
165-005/17 N° 3
f
RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) 332-202/81 N° 3
A TWIST (UBR-PBR 100) 504-656/51K N° 1
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
70/96 Issue 1, September 1999
– 13 GHz
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-766)
CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-781SR)
OPTIONAL, USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY
NOTE 1 = QUANTITY TO BE DEFINED AS PER PLANT REQUIREMENTS
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
1
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 127) 127-042/08 Mt.
NOTE 1
2
ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) 165-005/84 N°
NOTE 1
3
WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) 165-005/72 N°
NOTE 1
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
a
WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 120) 504-238/26 N° 2
b
PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR
120)
308-005/24 N° 1
c
GROUNDING KIT 333-031/74 N° 2
d
WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT 332-005/21 N° 3
e
UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 38) 165-005/17 N° 3
f
RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) 332-202/83 N° 3
A TWIST (UBR-PBR 120) 504-656/52K N° 1
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 71/96
– 15 GHz
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-767)
CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-782SR)
OPTIONAL, USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
1
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 132) 127-042/09 Mt.
NOTE 1
2
ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) 165-005/84 N°
NOTE 1
3
WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) 165-005/72 N°
NOTE 1
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
a
WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 140) 504-238/96 N° 2
b
PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR
140)
308-005/22 N° 1
c
GROUNDING KIT 333-031/74 N° 2
d
WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT 332-005/21 N° 3
e
UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 38)
165-005/17 N° 3
f
RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) 332-202/82 N° 3
A TWIST (UBR-PBR 140) 504-656/53K N° 1
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
72/96 Issue 1, September 1999
– 18 GHz
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-768)
CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-783SR)
OPTIONAL, USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY
NOTE 1 = QUANTITY TO BE DEFINED AS PER PLANT REQUIREMENTS
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
1
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 180) 127-042/10 Mt.
NOTE 1
2
ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) 165-005/84 N°
NOTE 1
3
WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) 165-005/74 N°
NOTE 1
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
a
WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 220) 504-238/94 N° 2
b
PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR
220)
308-005/21 N° 1
c
GROUNDING KIT 333-031/75 N° 2
d
WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT 332-005/21 N° 3
e
UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 38) 165-005/17 N° 3
f
RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) 332-202/84 N° 3
A TWIST (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K N° 1
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 73/96
– 23 GHz
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-769)
CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-784SR)
OPTIONAL, USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
1
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 220) 127-042/11 Mt.
NOTE 1
2
ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcsz) 165-005/84 N°
NOTE 1
3
WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) 165-005/74 N°
NOTE 1
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
a
WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 220) 504-238/92 N° 2
b
PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR
220)
308-005/21 N° 1
c
GROUNDING KIT 333-031/75 N° 2
d
WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT 332-005/21 N° 3
e
UNIVERSAL CLAMP (∅ 38)
165-005/17 N° 3
f
RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) 332-202/85 N° 3
A TWIST (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K N° 1
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
74/96 Issue 1, September 1999
– 26 GHz
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-771)
CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-785SR)
OPTIONAL, USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY
NOTE 1 = QUANTITY TO BE DEFINED AS PER PLANT REQUIREMENTS
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
1
ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 240) 127-042/13 Mt.
NOTE 1
2
ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs 165-005/84 N°
NOTE 1
3
WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) 165-005/74 N°
NOTE 1
ITEM DESCRIPTION P/N Unit Q.ty
a
WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 220) 504-238/95 N° 2
b
PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR
220)
308-005/21 N° 1
c
GROUNDING KIT 333-031/75 N° 2
d
WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT 332-005/21 N° 3
e
UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 38) 165-005/17 N° 3
f
RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) 332-202/89 N° 3
A TWIST (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K N° 1
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 75/96
10 OUTDOOR ASSEMBLY
10.1 Assembly on support frame
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
76/96 Issue 1, September 1999
10.2 ODU dimensions
WEIGHT OF THE OUTDOOR ASSEMBLY = 6 Kg
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 77/96
10.3 Outdoor assembly versions
* 07C to 38C Version with Heater,
order for environmental temperature range: -50°to +55°C
(Standard -30°to +55°C)
FREQUENC
Y
BAND
(GHz)
FREQUENCY
SHIFTER
(MHz)
P/N (*)
FEEDER
FLANGE 8x2 Mb/s 16x2 Mb/s
7
(7.1 to7.9)
154 / 161 /245 732-201/07B - 07C 732-221/07B - 07C UDR 84
8
(8.2 to 8.5)
119/126 732-201/08B - 08C 732-221/08B - 08C UDR 84
10.5
(10.5 to 10.68)
91 732-201/10B - 10C 732-221/10B - 10C UBR 100
13
(12.75 to
13.25)
266 732-201/13B - 13C 732-221/13B - 13C UBR 120
15
(14.5 to 15.35)
336 / 420 / 490 /
644 / 714 / 728
732-201/15B - 15C 732-221/15B - 15C UBR 140
18
(17.7 to 19.7)
340 / 1010 732-201/18B - 18C 732-221/18B - 18C UBR 220
23
(21.2 to 23.6)
1008 / 1200 /
1232
732-201/23B - 23C 732-221/23B - 23C UBR 220
26
(24.5 to 26.5)
1008 732-201/26B - 26C 732-221/26B - 26C UBR 220
38
(37.0 to 39.5)
1260 732-201/38B - 38C 732-221/38B - 38C UBR 320
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
78/96 Issue 1, September 1999
10.4 “Vertical” polarization application (standard)
10.5 “Horizontal” polarization application
NOTE = FOR “VERTICAL” POLARISED APPLICATION, THE IN/OUT CABLE CONNECTOR IS ON RIGHT HAND SIDE
NOTE = FOR “HORIZONTAL” POLARISED APPLICATION, THE IN/OUT CABLE CONNECTOR IS AT BOTTOM
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 79/96
10.6 “Rx field measure” connector
(*) THIS “FX FIELD MEASURE” CONNECTOR IS THE TEST POINT FOR THE CONNECTION OF A VOLT METER
DURING THE ANTENNA ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
80/96 Issue 1, September 1999
11 1/4” COAXIAL CABLE
11.1 Tipical connection
NOTE = THE MAX LENGHT OF ONE IDU/ODU CONNECTION IS 400 mt
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 81/96
11.2 Connection on ODU side
(*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. 11.6
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
82/96 Issue 1, September 1999
11.3 Grounding connections
(*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. 11.6
(**) REFER TO par. 11.4 FOR THE FIXING PROCEDURE OF THE 1/4” COAXIAL CABLE
(***) N°2 GROUNDING KITS ARE A STANDARD SOLUTION FOR A 1/4” COAXIAL CABLE PATH ≤ 50 m
(****) THIS CABLE IS INCLUDED INTO THE INSTALLATION MATERIAL KIT (597-523/58..86, 597-524/61..62)
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 83/96
11.4 Fixing
(*) THIS IS THE STANDARD SOLUTION THE INSTALLATION KIT (314-205/76), PROVIDED WITH THE EXTERNAL
CONNECTION ACCESSORIES (597-524/10)INCLUDED 50 CABLE TIE
(**) OPTIONAL MATERIAL RELEVANT TO ALTERNATIVE SOLUTIONS TO BE ADOPTED ACCORDING TO THE
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. REFER TO PAR. 11.4.1 AND PAR. 11.4.2 FOR THE CODES.
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
84/96 Issue 1, September 1999
11.4.1 Fixing for Andrew cable
11.4.2 Fixing for RFS-Kabelmetal cable
(*) for WALL-FASTENING: USE SCREW ANCHOR M5 Cod. 165-010/08
for ø 83 ÷ 120 POLE INSTALLATION: USE METALLIC CABLE TIE Cod. IMC
3043VIPA
(**) MATERIAL TO BE DEFINED
P / N DESCRIPTION
1/4” CABLE
No.
DIMENSIONS
D
mm
L
mm
H
mm
(**) CABLE CLAMP for LADDER, ROD 1 8-9 12 59
(**) CABLE CLAMP for LADDER, ROD 2 8-9 12 72
(**) CABLE CLAMP for LADDER, FLAT 1 8-9 12 44.5
(**) CABLE CLAMP for LADDER, FLAT 2 8-9 12 57.5
(**) CABLE CLAMP for LADDER, ANGULAR 1 8-9 12 78
(**) CABLE CLAMP for LADDER, ANGULAR 2 8-9 12 91
P / N DESCRIPTION
1/4”
CABLE
No.
DIMENSIONS
D
mm
L
mm
H
mm
332-202/71 CABLE CLAMP for LADDER, ROD 1 10-11 22 73
332-202/72 CABLE CLAMP for LADDER, ROD 2 10-11 22 102
332-202/74 CABLE CLAMP for LADDER, FLAT 1 10-11 22 58.5
332-202/75 CABLE CLAMP for LADDER, FLAT 2 10-11 22 87.5
IMC 5009VIPA CABLE CLAMP for LADDER,
ANGULAR
1 10-11 22 92
IMC 5010VIPA CABLE CLAMP for LADDER,
ANGULAR
2 10-11 22 121
IMC 5025VIPA CABLE CLAMP for WALL/POLE (*) 1 10-11
(**) CABLE CLAMP for WALL/POLE (*) 2 10-11
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 85/96
11.5 Rack assembly
THE FIGURE SHOWS A SYSTEM IN 1+1 OR 2×(1+0) OR ADD DROP CONFIGURATION. IN CASE OF 1+0
CONFIGURATION ONLY ONE IN/OUT CONNECTION IS PRESENT
(*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. 11.6
(**) THIS “OSM/N” COAXIAL TAIL IS CONTAINED IN THE BB ACCESSORIES (332-005/49), PROVIDED WITH
EXTERNAL CONNECTION ACCESSORIES (597-524/10).
(***) THIS COAXIAL CABLE FIXING BRACKET IS INCLUDED IN THE EXTERNAL CONNECTION ACCESSORIES
(597-524/10).
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
86/96 Issue 1, September 1999
11.6 Andrew and RFS-Kabelmetal sets
Andrew SET
FOR THE ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS SEE “CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY”
DOUMENT
OR
RFS-Kabelmetal SET
FOR THE ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS SEE “CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY”
DOCUMENT
• The Andrew and RFS-Kabelmetal material sets are alternative to each other
• The above listed quantities are relevant to one IDU/ODU connection
• NOTE 1 = The max length of one IDU/ODU connection is 400 Mt. (standard
delivery is 30 Mt.)
* Commercial reference code
ITEM P / N DESCRIPTION UNIT Q.TY
1. 104-009/42
(314-327/79)*
1/4” LDF1RN - 50 W
LDF1RN-50
Mt.
NOTE 1
2. 597-523/94A
(597-523/94)*
1/4” COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES
597-523/94A
Nr.
1
L1PNM-H COAX N-PLUG
(421-008/86) 1
L1PNR-HC 90°COAX N-PLUG
(421-008/84) 1
223158 GROUNDING KIT
(333-032/15) 2
ITEM P / N DESCRIPTION UNIT Q.TY
1. 104-009/33
(314-327/79)*
1/4” CuH - 50 Ω COAXIAL CABLE
152 156 11
Mt.
NOTE 1
2. 597-523/94B
(597-523/94)*
1/4” COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES
158 910 37
Nr.
1
155 010 35 COAX N-PLUG
(421-008/24) 1
155 010 16 90°COAX N-PLUG
(421-008/23) 1
155 096 02 GROUNDING KIT
(333-031/80) 2
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 87/96
11.7 Characteristics
1. Construction Characteristics
2. Mechanical Characteristics
3. Range of Temperature
ANDREW RFS-Kabelmetal
Inner Conductor Diameter (mm) 2.6 2.4
Dielectric Diameter (mm) 6.7 6.0
Outer Conductor Diameter (mm) 7.7 7.5
Standard Jacket Diameter (mm) 9 10.0
ANDREW RFS-Kabelmetal
Weight (kg/m) 0.09 0.13
Min. Bending Radius single bend (mm) 38 40
Min. Bending Radius repeated bends (mm) 76 120
Number of Bends Min. (typical) 15 (30) -
Tensile Strength (kg) 91 -
Bending Moment (N • m)
1.33 -
Max. Tensile Force (N) - 650
Crush Strength (kg/mm) 1.4 -
Max. Standard Hanger Spacing (m) 0.5 -
ANDREW RFS-Kabelmetal
Recommended Temperature for
Installation
(°C) - 25 / + 60 - 10 / + 60
Recommended Storage for
Installation
(°C) - 30 / + 80 -
Operating Temperature (°C) - 30 / + 80 -
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
88/96 Issue 1, September 1999
4. Electrical Characteristics
ANDREW RFS-Kabelmetal
Characteristics Impedance (Ω) 50 50
Relative Propagation Velocity (%) 87 82
Capacitance (pF/m) 76.8 82
Maximun Operating Frequency (Mhz) 15800 3000
Cut-off Frequency (Mhz) - 18700
Peak RF Voltage Rating (kV) 1.1 0.83
Peak Power Rating (kW) 12.1 6.9
DC Resistance : Inner Conductor (Ω/km) 5.15 4.1
DC Resistance : Outer Conductor (Ω/km) 3.33 3.5
DC Breakdown (V) 2200 -
Inductance (µH/m) 0.19 -
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 89/96
5. Attenuation, (dB/100m) Standard conditions : VSWR 1.0 ; ambient temperature
24°C
ANDREW RFS-Kabelmetal
10 MHz - 1.32
30 MHz 2.20 2.3
100 MHz 4.08 4.3
150 MHz 5.03 -
200 MHz - 6.1
300 MHz 7.22 7.6
450 MHz 8.94 9.4
600 MHz 10.42 -
824 MHz 12.36 -
894 MHz 12.92 -
900 MHz - 13.7
960 MHz 13.43 -
1000 MHz 13.73 -
1500 MHz 17.15 18.2
1700 MHz 18.38 -
1800 MHz - 20.1
2000 MHz 20.13 -
2300 MHz 21.77 23.1
3000 MHz - 27.0
4000 MHz 29.89
6000 MHz 37.94
10000 MHz 51.72
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
90/96 Issue 1, September 1999
6. Average Power Rating, kW Standard conditions : VSWR 1.0 ; ambient
temperature 40°C ; inner conductor temperature 100°C ;
ANDREW RFS-Kabelmetal
10 MHz - 4.4
30 MHz 3.38 2.51
100 MHz 1.85 1.36
150 MHz 1.51 -
200 MHz - 0.95
300 MHz 1.07 0.77
450 MHz 0.871 0.62
600 MHz 0.756 -
824 MHz 0.644 -
894 MHz 0.618 -
900 MHz - 0.43
960 MHz 0.579 -
1000 MHz 0.585 -
1500 MHz 0.477 0.32
1700 MHz 0.448 -
1800 MHz - 0.294
2000 MHz 0.413 -
2300 MHz 0.385 0.257
3000 MHz - 0.221
4000 MHz 0.292 -
6000 MHz 0.239 -
10000 MHz 0.185 -
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 91/96
12 IDU INSTALLATION
The IDU can be arranged for installation both on ETSI and 19" racks, by means of two
different types of brackets.
Before starting with the installation, IDU sub-rack has to be arranged for the rack type
(ETSI or 19") and then the identification plate has to be applied to the left bracket.
The IDU is delivered already assembled, i.e. with the units inserted.
12.1 Installation accessories
The IDU sub-rack P/N 628-585/01 is delivered with especial fixing kit code 332-308/34.
In Tab. 1 the list and description is set down of the accessories contained in the fixing kit.
Tab. 1 – Fixing kit code 332-308/34
Code Denomination Q.ty
232-168/62 Brackets for 19" rack 2
232-168/63 Right bracket for ETSI rack 1
232-168/64 Left bracket for ETSI rack 1
266-200/44 Rubber foot 4
204-364/07D Screw M4×8 hex. head 4
216-21/469 Sticker 4×20 1
NOTE – The IDU can be installed on a desk; to this purpose in the
installation kit code 332-308/34, four rubber feet to be applied to the
IDU base, are included; in this case, the identification plate has to
be applied to the sub-rack upper panel.
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
92/96 Issue 1, September 1999
12.2 IDU sub-rack arrangement for ETSI rack
– In the sub-rack front part (4), install on the side panels, the two brackets (1-2) for
ETSI rack, by means of the relevant two fixing screws (3).
1 - Left bracket for ETSI
2 - Right bracket for ETSI
3 - Screw M4×8, hex. head
4 - Sub-rack
NB: Items 1 to 3 are contained in the fixing kit, code 332-308/34 (see Tab. 1), delivered
with the sub-rack.
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 93/96
12.3 IDU sub-rack arrangement for 19" rack
– In the sub-rack front part (3), install on the side panels, the two brackets (1) for 19"
rack, by means of the relevant two fixing screws (2).
12.4 IDU installation
– Insert IDU (1) in the relevant housing of the rack
– Screw down the four screws (2) fixing the IDU (1).
– Fix the support of the coaxial cables (3) to the frame, screwing the two relevant
fixing screws (4).
NB: Items 1-2 are contained in the fixing kit, code 332-308/34 (see Tab. 1), delivered with
the sub-rack.
1 - Bracket for 19"
2 - Screw M4×8, hex. head
3 - Sub-rack
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
94/96 Issue 1, September 1999
1 - IDU
2 - Screw
3 - Coaxial cable fixing bracket (*)
4 - Screw
(*) This coaxial fixing bracket is included in the external connection accessories (597-524/10).
SRA L Equipment installation
53-001A8-200/E
Issue 1, September 1999 95/96
13 INSTALLATION OF IDU OPTIONAL UNITS
Optional units (Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit, EOW unit, Q-Adapter unit, D Channel
Distributor unit) can be installed on IDU during the first installation phase (if not already
present) or afterwards.
The installation procedure is the same for all the optional units.
For the installation of an optional unit, act as follows:
– Back off the two fixing screws (1) of the covering panel (2) relevant to the housing
where the unit has to be installed.
– Insert the unit (3) in the relevant housing.
– Screw down the two unit fixing screws (1).
WARNING – While inserting the unit, should a certain resistance be
found, pay attention not to force excessively on the unit.
This could cause a damage to IDU back-plane or to unit
back-connector.
NOTE – When a optional unit installation is realized after the equipment
commissioning, before activating the optional unit operation:
• update through the local or remote PC, with control and
configuration software, the equipment configuration (see
software OMN Manual)
• carry out the relevant electrical connections (see doc. "External
connections").
Equipment installation SRA L
53-001A8-200/E
96/96 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
1 - Screw
2 - Cover
3 - Unit
A - COVER REMOVAL
B - UNIT INSTALLATION
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Presettings
53-001A8-500/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Presettings SRA L
53-001A8-500/E
2/14 Issue 1, September 1999
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Presettings
53-001A8-500/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/14
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2 HARDWARE PRESETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.1 System configuration presetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2 DC ground presetting for transmission tributaries (P/N 612-404/04) . . . . . . 8
2.3 75/120 Ohm tributary interface presetting (P/N 612-404/01) . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.4 Presetting of +V AUX local ground connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Presettings SRA L
53-001A8-500/E
4/14 Issue 1, September 1999
Illustrations
Fig. 1 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout - P/N 523-404/78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fig. 2 75 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout P/N 523-404/76. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fig. 3 75/120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout P/N 523-407/62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Fig. 4 Alarm Interface sub-unit layout - P/N 523-405/59 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
SRA L Presettings
53-001A8-500/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/14
Tables
Tab. 1 Location of 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit jumpers/microswitches for
system configuration presetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Tab. 2 Location of 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit DC ground presetting
for transmission tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Tab. 3 Presetting jumper position of Alarm Interface sub-unit for +V AUX local
ground connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Presettings SRA L
53-001A8-500/E
6/14 Issue 1, September 1999
1 GENERAL
This document contains the instruction for checking and, if necessary, for carrying out
the presettings relevant to the equipment expected operating modes.
Two presetting types are possible:
– hardware presettings: performed by means of jumpers/microswitches directly in
the units cards; in this case, the equipment has to be deactivated for getting access
to the units for their execution
– software presettings: performed by means of a PC (in local or remote mode) with
dedicated software; in this case, the equipment has to be activated (in local mode
the PC can be connected to IDU in any moment).
The utmost part of the hardware presettings are carried out at factory and they must
never be changed in order not to jeopardize the equipment correct operation. The
hardware presettings described in this document are the only ones that can be carried
out on installation.
To execute a hardware presetting, act as follows:
– draw out from IDU the involved unit
– execute the relevant hardware presetting (see par. 2)
– draw in IDU the unit.
As far as the software presettings are concerned, refer to the software OMN Manual.
NOTE – The hardware presettings have to be carried out with the
equipment deactivated.
SRA L Presettings
53-001A8-500/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/14
2 HARDWARE PRESETTINGS
2.1 System configuration presetting
According to the system configuration, the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit has to be suitably
preset. Two different presetting jumper/microswitch configurations are possible:
– 2×(1+0)/AD-RPT configuration
– (1+1) configuration.
In the case of (1+0) configuration, the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit is delivered with the
jumpers preset as for (1+1) configuration, the presetting jumpers/microswitches are
located:
– in the case of 120 Ohm interface: in the 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit 523-404/78
– in the case of 75 Ohm interface: in the 75 Ohm Tributary sub-unit 523-404/76
– in the case of 75/120 Ohm interface: in the 75/120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit
523-407/62.
In Tab. 1, the different presetting jumper/microswitch configurations are set down.
Fig. 1, Fig. 2 and Fig. 3 show the layouts of 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit P/N 523-404/78,
75 Ohm Tributary sub-unit P/N 523-404/76 and 75/120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit P/N
523-407/62, respectively, where the presetting jumpers/microswitches are pointed out.
Tab. 1 – Location of 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit jumpers/microswitches for system
configuration presetting
Sub-unit
Jumpers/
microswitches
2×(1+0)/AD-RPT
configuration
(1+1) or (1+0)
configuration
120 Ohm Tribu-
tary
P/N 523-404/78
(see Fig. 1)
or
75 Ohm Tributary
P/N 523-404/76
(cfr. Fig. 2)
XM1A Open Closed
XM1B8 Open Closed
XM2A8 Closed Open
XM2B8 Closed Open
I1 OFF ON
NB: Jumpers XM1A to XM2B configure the tributary streams. The jumpers of micro-
switch I1, which have to be jointly set, configure the User channel.
Sub-unit Jumpers
2×2 Mbit/s and 4×2
Mbit/s
8×2 Mbit/s
(1+1)
or
(1+0)
2×(1+0) or
Add/Drop
(1+1)
or
(1+0)
Add/Drop
75/120 Ohm
Tributary
P/N 523-407/62
(see Fig. 3)
XM1A-B-C Closed Open Closed Open
XM2A-B-C Open Closed Open Closed
Presettings SRA L
53-001A8-500/E
8/14 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2 DC ground presetting for transmission tributaries
(P/N 612-404/04)
The 120 Ohm tributaries can be available on transmission side by means of jumper
presetting either with or without DC ground of the shield wire; the jumpers are located
on 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit P/N 523-404/78.
The 75 Ohm tributaries can be available on transmission side with DC grounding of
cable shield.
Unless the customer presents a specific request, the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit is delivered
with jumpers preset for transmission tributaries with DC ground.
The several presetting jumper configurations are set down in Tab. 2.
Fig. 1 shows the layout of 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit P/N 523-404/78, where the
presetting jumpers are pointed out.
Tab. 2 – Location of 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit DC ground presetting for
transmission tributaries
2.3 75/120 Ohm tributary interface presetting (P/N 612-404/01)
The TR18 jumper of the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (P/N 612-404/01) must be on B position
(see Fig. 3).
Sub-unit TX trib. Jumper
Tributaries
without DC
ground
Tributaries
with DC
ground
120 Ohm
Tributary
P/N 523-404/78
(see Fig. 1)
TX11
TR1-TR2
TR2-TR3
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
TX21
TR4-TR5
TR5-TR6
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
TX31
TR7-TR8
TR8-TR9
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
TX41
TR10-TR11
TR11-TR12
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
TX12
TR13-TR14
TR14-TR15
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
TX22
TR16-TR17
TR17-TR18
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
TX32
TR19-TR20
TR20-TR21
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
TX42
TR22-TR23
TR23-TR24
Closed
Open
Open
Closed
SRA L Presettings
53-001A8-500/E
Issue 1, September 1999 9/14
2.4 Presetting of +V AUX local ground connection
(P/N 614-041/01 and 614-041/11)
The V AUX voltage positive pole, is connected to the IDU internal ground.
The line of the +V AUX signal can be optionally used also to provide an output a +5 V.
Tributary interface Tab. 3 indicates the different configuration of the presetting jumper.
Usually, the Alarm Interface sub-unit is delivered with the jumper preset in such way to
realize the connection of +V AUX voltage.
Fig. 4 shows the layout of Alarm sub-unit P/N 523-405/59 where the presetting jumpers
are pointed out.
Tab. 3 – Presetting jumper position of Alarm Interface sub-unit for +V AUX local
ground connection
Sub-unit
Jumper
(*)
+V AUX
connected to
local ground
(default)
OUT
+5 V
Alarm Interface
P/N 523-405/59
(see Fig. 4)
SZ1 1-8
(pos. A)
Open Closed
SZ1 2-7
(pos. B)
Closed Open
* The jumper SZ1 3-6 must always be closed.
Presettings SRA L
53-001A8-500/E
10/14 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 1 – 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout - P/N 523-404/78
SRA L Presettings
53-001A8-500/E
Issue 1, September 1999 11/14
Fig. 2 – 75 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout P/N 523-404/76
Presettings SRA L
53-001A8-500/E
12/14 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 3 – 75/120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout P/N 523-407/62
SRA L Presettings
53-001A8-500/E
Issue 1, September 1999 13/14
Fig. 4 – Alarm Interface sub-unit layout - P/N 523-405/59
Presettings SRA L
53-001A8-500/E
14/14 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
BLANK PAGE
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
2/56 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
BLANK PAGE
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/56
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2 IDU EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.1 Power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
2.2 2 Mbit/s tributary connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.2.1 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/02) (²) . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
2.2.2 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/04) (²) . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.2.3 75/120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/01) . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2.4 75/120 Ohm 16¥2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/11) . . . . . . . . 21
2.3 PC channel (F interface) connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
2.4 V bus connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
2.5 Alarm connection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
2.6 User channel connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
2.7 D/D1-D2 channel connection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
2.8 Q channel connection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
2.9 Handset connection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
2.10 EOW expansion channel connection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3 IDU-ODU IF INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.1 Antenna connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
3.2 POE connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
4 EXTERNAL CONNECTION ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
4/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Illustrations
Fig. 1 IDU front view (fully equipped) - P/N 732-101/01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Fig. 2 IDU front view (fully equipped) - P/N 732-101/11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fig. 3 "PS1" and "PS2" power supply connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fig. 4 75 Ohm plug and coaxial cable for 2 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Fig. 5 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Fig. 6 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Fig. 7 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Fig. 8 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fig. 9 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Fig. 10 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fig. 11 F interface (PC) - RS232C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Fig. 12 V bus interface - 128 kbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Fig. 13 V bus interface - 128 kbit/s: connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Fig. 14 V bus interface - 128 kbit/s: accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Fig. 15 System alarm restitution and external alarm input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fig. 16 User channel interface - 64 kbit/s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Fig. 17 D/D1-D2 data channel interface - 64 kbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Fig. 18 D/D1-D2 data channel interface - 64 kbit/s: connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Fig. 19 Q(X.21) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Fig. 20 Q(10BASE) interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Fig. 21 View of handset jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Fig. 22 EOW expansion channel interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Fig. 23 View of ODU external connection elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Fig. 24 Front view of POE connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/56
Tables
Tab. 1 2 Mbit/s tributary numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Tab. 2 "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" connector pin-out (standard numbering) 13
Tab. 3 "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8" connector pin-out (standard numbering) 14
Tab. 4 "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" connector pin-out
(not standard numbering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Tab. 5 "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8" connector pin-out
(not standard numbering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Tab. 6 “2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4”connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Tab. 7 “2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8” connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Tab. 8 CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 1-8
(120 Ohm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tab. 9 CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 9-16 (120 Ohm) . . . . 24
Tab. 10 CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 1-8 (75 Ohm) . . . . . . 25
Tab. 11 CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 9-16
(75 Ohm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Tab. 12 "PC" connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Tab. 13 "V" connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Tab. 14 "ALARMS" connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tab. 15 "USER" connector pin-out. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Tab. 16 "D"/"D1"-"D2" connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Tab. 17 "Q(X.21)" connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Tab. 18 Handset jack pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Tab. 19 "EOW EXP" connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Tab. 20 POE connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Tab. 21 External connection accessories P/N 597-524/10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Tab. 22 V bus daisy-chain kit P/N 597-524/09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Tab. 23 Andrew coaxial cable and accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Tab. 24 RFS-Kabelmetal coaxial cable and accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Tab. 25 120 Ohm electrical material set - 8x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-523/85) . . . . . . . . . 55
Tab. 26 75 Ohm electrical material set - 8x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-523/86) . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tab. 27 120 Ohm electrical material set - 16x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-524/61) . . . . . . . . 56
Tab. 28 75 Ohm electrical material set - 16x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-524/62) . . . . . . . . . 56
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
6/56 Issue 1, September 1999
1 GENERAL
This document deals with the description of the external electrical connections of SRA L
radio equipment.
2 IDU EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS
All the connectors for IDU external connections are located on the front panel of the units
the assembly consists of (see Fig. 1 and Fig. 2):
Fig. 1 - IDU front view (fuIIy equipped) - P/N 732-101/01
(*) Optional
(**) Not present in (1+0) configuration
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/56
Fig. 2 - IDU front view (fuIIy equipped) - P/N 732-101/11
2.1 Power suppIy connections
For the connection of the supply voltage -48 V/-64 V (delivered by the station batteries)
of the SRA L equipment, the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (see Fig. 1 and Fig. 2), is provided
with two 3-poles sub-D-3W3 connectors, identified by wording "PS1" and "PS2" (see
Fig. 3).
Two connectors are available to allow the redundancy of the main power supply.
(*) Optional
(**) Not present in (1+0) configuration
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
8/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 3 - "PS1" and "PS2" power suppIy connectors
NOTE - The positive poIe of the power suppIy voItage from battery
(BATTERY+) is necessariIy connected to IDU inner ground in such
a way to aIIow the ODU power suppIying by means of the IF coaxiaI
cabIe onIy.
(*) These accessories are contained in the power supply accessories (332-005/28), provided with external connection ac-
cessories (597-524/10); for mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) When ODU with operating pre-heater.
(***) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/85..86, 597-524/61..62).
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 9/56
2.2 2 Mbit/s tributary connection
For the 2 Mbit/s Tributary units, 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces, in alternative, are
available, according to IDU outfit (see Fig. 1 and Fig. 2):
– 75 Ohm interface: for unit P/N 612-404/02 (IDU P/N 732-101/01 only) *
– 120 Ohm interface: for unit P/N 612-404/04 (IDU P/N 732-101/01 only) * *
– 75/120 Ohm interface: for unit P/N 612-404/01 (IDU P/N 732-101/11 only)
– 75/120 Ohm interface: for unit P/N 612-404/11 (IDU P/N 732-101/11 only).
According to the combination between system software and the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit
P/N 612-404/02 and 612-404/04, two different numberings of the tributaries to connector
are possible, as set down in the following Tab. 1.
Tab. 1 – 2 Mbit/s tributary numbering
* The unit is available only as a replacement of units installed in field. It cannot be
associated to new orders (it is replaced by P/N 612-404/01)
** The unit has been replaced by P/N 612-404/01 for both spare parts and new orders.
SVR 1.0*
SVR 1.0 and
foIIowing ones
Issue 009 and previous ones
STANDARD
numbering
NOT STANDARD
numbering
Issue 010 and following ones
NOT STANDARD
numbering
STANDARD
numbering
Software
version
2 Mbit/s
Tributary
unit
(P/N 612-404/02
or 612-404/04)
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
10/56 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2.1 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/02) (•)
For the connection of 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributaries, the 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit
(see Fig. 1) is provided with sixteen 1.0/2.4 coaxial connectors, subdivided into eight
pairs TX and RX, one pair for every 2 Mbit/s I/O tributary. Fig. 4 shows the plug and the
coaxial cable for 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s connectors.
The function of each coaxial connector is set down in Fig. 5.
Fig. 4 - 75 Ohm pIug and coaxiaI cabIe for 2 Mbit/s tributaries
• The unit is available only as a replacement of units installed in field. It cannot be
associated to new orders (it is replaced by P/N 612-404/01)
(*) These connectors are included in the external connection accessories (597-524/10); for
mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/86).
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 11/56
Fig. 5 - 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface
(*) For 2×(1+0) system configuration, the TX and RX connector pairs, numbered 5 to 8,
are associated with the four tributary streams of the second system.
B) Not Standard numbering
A) Standard numbering
NB: TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment, RX are the ones in opposite direction.
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
12/56 Issue 1, September 1999
2.2.2 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/04) (•)
For the connection of 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributares, the 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit
(see Fig. 1) is provided with two 25-poles sub-D connectors, identified by wording "2
Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" and "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8" (see Fig. 6).
According to the system configuration (1+0) or 2×(1+0) the channels associated with
connector "5-8" can be numbered from 5 to 8 or from 1 to 4.
In Tab. 2, Tab. 3, Tab. 4 and Tab. 5, with reference to Fig. 6, the pin-out is set down of
"1-4" and "5-8" connectors, either for standard and not standard numbering.
Fig. 6 - 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface
• The unit has been replaced by P/N 612-404/01 for both spare parts and new orders.
(*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 25C (332-005/50), provided with external
connection accessories (597-524/10); for mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/85).
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 13/56
Tab. 2 – "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" connector pin-out (standard numbering)
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 Not utilized
2 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 4
3 RX41-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 4
4 TX41-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 4
5 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 3
6 RX31-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 3
7 TX31-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 3
8 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 2
9 RX21-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 2
10 TX21-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 2
11 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 1
12 RX11-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 1
13 TX11-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 1
14 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 4
15 RX41-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 4
16 TX41-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 4
17 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 3
18 RX31-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 3
19 TX31-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 3
20 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 2
21 RX21-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 2
22 TX21-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 2
23 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 1
24 RX11-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 1
25 TX11-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 1
NB - TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment, RX are the ones in opposite
direction.
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
14/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 3 – "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8" connector pin-out (standard numbering)
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 Not utilized
2 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 8 (4)
3 RX42-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 8 (4)
4 TX42-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 8 (4)
5 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 7 (3)
6 RX32-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 7 (3)
7 TX32-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 7 (3)
8 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 6 (2)
9 RX22-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 6 (2)
10 TX22-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 6 (2)
11 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 5 (1)
12 RX12-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 5 (1)
13 TX12-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 5 (1)
14 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 8 (4)
15 RX42-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 8 (4)
16 TX42-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 8 (4)
17 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 7 (3)
18 RX32-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 7 (3)
19 TX32-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 7 (3)
20 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 6 (2)
21 RX22-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 6 (2)
22 TX22-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 6 (2)
23 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 5 (1)
24 RX12-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 5 (1)
25 TX12-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 5 (1)
NB - TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment, RX are the ones in opposite
direction.
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 15/56
Tab. 4 – "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" connector pin-out
(not standard numbering)
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 Not utilized
2 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 2 line 1
3 RX21-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 2 line 1
4 TX21-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 2 line 1
5 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 1 line 1
6 RX11-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 1 line 1
7 TX11-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 1 line 1
8 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 4 line 1
9 RX41-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 4 line 1
10 TX41-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 4 line 1
11 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 3 line 1
12 RX31-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 3 line 1
13 TX31-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 3 line 1
14 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 2 line 1
15 RX21-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 2 line 1
16 TX21-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 2 line 1
17 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 1 line 1
18 RX11-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 1 line 1
19 TX11-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 1 line 1
20 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 4 line 1
21 RX41-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 4 line 1
22 TX41-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 4 line 1
23 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 3 line 1
24 RX31-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 3 line 1
25 TX31-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 3 line 1
NB - TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment, RX are the ones in opposite
direction.
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
16/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 5 – "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8" connector pin-out
(not standard numbering)
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 Not utilized
2 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 2 line 2
3 RX22-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 2 line 2
4 TX22-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 2 line 2
5 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 1 line 2
6 RX12-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 1 line 2
7 TX12-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 1 line 2
8 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 4 line 2
9 RX42-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 4 line 2
10 TX42-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 4 line 2
11 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 3 line 2
12 RX32-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 3 line 2
13 TX32-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 3 line 2
14 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 2 line 2
15 RX22-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 2 line 2
16 TX22-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 2 line 2
17 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 1 line 2
18 RX12-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 1 line 2
19 TX12-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 1 line 2
20 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 4 line 2
21 RX42-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 4 line 2
22 TX42-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 4 line 2
23 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 3 line 2
24 RX32-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 3 line 2
25 TX32-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 3 line 2
NB - TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment, RX are the ones in opposite
direction.
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 17/56
2.2.3 75/120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/01)
For the connection of 75/120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributares, the 75/120 Ohm
2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (see Fig. 1) is provided with two 25-poles sub-D connectors,
identified by wording "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" and "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES
5-8" (see Fig. 7).
In Tab. 6 and Tab. 7, with reference to Fig. 7 and Fig. 8, the pin-out is set down of "1-4"
and "5-8" connectors.
Fig. 7 - 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface
(*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 25C (332-055/50), provided with external
connection accessories (597-524/10); for mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/85).
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
18/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 8 - 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface
(*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 25C (332-055/50), provided with external
connection accessories (597-524/10); for mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/86).
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 19/56
Tab. 6 – “2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4”connector pin-out
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1
ADAPT (IN)-(75 Ohm)
ADAPT (IN)-(120 Ohm)
Configuration
Not utilized
2
TX-41-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-41-a-(120 Ohm)
TX ground of the channel No. 4
Not utilized
3
RX-41-a-(75 Ohm)
RX-41-a-(120 Ohm)
RX ground of the channel No. 4
Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 4
4
TX-41-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-41-a-(120 Ohm)
Not utilized
Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 4
5
TX-31-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-31-a-(120 Ohm)
TX ground of the channel No. 3
Not utilized
6
RX-31-a-(75 Ohm)
RX-31-a-(120 Ohm)
RX ground of the channel No. 3
Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 3
7
TX-31-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-31-a-(120 Ohm)
Not utilized
Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 3
8
TX-21-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-21-a-(120 Ohm)
TX ground of the channel No. 2
Not utilized
9
RX-21-a-(75 Ohm)
RX-21-a-(120 Ohm)
RX ground of the channel No. 2
Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 2
10
TX-21-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-21-a-(120 Ohm)
Not utilized
Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 2
11
TX-11-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-11-a-(120 Ohm)
TX ground of the channel No. 1
Not utilized
12
RX-11-a-(75 Ohm)
RX-11-a-(120 Ohm)
RX ground of the channel No. 1
Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 1
13
TX-11-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-11-a-(120 Ohm)
Not utilized
Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 1
14 GND Shield wire*
15
RX-41-b-(75 Ohm)
RX-41-b-(120 Ohm)
RX coax hot side of the channel No. 4
Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 4
16
TX-41-b-(75 Ohm)
TX-41-b-(120 Ohm)
TX coax coax hot side of the channel No. 4
Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 4
17 GND Shield wire*
18
RX-31-b-(75 Ohm)
RX-31-b-(120 Ohm)
RX coax hot side of the channel No. 3
Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 3
19
TX-31-b-(75 Ohm)
TX-31-b-(120 Ohm)
TX coax hot side of the channel No. 3
Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 3
20 GND Shield wire*
21
RX-21-B-(75 Ohm)
RX-21-B-(120 Ohm)
RX coax hot side of the channel No. 2
Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 2
22
TX-21-B-(75 Ohm)
TX-21-B-(120 Ohm)
TX coax hot side of the channel No. 2
Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 2
23 GND Shield wire*
24
RX-11-a-(75 Ohm)
RX-11-a-(120 Ohm)
RX coax hot side of the channel No. 1
Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 1
25
TX-11-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-11-a-(120 Ohm)
TX coax hot side of the channel No. 1
Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 1
NB - TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment, RX are the ones in opposite
direction
* - Used when cables other than P/N 106-041/23 are chosen, which require single twisted pair
shielding
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
20/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 7 – “2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8” connector pin-out
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1
ADAPT (IN)-(75 Ohm)
ADAPT (IN)-(120 Ohm)
Configuration
Not utilized
2
TX-41-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-41-a-(120 Ohm)
TX ground of the channel No. 8
Not utilized
3
RX-41-a-(75 Ohm)
RX-41-a-(120 Ohm)
RX ground of the channel No. 8
Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 8
4
TX-41-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-41-a-(120 Ohm)
Not utilized
Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 8
5
TX-31-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-31-a-(120 Ohm)
TX ground of the channel No. 7
Not utilized
6
RX-31-a-(75 Ohm)
RX-31-a-(120 Ohm)
RX ground of the channel No. 7
Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 7
7
TX-31-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-31-a-(120 Ohm)
Not utilized
Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 7
8
TX-21-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-21-a-(120 Ohm)
TX ground of the channel No. 6
Not utilized
9
RX-21-a-(75 Ohm)
RX-21-a-(120 Ohm)
RX ground of the channel No. 6
Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 6
10
TX-21-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-21-a-(120 Ohm)
Not utilized
Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 6
11
TX-11-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-11-a-(120 Ohm)
TX ground of the channel No. 5
Not utilized
12
RX-11-a-(75 Ohm)
RX-11-a-(120 Ohm)
RX ground of the channel No. 5
Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 5
13
TX-11-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-11-a-(120 Ohm)
Not utilized
Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 5
14 GND Shield wire*
15
RX-41-b-(75 Ohm)
RX-41-b-(120 Ohm)
RX hot side of the channel No. 8
Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 8
16
TX-41-b-(75 Ohm)
TX-41-b-(120 Ohm)
TX hot side of the channel No. 8
Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 8
17 GND Shield wire*
18
RX-31-b-(75 Ohm)
RX-31-b-(120 Ohm)
RX hot side of the channel No. 7
Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 7
19
TX-31-b-(75 Ohm)
TX-31-b-(120 Ohm)
TX hot side of the channel No. 7
Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 7
20 GND Shield wire*
21
RX-21-B-(75 Ohm)
RX-21-B-(120 Ohm)
RX hot side of the channel No. 6
Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 6
22
TX-21-B-(75 Ohm)
TX-21-B-(120 Ohm)
TX hot side of the channel No. 6
Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 6
23 GND Shield wire*
24
RX-11-a-(75 Ohm)
RX-11-a-(120 Ohm)
RX hot side of the channel No. 5
Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 5
25
TX-11-a-(75 Ohm)
TX-11-a-(120 Ohm)
TX hot side of the channel No. 5
Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 5
NB - TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment, RX are the ones in opposite
direction
* - Used when cables other than P/N 106-041/23 are chosen, which require single twisted pair
shielding
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 21/56
2.2.4 75/120 Ohm 16×2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/11)
For the connection of 75/120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributares, the 75/120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (see
Fig. 2) is provided with two 50-poles sub-D connectors, identified by wording "2 Mbit/s 1-8" and "2
Mbit/s 9-16" (see Fig. 9)
In Tab. 8 and Tab. 9, with reference to Fig. 9 and Fig. 10, the pin-out is set down of "1-8" and
"9-16" connectors.
Fig. 9 - 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface
(*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 50C (332-055/57), provided with external
connection accessories (597-524/10); for mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) This cable is not included in the installation materials.
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
22/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 10 - 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface
(*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 50C (332-055/57), provided with external
connection accessories (597-524/10); for mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) This cable is not included in the installation materials.
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 23/56
Tab. 8 – CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 1-8
(120 Ohm)
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 ADAPT Floating
2 TX6-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 6
3 RX6-a Received tributary channel No 6
4 TX5-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 5
5 RX5-a Received tributary channel No 5
6 TX8-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 8
7 RX8-a Received tributary channel No 8
8 TX7-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 7
9 RX7-a Received tributary channel No 7
10 TX2-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 2
11 RX2-a Received tributary channel No 2
12 TX1-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 1
13 RX1-a Received tributary channel No 1
14 TX4-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 4
15 RX4-a Received tributary channel No 4
16 TX3-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 3
17 RX3-a Received tributary channel No 3
18 TX6-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 6
19 RX6-b Received tributary channel No 6
20 TX5-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 5
21 RX5-b Received tributary channel No 5
22 TX8-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 8
23 RX8-b Received tributary channel No 8
24 TX7-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 7
25 RX7-b Received tributary channel No 7
26 TX2-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 2
27 RX2-b Received tributary channel No 2
28 TX1-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 1
29 RX1-b Received tributary channel No 1
30 TX4-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 4
31 RX4-b Received tributary channel No 4
32 TX3-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 3
33 RX3-b Received tributary channel No 3
36, 38, 40, 42, 44, 46,
48, 34, 35, 37, 39, 41,
43, 45, 47, 49
Not utilized (do not connect!!)
50 GND
NB -TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment, RX are the ones in opposite direction
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
24/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 9 – CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 9-16 (120 Ohm)
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 ADAPT Floating
2 TX14-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 14
3 RX14-a Received tributary channel No 14
4 TX13-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 13
5 RX13-a Received tributary channel No 13
6 TX16-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 16
7 RX16 -a Received tributary channel No 16
8 TX15 -a Trasmitted tributary channel No 15
9 RX15 -a Received tributary channel No 15
10 TX10 -a Trasmitted tributary channel No 10
11 RX10 -a Received tributary channel No 10
12 TX9 -a Trasmitted tributary channel No 9
13 RX9 -a Received tributary channel No 9
14 TX12 -a Trasmitted tributary channel No 12
15 RX12 -a Received tributary channel No 12
16 TX11 -a Trasmitted tributary channel No 11
17 RX11 -a Received tributary channel No 11
18 TX14 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 14
19 RX14 -b Received tributary channel No 14
20 TX13 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 13
21 RX13 -b Received tributary channel No 13
22 TX16 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 16
23 RX16 -b Received tributary channel No 16
24 TX15 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 15
25 RX15 -b Received tributary channel No 15
26 TX10 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 10
27 RX10 -b Received tributary channel No 10
28 TX9 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 9
29 RX9 -b Received tributary channel No 9
30 TX12 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 12
31 RX12 -b Received tributary channel No 12
32 TX11-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 11
33 RX11-b Received tributary channel No 11
34, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39,
40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 46,
47, 48, 49
Not utilized (do not connect!!)
50 GND
NB -TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment, RX are the ones in opposite direction
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 25/56
Tab. 10 – CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 1-8 (75 Ohm)
* These pins must be wired to pin 50.
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 ADAPT Grounded cable *
2 to 17 Not utilized
18 TX6-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 6 - signal
19 RX6-b Received tributary channel No 6 - signal
20 TX5-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 5 - signal
21 RX5-b Received tributary channel No 5 - signal
22 TX8-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 8 - signal
23 RX8-b Received tributary channel No 8 - signal
24 TX7-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 7 - signal
25 RX7-b Received tributary channel No 7 - signal
26 TX2-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 2 - signal
27 RX2-b Received tributary channel No 2 - signal
28 TX1-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 1 - signal
29 RX1-b Received tributary channel No 1 - signal
30 TX4-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 4 - signal
31 RX4-b Received tributary channel No 4 - signal
32 TX3-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 3 - signal
33 RX3-b Received tributary channel No 3 - signal
34 TX6-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 6 - ground *
35 RX6-c Received tributary channel No 6 - ground *
36 TX5-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 5 - ground *
37 RX5-c Received tributary channel No 5 - ground *
38 TX8-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 8 - ground *
39 RX8-c Received tributary channel No 8 - ground *
40 TX7-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 7 - ground *
41 RX7-c Received tributary channel No 7 - ground *
42 TX2-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 2 - ground *
43 RX2-c Received tributary channel No 2 - ground *
44 TX1-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 1 - ground *
45 RX1-c Received tributary channel No 1 - ground *
46 TX4-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 4 - ground *
47 RX4-c Received tributary channel No 4 - ground *
48 TX3-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 3 - ground *
49 RX3-c Received tributary channel No 3 - ground *
50 GND
NB -TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment, RX are the ones in opposite direction
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
26/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 11 – CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 9-16
(75 Ohm)
* These pins must be wired to pin 50.
PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
1 ADAPT Grounded cable *
2-17 Not utilized
18 TX14-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 14 - signal
19 RX14-b Received tributary channel No 14 - signal
20 TX13-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 13 - signal
21 RX13-b Received tributary channel No 13 - signal
22 TX16-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 16 - signal
23 RX16-b Received tributary channel No 16 - signal
24 TX15-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 15 - signal
25 RX15-b Received tributary channel No 15 - signal
26 TX10-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 10 - signal
27 RX10-b Received tributary channel No 10 - signal
28 TX9-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 9 - signal
29 RX9-b Received tributary channel No 9 - signal
30 TX12-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 12 - signal
31 RX12-b Received tributary channel No 12 - signal
32 TX11-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 11 - signal
33 RX11-b Received tributary channel No 11 - signal
34 TX14-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 14 - ground *
35 RX14-c Received tributary channel No 14 - ground *
36 TX13-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 13 - ground *
37 RX13-c Received tributary channel No 13 - ground *
38 TX16-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 16 - ground *
39 RX16-c Received tributary channel No 16 - ground *
40 TX15-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 15 - ground *
41 RX15-c Received tributary channel No 15 - ground *
42 TX10-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 10 - ground *
43 RX10-c Received tributary channel No 10 - ground *
44 TX9-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 9 - ground *
45 RX9-c Received tributary channel No 9 - ground *
46 TX12-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 12 - ground *
47 RX12-c Received tributary channel No 12 - ground *
48 TX11-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 11 - ground *
49 RX11-c Received tributary channel No 11 - ground *
50 GND
NB -TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment, RX are the ones in opposite direction
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 27/56
2.3 PC channeI (F interface) connection
For the connection to an external PC, the Controller unit (see Fig. 1 and
Fig. 2) is provided with a 9-pole female sub-D connector, identified by wording "PC" (see
Fig. 11).
In Tab. 12, with reference to Fig. 11, the "PC" connector pin-out is set down, which
corresponds to the RS-232 standard one for DCE since the IDU is considered as DCE.
Tab. 12 – "PC" connector pin-out
Fig. 11 - F interface (PC) - RS232C
PIN SIGNAL MEANING DIRECTION (*)
1 Not utilized
2 PC-RXD Received Data OUT
3 PC-TXD Transmitted Data IN
4 PC-DTR Data Transmit Ready IN
5 GND Cable local ground
connected to IDU internal
ground
6 PC-DSR Data Set Ready OUT
7 PC-RTS Request To Send IN
8 PC-CTS Clear To Send OUT
9 Not utilized
(*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e.g., OUT means
signal outgoing from IDU.
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
28/56 Issue 1, September 1999
2.4 V bus connection
For the connection of V bus, the Controller unit (see Fig. 1 and Fig. 2) is provided with
a 9-pole female sub-D connector, identified by wording "V" (see Fig. 12).
Fig. 13 shows an example of connections on V bus; Fig. 14 shows the available
accessories for the execution of the connections on V bus.
In Tab. 13, with reference to Fig. 12, the pin-out is set down of "V" connector of the
Controller unit.
Tab. 13 – "V" connector pin-out
Fig. 12 - V bus interface - 128 kbit/s
PIN SIGNAL MEANING DIRECTION (*)
1 Not utilized
2 Not utilized
3 Not utilized
4 Not utilized
5 Not utilized
6 Not utilized
7 Not utilized
8 V-D-a Negative side of balanced pair of
bidirectional data line
IN/OUT
9 V-D-b Positive side of balanced pair of
bidirectional data line
IN/OUT
(*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to thw IDU: e.g., OUT means
signal outgoing from IDU.
NOTE - The interconnection on V bus for the ControIIer unit is carried out
by means of a 120 Ohm twisted-pair cabIe (max. Iength 500 m). The
V bus cabIe must be correctIy terminated by two 120 OhmOhm
terminations, mounted at the two ends of the cabIe.
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 29/56
Fig. 13 - V bus interface - 128 kbit/s: connections
1 For these termination 120 Ohm connectors (314-327/88) see Fig. 14.
For this interconnection cable (314-327/90) see Fig. 14.
2
3
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
30/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 14 - V bus interface - 128 kbit/s: accessories
(*) These accessories are included in the daisy-chain kit (597-524/09).
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 31/56
2.5 AIarm connection (optionaI)
For the alarm connection, the Alarm unit or the Alarm and Fan unit (see Fig. 1 and
Fig. 2) (according to the unit installed in IDU) is provided with a 25-pole, female sub-D
connector, identified by wording "ALARMS" (see Fig. 15).
In Tab. 14, with reference to Fig. 15, the "ALARMS" connector pin-out is set down.
NOTE - The aIarm interface is avaiIabIe onIy if the IDU is equipped with
AIarm unit or AIarm and Fan unit.
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
32/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 14 – "ALARMS" connector pin-out
PIN SIGNAL MEANING DIRECTION (*)
1 ORBAT Lack of battery redundancy OUT
2 URG Urgent alarm activation OUT
3 INT Activation of an equipment internal alarm OUT
4 ALM-OUT1 Activation of an external alarm (EXT) OUT
5 ALM-OUT3 Activation of an external alarm (ODU) OUT
6 CEN-OUT1 Carried signal output 1, received by SRA L
remote equipment
OUT
7 CEN-OUT3 Carried signal output 3, received by SRA L
remote equipment
OUT
8 CEN-IN1 Carried signal input 1, trasmitted to SRA L
remote equipment
IN
9 CEN-IN3 Carried signal input 3, trasmitted to SRA L
remote equipment
IN
10 ALIM OFF Report of general power supply switch status OUT
11 MEM Report of IDU alarm storage push-button
status
OUT
12 CALL Report of local telephone call presence OUT
13 -VAUX Negative side of the auxiliary battery IN
14 ANDBAT Lack of both main batteries OUT
15 NURG Non urgent alarm activation OUT
16 IND Abnormal SRA L equipment operation OUT
17 ALM-OUT2 Activation of an external alarm (TEST) OUT
18 ALM-OUT4 Activation of an external alarm (IDU) OUT
19 CEN-OUT2 Carried signal output 2, received by SRA L
remote equipment
OUT
20 CEN-OUT4 Carried signal output 4, received by SRA L
remote equipment
OUT
21 CEN-IN2 Carried signal input 2, trasmitted to SRA L
remote equipment
IN
22 CEN-IN4 Carried signal input 4, trasmitted to SRA L
remote equipment
IN
23 GND Cable local ground; connected to IDU internal
ground
24 RIEP Report of alarm general status of SRA L
equipment (summary alarm)
OUT
25 +VAUX
(+5 V) (**)
(•)
Positive side of the auxiliary battery IN (OUT)
(*) The signal transmission direction is referred to IDU: e.g., OUT means signal
outgoing from IDU.
(**) The positive side of the auxiliary battery is connected to IDU internal ground.
(•) The pin can be configured using internal jumpers (see Presettings) in order to
provide a +5V/100 mA power supply to the outside (fuse protected).
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 33/56
ELETRICAL DEFINITIONS
OPEN CONDITION = ≥ 1MOhm to IDU GND
OUT = OUTPUT PORT
GND CONDITION = ≤ 25 Ohm to IDU GND
OPEN CONDITION = -3 to +2 Vdc; ≥ 60 KOhm
IN = INPUT PORT
GND CONDITION = -3 to +2 Vdc; 0 to 200 Ohm
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
34/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 15 - System aIarm restitution and externaI aIarm input
(*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 25C accessories (332-055/50), provided with external
connection accessories (597-524/10); for mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/85..86; 597-524/61..62).
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 35/56
2.6 User channeI connection
For the connection of the user channel, the RTM unit (see Fig. 1 and Fig. 2) is provided
with a 15-pole, female, sub-D connector, identified by wording "USER" (see Fig. 16).
In Tab. 15, with reference to Fig. 16, the "USER" connector pin-out is set down.
Tab. 15 – "USER" connector pin-out
PIN SIGNAL MEANING
DIRECTION
(*)
1 GND Cable local ground, connected to IDU internal
ground
2 TXUCKCN-a Negative side of counter-directional clock
balanced pair associated with transmitted
signal
OUT
3 TXUCKCD-a Negative side of codirectional clock balanced
pair associated with transmitted signal
IN
4 RXUCK-a Negative side of clock balanced pair
associated with received signal
OUT
5 TXUD-a Negative side of the transmitted data
balanced pair
IN
6 Not utilized
7 RXUD-a Negative side of the received data balanced
pair
OUT
8 GND
(Shield)
Ground connection for cable shield,
connected to IDU internal ground
9 Not utilized
10 TXUCKCN-b Positive side of counter-directional clock
balanced pair associated with transmitted
signal
OUT
11 TXUCKCD-b Positive side of codirectional clock balanced
pair associated with transmitted signal
IN
12 RXUCK-b Positive side of clock balanced pair
associated with received signal
OUT
13 TXUD-b Positive side of the transmitted data balanced
pair
IN
14 Not utilized
15 RXUD-b Positive side of the received data balanced
pair
OUT
(*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e.g., OUT means
signal outgoing from IDU.
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
36/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 16 - User channeI interface - 64 kbit/s
(*) These accessories are contained in the BB accessories (332-055/49), provided with external con-
nection accessories (597-524/10); for mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) This cable is not included in the installation materials
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 37/56
2.7 D/D1-D2 channeI connection (optionaI)
According to IDU equipment, the D channel connection concern:
– internal D channel: IDU equipped with optional Q-Adapter unit (see Fig. 1 and
Fig. 2)
– two D channels defined "external": IDU equipped with optional D Channel
Distributor unit (see Fig. 1).
For the connection of D channel (see Fig. 17), there are available the 9-pole female
sub-D connectors identified by "D" character (Q-Adapter unit) or "D1" and "D2" ones (D
Channel Distributor unit).
Fig. 18 shows an example of connections by means of D/D1-D2 channel.
In Tab. 16, with reference to Fig. 17, the "D"/"D1"-"D2" connector pin-out is set down.
Tab. 16 – "D"/"D1"-"D2" connector pin-out
PIN SIGNAL MEANING DIRECTION (*)
1 D-DRX-a Negative side of received data balanced pair OUT
(D1/D2-IN)
2 D-DTX-a Negative side of transmitted data balanced
pair
IN
(D1/D2-OUT)
3 D-CKTX-a Negative side of clock balanced pair
associated with transmitted data
OUT
(D1/D2-IN)
4 D-CKRX-a Negative side of clock balanced pair
associated with received data
OUT
(D1/D2-IN)
5 GND Cable local ground, connected to IDU internal
ground
6 D-DRX-b Positive side of received data balanced pair OUT
(D1/D2-IN)
7 D-DTX-b Positive side of transmitted data balanced
pair
IN
(D1/D2-OUT)
8 D-CKTX-b Positive side of clock balanced pair
associated with transmitted data
OUT
(D1/D2-IN)
9 D-CKRX-b Positive side of clock balanced pair
associated with received data
OUT
(D1/D2-IN)
(*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e.g., OUT means
signal outgoing from IDU.
NOTE - The D channeI is onIy avaiIabIe shouId IDU be equipped with
Q-Adapter unit or, in aIternative, with D ChanneI Distributor unit
suitabIy preset.
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
38/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 17 - D/D1-D2 data channeI interface - 64 kbit/s
(*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 9C accessories (332-055/29), provided with external
connection accessories (597-524/10); for mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) This cable is not included in the installation materials
(•) P/N 634-001/66 is no more available for both spare parts and for new orders. It is replaced with P/N
634-001/69.
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 39/56
Fig. 18 - D/D1-D2 data channeI interface - 64 kbit/s: connections
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
40/56 Issue 1, September 1999
2.8 Q channeI connection (optionaI)
The Q channel is available on two different electrical interfaces: X.21 and 10BASE2.
For this reason, the Q-Adapter unit is provided with two connectors:
– X.21 interface: 15-pole, male, sub-D connector, identified by wording "Q(X.21)"
(see Fig. 19)
– 10BASE2 interface: 50 Ohm, BNC coaxial connector, identified by wording
"Q(10BASE2)" (see Fig. 20).
In Tab. 17, with reference to Fig. 18, the "Q (X.21)" connector pin-out is set down.
NOTE - The Q channeI is onIy avaiIabIe shouId IDU be equipped with
Q-Adapter unit.
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 41/56
Fig. 19 - Q(X.21) interface
(*) These accessories are contained in the Q-Adapter unit kit (597-523/39), provided with ex-
ternal connection accessories (597-524/10); for mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) This cable is not included in the installation materials
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
42/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 17 – "Q(X.21)" connector pin-out
PIN SIGNAL MEANING DIRECTION (*)
1 Shield Cable shield: usually is left open
2 T(A) Negative side of transmitted data balanced
pair
OUT
3 C(A) Negative side of balanced pair of X.21 protocol
control line
OUT
4 R(A) Negative side of received data balanced pair IN
5 I(A) Negative side of balanced pair of X.21
connection indication line
IN
6 S(A) Negative side of input clock balanced pair
(common for transmission and reception)
IN
7 X(A) (**) Negative side of clock balanced pair to
transmitter input
IN
8 GND IDU local ground
9 T(B) Positive side of transmitted data balanced pair OUT
10 C(B) Positive side of balanced pair of X.21 protocol
control line
OUT
11 R(B) Positive side of received data balanced pair IN
12 I(B) Positive side of balanced pair of X.21
connection indication line
IN
13 S(B) Positive side of input clock balanced pair
(common for transmission and reception)
IN
14 X(B) (**) Positive side of clock balanced pair to
transmitter input
IN
15 Not
connected
(*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e.g., OUT means
signal outgoing from IDU.
(**) The balanced pair X(A)/X(B) does not fully comply with X.21 standard. It is the
clock input to SRA L equipment from an external equipment which can be used
by the Q-Adapter unit to synchronize the TX data stream in order to allow
different transmission rates between the transmitted and received data.
For X.21 standard, the receiver and transmitter data transmission rate is equal
and the common clock line is provided by S(A)-S(B) balanced pair.
Pins 7 and 14 of X.21 standard are usually dedicated to byte synchronization by
means of B(A)-B(B) balanced pair. In any case, the utilization of the byte
synchronization line is not monitoring for X.21 standard. "Q(X.21)" connector
can be configured through the Controller unit.
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 43/56
Fig. 20 - Q(10BASE) interface
(*) These accessories are contained in the Q-Adapter unit kit (597-523/39), provided with external connection accessories
(597-524/10); for mounting see doc. "Connector assembling".
(**) This cable is not included in the installation materials
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
44/56 Issue 1, September 1999
2.9 Handset connection (optionaI)
For the connection of the handset, EOW unit (see Fig. 1 and Fig. 2) is provided with a
jack (see Fig. 21).
In Tab. 18, with reference to Fig. 21, the handset jack pin-out is set down.
Tab. 18 – Handset jack pin-out
Fig. 21 - View of handset jack
PIN SIGNAL MEANING DIRECTION (*)
1 T Red wire of the telephone twisted pair
(NEUTRIX jack type) or battery positive line
(A&C type jack)
IN/OUT
2 R Black wire of the telephone twisted pair
(NEUTRIX type jack) or battery negative line
(A&C type jack)
IN/OUT
3 S Shield connected to IDU internal ground
(*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e.g., OUT means
signal outgoing from IDU.
NOTE - The service teIephone channeI is onIy avaiIabIe shouId IDU be
equipped with EOW unit.
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 45/56
2.10 EOW expansion channeI connection (optionaI)
For the EOW expansion channel, EOW unit (see Fig. 1 and Fig. 2) is provided with two
9+9 (18)-pole, female µD connectors, identified by wording “EOW EXP” (see Fig. 22).
Two connectors are required to realize EOW channel daisy-chain structure.
In Tab. 19, with reference to Fig. 22, "EOW EXP" connector pin-out is set down.
Tab. 19 – "EOW EXP" connector pin-out
PIN SIGNAL MEANING DIRECTION (*)
1 R1AIN Wire "a" of input audio signal for exp. 1 IN
2 T1AOUT Wire "a" of output audio signal for exp. 1 OUT
3 S1MIN (**) M input signal for exp. 1 IN
4 Not connected
5 Not connected
6 R1BIN Wire "b" of input audio signal for exp. 1 IN
7 T1BOUT Wire "b" of output audio signal for exp. 1 OUT
8 S1EOUT (**) E input signal for exp. 1 OUT
9 Not connected
10 R2AIN Wire "a" of input audio signal for exp. 2 IN
11 T2AOUT Wire "a" of output audio signal for exp. 2 OUT
12 S2MIN (**) M input signal for exp. 2 IN
13 Not connected
14 Not connected
15 R2BIN Wire "b" of input audio signal for exp. 2 IN
16 T2BOUT Wire "b" of output audio signal for exp. 2 OUT
17 S2EOUT (**) E input signal for exp. 2 OUT
18 Not connected
(*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e.g., OUT means
signal outgoing from IDU.
(**) For the use of keyboard handset with DMTF signaling, don’t connect this wire.
NOTE - The service teIeohone channeI is onIy avaiIabIe shouId IDU be
equipped with EOW unit.
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
46/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 22 - EOW expansion channeI interface
(*) This EOW cable is included in the external connection accessories (597-524/10).
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 47/56
3 IDU-ODU IF INTERCONNECTION
Fig. 23 shows the ODU external connection elements.
Fig. 23 - View of ODU externaI connection eIements
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
48/56 Issue 1, September 1999
3.1 Antenna connection
For the wave-guide connection to the antenna, the ODU is provided with following
flange/wave-guide:
7 GHz 8 GHz 10.5
GHz
13 GHz
FIange/Wave-guide
type
UDR 84 UDR 84 UBR
100
UBR
120
15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz
FIange/Wave-guide
type
UBR
140
UBR
220
UBR
220
UBR
220
UBR
320
NOTE - In (1+1) Hot-Standby 1 antenna configuration, the ODUs are directIy
connected to the antenna by means of fIexibIe wave-guides of (1+1)
Hot-Standby kit (RF spIitter).
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 49/56
3.2 POE connection
For the connection to POE, the ODU is provided with a 19-pin, hermetic circular
connector (see Fig. 23 and Fig. 24), provided with protective cover.
In Tab. 20, with reference to Fig. 23, the connector pin-out is set down.
Fig. 24 - Front view of POE connector
NOTE - The POE, described into this document, can be used onIy with ODU
with P/N 732-201/XX.
AII the other ODUs (P/N 732-201/XXB, C and 732-221/XXB, C) are
not provided with muItipoIar connector or if such a connector is
present (for instance 732-201/07B, C and 732-201/08 B, C), it is not
wired inside with the exception of the wire that carries the AGC
voItage for the received fieId.
Besides, it is present a BNC that aIIows the AGC measurement of
the received fiIed.
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
50/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 20 – POE connector pin-out
PIN SIGNAL MEANING DIRECTION (*)
A DTTX-P Positive side of transmitted data balanced
pair (to IDU)
IN
B DTTX-N Negative side of transmitted data balanced
pair (to IDU)
IN
C CKTX-N Negative side of clock balanced pair
associated with transmitted data
(counter-directional interface)
OUT
D CKRX-N Negative side of clock balanced pair
associated with received data (codirectional
interface)
OUT
E DTRX-N Negative side of received data balanced
pair (from IDU)
OUT
F VCC +5 V supply voltage OUT
G Not connected
H -VB Negative side of POE power supply battery
voltage
OUT
J Not connected
K RX PWR Received signal level indication
(-4.5 V to -1 V = -90 to -20 dB aprox)
OUT
L IDU-CALL Call signal from ODU operator to local IDU
operator
IN
M IDU-RING Call signal from IDU operator to local ODU
operator
OUT
N LOCAL Call signal local ODU/remote equipment IN
P CKTX-P Positive side of clock balanced pair
associated with transmitted data
(counter-directional interface)
OUT
R CKRX-P Positive side of clock balanced pair
associated with received data (codirectional
interface)
OUT
S DTRX-P Positive side of received data balanced pair
(from IDU)
OUT
T Not connected
U TXPWRALM RF power alarm signaling OUT
V GND Connection to ODU general ground and
positive side of battery voltage
(*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to the ODU: e.g., OUT means
signal outgoing from ODU.
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 51/56
4 EXTERNAL CONNECTION ACCESSORIES
For the execution of the external connections, the SRA L equipment is provided with the
accessories listed in Tab. 21, Tab. 22, Tab. 23, Tab. 24, Tab. 25 and Tab. 26.
Tab. 21 – External connection accessories P/N 597-524/10
Item Cod. Description Q.ty Function
1 332-055/28 Power suppIy accessories 1 Power suppIy
422-060/16 Female connector 2
422-027/31 Female contact 4
422-027/35 Male contact 2
422-030/92 Shield shell for 15C conn. 2
422-059/16 Locking screw 4
147-016/02 Polyt. small. sack 1
216-21/469 Label 1
2 314-303/56 Ground cabIe 1 IDU grounding
3 332-055/50 Sub-D 25C accessories 1 AIarms
422-030/83 Shield shell for 25C conn. 1
422-062/61 25C male sub-connector 1
422-059/16 Locking screw 2
147-016/02 Polyt. small. sack 1
216-21/469 Label 1
4 332-055/49 BB accessories 1 RTM 1 unit
422-030/92 Shield shell for 25C conn. 1
422-062/86 25C male sub-connector 1
422-059/16 Locking screw 2
314-327/91 “OSM/N” coaxial tail 1
147-016/04 Polyt. sack 1
216-21/469 Label 1
(continue)
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
52/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 21 – External connection accessories P/N 597-524/10 (continue)
Item P/N Description Q.ty Function
5 332-055/49 BB accessories 1 RTM 2 unit
(onIy 1+1 or
2x(1+0) or Add
Drop)
422-030/92 Shield shell for 15C conn. 1
422-062/86 15C male sub-connector 1
422-059/16 Locking screw 2
314-327/91 "OSM/N" coaxial tail 1
147-016/04 Polyt. sack 1
216-21/469 Label 1
6 314-325/98 EOW cabIe 1 EOW unit
7 332-055/50 Sub-D 25C accessories 2 Trib. 8x2
2 Mbit/s
streams
422-030/83 Shield shell for 25C conn. 2
422-062/61 25C male sub-connector 2
422-059/16 Locking screw 2
147-016/02 Polyt. sack 2
216-21/469 Label 2
8 332-055/57 Sub-D 50C accessories 2 Trib. 16x2
2 Mbit/s
streams
422-058/81 Shield shell for 50C conn. 2
422-062/89 50C male sub-connector 2
422-059/16 Locking screw 2
147-016/13 Polyt. sack 2
216-21/469 Label 2
9 332-055/29 Sub-D 9C accessories 1 D ChanneI
Distributor unit
422-030/91 Shield shell for 9C conn. 2
422-062/60 9C male sub-connector 2
422-059/16 Locking screw 2
147-016/13 Polyt. sack 1
216-21/469 Label 1
(continue)
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 53/56
Tab. 21 – External connection accessories P/N 597-524/10 (continue)
Item P/N Description Q.tY Function
10 597-523/39 Kit for Q-Adapter unit 1 Q-Adapter unit
422-030/92 Shield shell for 15C conn. 1
422-062/64 15C female sub-connector 1
422-059/16 Locking screw 2
422-030/91 Shield shell for 9C conn. 1
422-062/60 9C male sub-connector 1
422-059/16 Locking screw 1
421-009/93 T coax. BNC adapter 1
421-009/96 BNC coax. terminat. 50 Ohm 1
421-009/21 50 Ohm BNC flyng plug 2
147-016/13 Box 1
11 314-205/76 InstaIIation kit 1
MOD. 10-52 ø 2.6-5.2 shrink tubing 1 m
PIR/15-25 PVC adhes tape 1
LEG/320-39 Cable TIE for internal inst. 50
BM/80-631
ø 6.4 tube term. for 25 mm
2
10
BM80649
ø 13 tube term. for 25 mm
2
10
RIB/5732-6
22
Inox steel screw M6×22 10
RIB/125-6 Inox steel washer ø 6 10
RIB/175-6 Inox steel spring washer ø 6 10
RIB/5588-6 Inox steel hex stail M6 10
RIB/5739-1
040
Inox steel screw M10×40 10
RIB/125-10 Inox steel washer ø 10 10
RIB/175-10 Inox steel spring washer ø 10 10
RIB/5588-1
0
Inox steel hex stail M10 10
LEG/31916 Cable TIE for external inst. 50
TEC/402 Adhes tape for coaxial cable 1
PL/40 Antistatic bacs 1
12 232-124/25 CoaxiaI cabIe fixing bracket 1 I/O cabIe
(fixing)
13 350-001/04 Box 1
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
54/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 22 – V bus daisy-chain kit P/N 597-524/09
Tab. 23 – Andrew coaxial cable and accessories
Tab. 24 – RFS-Kabelmetal coaxial cable and accessories
1) The Andrew and Kabelmetal coaxial cable are alternative to each other.
2) The quantities refer to single IDU/ODU Connection
3) The length of one IDU/ODU connection is at the maximum 400 m (standard
delivery is 30 m).
Item P/N Description Q.ty
1 314-327/88 120 Ohm termination connector (male) 1
2 314-327/89 120 Ohm termination connector (female) 1
3 314-327/90 Interconnection cable (male/female/male) 1
4 350-001/08 Box 1
Item P/N Description Q.ty Notes
1 314-327/79 CF 1/4” LDF1RN - 50 Ohm
coaxial cable
m 1, 2, 3
2 597-523/94
421-008/86
421-008/84
333-032/15
1/4” coaxial cable accessories
N type coaxial plug L1PNM-H N
90°N type coaxial plug L1PNR-HC
223158 Grounding Kit
1
1
1
2
1, 2
Item P/N Description Q.ty Notes
1 104-009/33 CF 1/4 Cu2Y - 50 Ohm coaxial cable m 1, 2, 3
2 597-523/94
421-008/24
421-008/23
333-031/80
1/4” coaxial cable accessories
N type coaxial plug 155 010 35
90°N type coaxial plug L1PNR-HC
223158 Grounding Kit
1
1
1
2
1, 2
SRA L External connections
53-001A8-201/E
Issue 1, September 1999 55/56
Tab. 25 – 120 Ohm electrical material set - 8x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-523/85)
1) To be used for the connections from the power supply distributor to "PS1" and
"PS2" connectors available on the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for
SRA L).
2) To be used for the connections from the station earthing system to rack, IF coaxial
cable and ODU (standard L = 20 m for SRA L).
3) To be used for the connections from the 120 Ohm - 2 Mbit/s streams distributor to
"1"-"4" and "5"-"8" connectors available on the 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit
(standard L = 2×15 m for SRA L).
4) To be used for the connections from the alarms distributor to "ALARMS"
connectors available on the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (standard L = 15 m for
SRA L).
Tab. 26 – 75 Ohm electrical material set - 8x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-523/86)
1) To be used for the connections from the power supply distributor to "PS1" and
"PS2" connectors available on the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for
SRA L).
2) To be used for the connections from the station earthing system to rack, IF coaxial
cable and ODU (standard L = 20 m for SRA L).
3) To be used for the connections from the 75 Ohm - 2 Mbit/s streams distributor to
"1"-"8" connectors available on the 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L =
2×15 m for SRA L).
4) To be used for the connections from the alarms distributor to "ALARMS"
connectors available on the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (standard L = 15 m for
SRA L).
Item P/N Description Notes
1 105-013/02
2×1.5 mm
2
bipolar shielded cable
1
2 103-037/60
YE-GR PVC 1×25 mm
2
grounding cable
2
3 104-041/23 8 pair double shield cable 3
4 106-001/62 13 pair double shield cable 4
Item P/N Description Notes
1 105-013/02
2×1.5 mm
2
bipolar shielded cable
1
2 103-037/60
YE-GR PVC 1×25 mm
2
grounding cable
2
3 104-041/22 75 Ohm coaxial cable TCE 2HH2 8(0.4-1.9) 3
4 106-001/62 13 pair double shield cable 4
External connections SRA L
53-001A8-201/E
56/56 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 27 – 120 Ohm electrical material set - 16x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-524/61)
1) To be used for the connections from the power supply distributor to "PS1" and
"PS2" connectors available on the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for
SRA L).
2) To be used for the connections from the station earthing system to rack, IF coaxial
cable and ODU (standard L = 20 m for SRA L).
3) To be used for the connections from the 120 Ohm - 2 Mbit/s streams distributor to
"1"-"8" and "9"-"16" connectors available on the 120 Ohm
2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for SRA L).
4) To be used for the connections from the alarms distributor to "ALARMS"
connectors available on the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (standard L = 15 m for
SRA L).
Tab. 28 – 75 Ohm electrical material set - 16x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-524/62)
1) To be used for the connections from the power supply distributor to "PS1" and
"PS2" connectors available on the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for
SRA L).
2) To be used for the connections from the station earthing system to rack, IF coaxial
cable and ODU (standard L = 20 m for SRA L).
3) To be used for the connections from the 75 Ohm - 2 Mbit/s streams distributor to
"1"-"8" connectors available on the 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L =
2×15 m for SRA L).
4) To be used for the connections from the alarms distributor to "ALARMS"
connectors available on the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (standard L = 15 m for
SRA L).
FINE
Item P/N Description Notes
1 105-013/02
2×1.5 mm
2
bipolar shielded cable
1
2 103-037/60
YE-GR PVC 1×25 mm
2
grounding cable
2
3 (*) 16 pair double shield cable 3
4 106-001/62 13 pair double shield cable 4
Item P/N Description Notes
1 105-013/02
2×1.5 mm
2
bipolar shielded cable
1
2 103-037/60
YE-GR PVC 1×25 mm
2
grounding cable
2
3 104-041/23 75 Ohm coaxial cable TCE 2HH2 16 (0.4-1.9) 3
4 106-001/62 13 pair double shield cable 4
NOTE - (*) P/N IMC 3399QIPA
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
2/62 Issue 1, September 1999
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/62
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 SELF-LOCKING COAXIAL PLUG (421-015/60) FOR 75 OHM
COAXIAL CABLE (104-102/21-22) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . 5
3 SHIELD SHELL 9-15-25-50 PIN CONNECTOR
(422-030/90-93) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
4 SHIELD SHELL 9-15-25-50 PIN CONNECTOR
(422-062/60..61..64..86..89) ASSEMBLING
INSTRUCTIONS WITH MULTIPAIRS CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
5 SUB-D 9-15-25-50 CONTACTS CONNECTOR
(422-062/60..61..64..86..89) WITH MULTIPAIRS CABLE
(METALLIC SHELL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
6 SUB-D 25..50 CONTACTS CONNECTOR (422-062/61..89) WITH
75 Ohm MULTICOAXIAL CABLE (104-102/22..23) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
7 METALLIC SHELL (422-030/83 and 422-058/81) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
8 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR (422-060/16, 422-027/31-35)
WITH BIPOLAR SHIELDED 2x1.5 mmq POWER SUPPLY
CABLE (105-013/02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
9 BNC COAXIAL PLUG (421-009/21) FOR ETH 3120 50 OHM
COAXIAL CABLE (104-013/01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
10 KABELMETAL COAXIAL N-PLUG (421-008/24) AND COAXIAL
N90°- (421-008/23) PLUG ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 26
11 KABELMETAL GROUNDING KIT (333-031/80)
ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
12 ANDREW COAXIAL 90°N-PLUG (421-008/84) MOUNTING
INSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
13 COAXIAL PLUG L1PNM-H (421-008/86) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
14 ANDREW GROUNDING KIT (333-032/15) ASSEMBLING
INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
15 CRIMP TOOL (323-003/19) FOR POWER SUPPLY
CONNECTOR (422-060/16, 422-027/31-35) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
4/62 Issue 1, September 1999
Illustrations
Fig. 1 Dimensions of 9-15-25-50 contact connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Fig. 1 Dimensions of 9-15-25-50 contact connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Fig. 2 Dimensions of metallic shell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fig. 3 Power supply connector. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Fig. 4 Kabelmetal coaxial plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Fig. 5 Andrew coaxial 90°N-plug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Fig. 6 Andrew coaxial N-plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Fig. 7 Andrew grounding kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/62
1 GENERAL
This document provides useful information for the installation personnel about the cable
installation and the connector assembling.
2 SELF-LOCKING COAXIAL PLUG (421-015/60)
FOR 75 OHM COAXIAL CABLE
(104-102/21-22) ASSEMBLING
INSTRUCTIONS
PROCEDURE:
1. Insert the ferrule over the cable and cut the cable sheat, braid, dielectric and central
conductor accoring to the measurement indicated here below.
2. Introduce the dielectric central conductor until resting, crimp by crimping tool.
3. Introduce the central onductor in the coaxial plug until the central conductor blocks,
arrage the braid on plug body and push the ferrule until it rests against the plug and
crimp by crimping tool.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
6/62 Issue 1, September 1999
3 SHIELD SHELL 9-15-25-50 PIN CONNECTOR
(422-030/90-93) ASSEMBLING
INSTRUCTIONS
Fig. 1 shows the connector dimensions.
Fig. 1 – Dimensions of 9-15-25-50 contact connectors
P/N
PIN
CONTACT
DIMENSIONS
max. A max. B C D E max. F
422-030/91 9 15 31.30 25 - 23.3 8
422-030/92 15 15 39.62 33.3 16.5 23.3 9
422-030/93 25 15 53.52 47 30.4 37 11
422-030/90 50 19 67.41 61.1 44.3 51.5 14.9
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/62
PROCEDURE:
1. Fit both (cable and connector) into the shell and position the cable ring in its
appropriate seat.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
8/62 Issue 1, September 1999
2. Fix the cable clamp with the three screws supplied. Each shell is equipped with two
different cable clamps. Choose the more suitable for the size of the cable and
discard the other one in accordance with the table below.
(*) A = small
B = large
P/N
SHELL
PIN
CONTACT
CABLE CLAMP
(*)
CABLE
DIAM.
422-030/91 9
A
B
4-6
6-8
422-030/92 15
A
B
5-8
8-10
422-030/93 25
A
B
5-8.5
8.5-11
422-030/90 50
A
B
9-1
12-14.5
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 9/62
3. Fit the two fixing screws in the appropriate seats of the shell.
4. Close the two halves of the shell by pressing them together with a hand press.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
10/62 Issue 1, September 1999
4 SHIELD SHELL 9-15-25-50 PIN CONNECTOR
(422-062/60..61..64..86..89) ASSEMBLING
INSTRUCTIONS WITH MULTIPAIRS CABLE
PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the sheat to a lenght suitable for the dimensions of the ferrule.
2. Insert the cable throught the cable-ring and through the contact bush.
3. Position the cable-ring at the distance shown in the figure.
4. Place the contact ring against the contact bush.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 11/62
5. For the double shield cable, cut the metal braid and the ground wire to a lenght of
9/10 mm and bend them back the contact ring.
Cut the metal ribbon to completely free the twisted pairs.
6. Connect the cable to the connector.
7. Fit both (cable and connector) into the shell and position the cable ring in its
appropriate seat.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
12/62 Issue 1, September 1999
5 SUB-D 9-15-25-50 CONTACTS CONNECTOR
(422-062/60..61..64..86..89) WITH
MULTIPAIRS CABLE (METALLIC SHELL)
PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the sheat to a lenght suitable for the dimensions of the ferrule.
2. Insert the cable throught the cable-ring.
3. Position the cable-ring at the distance shown in the figure.
4. For the double shield cable, cut the metal braid and the ground wire to a lenght of
9/10 mm and bend them back the contact ring.
Cut the metal ribbon to completely free the twisted pairs.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 13/62
5. Connect the cable to the connector.
6. Fit both (cable and connector) into the shell and position the cable ring in its
appropriate seat.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
14/62 Issue 1, September 1999
6 SUB-D 25..50 CONTACTS CONNECTOR
(422-062/61..89) WITH 75 Ohm
MULTICOAXIAL CABLE (104-102/22..23)
PROCEDURE:
1. Insert the HEATSHRINK SLEEVE with length 40 mm on the cable and trim the
OUTER SHEATH according to the measures pointed out here below.
2. Trim the SHEATH, the BRAID, the DIELECTRIC and the CENTRAL
CONDUCTOR of all the eight single cables according to the measures pointed out
here below.
3. Position the HEATSHRINK SLEEVE on the OUTER SHEATH and on the INNER
ones, as pointed out here below.
Heat the heatshrink sleeve ensuring that it adheres well on the inner and outer sheaths.
* = Dimension to be used for the 8 coax cable (104-102/22)
** = Dimension to be used for the 16 coax cable (104-102/23)
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 15/62
4. Connect the cable to the connector. Use a piece of the central conductor to execute
the ground inner connections.
5. Insert the cable and the connector into the shielded shell, as pointed out at point 7.
Pay maximum attention to connect all the BRAIDS of the single cables to the cable
clamp of the shell itself.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
16/62 Issue 1, September 1999
7 METALLIC SHELL (422-030/83 and
422-058/81)
Fig. 2 shows the connector dimensions.
Fig. 2 – Dimensions of metallic shell
P/N
CONTACTS

A
±0.3
B
±0.3
C
±0.3
D
±0.3
E
±0.3
F
Max
422-030/83 25 28 47 54 45 15.4 11.3
422-058/81 50 42 61.1 67.8 48 18.5 15
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 17/62
PROCEDURE:
1. Fit both (cable and connector) into the shell and position the cable ring in its
appropriate seat.
2. Fix the CABLE CLAMP with the two screws supplied.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
18/62 Issue 1, September 1999
3. Fit the two FIXING SCREWS in the appropriate seats of the shell.
4. Close the two HALVES OF THE SHELL by pressing them together with a hand
press
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 19/62
5. Fix the two halves of the shell inserting and screwing a screw on both sides into the
proper available seats
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
20/62 Issue 1, September 1999
8 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR (422-060/16,
422-027/31-35) WITH BIPOLAR SHIELDED
2x1.5 mmq POWER SUPPLY CABLE
(105-013/02)
Fig. 3 shows the parts composing the power supply connector.
Fig. 3 – Power supply connector
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 21/62
PROCEDURE:
1. Remove the sheat to a lenght suitable for the dimensions of the ferrule.
2. Insert the cable throught the cable-ring and through the contact bush.
3. Position the cable-ring at the distance shown in the figure.
4. Place the contact ring against the contact bush.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
22/62 Issue 1, September 1999
5. Cut the METAL BRAID to a length of 9-10 mm and bend it back to cover the
CONTACT RING.
6. Unsheath the two wires as shown on the drawing.
7. Insert the two unsheathed wires into the female contacts (422-027/31) as shown
on the drawing
and crimp them with the crimp tool. (323-003/15).
8. Insert the contact with the 1-brand cable set to pos. “A1” and the contact with the
2-brand cable set to pos. “A3”, as certain that the contacts are securely
snap-fastened into position.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 23/62
9. Insert the male contact (422-027/35) with no wire crimped into pos. “A2”.
10. Insert the whole (i.e. cable and connector) into the shielded shell (see par. 3).
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
24/62 Issue 1, September 1999
9 BNC COAXIAL PLUG (421-009/21) FOR ETH
3120 50 OHM COAXIAL CABLE (104-013/01)
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 25/62
PROCEDURE:
1. Insert the Ferrule over the cable and cut the cable Sheath, Braid, Dielectric and
Central Conductor according to the measurements indicated here below
2. Introduce the dielectric Central Conductor until resting, crimp by Crimp Tool
(236-100/15)
3. Introduce the Central Conductor in the BNC Coaxial Plug until the central
Conductor blocks, arrange the Braid on Plug Body and push the Ferrule until it
rests against the plug and crimp by Crimp Tool (236-100/15)
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
26/62 Issue 1, September 1999
10 KABELMETAL COAXIAL N-PLUG
(421-008/24) AND COAXIAL N90°-
(421-008/23) PLUG ASSEMBLING
INSTRUCTIONS
Fig. 4 shows the parts composing the Kabelmetal coaxial N/N90°plugs.
Fig. 4 – Kabelmetal coaxial plugs
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 27/62
PROCEDURE:
1. Trim the cable in a right angle to the cable longitudinal axis.
2. Trim the cable SHEATH according to the measure pointed out here below.
**Warning** Do not strain the cable during the trimming operation.
3. Insert the O-RING (1) on the cable. Position it into the last valley of the corrugated
shield.
4. Insert the CABLE-CLAMP (2) on the cable until to reach the perfect contact on the
SHEATH and on the O-RING (1).
5. Let the CABLE-CLAMP lightly sliding in the opposite direction of the insertion, until
the CLAMPING TEETH enter the first corrugation valley.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
28/62 Issue 1, September 1999
6. Let the CABLE-CLAMP lightly sliding over the CLAMPING TEETH until to reach
the contact.
7. Remove the visible CORRUGATED SHIELD by means of cutting nippers and
pliers. Apply a rotation force through wich it is possible using as a reference the
connector CABLE-CLAMP and paying the maximum attention, to reach directly the
correct trimming of the shield.
8. After having removed the visible corrugated shield, check that the ending part of
the not removed corrugated shield creates a supporting lip on the clamping teeth.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 29/62
9. Remove the visible DIELECTRIC and if it is necessary clean the central conductor
from dielectric residues.
10. Trim the CENTRAL CONDUCTOR according to the measure pointed out here
below. Apply a rotation force by means of cutting nippers and chamfer the
trimming edge by means of a file.
11. Insert the CENTRAL BODY (3) until to reach the contact with the CABLE-CLAMP
(2).
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
30/62 Issue 1, September 1999
12. Screw together the CENTRAL BODY (3) and the CABLE-CLAMP (2) (The
tightening torque is about 8 Nm). Pay particular **ATTENTION** to keep at rest the
CENTRAL BODY (3) and to let rotating the CABLE-CLAMP (2) only.
13. To tape the 90°N COAXIAL PLUG and the COAXIAL CABLE with the ADHES
TAPE FOR COAXIAL, CABLE (TEC/402) supplied with INSTALLATION KIT
(314-205/76), in order to assure a complete tightly. First of all wrap the ADHES
TAPE FOR COAXIAL CABLE to the CABLE, in advance take care to heat and to
tight the ADHES TAPE FOR COAXIAL CABLE, and besides to put on at least by
a half tape width.
14. To repeat the operation of item "13" with the PVC ADHES TAPE (PIR/15-25)
supplied with INSTALLATION KIT (314-205/76), wrapping the PVC ADHES TAPE
over the ADHES TAPE FOR COAXIAL CABLE.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 31/62
11 KABELMETAL GROUNDING KIT (333-031/80)
ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS
THE KIT CONTAINS :
1 - Earthing clamp
2 - Clamp lining
3 - Butyl sealing compound
4 - Self bonding tape
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
32/62 Issue 1, September 1999
PROCEDURE:
1. Clean the plastic jacket at the desired earthing point and cut out a strip of approx
26 mm.
2. Push the clamp lining (2) on the outer conductor.
Push the earthing clamp (1) over the linings and screw togheter.
3. Remove both layers of paper from the butyl sealing compound (3) and form it
equilateral around the cable and earthing clamp.
Press carefully all compound edges together, tight to the cable and earthing clamp.
ATTENTION !
Install EARTHING KIT only the cable runs straight.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 33/62
4. Fold on of the overlapping edges in front of and the other one behind the earthing
outlet.
Press and farm it tightly to cable and earthing clamp.
5. Cut from the self bonding tape (4) two strips of each 8 cm and one strip of 5 cm.
Wrap the two 8 cm strips in a parallel overlapping fashion over the compound on
cable and earthing outlet, wrap now the 5 cm strip overlapping onto the compound
edge, around the earthing outlet.
6. Wrap thigt the remaining tape over the uncovered part of the compound and make
sure that the tape overlapps the compound on the cable at least by a half tape
width.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
34/62 Issue 1, September 1999
12 ANDREW COAXIAL 90° N-PLUG (421-008/84)
MOUNTING INSTRUCTION
Fig. 5 shows the parts composing the Andrew coaxial 90°N-plug.
A - Connector
B - Clamping nut
C - O-ring
D - O-ring
E - Heat-shrink tube
F - Adhesive
G - Trim gauge
Fig. 5 – Andrew coaxial 90°N-plug
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 35/62
PROCEDURE:
1. Cut the cable into the CORRUGATION VALLEY
2. Cut the CABLE JACKET for a lenght of 32 mm
3. Insert on the shield the O-RING (C), apply on the ring the SILICONE GREASE (F).
Do not touch the grease with fingers
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
36/62 Issue 1, September 1999
4. Insert the CLAMPING NUT (B) on the cable till to touch the O-RING (C)
5. Cut, by means of a FINE-TOOTHED SAW, THE METALLIC SHIELD at the base
of the CLAMPING NUT.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 37/62
6. In the same position described at the preceding point engrave the DIELECTRIC
MATERIAL by means of a cutter and remove it.
7. Insert the tip of a knife between the FOAM and the OUTER CONDUCTOR of the
cable and separate them so that the OUTER CONDUCTOR touch the CLAMPING
NUT
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
38/62 Issue 1, September 1999
8. Place the TRIM GAUGE (G) over the INNER CONDUCTOR and against the
CLAMPING NUT. Cut the INNER CONDUCTOR
9. Remove the TRIM GAUGE and deburr the INNER CONDUCTOR with a file and let
at sight a part of it with lenght 9mm
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 39/62
10. Lubricate the O-RING by means of the SILICONE (F) and insert the O-RING on the
CLAMPING NUT. Do not touch the SILICONE with fingers.
11. Insert the OUTER BODY (A) on the CLAMPING NUT (B).
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
40/62 Issue 1, September 1999
12. Keeping stopped the 1/2" WRENCH on the CLAMPING NUT, rotate clockwise the
9/16 WRENCH on the OUTER BODY (Force = 5-6 Nm)
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 41/62
13. To tape the 90°N-PLUG and the COAXIAL CABLE with the ADHES TAPE FOR
COAXIAL CONNECTOR (TEC/402) supplied with INSTALLATION KIT
(314-205/76), in order to assure a complete tightly. First of all wrap the ADHES
TAPE FOR COAXIAL CONNECTOR to the CABLE, in advance take care to heat
and to tight the ADHES TAPE FOR COAXIAL CONNECTOR, and besides to put
on at least by a half tape width.
14. To repeat the operation of item "13" with the PVC ADHES TAPE (PIR/15-25)
supplied with Installation Kit (314-205/76), wrapping the PVC ADHES TAPE over
the ADHES TAPE for COAXIAL CONNECTOR .
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
42/62 Issue 1, September 1999
13 COAXIAL PLUG L1PNM-H (421-008/86)
Fig. 6 shows the parts composing the coaxial N-plug.
A - Connector
B - Clamping nut
C - O-ring
D - O-ring
E - Heat-shrink tube
F - Adhesive
G - Trim gauge
Fig. 6 – Andrew coaxial N-plug
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 43/62
PROCEDURE:
1. Cut the cable into the CORRUGATION VALLEY
2. Cut the CABLE JACKET for a lenght of 32 mm
3. Insert on the shield the O-RING (C) apply on the ring the SILICONE GREASE (F)
Do not touch the grease with fingers
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
44/62 Issue 1, September 1999
4. Insert the CLAMPING NUT (B) on the cable till to touch the O-RING (C)
5. Cut, by means of a FINE-TOOTHED SAW, THE METALLIC SHIELD at the base
of the CLAMPING NUT.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 45/62
6. In the same position described at the preceding point engrave the DIELECTRIC
MATERIAL by means of a cutter and remove it
7. Insert the tip of a knife between the FOAM and the OUTER CONDUCTOR of the
cable and separate them so that the OUTER CONDUCTOR touch the CLAMPING
NUT
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
46/62 Issue 1, September 1999
8. Place the TRIM GAUGE (G) over the INNER CONDUCTOR and against the
CLAMP NUT. Cut the INNER CONDUCTOR
9. Remove the TRIM GAUGE and deburr the INNER CONDUCTOR with a file
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 47/62
10. Slide the INNER CONNECTOR onto the CONDUCTOR
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
48/62 Issue 1, September 1999
11. Insert the SPACING GAUGE (E) to properly position the INNER CONNECTOR
during assembly
12. Solder the INNER CONNECTOR in place using the solder hole provided
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 49/62
13. Shave off any excess solder or flux residue with a knife or buff it carefully
14. Add the bigger O-RING (D) to the CLAMPING NUT. Apply a thin coating of silicone
grease to the outer surface of the O-RING. Keep all the CLAMPING NUT threads
free of grease.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
50/62 Issue 1, September 1999
15. Thread the OUTER BODY (A) onto the CLAMPING NUT (B). Hold the CLAMPING
NUT and turn only the OUTER BODY (connector) (Force = 5.4 ± 0.5 Nm)
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 51/62
14 ANDREW GROUNDING KIT (333-032/15)
ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS
Fig. 7 shows the parts composing the Andrew grounding kit.
A - Ground wire
B - Butyl rubber tape
C - Bolt
D - Nut
E - Flat washer
F - Lock washer
G - Electrical tape
H - Cable ties
I - Conductive grease
Fig. 7 – Andrew grounding kit
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
52/62 Issue 1, September 1999
PROCEDURE:
1. Position the ground wire terminal (if attached) to the attachment point (bus bar,
etc.).
Then, position the ground strap on the transmission line and mark the location.
Remove 63 mm of jacket for attachment of the ground strap.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 53/62
2. Cut off a piece of butyl rubber tape 76 mm long and wrap it around the ground wire
near the ground strap.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
54/62 Issue 1, September 1999
3. Wrap the ground strap around the conductor so that the appropriate slot is
exposed.
4. Install the cables ties in the proper slots according to the type of cable.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 55/62
5. Tighten the cables ties with pliers and cut off the excess.
WARNING – Do not rotate or otherwise move the ground strap after
tightening.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
56/62 Issue 1, September 1999
6. Press and form butyl rubber tape on the entire ground wire to the jacket of cable or
waveguide.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 57/62
7. Cut off a piece of butyl rubber tape 76 mm long and fold it twice to make a small
square. Press and form this tape onto the flange of the ground strap.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
58/62 Issue 1, September 1999
8. Starting at the bottom, wrap the butyl rubber tape over the entire connection in a
half-width, overlapping pattern, stretching the tape as you wrap.
Continue upward to a point 25 mm above the ground strap. Squeeze the tape along
its edges to form it to the connection.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 59/62
9. Wrap five layers of electrical tape over the entire connection so that each layer
extends 25 mm beyond the ends of the previous tape layer.
Start wrapping at the bottom, below the butyl rubber tape, and overlap the tape at
half-width.
Stretch the tape enough to avoid forming wrinkles.
Reverse wrapping directions at the end of each layer.
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
60/62 Issue 1, September 1999
10. Do not stretch the tape for the last two turns of the fifth layer to avoid unraveling
because of tension on the adhesive.
Tightly squezee the completed wrapping with both hands to ensure that the layers
are secure.
SRA L Connector assembling
53-001A8-202/E
Issue 1, September 1999 61/62
15 CRIMP TOOL (323-003/19) FOR POWER
SUPPLY CONNECTOR (422-060/16,
422-027/31-35)
THE SPECIAL TOOL CONSISTS OF ONE CRIMP TOOL AND TWO MATRIX
* WARNING * = ONE TOOL FOR EACH INSTALLATION TEAM HAS TO BE
SUPPLIED
Connector assembling SRA L
53-001A8-202/E
62/62 Issue 1, September 1999
* WARNING * = ONE TOOL FOR EACH INSTALLATION TEAM HAS TO BE
SUPPLIED
FINE
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
2/26 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/26
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2 PRELIMINARY CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
3 START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5 ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
5.1 Alignment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5.2 Standard antenna adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
5.2.1 Fine adjustment in elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.2.1.1 Adjustment between +5°and -50°(see Fig. 4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.2.1.2 Adjustment between -5°and +50°(see Fig. 5 and Fig. 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
5.2.2 Fine adjustment in azimuth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.2.3 Crossed polarization optimization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
5.3 Elevation and azimuth adjustment for slim antenna ∅20/30 cm. . . . . . . . . 20
5.4 Elevation and azimuth adjustment for slim antenna ∅60 cm . . . . . . . . . . . 21
6 FINAL CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6.1 Normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
6.2 Alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
4/26 Issue 1, September 1999
Illustrations
Fig. 1 IDU P/N 732-101/01 front view (fully equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fig. 2 IDU P/N 732-101/11 front view (fully equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fig. 3 ODU external view. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Fig. 4 Standard antenna: fine adjustment in elevation between +5°and -50°. . . . 15
Fig. 5 Standard antenna: presetting for adjustment in elevation between
+5°and -50°. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Fig. 6 Standard antenna: fine adjustment in elevation between +5°and -50°. . . . 17
Fig. 7 Standard antenna: fine adjustment in azimuth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Fig. 8 Standard antenna in (1+0): crossed polarization optimization. . . . . . . . . . . 19
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/26
Tables
Tab. 1 LED lighting up status in normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
6/26 Issue 1, September 1999
1 GENERAL
This document describes the actions to be carried out for setting the equipment to work,
the equipment having been assembled (see document "Equipment installation), the
hardware presettings (see document "Presettings") and the external connections (see
document "External connections") performed.
An external device (multimeter) can be used by the external operator to obtain the
measurement of the received power field. This device, when utilized, has to be plugged
in the ODU special connector (BNC type), after removing the protective cover (see
document "External connections").
Fig. 1, Fig. 2, and Fig. 3 show the external views of IDU, ODU where all the connectors,
LEDs, commands and test points, utilized during the activation phase, are pointed out.
NOTE – Should doubts arise while executing the activation actions
(especially as far as the antenna alignment is concerned), address
to the factory.
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/26
Fig. 1 – IDU P/N 732-101/01 front view (fully equipped)
(*) Optional
(**) Not present in (1 + 0) configuration
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
8/26 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 2 – IDU P/N 732-101/11 front view (fully equipped)
(*) Optional
(**) Not present in (1 + 0) configuration
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 9/26
Fig. 3 – ODU external view
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
10/26 Issue 1, September 1999
2 PRELIMINARY CHECKS
All the units, the equipment consists of, are tested and adjusted in the factory;
consequently, no checks are required on these units during installation.
Before activating the equipment, the following preliminary checks have to be performed:
– Before supplying the equipment check that the equipment (IDU and ODU) is
connected to the protection ground. Such a connection has not to be removed or
damaged.
– Check the IDU is correctly equipped, according to the requirements of the specific
utilization configuration (see the document "Equipment composition").
– Check the IDU is connected in redundant way to the power supply line from the
station battery ("PS1" and "PS2" connectors of 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit).
– Check the IF connection is made between IDU and each ODU.
– Check all the IDU external connections are made, according to the requirements
of the specific utilization configuration.
– Check the wave-guide connections between the antenna and ODU have been
carried out.
3 START-UP
To activate the equipment, act as follows:
– Apply the voltage to the power supply line from station batteries.
– Check that, on the Controller unit, leds "INT", "URG" and "∑" are lit.
– Set to "ON" the main switch "POWER" of the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit.
– Check the green LED is lit on the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit.
– At initialization phase end (display of RTM unit lit), check the following IDU LEDs
are off:
• red LEDs "∆
\
", "INT", "NURG" and yellow LEDs "ABN", "IND" of Controller unit
WARNING – Should the equipment configuration be modified on field, it
is necessary to execute the relevant presettings in the
2 Mbit/s Tributary unit according to instructions set down in
document "Presettings".
WARNING – The IDU can be connected to the power supply line of the
station batteries even in non redundant way. In such a case,
only the input relevant to "PS1" connector has to be utilized.
WARNING – To ensure the operators' safety, make sure that no operator
is facing the antenna when the equipment is activated.
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 11/26
• red LEDs "OPEN CABLE", "ODU OVL", "∆
\
", "BER" of RTM unit
• red LED "∆
\
" and yellow LED "TEMP" of Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (if
equipped)
• red LED "∆
\
" of EOW unit (if equipped)
• red LED "∆
\
" of Q-Adapter unit (if equipped).
The status of the other LEDs located on the IDU front panel is not significant since it
depends on equipment operating conditions.
4 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Before the operational use of the equipment, it is necessary to software configure both
the radio link and the equipment, according to the system outfit and configuration and
the customer operational requirements.
The software configuration can be carried out, either in local way or in remote way,
through a PC, on which the special software is loaded. In local mode, the service PC
has to be plugged in the "PC" connector of the Controller unit (see document "External
connections"). For the use of the configuration software, refer to the software OMN
Manual. The equipment comes with default TCP/IP address and netmask set. It can
therefore be conected to the PC only using the localne.map IP map (see OMN Manual
for details).
Should the software configuration have been already executed at factory under
customer request, it is necessary, in any case, to check it before the equipment
utilization to ensure a correct and reliable operation.
5 ALIGNMENT
The alignment procedure consists in positioning the antenna according to the maximum
field direction.
This procedure can be directly performed by ODU operator.
NOTE – In this phase, the red LED "URG", of Controller unit, is not
significant since it can be lit on account of the misalignment of the
corresponding antenna and/or the deactivation of the
corresponding remote terminal. In operating conditions
(equipment activated, antenna aligned, remote terminal activated),
the mentioned LED is off.
WARNING – The first setting of the TCP/IP connection parameters must
be executed in local mode, insulating the equipment from
the rest of the network or of the link.
WARNING – The antenna alignment is indispensable to ensure the
equipment correct operation and to make reliable the radio
link towards the remote terminal.
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
12/26 Issue 1, September 1999
5.1 Alignment procedure
For the antenna alignment, act as follows:
– Check the antenna is positioned in accordance with the specified coordinates for
the site both on local terminal and remote terminal.
– Check the local terminal and the remote one are activated (see par. 3).
– Set the equipment for the received power measurement. The reading of the RF
received power can be made either on the "RCV FIELD" display, of the RTM unit
(digital indication in dBm) and on multimeter. Besides, the RF received power can
be measured by applying an analog voltmeter to the relevant test point of AUX
connector in this case, remove the protective cover to get access to the connector.
The RF received power analog indication ranges between -5 V (maximum power)
and -0.5 V (-90 dBm approx.). Sensitivity is 0.5V/decade, approx.
– Carry out the antenna centering by the fine adjustment in azimuth and elevation
(see par. 5.2), in order to position the antenna in correspondence of the maximum
value of the received power.
– Execute the centering procedure also in the remote terminal.
– If necessary, execute the optimization by means of the crossed polarization on
both the local and remote terminal.
5.2 Standard antenna adjustment
The antenna adjustments are carried out in the same way for all the system
configurations, since the antenna supporting frame, where the adjusting devices are
located, is always the same. The antenna adjusting procedures are here below
described, with reference to (1+0) configuration.
NOTE – The centering procedure has to be made on every terminal at least
twice alternatively, before the final positioning.
– For the correct equipment operation, it is necessary that the value
on "RCV FIELD" display of RTM unit ranges between -91 dBm (min.
received power) and -30 dBm (max. received power) with nominal
indication accuracy. Should the received power be below the
minimum threshold, number "-99" is displayed. Instead, should the
received power exceeds the maximum threshold, the value power
indication accurancy makes worse since the ODU Rx RF chain
saturates and so prevents the equipment damaging limiting the
signal level. Up to real received signal power -20 dBm the
equipments works correctly with BER ≤ 10
-10
.
NOTE – The antenna adjustments have to be carried out with the local and
remote terminals activated and operating.
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 13/26
5.2.1 Fine adjustment in elevation
The antenna, according to its arrangement, can be fine adjusted in elevation between:
– +5°and -50°: adjusting screw in upper position
– -5°and +50°: adjusting screw in lower position.
This is valid for both the antenna mounting modes (right hand and left hand pole)..
5.2.1.1 Adjustment between +5°and -50°(see Fig. 4)
– Loosen the three screws (1) blocking the elevation on the antenna supporting
frame.
– Act on the elevation adjusting screw (2):
• clockwise (A): up
• counterclockwise (B): down.
– At the end of the action, screw down the three screws (1) blocking the elevation on
the antenna supporting frame.
5.2.1.2 Adjustment between -5°and +50°(see Fig. 5 and Fig. 6)
Prior to proceed, it is necessary to arrange the antenna supporting frame for the
adjustment between -5°and +50°, by acting as follows (refer to Fig. 5):
– Remove the three screws (1) and the relevant washers (2-3) and nuts (4) blocking
the elevation on the antenna supporting frame.
– Move each blocking elevation screw (1) to the opposed end of the relevant slot (5).
– Screw down the three blocking elevation screws (1) with relevant washers (2-3)
and nuts (4) in the new position.
– Take away the elevation adjusting screw (6) by backing off the two fixing screws
(7) and the relevant washers (8).
– Mount the antenna adjusting screw (2), rotated by 180°, in the lower part of the
antenna supporting frame and screw down the two fixing screws (7) by relevant
washers (8).
The frame having been arranged, proceed to the adjustment in elevation between -5°
and +50°, with reference to Fig. 6, acting as follows:
– Loosen the three screws (1) blocking the elevation on the antenna supporting
frame.
– Act on the elevation adjusting screw (2):
• clockwise (A): up
• counterclockwise (B): down.
– On procedure completion, tighten the three screws (1) blocking the elevation on the
antenna supporting frame.
NOTE – The antenna is always delivered with the supporting frame
arranged for left pole mounting and for elevation adjustment
between +5°and -50°.
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
14/26 Issue 1, September 1999
5.2.2 Fine adjustment in azimuth
The antenna can be adjusted in azimuth between ±7°. To adjust in azimuth the antenna,
act as follows (refer to Fig. 7):
– Loosen the nuts (1) securing the two upper U-bolts (2)
– Act on azimuth adjusting screw (3):
• clockwise (A)
• counterclockwise (B)
– On procedure completion, tighten the nuts (1) fixing the two upper U-bolts (2).
5.2.3 Crossed polarization optimization
For the crossed polarization optimization, a fine adjustment between ±5°is possible on
every antenna.
To execute this procedure act as follows (refer to Fig. 8):
– Loosen the four screws (1) blocking the antenna on it supporting frame.
– Act on one of the two screws (2-3) for crossed polarization adjustment:
• upper screw (2): adjustment from 0°to -5°
• lower screw (3): adjustment from 0°to +5°.
– On procedure completion, tighten the four screws (1) blocking the antenna on its
supporting frame.
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 15/26
Fig. 4 – Standard antenna: fine adjustment in elevation between +5°and -50°
1 - M10×30 hex. head screw
2 - Elevation adjusting screw
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
16/26 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 5 – Standard antenna: presetting for adjustment in elevation between +5°and -50°
1 - M10×30 hex, head screw
2 - Flat washer
3 - Spring washer
4 - Hexagonal nut
5 - Slot
6 - Elevation adjusting screw
7 - Screw
8 - Washer
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 17/26
Fig. 6 – Standard antenna: fine adjustment in elevation between +5°and -50°
1 - TE M10×30 hex. head screw
2 - Elevation adjusting screw
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
18/26 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 7 – Standard antenna: fine adjustment in azimuth
1 - Hex. nut
2 - U-bolt
3 - Azimuth adjusting screw
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 19/26
Fig. 8 – Standard antenna in (1+0): crossed polarization optimization
1 - M8×20 hex. head screw
2 - M6×40 hex. head screw, adjustment from 0°to -5°
3 - M6×40 hex. head screw, adjustment from 0°to +5°
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
20/26 Issue 1, September 1999
5.3 Elevation and azimuth adjustment for slim antenna ∅20/30
cm
Fig. 9 – Slim antenna ∅20/30 cm: adjustment in elevation and azimuth
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 21/26
5.4 Elevation and azimuth adjustment for slim antenna ∅60
cm
Fig. 10 – Slim antenna ∅60 cm: adjustment in elevation and azimuth
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
22/26 Issue 1, September 1999
6 FINAL CHECKS
The antennas having been aligned, the following checks have to be carried out with both
the local and remote terminals activated:
– Check all the red and yellow LEDs of IDU alarm signaling are off; the lighting up
status of the other LEDs must comply with the operational condition (see Tab. 1).
– Check on "RCV FIELD" display of every RTM unit, a value ranging between -91
dBm (min. received power value) and -30 dBm (max. received power value) is
displayed.
The equipment operating status could be verified through the PC, via software (see
software OMN Manual).
A malfunction is signaled:
– by the alarm/status LEDs installed on the front panel of the IDU units and by
resuming optical indications of rack alarm
– by software through the alarm signallings displayed on the PC or on the
supervision system.
6.1 Normal operating conditions
The equipment normal operating conditions are pointed out by:
– alarm signaling red lamp (if present) off, on the rack top
– all the alarm signaling red LEDs off, on IDU front panel
– green LED on, signaling the supply voltage presence, on 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit
front panel
– all the other signaling LED, located on IDU front panel, in the status expected for
the current operating condition of the equipment
– transmitted and received RF power at nominal values.
– absence of alarm signaling via software.
In Tab. 1 the status is indicated of the signaling LEDs, located on the front panel of IDU
(see Fig. 1) in conditions of normal operation.
NOTE – For the correct equipment operation, it is necessary that the value
on "RCV FIELD" display of RTM unit ranges between -91 dBm (min.
received power) and -30 dBm (max. received power) with accuracy
±2 dB. Should the received power be below the minimum
threshold, number "-99" is displayed. Instead, should the received
power exceeds the maximum threshold, the value power indication
accurancy makes worse since the ODU Rx RF chain saturates and
so prevents the equipment damaging limiting the signal level.
Up to real received signal power -20 dBm the equipments works
correctly with BER ≤ 10
-11
.
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 23/26
6.2 Alarm conditions
An alarm condition usually indicates a fault in one of the equipment assemblies (IDU
and/or ODU); sometimes, the cause may be an external abnormal operation of the
equipment (e.g., fault on remote terminal, etc.).
An equipment alarm condition can be pointed out:
– by the lighting up of an alarm red/yellow LED on the front panel of the faulty part
and by the lighting up of the red summary lamp (if present) on the rack top
– by the incorrect lighting up status of a green/yellow LED on IDU front panel (see
Tab. 1).
– by an alarm signaling via software.
The summary alarm signalings are also returned to the outside by Alarm/Alarm and Fan
unit (if equipped).
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
24/26 Issue 1, September 1999
Tab. 1 – LED lighting up status in normal operating conditions
Unit LED Colour Status
Controller unit

\
Red OFF
ABN Yellow OFF
URG Red OFF
NURG Red OFF
IND Yellow OFF
INT Red OFF
MEM Yellow Significant only in (1+1) configuration:
– OFF, in case of radio channel automatic selection
– ON, the LED corresponding to the active radio channel
forced manually
∑ Red OFF
CH1 and
CH2
Green OFF
Alarm/Alarm and Fan
unit (optional)

\
Red OFF
TEMP Yellow OFF
2 Mbit/s Tributary unit - Green ON
Q-Adapter unit
(optional)

\
Red OFF
OS LINK Green ON should the connection be active to the TMN
supervisory center; otherwise, it must be OFF
EOW unit
(optional)

\
Red OFF
LINE 1 and
LINE 2
Green
The lighting up status depends on the operational status of
the service telephone channel (see document "Use of the
service telephone channel" of the OMN Manual)
ODU Green
BUSY Green
CONF Green
(continue)
SRA L Activation
53-001A8-501/E
Issue 1, September 1999 25/26
Tab. 1 – LED lighting up status in normal operating conditions (continue)
Unità LED Colour Status
RTM unit

\
Red OFF
ODU ALM Red OFF
OPEN
CABLE
Red OFF
ODU OVL Red OFF
ALIGN Green ON; significant only in (1+1) configuration
BER Red OFF
CH1 and
CH2
Yellow The LED corresponding to the active radio channel is ON
ON LINE Green ON
For (1+1) configuration, the LED corresponding to the
active RTM is ON
Activation SRA L
53-001A8-501/E
26/26 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
BLANK PAGE
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Use of POE
53-001A8-300/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Use of POE SRA L
53-001A8-300/E
2/10 Issue 1, September 1999
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Use of POE
53-001A8-300/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/10
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2 POE COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3 CONTROL AND CHECK DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
4 OPERATING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.1 POE connection to ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
4.2 Received power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2.1 Measurement with POE instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.2.2 Measurement with external voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.3 Measurement of +5 V and V BAT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.3.1 +5 V measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.3.2 V BAT measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
4.4 Use of the service telephone channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Use of POE SRA L
53-001A8-300/E
4/10 Issue 1, September 1999
Illustrations
Fig. 1 POE block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Fig. 2 POE unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fig. 3 DTFM handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Fig. 4 POE-ODU interconnection cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Fig. 5 POE control and check devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
SRA L Use of POE
53-001A1-300/E
Issue 1, September 1998 5/10
Tables
Tab. 1 POE control and check devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Use of POE SRA L
53-001A8-300/E
6/10 Issue 1, September 1999
1 GENERAL
This documents instructs about the use of the External Operator Post (POE), utilized in
the SRA L low-capacity radio system.
The POE is utilized by the external operator (ODU) during the phase of equipment
setting to work.
The POE, in combination with the EOW unit of IDU, allows the communication functions
between the operators located in the several stations of the radio system, in particular
allows:
– the conversation between stations
– the local conversation between the internal operator (IDU) and the external one
(ODU) of the same station
– the conversation between remote operators and the conference among the
operators of the radio system.
The POE utilizes a DTMF type handset.
Besides the communication functions, the POE allows the following checks to be
performed concerning the correct operation of ODU:
– check of the correct operation of ODU internal power supply
– check of the presence of the battery voltage supplying the ODU
– measurement of the received field power
– signaling of RF transmitter correct operation.
The POE block diagram is shown in Fig. 1.
Fig. 1 – POE block diagram
NOTE – The POE, described into this document, can be used only with ODU
with P/N 732-201/XX.
All the other ODUs (P/N 732-201/XXB, C and 732-221/XXB, C) are
not provided with multipolar connector or if such a connector is
present (for instance 732-201/07B, C and 732-201/08 B, C), it is not
wired inside with the exception of the wire that carries the AGC
voltage for the received field.
Besides, it is present a BNC that allows the AGC measurement of
the received filed.
SRA L Use of POE
53-001A8-300/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/10
2 POE COMPOSITION
The POE, P/N 609-004/11, consists of:
– POE unit, P/N 630-202/18 (see Fig. 2)
– DTMF handset, P/N 634-901/02 (see Fig. 3)
– cable for the connection to ODU, P/N 314-184/70 (see Fig. 4)
– bag for the transport and keeping of the accessories.
The DTMF handset is provided with a 2 m long extension.
Fig. 2 – POE unit
Fig. 3 – DTFM handset
Use of POE SRA L
53-001A8-300/E
8/10 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 4 – POE-ODU interconnection cable
3 CONTROL AND CHECK DEVICES
In Tab. 1, with reference to Fig. 5, all POE control and check devices are described,
located on POE unit front panel.
Tab. 1 – POE control and check devices
Pos. in
Fig. 5
Type Acronym Function
1 Measurement
instrument
It allows, according to the position of
switch "TEST", the measurement of the
received power or of the ODU voltages
(+5 V/V BAT).
2 LED (red) TX AMP
ALM
When lit, it signal the RF transmitter alarm
activation.
3 Bipolar test
point
RX
POWER
It allows the measurement of the received
power by an external voltmeter.
4 2-position
switch
TEST It selects the type of measurement to be
carried out with the unit instrument:
– pos. "-5V/Vbat": measurement of +5 V/
V BAT
– pos. "RX POWER": measurement of the
received power.
5 Momentary
type
push-button
-5V When pressed, the measurement of +5 V
(delivered by the ODU internal power
supply) is performed by the instrument.
The push-button is operational the switch
"TEST" being set to "-5V/Vbat" position.
6 Momentary
type
push-button
Vbat When pressed, the measurement of the
battery voltage feeding the ODU is
performed by the instrument.
The push-button is operational the switch
"TEST" being set to "-5V/Vbat" position.
(Continued)
SRA L Use of POE
53-001A8-300/E
Issue 1, September 1999 9/10
Tab. 1 – POE control and check devices
Fig. 5 – POE control and check devices
4 OPERATING PROCEDURES
4.1 POE connection to ODU
To have the POE in operational status, it has to be connected to ODU through the
special allotted cable (see Fig. 4); to this purpose, the POE is provided with a 15-pole,
female, sub-D type connector.
The POE in not provided with switching-on/off devices since it is directly fed by the
battery voltage (V BAT) delivered by ODU.
Pos. in
Fig. 5
Type Acronym Function
7 Momentary
type
push-button
INDOOR
CALL
When pressed, it causes a local call to IDU
to be sent.
8 2-position
Switch
LINE
ENG.
When actuated (ON), it determines the
seizure of the telephone channel for the
conversation with the remote operator.
NOTE – For the location of the control and check devices, refer to Fig. 5.
Use of POE SRA L
53-001A8-300/E
10/10 Issue 1, September 1999
4.2 Received power measurement
The received power measurement can be performed either with the POE measurement
instrument or an external voltmeter.
4.2.1 Measurement with POE instrument
– Set switch "TEST" to "RX POWER" position.
– Read the measured value (by marks) on the instrument. The indication is
approximately set to mark No. 1, the received signal being -90 dBm, with a
sensitivity of about 10 dB for mark.
4.2.2 Measurement with external voltmeter
By a cable provided with plug and banana plug, connect a voltmeter to the bipolar
measurement point "RX POWER".
Read on the voltmeter the measured value which should range between -0.5 V (min.
received power) and -5 V (max. received power).
4.3 Measurement of +5 V and V BAT
The ODU voltages measurement is carried out through the POE instrument.
4.3.1 +5 V measurement
– Set switch "TEST" to "-5V/Vbat" position.
– Press push-button "-5V" and check the instrument pointer moves to green field.
4.3.2 V BAT measurement
– Set switch "TEST" to "-5V/Vbat" position.
– Press push-button "Vbat" and check the instrument pointer moves to green field.
4.4 Use of the service telephone channel
The service telephone channel is available only if IDU is equipped with EOW unit.
To preset the POE to the use of the service telephone channel, connect the DTMF
handset to the jack on POE front panel (see Fig. 5).
The operational functions relevant to the service telephone channel are realized on POE
through the DTMF handset and the relevant control/check devices, located on POE unit
front panel (see Tab. 1); POE unit is provided with a ringing bell for the signaling of the
local call in progress from IDU.
As far as the use procedures are concerned of the service telephone channel, refer to
the relevant document "Use of the service telephone channel" of the OMN manual.
FINE
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Periodical controls and equipment operating
check
53-001A8-301/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Periodical controls and equipment operating check SRA L
53-001A8-301/E
2/8 Issue 1, September 1999
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Periodical controls and equipment operating check
53-001A8-301/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/8
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 PERIODICAL CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 EQUIPMENT OPERATING CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.1 Normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3.2 Alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Periodical controls and equipment operating check SRA L
53-001A8-301/E
4/8 Issue 1, September 1999
Tables
Tab. 1 LED lighting up status in normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
SRA L Periodical controls and equipment operating check
53-001A8-301/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/8
1 GENERAL
Subject document describes the controls to be executed on the equipment to verify and
check its correct functioning.
2 PERIODICAL CONTROLS
The only periodical controls to be executed on the equipment are the following ones:
– visual control of the equipment integrity with possible cleaning procedure of the
equipment itself
– check of the power supply voltage value; such a value must be comprised into the
defined limits (±20% of the nominal value)
– software check of the RF RX power
– yearly cleaning and new pressurization of the wave guide, in case of RF
connections with elliptic wave guide.
3 EQUIPMENT OPERATING CHECK
The equipment operating status can be checked in every moment by means of a service
PC equipped with a control and configuration software (refer to the software OMN
Manual).
3.1 Normal operating conditions
The equipment normal operating conditions are pointed out by:
– alarm signaling red lamp off, on the rack front top
– all the alarm signaling red LEDs off, on IDU front panel
– green LED on, signaling the supply voltage presence, on 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit
front panel
– all the other signaling LED, located on IDU front panel, in the status expected for
the current operating condition of the equipment
– transmitted and received RF power at nominal values
– absence of alarm signaling via software
– value displayed on “RCV FIELD” display of every RTM unit, such a value is ranging
between -91 dBm (min. received power value) and -30 dBm (max. received value).
Periodical controls and equipment operating check SRA L
53-001A8-301/E
6/8 Issue 1, September 1999
In Tab. 1 the status is indicated of the signaling LEDs, located on the front panel of IDU
in conditions of normal operation.
NOTE – For the correct equipment operation, it is necessary that the value
on "RCV FIELD" display of RTM unit ranges between -91 dBm (min.
received power) and -30 dBm (max. received power) with accuracy
±2 dB. Should the received power be below the minimum
threshold, number "-99" is displayed. Instead, should the received
power exceeds the maximum threshold, the value power indication
accurancy makes worse since the ODU RX RF chain saturates and
so prevents the equipment damaging limiting the signal level.
Up to real received signal power -20 dBm the equipments works
correctly with BER ≤ 10
-10
.
SRA L Periodical controls and equipment operating check
53-001A8-301/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/8
Tab. 1 – LED lighting up status in normal operating conditions
Unit LED Colour Status
Controller unit

\
Red OFF
ABN Yellow OFF
URG Red OFF
NURG Red OFF
IND Yellow OFF
INT Red OFF
MEM Yellow OFF; it must be ON should an alarm condition have been
memorized
∑ Red OFF
CH1 and
CH2
Green Significant only in (1+1) configuration:
– OFF, in case of radio channel automatic selection
– ON, the LED corresponding to the on line RX channel
forced manually
Alarm/Alarm and Fan
unit (optional)

\
Red ON
TEMP Yellow OFF
2 Mbit/s Tributary unit - Green ON
Q-Adapter unit
(optional)

\
Red OFF
OS LINK Green ON should the connection be active to the TMN
supervisory center; otherwise, it must be OFF
EOW unit
(optional)

\
Red OFF
LINE 1 and
LINE 2
Green
The lighting up status depends on the operational status of
the service telephone channel (see document "Use of the
service telephone channel")
ODU Green
BUSY Green
CONF Green
RTM unit

\
Red OFF
ODU ALM Red OFF
OPEN
CABLE
Red OFF
ODU OVL Red OFF
ALIGN Green ON; significant only in (1+1) configuration
BER Red OFF
CH1 and
CH2
Yellow The LED corresponding to the on line channel is ON
ON LINE Green ON
Periodical controls and equipment operating check SRA L
53-001A8-301/E
8/8 Issue 1, September 1999
3.2 Alarm conditions
An alarm condition usually indicates a fault in one of the equipment assemblies (IDU
and/or ODU); sometimes, the cause may be an external abnormal operation of the
equipment (e.g., fault on remote terminal, etc.).
An equipment alarm condition can be pointed out:
– by the lighting up of an alarm red/yellow LED on the front panel of the faulty part
and by the lighting up of the red summary lamp (if present) on the rack top
– by the incorrect lighting up status of a green/yellow LED on IDU front panel
– by an alarm signaling via software.
The summary alarm signalings are also returned to the outside by Alarm/Alarm and Fan
unit (if equipped).
FINE
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Troubleshooting
53-001A8-502/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Troubleshooting SRA L
53-001A8-502/E
2/14 Issue 1, September 1999
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Troubleshooting
53-001A8-502/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/14
&RQWHQWV
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.1 Unit connection status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.2 System alarm events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
2.3 Alarm events on RTM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.4 Alarm events on ODU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.5 Alarm events on Controller unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.6 Alarm events on 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
2.7 Alarm events on Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2.8 Alarm events on EOW unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
2.9 Alarm events on Q-Adapter unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Troubleshooting SRA L
53-001A8-502/E
4/14 Issue 1, September 1999
1 GENERAL
Subject documents contents the guide lines to be followed when an alarm condition
occurs to reach a quick identification of the alarm cause and then to reset the equipment
correct functioning.
2 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF PC
The operator can check the presence of an alarm and detect its causes by means of the
control and configuration software.
For such a purpose here below there is the detailed description of all the alarm signals
available via software, completed with the indication of the probable causes and with the
advice of the possible remedies.
2.1 Unit connection status
The connection statuses between the Controller unit and the slave units are the
following ones:
– DISCONNECTED
– CONNECTED
– ON LINE
– MISMATCH.
In DISCONNECTED and CONNECTED statuses, the slave unit is considered as
extracted (also if the unit is inserted into the equipment and it is not able to communicate
correctly with the Controller unit).
In the ON LINE status, the slave unit is in the correct slot according to the provided
configuration and it communicates correctly with the Controller unit. The firmware
version is then equivalent with the one of the Controller unit.
In the MISMATCH status, the slave unit is present into the slot but it does not correspond
to what is provided by the current configuration or the firmware version is not equivalent
with the one of the Controller unit.
The signalling of the connection status is automatically updated by the Controller unit
while the equipping setting of the units is executed via software by the operator.
Then it is possible the presence of errors caused by the discordance between the
equipping status set by the operator and the physical one of the equipment.
2.2 System alarm events
– Battery power supply alarm (PWR SUPPLY ALM)
The power supply voltage, provided by the station batteries, is absent at input.
The SRA L is provided with a redundant power supply.
An alarm signal is present for each of the two power supply lines.
If an alarm occurs on both the power supply lines, there is the functionality loss of
the equipment.
SRA L Troubleshooting
53-001A8-502/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/14
– Power supply configuration error from battery 2 (PS2 CONFIG)
It is possible, via software, to disable the second power supply line of the
equipment. Such a line assures the power supply redundancy. The alarm signals
the presence at input of power supply on the second line if the second line itself
has been disabled.
– TX On Line channel alarm (TX onL CH ALM)
A serious alarm has occurred on TX On Line channel preventing its correct
functioning, in presence of manual forcing (software) or of serious alarm on the
standby TX channel.
The alarm is the summarization result of the ODU CARD FAIL, ODU TX ALM, RTM
CARD FAIL, MOD ALM, CABLE ALM and IN TRIB ALM serious alarms.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to detect the alarm root that has
caused the signal intervention and to proceed according to such a root.
In presence of manual forcing before proceeding to the alarm root individuation, it
is necessary to remove the forcing action or forcing the other channel On Line.
– RX On Line channel alarm (RX onL CH ALM)
A serious alarm has occurred on RX On Line channel preventing its correct
functioning, in presence of manual forcing (hardware or software) or of serious
alarm on the standby RX channel.
The alarm is the summarization result of the ODU CARD FAIL, ODU RX ALM, RTM
CARD FAIL, RX PWR ALM, IF-DEM ALM, CABLE ALM, OUT TRIB ALM,
BER ≥ 10
-3
, LOF, ALIGN ALM and LINK ERR serious alarms.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to detect the alarm root that has
caused the signal intervention and to proceed according to such a root.
In presence of manual forcing before proceeding to the alarm root individuation, it
is necessary to remove the forcing action or forcing the other channel On Line.
– Back-plane EEPROM failure (EEPROM BACK-PLANE ALM)
The back-plane EEPROM is out of order.
This event causes the possible loss of some configuration data as a consequence
of a power supply absence.
The alarm does not cause then an immediate out of order status for the equipment.
It is not longer assured the correct service restarting after a power supply
interruption.
– External alarms (EXT LINE ALM)
Four alarm lines (LINE 1 to LINE 4) are available at connector for the transparent
transport, via radio, of station alarms (e.g. open door, fume presence, etc.).
The presence of an alarm signals the failure of the connected function to the
subject alarm line.
– Remote alarms (REM LINE ALM)
The SRA L receives from the remote station the four lines (LINE 1 to LINE 4)
relevant to the station external alarms.
The presence of an alarm signals the failure of the connected function to the
subject alarm line on the remote station.
Troubleshooting SRA L
53-001A8-502/E
6/14 Issue 1, September 1999
2.3 Alarm events on RTM unit
– Unit failure (CARD FAIL)
The RTM unit is out of order.
The CARD FAIL alarm masks the following alarms:
• IF-DEM ALM
• LOF
• HIGH EW
• LOW EW
• ALIGN ALM
• HIGH BER
• LINK ID ERR
• FERF
• OUT TRIB ALM
To reset the correct functioning, it is necessary to execute the unit replacement.
– Modulator alarm (MOD ALM)
The Modulator sub-unit inside the RTM unit is out of order.
To reset the correct functioning, it is necessary to execute the unit replacement.
– Demodulator/IF section alarm (IF-DEM ALM)
The Demodulator sub-unit inside the RTM unit is out of order.
The alarm presence causes the AIS insertion (it can not be deactivated via
software) at tributary side for the aggregate signal.
To reset the correct functioning, it is necessary to execute the unit replacement.
– BER ≥ 10
-3
(HIGH BER)
The calculated BER downstream the switching has reached a threshold of 10
-3
.
The received signal has an extremely bad quality. It is likely be caused by remote
failures or by transmission anomalies.
The alarm presence causes the AIS insertion (it can not be deactivated via
software) at tributary side for the aggregate signal.
– Hitless logic alignment alarm (ALIGN ALM)
The RTM unit has detected a misalignment gap between the two channels higher
than the one that the unit is able to recover by means of its own elastic memory; it
causes the loss of switching capacity of the hitless switch.
The effect on the equipment functioning is not immediate but only of potential
danger. May be the static delay parameter must be changed (see OMN manual) or
RF signal is not available for one of the RTM units.
– “Early warning low” and “early warning high” condition (LOW EW and HIGH EW)
The SRA L allows to calculate the error degree according to the errors of the error
correction coding. By means of this error degree, two successive thresholds
(approximately Low = 10
-7
to 10
-6
and High = 10
-4
to 10
-3
) are set via hardware
(such thresholds can no be modified) corresponding to the LOW EW and HIGH EW
events.
The error detectable on the connector as a consequence of the forwarded
correction pulses is respectively about 10
-11
(currently it can not be detected) and
NOTE – In (1+1) configuration, if an alarm occurs on a RTM unit, the service
is assured by the other RTM unit.
SRA L Troubleshooting
53-001A8-502/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/14
10
-6
.
These two alarms, relevant to the reception side, are typically caused by anomalies
of the transmitting device, as the fading or the bad weather. The creation speed
and the disappearing one can be very high because the calculation of the error
degree is very quick.
– Loss on aggregate signal (LOF)
An alignment loss has occurred of the frame at line side.
It could be caused by failures into the remote system or by transmission anomalies
and, only with a very low probability, by a failure of the demodulator.
The alarm presence causes the AIS insertion (it can not be deactivated via
software) at tributary side for the aggregate signal.
It is necessary an intervention on the field and/or an evaluation of the possible
alarms present on the connected ODU.
– Link identification code error (LINK ID ERR)
The radio path (hop) realised with SRA L equipment receives an identification code
(Link ID). Such code defines the “colour” of the path. A single two-way radio path
receives two numeric identification codes (ranging between 0 and 15):
• TX link ID code
• RX link ID code.
Such codes are valid respectively in transmission mode and in reception one.
The RTM unit controls if the ID value present inside the received signal correspond
to the value expected to be received (RX link ID code); if the two values are
different, the alarm is generated.
The alarm does not automatically underline the failure of the RTM unit, but it means
with a great probability that it has occurred a failure into the remote transmission
system or a temporary transmission anomaly.
The alarm presence causes the AIS insertion (it can not be deactivated via
software) at tributary side for the aggregate signal.
– Alarm on the input tributaries (TRIB IN ALM)
The input signal (LOS) at tributary side is not present or an overflow of the input
buffer has occurred.
For each available tributary, it is present an alarm line.
The alarm presence, caused by LOS, causes the AIS insertion (it can not be
deactivated via software) at radio side only for the tributary under alarm. Instead if
the alarm cause is the buffer overflow, the AIS insertion can be disabled via
software.
It is necessary an intervention on the field and/or an evaluation of the possible
alarms present on the output of the connected system at tributary side.
Troubleshooting SRA L
53-001A8-502/E
8/14 Issue 1, September 1999
– Alarm on the output tributaries (TRIB OUT ALM)
The output signal at tributary side is not present.
For each available tributary, it is present an alarm line.
It is necessary a field intervention and/or an evaluation of the possible alarms
present upstream the output at tributary side, it is then highly possible a failure of
the RTM unit.
– AIS on the input tributaries (TRIB IN AIS)
It is detected the AIS presence on one of the input tributaries.
It is necessary an intervention on the field and/or an evaluation of the possible
alarms on the output of the connected system at tributary side.
– HDB3 code error on the input tributaries (TRIB IN HDB3 CODE ERR)
It is detected an HDB3 code error on one of the input tributaries.
It is necessary an intervention on the field and/or an evaluation of the possible
alarms on the output of the connected system at tributary side.
– Reception failure on remote terminal (FERF)
The radio signal is not correctly received by the remote station. Such a station
reacts forwarding back the FERF signal (Far End Receive Failure). This alarm can
be caused by failures of the equipment output section at radio side; the probability
that the alarm is generated for transmission errors is very low.
– Block error on remote terminal (FEBE)
The radio signal is not correctly received by the remote station. Such a station
reacts forwarding back the FEBE signal (Far End Block Error). This alarm can be
caused by failures of the equipment output section at radio side; the probability that
the alarm is generated for transmission errors is very low.
– Tributary configuration alarm (TRIB CONF ALM)
The RTM unit allows to set the tributary number really used in such a way to
realised not completely equipped equipment.
The alarm signals the presence of input signal on one tributary that has been
disabled. Therefore in this case, AIS is inserted on the aggregate signal.
If the operator wants or not to transport the signal, it is necessary to disconnect the
input signal or to set again the tributary.
– Cable alarm (CABLE ALM)
A failure is present in the connection between ODU and RTM unit.
It is highly probable that a failure has occurred on the cable, it is much less
probable that a failure has occurred on the cable interface circuits of the ODU and
of the RTM unit.
It is necessary an intervention on the field.
SRA L Troubleshooting
53-001A8-502/E
Issue 1, September 1999 9/14
2.4 Alarm events on ODU
– Unit failure (CARD FAIL)
The ODU is out of order.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement.
– ODU power supply alarm (POWER ALM)
The ODU power supply voltage is not present.
The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report
of the transmission and reception alarms of the ODU.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement.
– Loss of IF TX signal (TX IF ALM)
An inner sensor detects the loss of the signal at intermediate frequency (IF)
transporting the signal in TX at radio side.
The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report
of the transmission alarms of the ODU.
– TX local oscillator failure (TX LO ALM)
The local oscillator used for transmission inside the ODU is out of order.
The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report
of the transmission alarms of the ODU.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement.
– TX power alarm (TX PWR ALM)
A too high decrease of transmission power has occurred.
The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report
of the transmission alarms of the ODU.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement.
– RX power alarm (RX PWR ALM)
At input of the reception demodulator unit, it is signalled the loss of the RX RF
signal; the alarm is activated according to the not sufficient value of the received
power.
The event can be caused, for example, by anomalies of the transmitting device or
by failures into the remote system.
In case of alarm caused by bad weather (fading), there is the alarm reset after a
relatively short time (depending on the atmospheric conditions). Then to be able to
distinguish between the other causes, it is necessary to check on the field the
possible presence on the local equipment of the alarms relevant to the signal
reception and, at network level, of the alarms relevant to transmission on the
remote equipment.
– RX local oscillator failure (RX LO ALM)
The local oscillator used for reception inside the ODU is out of order.
The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report
of the reception alarms of the ODU.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement.
NOTE – In (1+1) configuration if an alarm has occurred on one ODU, the
service is assured by the other ODU.
Troubleshooting SRA L
53-001A8-502/E
10/14 Issue 1, September 1999
– IF RX synthesizer failure (IF SYN ALM)
The local oscillator used for reception inside the ODU for the RF/IF connection is
out of order.
The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report
of the reception alarms of the ODU.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement.
– RX receiver failure (RX FAIL)
The receiver of the ODU is out of order.
The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report
of the reception alarms of the ODU.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement.
– Wrong frequency plan (FREQ PLAN FAIL)
There is a wrong correspondence between the set parameters into the frequency
plan and the ones of the transceiver system (ODU) at disposal.
It is necessary to define again the frequency plan.
– Suppression of the transmission on progress (SQUELCH TX)
It is a status signal (it is not an alarm one) signalling the squelch on progress on
the ODU of the transmission signal.
It can be caused by a wrong functioning of the TX chain (e.g. TX LO ALM) or by a
command automatically created by the system TX protection logic or by a software
command.
– TX ODU section alarm (ODU TX ALM)
A malfunction has occurred into the TX section of the ODU.
The alarm is the result of the summarising of the TX IF ALM, TX LO ALM, POWER
ALM and PS ALM alarms of the ODU.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement.
– RX ODU section alarm (ODU RX ALM)
A malfunction has occurred into the RX section of the ODU.
The alarm is the result of the summarising of the RX LO ALM, IF SYN ALM, RX
FAIL and PS ALM alarms of the ODU.
The alarm presence causes the AIS insertion (it can not be disabled via software)
at tributary side for the aggregate signal.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement.
SRA L Troubleshooting
53-001A8-502/E
Issue 1, September 1999 11/14
2.5 Alarm events on Controller unit
– Unit failure (CARD FAIL)
The Controller unit is out of order.
The service is assured also with a Controller unit out of order or absent.
The status of all the equipment units is considered unknown (unknown).
Then the failure has influence upon the tele-control possibility and upon the
operations executed by a local PC.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the unit replacement.
– EEPROM failure (CONTROLLER EEPROM ALM)
The EEPROM of the Controller unit is out of order.
This event causes only that the Controller unit can not save the configuration into
the not volatile memory. It does not cause neither an out of order condition for the
equipment not that the Controller unit does not execute its functions.
Therefore, if the system restarts after a power supply absence condition, the
Controller unit is not able to read the configuration from the other memories present
inside the equipment for the redundancy among the Controller unit EEPROM and
the back-plane EEPROM.
2.6 Alarm events on 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit
– Unit failure (CARD FAIL)
The 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit is out of order.
This event prevents the interfacing operation at tributary side of the equipment.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the unit replacement.
Troubleshooting SRA L
53-001A8-502/E
12/14 Issue 1, September 1999
2.7 Alarm events on Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit
– Unit failure (CARD FAIL)
The Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit is out of order.
This event prevents the possibility of the Controller unit to detect the failures
signalled by the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit.
The failure does not affect the service, but it reduced only the possibility of
tele-control operations.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the unit replacement.
– IDU overtemperature alarm (OVER TEMP ALM)
It has been exceeded the maximum temperature threshold compatible with the
correct functioning of the IDU also if there is the presence of the fans (in case of
Alarm and Fan unit).
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to check the wear of the fans (if
present), on the other hand it is necessary an intervention on the field.
– IDU undertemperature alarm (UNDER TEMP ALM)
It has been exceeded the minimum temperature threshold compatible with the
correct functioning of the IDU.
To reset the correct functioning it is an intervention on the field.
– Fan alarms (FAN ALM)
One fan of the Alarm and Fan unit is out of order.
Two alarms are available, one for each fan:
• fan 1 alarm (FAN 1 ALM)
• fan 2 alarm (FAN 2 ALM).
The failure has not an immediate influence on the service but it can cause an
excessive increase of the IDU inner temperature and then it can cause a
subsequent malfunctioning of the equipment.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the Alarm and Fans unit
replacement.
NOTE – The fan alarms are present only with equipment provided with
Alarm and Fan unit.
SRA L Troubleshooting
53-001A8-502/E
Issue 1, September 1999 13/14
2.8 Alarm events on EOW unit
– Unit failure (CARD FAIL)
The EOW unit is out of order.
This event prevents the phonic communicaton service provided by the unit itself.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the unit replacement.
– Loss of TX/RX clock for radio link (CH TXCK, CH RXCH LOS)
The EOW unit manages a 64 kbit/s channel for the phonic communication (by
means of POL) between two stations connected by means of radio link. Four
alarms are available to signal the loss of synchronism (coming from the
corresponding RTM unit) for each line and for each direction:
• TX clock loss line 1 (CHN1 TXCK LOS)
• RX clock loss line 1 (CHN1 RXCK LOS)
• TX clock loss line 2 (CHN2 TXCK LOS)
• RX clock loss line 2 (CHN2 RXCK LOS).
– Loss of TX/RX clock for POL - POE link (ODU TXCK LOS, ODU RXCK LOS)
The EOW unit manages a 64 kbit/s channel for the phonic communication (by
means of POL) between the station operator (POL) and the external one (POE),
such a channel is placed near the antenna.
Four alarms are available to signal the loss of synchronism (coming from the
corresponding RTM unit) for each line and for each direction:
• TX clock loss line ODU 1 (ODU1 TXCK LOS)
• RX clock loss line ODU 1 (ODU1 RXCK LOS)
• TX clock loss line ODU 2 (ODU2 TXCK LOS)
• RX clock loss line ODU 2 (ODU2 RXCK LOS).
2.9 Alarm events on Q-Adapter unit
– Unit failure (CARD FAIL)
The Q-Adapter unit is out of order.
This event prevents the gateway service between the protocol used into the
supervision system and the TCP/IP one used into the SRA L radio network.
To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the unit replacement.
– EEPROM failure (Q-ADAPTER EEPROM ALM)
The EEPROM of the Q-Adapter unit is out of order.
This event causes only that the Q-Adapter unit can not save the configuration into
the not volatile memory. It does not cause neither an out of order condition for the
equipment not that the Q-Adapter unit does not execute its functions.
NOTE – The alarms relevant to line 2 are present only in 2×(1+0) and
A/D-RPT configuration.
NOTE – The alarms relevant to line ODU 2 are present only in 2×(1+0) and
A/D-RPT configuration.
Troubleshooting SRA L
53-001A8-502/E
14/14 Issue 1, September 1999
3 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF LEDS
The aim of this troubleshooting is the one to provide to un operator/installer, not
equipped with PC with control and configuration software, some advices about how to
detect possible troubles from the equipment alarms.
FINE
Alarm status on equipment Possible causes
URG/NURG, ∑ alarms
-99 dBm received field (reading
on RCV FIELD display)
• Wrong line-up on radio hop
• ODU squelch (system activation OFF)
• Wrong set frequency (widely external from the
allowed channel)
URG/NURG, ∑ alarms
Low received field (from -80 up
to -90 dBm) (reading on RCV
FIELD display)
• Absence of 2 Mbit/s signal on enabled
tributaries
• Wrong set frequency (external from the
allowed channel)
• Interference from next radio hop
• Reception troubles of a chain of the protected
system
URG/NURG, ∑ alarms
Nominal received field (from -40
up to -60 dBm) (reading on RCV
FIELD display)
• Absence of 2 Mbit/s signal on enabled
tributaries
• Incompatibility at radio hop level (ASIC or
wrong capacity)
• Wrong set frequency (external from the
allowed channel)
• Interference from next radio hop
• Reception troubles of a chain of the protected
system
URG/NURG, INT, ∑ alarms
Nominal received field (from -40
up to -60 dBm) (reading on RCV
FIELD display)
• Fault on one IDU unit
• Fault on the ODU transceiving chain
• Troubles on the IDU-ODU connection
NURG alarms
Nominal received field (from -40
up to -60 dBm) (reading on RCV
FIELD display)
• Power supply
• Second power supply line (redundant line)
enabled without input power supply from
battery
NURG alarms
Low received field (from -80 up
to -90 dBm) (reading on RCV
FIELD display)
• Line-up not complying to the hop calculation,
external or deriving interference troubles
IND, INT alarms • EEPROM fault
IND alarms • Second present power supply line (redundant
line) but not enabled through software
• Troubles in the reception chain of the remote
unit or no one enabled tributary on the remote
unit
ABN, MEM alarms • HW/SW forcements in the protected systems
• Test conditions for software loop
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Replacement procedures
53-001A8-302/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Replacement procedures SRA L
53-001A8-302/E
2/8 Issue 1, September 1999
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Replacement procedures
53-001A8-302/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/8
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OF THE IDU UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 ODU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
4 FINAL OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Replacement procedures SRA L
53-001A8-302/E
4/8 Issue 1, September 1999
Illustrations
Fig. 1 Replacement of an IDU plug-in unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
SRA L Replacement procedures
53-001A8-302/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/8
1 GENERAL
Subject document describes the replacement procedures of the failure unit with the
corresponding spare part one.
At the end of the replacement procedure, it is necessary to verify that the alarm condition
has been removed and then the equipment correct functioning has been reset.
2 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OF THE IDU
UNITS
After having detected the failure unit, it is necessary to execute its replacement with a
spare part one with the same code.
All the IDU units are plug-in type ones; to execute their replacement, it is necessary to
execute the following procedure according to Fig. 1:
– Plug out, on the interested unit, the connection cables present on the front part.
– Screw down the two fixing screws of the unit placed on its front part.
– Extract the unit pulling it outside.
NOTE – The replacement of an IDU unit, with the exception of the 2 Mbit/s
Tributary unit, can be executed with “hot” equipment, that is
without turning off the equipment.
WARNING – In case of replacement of the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit, of the
Controller unit or of the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit, it is
necessary to check that the spare part unit has the same
hardware presettings of the one to be replaced (refer to
document “Presettings”.
– During the insertion phase into the IDU sub-rack, if it is
present a particular resistance, it is necessary to pay
maximum attention avoiding to force excessively the unit.
An excessive forcing action can cause a failure on the IDU
back-plane or on the unit bottom connector.
Replacement procedures SRA L
53-001A8-302/E
6/8 Issue 1, September 1999
Fig. 1 – Replacement of an IDU plug-in unit
SRA L Replacement procedures
53-001A8-302/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/8
3 ODU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Specific spare parts are not provided for the ODU.
Then if an ODU failure occurs, it is necessary to replace the ODU with a spare one
having the same code.
For the replacement procedure of the ODU execute in a reverse order the installation
procedure (refer to the doc. “Equipment installation”).
NOTE – To execute the ODU replacement procedure it is not necessary to
turn off the equipmnent.
WARNING – Every ODU is marked with a code having an extended part
composed by four digits (eg.: 732-221/15_XXXY), identifying
the ODU personalization.
Then it is necessary to check that the spare ODU has the
same code of the ODU to be replaced.
Replacement procedures SRA L
53-001A8-302/E
8/8 Issue 1, September 1999
4 FINAL OPERATIONS
At the end of the failure unit replacement procedure, it is necessary to:
– reset the service, if it is necessary
– check that the alarm condition has been removed and then that the equipment is
in normal functioning conditions
– check that the unit is correctly detected by the software and that it is On Line.
FINE
SRA L
Low capacity digital radio system
Symbols and abbreviations
53-001A8-151/E
Issue 1, September 1999
Symbols and abbreviations SRA L
53-001A8-151/E
2/8 Issue 1, September 1999
BLANK PAGE
SRA L Symbols and abbreviations
53-001A1-151/E
Issue 1, September 1999 3/8
Contents
1 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2 SIMBOLS UTILIZED IN THE FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Symbols and abbreviations SRA L
53-001A1-151/E
4/8 Issue 1, September 1999
Tables
Tab. 1 Symbols utilized in the figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
SRA L Symbols and abbreviations
53-001A8-151/E
Issue 1, September 1999 5/8
1 GENERAL
All the symbols and abbreviations, utilized in the manual, are summarized and
described in this document.
2 SIMBOLS UTILIZED IN THE FIGURES
In Tab. 1, the list and the meaning of the different symbols, utilized in the figures of this
manual, are set down.
Tab. 1 – Symbols utilized in the figures
Symbol Meaning
Antenna
Splitter
Switch
Handset
Radio transmission
Personal Computer
RF coupler
Symbols and abbreviations SRA L
53-001A8-151/E
6/8 Issue 1, September 1999
3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
A/D-RPT Add/Drop Repeater
AC Alternating Current
AGC Automatic Gain Control
ALM Alarm
ATPC Automatic Transmit Power Control
AUX Auxiliary
BB Base Band
BER Bit Error Rate
BSC Basic Station Center
BTS Basic Terminal Station
CH Channel
CMD Command
CPFSK Continuous Phase Frequency Shift Keying
CW Continous wave
D/A Digital/Analog
DC Direct Current
DCE Data Circuit-terminating Equipment
DEM Demodulator
DTE Data Terminal Equipment
DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency
EM ElectroMagnetic
EN Enable
EOW Engineering Order Wire
ESDS Electro Static Discharge Sensitive
EXT External
FD Frequency Diversity
FEC Forward Error Corrector
FSK Frequency Shift Keying
GA Gate Array
GND Ground
GTFM Generalized Tamed Frequency Modulation
H High
H/S Hot-Standby
HDB3 High Density Bipolar 3
HDLC High Data Link Control
HL Hitless
HW Hardware
I/O Input/Output
IC Integrated Circuit
ID Identifier
IDU Indoor Unit
IF Intermediate Frequency
IN Input
IND Indicative
INT Internal
ITMN Installation Test Manual
L Low
LCTI Local Terminal Interface
LSI Large Scale Integration
SRA L Symbols and abbreviations
53-001A8-151/E
Issue 1, September 1999 7/8
MEM Memorization
MOD Modulator
MSC Mobile Service switching Center
MTTR Mean Time To Repair
NE Network Element
NRZ Not Return-to-Zero
NURG Not Urgent
ODU Outdoor Unit
OMC Operation & Maintenance Center
OSI Open System Interconnection
OUT Output
OW Overflow
PC Personal Computer
PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
POH Path OverHead
PLL Phase Lock Loop
POE External operator post
POL Local operator post
RF Radio Frequency
RIEP Recapitulary
RS Reed Solomon
RTM Radio Transport Module
RX Reception
S/I Sensitivity/Interference
SAW Surface Acoustic Wave
SRA L Siemens radio access at low capacity
SW Software
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TFM Tamed Frequency Modulation
TMN Telecommunications Management Network
TRIB Tributary
TS Service telephone
TX Transmission
UHF Ultra High Frequency
URG Urgent
VCO Voltage Controlled Oscillator
Symbols and abbreviations SRA L
53-001A8-151/E
8/8 Issue 1, September 1999
FINE
BLANK PAGE
PRINTED in ITALY

Volume: 1/1

Manual code: 911-292/02B4000

Equipment code: - 732-001/7, 8, 10, 13, 15 - 732-001/18, 23, 26, 38 - 732-021/7, 8, 10, 13, 15 - 732-021/18, 23, 26, 38

Approved by: Responsible for Instruction Manual Department Signature: Date: 

Manual printed:

53-001A8-F00/E Issue 1, September 1999

SRA L/7...38 LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL (ITMN)
Volume: 1/1 911-292/02B4000

SRA L/7...38 LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM
INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL (ITMN) Volume: 1/1 911-292/02B4000

D.45

D.55

SRA L/7...38 LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM

INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL (ITMN) Volume: 1/1 911-292/02B4000

SRA L/7...38 D.25 LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM
INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL (ITMN)

Volume: 1/1

911-292/02B4000 D.30

SRA L/7...38 LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM
INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL (ITMN)

SRA L/7...38 LOW CAPACITY DIGITAL RADIO SYSTEM INSTALLATION TEST MANUAL (ITMN) Volume: 1/1 911-292/02B4000

D.20

Volume: 1/1

911-292/02B4000

SRA L

Index of manual

Index of Manual
Frontispiece Handbook status Index Section 1: INTRODUCTION Foreword Safety rules and use precautions Section 2: DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT General information Technical characteristics Equipment composition Control and check devices Use of the service telephone channel Section 3: INSTALLATION Equipment installation Section 4: HARDWARE PREPARATION Presettings External connections Connector assembling Section 5: ACTIVATION Activation Use of POE Section 6: MAINTENANCE Periodical check and equipment functioning check Troubleshooting Replacement procedures Section 7: SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS Symbols and abbreviations 53-001A8-151/E 53-001A8-301/E 53-001A8-502/E 53-001A8-302/E 53-001A8-501/E 53-001A8-300/E 53-001A8-500/E 53-001A8-201/E 53-001A8-202/E 53-001A8-200/E 53-001A8-100/E 53-001A8-101/E 53-001A8-102/E 53-001A8-103/E 53-001A8-104/E 53-001A8-P00/E 53-001A8-150/E 53-001A8-F00/E 53-001A8-R00/E 53-001A8-I00/E

53-001A8-I00/E Issue 1, September 1999

1/2

Index of manual

SRA L

FINE<

BLANK PAGE

2/2

53-001A8-I00/E Issue 1, September 1999

SRA L

Handbook status

HANDBOOK STATUS – –

Up-date: Previous:

Issue 1, September 1999

The following table shows the status of the documents composing this handbook. Type of change: N = new M = modified A = cancelled

The column "Modified pages" shows only pages which have been modified, whereas the indication "Issue/Date" has to be changed on all pages of the documentation, even if they have not been modified.

Document Frontispiece Handbook status Index of manual Foreword Safety rules and use precautions General information Technical characteristics Equipment composition Control and check devices Use of the service telephone channel Equipment installation Presettings External connections Connector assembling Activation Use of POE

Code 53-001A8-F00/E 53-001A8-R00/E 53-001A8-I00/E 53-001A8-P00/E 53-001A8-150/E 53-001A8-100/E 53-001A8-101/E 53-001A8-102/E 53-001A8-103/E 53-001A8-104/E 53-001A8-200/E 53-001A8-500/E 53-001A8-201/E 53-001A8-202/E 53-001A8-501/E 53-001A8-300/E

Issue/Date 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99

Type of change N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N N

Modified pages

53-001A8-R00/E Issue 1, September 1999

1/2

Handbook status

SRA L

Document Periodical check and equipment functioning check Troubleshooting Replacement procedures Symbols and abbreviations FINE

Code

Issue/Date

Type of change N N N N

Modified pages

53-001A8-301/E 53-001A8-502/E 53-001A8-302/E 53-001A8-151/E

1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99 1/09/99

2/2

53-001A8-R00/E Issue 1, September 1999

SRA L Index of manual Index of Manual Frontispiece Handbook status Index Section 1: INTRODUCTION Foreword Safety rules and use precautions Section 2: DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT General information Technical characteristics Equipment composition Control and check devices Use of the service telephone channel Section 3: INSTALLATION Equipment installation Section 4: HARDWARE PREPARATION Presettings External connections Connector assembling Section 5: ACTIVATION Activation Use of POE Section 6: MAINTENANCE Periodical check and equipment functioning check Troubleshooting Replacement procedures Section 7: SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS Symbols and abbreviations 53-001A8-151/E 53-001A8-301/E 53-001A8-502/E 53-001A8-302/E 53-001A8-501/E 53-001A8-300/E 53-001A8-500/E 53-001A8-201/E 53-001A8-202/E 53-001A8-200/E 53-001A8-100/E 53-001A8-101/E 53-001A8-102/E 53-001A8-103/E 53-001A8-104/E 53-001A8-P00/E 53-001A8-150/E 53-001A8-F00/E 53-001A8-R00/E 53-001A8-I00/E 53-001A8-I00/E Issue 1. September 1999 1/2 .

Index of manual SRA L FINE< BLANK PAGE 2/2 53-001A8-I00/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

September 1999 .SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Safety rules and use precautions 53-001A8-150/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .Safety rules and use precautions SRA L BLANK PAGE 2/6 53-001A8-150/E Issue 1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 53-001A8-150/E Issue 1. . .1 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SAFETY RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SRA L Safety rules and use precautions Contents 1 2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3 GENERAL . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 4 5 5 ESDS PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dangerous materials. . . . . . . . Electrical safety. . . September 1999 3/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 SAFETY RULES The equipment complies with the 89/336/EEC European specification. The following plate defines the points where such a danger is present. check that the supply has been removed by means of the sectioning device installed upstream. it is necessary to complete the wiring of the connections to the protection ground. The equipment supplying system must be provided with a sectioning device upstream the connector. 2. started up. – – – 4/6 53-001A1-150/E Issue 1. September 1999 . The equipment must be installed. the insertion of all the units and/or modules provided for the requested configuration and also the connection of all the necessary connectors. then follow the on force specifications for low voltage supplied equipment's.Safety rules and use precautions SRA L 1 GENERAL This document contains all the safety rules and the use precautions to be followed during operations on the equipment to avoid injuries to personnel and/or damages to the equipment components. managed and repaired only by properly trained personnel. according to the allowed tolerances (±20%).1 Electrical safety The equipment complies with the EN 60950/A3 safety specifications (1995). The connection to the protection ground must not be removed or damaged. The equipment is prearranged for supplying from station batteries (-48 to -60 VDC ± 20%). can be present inside the equipment. voltages exceeding the safety limits defined by the EN 60950/IEC 950 safety rule. If the equipment is supplied at 60 VDC. Before disconnecting the connectors. – Before supplying the equipment.

while the antenna and/or the external supporting-frame for rod are lifted. necessary for the EMC shielding. some materials can be present that must not be exposed to flames or to high temperatures. it is strictly forbidden to stay or to pass in the underlying area.3 External operations Some other operations involving danger conditions are the ones executed outside during the equipment installation and starting up phase. Such conditions can cause toxic fumes that must not absolutely be inhaled.2 Dangerous materials For the elimination at the end of life. all the necessary safety rules against accidental fallings of the operators must be respected. the operators must not be in front of the antenna. Some metallic elements. Nr. For example. September 1999 5/6 . this equipment is inside the 160202 class (other electronic material out of order) of the EUROPEAN CATALOGUE OF WASTES defined with CEE/CEEA/CECA decision Nr. – If one of the above mentioned safety rules is not respected. For the external operations to be executed on the antenna. it is necessary to follow strictly the safety rules listed here below: – During installation. according to the on force rules. Such an area must be properly restricted or signalled according to the on force rules. on the frame and on the ODU. Then it is necessary to pay high attention during the use of such elements to avoid their breakage or abrasion. During the equipment starting up phase. Inside this product. 2. some injuries to the personnel can be caused.SRA L Safety rules and use precautions 2. it is necessary to use protection fences and belts. L5 of 1994. News. 3 of 20-12-1993 published on the European Community Off. During the execution of such operations. – – DANGER 53-001A1-150/E Issue 1. content beryllium.

FINE 6/6 53-001A1-150/E Issue 1.Safety rules and use precautions SRA L 3 ESDS PRECAUTIONS The ESDS (Electro Static Discharge Sensitive) electronic devices can be partially or permanently damaged by the static electricity that is commonly present in the operating environment. grounded by means a spiral cord. September 1999 . Those modules that are mounted on the equipment (faulty or spare parts) shall be stores in their original antistatic package marked by the labels above shown. The main ESDS devices are: – – – – – – CMOS components Large Scale Integration components in MOS technology SAW (Surface Acoustic Wave) components Operational amplifiers with MOS/FET inputs MOS/FET components and arrays Microwave semiconductors and microcircuits at frequencies > 1 GHz Modules containing ESDS devices are identified by following adhesive labels: In order avoid any damage while handling the modules. the user should wear an antistatic elastic bracelet.

September 1999 .SRA L Low capacity digital radio system General information 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .General information SRA L BLANK PAGE FINE 2/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V bus. . . . .10 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 ODU architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hitless protection logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . . . . . . . . . . 5 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE . . . . . . . . . . . 18 PROTECTION . . 14 14 14 14 15 15 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 17 17 17 LOOP-BACK . . . . . . User channel. . . . . . . . 5 IDU architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm and remote control external lines (option) . . . .4 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11 5 6 7 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 4 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EOW expansion channel (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 CONFIGURATIONS . . . 11 IDU-ODU INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . .7 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SRA L General information Contents 1 2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . Q channel (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 4. . TX protection in (1+1) Hot-Standby configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX protection in (1+1) configuration at frequency diversity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 4. . . . . . . . . . . . Tributary signals . . . Handset (option) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX protection . . . . . .8 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring of received RF power . .2 3 3. . . D channel (option). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 24 26 26 28 29 30 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. .1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply . . . . . Hardware protection logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PHYSICAL INTERFACES . . . . . .1 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC channel (F interface) . . . . . ODU power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 7. . . . . . . . . . .

12 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 SRA L equipment: (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration. . . . . . . . . 8 Fig. . . . . 25 TX protection in frequency diversity configuration . . . . . 3 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Fig. . . 34 4/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . 13 Loop-back functions . . . . . . . 13 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration without RF switch and with one antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 SRA L equipment: (1+1) FD configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Fig. . . . . . 10 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . 33 TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration without RF switch and with two antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . .General information SRA L Illustrations Fig. . 10 ODU block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 IDU block diagram . . . . . . . 9 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Fig. . . . . . . 17 SRA L equipment block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Protection general diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 SRA L equipment: 2×(1+0) configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 SRA L equipment: (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . 5 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . 31 TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration with RF switch and two antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Fig. 18 SRA L equipment: (1+0) configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 RX protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 SRA L equipment: A/D-RPT configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Fig. . . . . . . . . . 27 TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration with RF switch and one antenna . . . . . . . .

is designed both for cellular network interconnections and for conventional point-to-point radio links. The transmission capacity can be: – – – – 2×2 Mbit/s 4×2 Mbit/s 8×2 Mbit/s 16×2 Mbit/s. to be minimized 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. one for outdoor installation (ODU) and one for indoor installation (IDU). having the channel arrangement step like the one of 2×2 Mbit/s capacity. is derived from 2×2 Mbit/s option. September 1999 5/34 . low-capacity radio systems. The main applications of this digital radio system are: – – – – BTS <-> BTS. This subdivision allows: – the RF losses. due to the interconnection between ODU and the antenna. several RF bands are provided: – – – – – – – – – 7 GHz 8 GHz 10. BSC <-> MSC interconnections in cellular networks point-to-point links in subscriber distribution networks networks pertaining to firms emergency and/or provisional links. 1 shows the SRA L equipment block diagram. The 2 Mbit/s capacity. BTS <-> BSC. 2 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE Fig. The equipment has been realized by physically subdividing it into two assemblies. According to the applications.SRA L General information 1 GENERAL The SRA L family.5 GHz 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 26 GHz 38 GHz.

a D Channel Distributor unit. the IDU is provided with a EEPROM memory. – – All the other IDU configurations (2×(1+0). each unit is equipped with a EEPROM memory where the inventory data are memorized. 4×2 Mbit/s. should the equipment be in protected configuration • tributary protection against fulminations and overloads. the modulation/demodulation functions. The IDU basic version (1+0) consists of: – a RTM unit (2x2 Mbit/s. 8×2 or 16×2Mbit/s). the backplane EEPROM stores the reference equipment data used for Controller EEPROM up-grading.General information SRA L – a common IDU. According to the configurations. including all the control and supervision functions. September 1999 . 2. • interfacing of the equipment main supply voltage (from station batteries) with protections against overvoltages and transients.1 IDU architecture The IDU block diagram is shown in Fig. (1+1)) are obtained by duplicating the RTM unit. The main functions of IDU units are here below set down: – 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit It performs the following functions: • impedance matching of 2 Mbit/s I/O tributaries • input tributary branching to the two RTM units. 2. should the equipment be utilized in a wide temperature range (-5° to +55°C). including all the alarm and remote control interfaces. for the connection to an supervisory center or in alternative. If available. On the back-plane. It is possible to use antennas with diameter dependently of the hop lenght to be realized. the IDU can be equipped with an Alarm and Fan unit EOW unit. 6/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. which includes all the Base Band processing. for local and remote speech connections between IDU and ODU Q-Adapter unit. the cable protection and the IDU-ODU auxiliary service channel management a 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (75 Ohm unbalanced or 120 Ohm balanced). Then. the IDU may include the following units (option): – an Alarm unit. one or two ODUs can be equipped. IF conversions. for all the applications to be realized. doubled on the Controller unit (for protection purposes) where all the configuration parameters are memorized. representing the equipment physical access of the public network 2 Mbit/s tributary streams a Controller unit. – – Besides. A/D-RPT.The connection between IDU and ODU is made through a single coaxial cable.

SRA L General information (*) Optional Fig. 1 – SRA L equipment block diagram 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. September 1999 7/34 .

) • storage of the configuration and data at unit level (code. etc.) and at system level (bit rate. RF frequencies. parameters change. and HDB3 → NRZ conversion of the associated code • generation of the aggregate frame and multiplexing of input tributary signals • scrambling and encoding on the aggregate signal • digital modulation on the aggregate signal and D/A conversion • conversion of the modulated signal to the 2nd IF TX frequency (320 MHz) and relevant filtering as per ETSI Rec. as per Rec. etc. It performs the following functions: • collection of the alarms and parameters from all the other equipment units and their transmission to local terminal or a supervisory center • activation of the commands from a PC or a supervisory center (state configuration presetting. Controller unit It constitutes the "intelligent" unit of the IDU. – 8/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. either local or remote.5 MHz carrier frequency) of the 128 kbit/s auxiliary service channel and frequency multiplexing with 320 MHz IF main signal • IF signal amplification to be sent to ODU through the coaxial cable and protection against fulminations and overloads • automatic level equalization on the signal from ODU • differential demodulation with associated Viterbi decoding of 70 MHz IF signal and consequent demultiplexing of the 2 Mbit/s tributaries from the frame • demodulation of 5. The unit includes a DC/DC converter for its own power supply and feeding of the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit.5 MHz FSK signal carrying the auxiliary service channel IDU-ODU. alarms. • generation of an auxiliary service channel for the transmission of data channel. the equipment being in protected configuration. G. speech channels. etc. it is possible to execute its download from terminal.) • collection of the data coming from the Controller units of the other equipments and from the supervisory center • routing of the messages addressed to all the other controllers and coming from a supervisory center. issue. The unit is equipped with: • boot software on EPROM • Management software on flash memories.703. etc. between IDU and ODU • FSK modulation (6. and also a DC/DC converter for its own power supply. September 1999 .. It is connected to all the other units through a data bus managed by a microprocessor and it is enabled to manage all the expected equipment configurations. The unit includes all the circuits required for executing a hitless switching function between two aggregate signals.General information SRA L – RTM unit It performs the following functions: • regeneration of 2 Mbit/s input tributary signals.

using a standard Qx/Q3 protocol. The unit comprises a DC/DC converter for its supply voltage and a DC/DC converter for Ethernet transceiver feeding. by means of QD2 interface. – – – 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. Several utilization configurations are provided of Q-Adapter unit and different connecting modes to TMN supervisory center. the Q-Adapter unit allows the connection of the SRA L network to QD2 management systems. using the TCP/IP protocol. The Alarm and Fan unit comprises a DC/DC converter to feed the fans. September 1999 9/34 . Q-Adapter unit The unit function consists in providing a protocol translation between the SRA L network. Alternatively. the following types of link: • between any two stations • between a station and all the other stations • between a station (IDU) and its external operator post (ODU) • between two ODUs which could be in conference with the relevant IDUs. and a TMN supervisory center. The unit includes a DC/DC converter for its supply voltage and a DC/DC converter to feed the subscriber line interface circuit. EOW unit The unit function consists in managing a service telephone channel. The unit is equipped with firmware of EPROM. of IDU circuits should an internal high temperature be detected (Alarm and Fan unit only). through the fan activation. D Channel Distributor unit The unit is fully passive and its function consists in providing additional channel accesses for the Controller unit: • I/O of two D external channels of the Controller unit. it allows for two stations belonging to the same service network.SRA L General information – Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit It performs the following functions: • management of the systems alarm and remote control signals • interfacing of the auxiliary supply voltage • cooling. in particular. The unit is equipped with firmware on EPROM.

General information SRA L (*)Optional (**)Not present in (1+0) configuration (***)With Q-Adapter unit only Fig. September 1999 . 2 – IDU block diagram 10/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.

On customer request. TX output power. for some versions. coming from the IF module. It sends the frequency-modulated microwave signal to the RF Transmitter.2 ODU architecture The ODU block diagram is shown in Fig. – – 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. From a functional viewpoint. through a wideband PLL. It receives the data from the microcontroller for the programming of the operational TX/RX frequencies utilized as reference for the locking of the microwave VCO. an RF switch unit. hot-standby.5 MHz FSK sub-carrier for the service connection • it transmits the IDU signals: 70 MHz IF RX signal and 5. Besides. an ODU version is available equipped with a pre-heater module which extends the lower limit of the working temperature range from -30°C to -50°C. filters and converts them to 70 MHz • it includes the narrow band FSK modem for the IDU-ODU auxiliary service channel and a microcontroller for the commands and data channels • it includes a microcontroller checking the ODU presettings (frequency synthesizer. September 1999 11/34 . locked to the reference signal.) and receives the information (RX input power.. coming from the dual UHF synthesizer.38 GHz). ODU temperature) and the alarms from the several ODU modules • it receives the DC voltages from the DC/DC converter and distributes them to the ODU modules • it includes the physical interface for the monitoring device for the received power measuring Local Oscillator It consists of three different parts: • TX/RX UHF synthesizer It includes a UHF double frequency synthesizer. etc. 3. in order to precisely repeat the IF spectrum at the frequency (7. IF and Distributor module It performs the following functions: • it receives and splits the signals coming from the IDU: 320 MHz IF TX modulated and 6. the ODU comprises six modules. with tolerance always lower than ±3 ppm.5 MHz FSK sub-carrier for the service connection • checks the amplitude of IF TX signal • receives RF signals from the Front-End. it generates the alarm signals for the fault signaling. defining the UHF TX and RX frequency. an RF Diplexer connected to the antenna and. • TX VCO It houses a microwave VCO which transfers the IF TX 320 MHz modulated frequency. The main function of ODU modules are here below set down: – Protection module It performs the following functions: • input protection against lightning • extraction of the DC supply voltage from the IDU-ODU coaxial connecting cable.SRA L General information 2..

– – 12/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. It sends the microwave signal to the port of the Front-End module local oscillator. • it converts the RF signal to the 1st 1310 MHz intermediate frequency • it amplifies and filters the converted signal and send it to IF and Distributor module input • it generates the alarm signals for the fault signaling. DC/DC converter It performs the following functions: • it receives the DC voltage from the protection module • it converts the input DC voltage in the DC voltages required by the different modules the ODU consists of • it delivers the generated DC voltages to the IF and Distributor module which provides to distribute them • it generates the alarm signals for the fault signaling. it also generates the alarm signals for the fault signaling. the power amplifier can be disabled through a squelch command (1+1) H/S configuration it generates the alarm signals for the fault signaling. It includes a microwave VCO which is locked to the reference through a PLL circuit. It connects the TX output and the Front-End input to the antenna. and sends the output signal to the Diplexer.General information SRA L • • • • – RX VCO It receives the reference signal from the RX UHF synthesizer. RF Transmitter It performs the following functions: it amplifies the microwave signal coming from the TX VCO up to the desired power. Diplexer Filter The microwave Diplexer Filter includes the wave-guide microwave TX and RX filters. Front-End module It performs the following functions: • it receives the signal from the Diplexer and amplifies it through two LNA stages. September 1999 . which can be modified through the microcontroller. filters the received and transmitted signals and isolates the receiver from the RF Transmitter.

September 1999 13/34 . 3 – ODU block diagram 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.SRA L General information (*)Present or absent according to versions Fig.

General information SRA L 3 IDU-ODU INTERCONNECTION The interconnection between IDU and ODU is carried out and consists of a single bidirectional line carrying a composite signal comprising the radio signal (TX and RX). 3. supplied by the corresponding IDU RTM unit.).3 ODU power supply The IDU-ODU interconnection cable also carries the secondary DC voltage for ODU feeding.5 MHz frequencies. with 5. attenuation and dimension to minimize the filtering functions on both IDU and ODU to minimize the interferences between the ODU TX and RX sections to minimize the interference between the harmonics of the TX IF frequency and the shifter frequencies to obtain the dynamic interval required the AGC circuit both in IDU and ODU. current limitation and open cable or short circuit cable alarm circuits.5 MHz and 6. This unit also includes soft-start. data channel. for the transmission of the signal to be transmitted through the radio equipment 70 MHz TFM modulated signal from IDU to ODU. consists of two IF signals: – – 320 MHz TFM modulated signal from IDU to ODU. 3.2 IDU/ODU service auxiliary channel An auxiliary channel connects the IDU and ODU. as far as the transmission/reception of the radio signal is concerned. etc. carrying all the information required for the correct equipment operation (alarms. speech channel. September 1999 . 3.1 Radio signal The IDU-ODU connection. an IDU-ODU auxiliary service channel and ODU power supply. The service connection between IDU and ODU is realized by means of two FSK modulated sub-carriers. The use of the 320 MHz and 70 MHz frequencies allows: – – – – – to optimize the IDU-ODU connecting cable length. 14/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. for the transmission of the signal received through the radio equipment.

2 kbit/s asynchronous data channel (standard RS-232C) for the connection to an external PC for the configuration. During the equipment normal operating conditions.3 User channel The IDU makes available. The user channel can be configured in two different modes: – – Contradirectional: clock associated with the input data stream originated by RTM unit and it is delivered to an external equipment Co-directional: clock associated with the input data stream originated by an external equipment and delivered to RTM unit. In the connection to the PC. 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.703. the connection to the service PC is not required since the PC is only utilized in the setting at work and/or local maintenance phase. at the outside. V bus daisy chain kit or D channel distributor (available only if Q-Adapter is non equipped) can be used for easy daisy chaining. a 19.1 Power supply The IDU makes available. with 75 Ohm unbalanced or 120 Ohm balanced interface. presetting and local supervisory functions of the equipment. at the outside.11) for applications defined by the user. for the interconnection of the Controller unit to other Controller units of different IDU assemblies located in the same site. 4. can be interconnected through a daisy-chain structure. 8 or 16 I/O lines for the 2 Mbit/s tributaries as per G. September 1999 15/34 . 4. The interconnection takes place by means of a 120 Ohm. the IDU is considered as DCE. at the outside.SRA L General information 4 PHYSICAL INTERFACES 4. carried out by the Controller unit. length 300 m). 4. The user channel configuration is an action controlled through software. 4. a redundant input line for the connection of the power supply batteries to the equipment. The SRA L system only executes a point-to-point channel carrying and it is absolutely transparent to the channel contents. mounted at the two ends of the cable.4 V bus The IDU makes available at the outside a 128 kbit/s data bus with burst mode (HDLC frame). a 64 kbit/s synchronous data channel (V.2 Tributary signals The IDU makes available.5 PC channel (F interface) The IDU makes available. at the outside. twisted-pairs cable (max. The V bus cable must be correctly terminated by two 120 Ohm terminations. Up to 32 Controller units of different IDUs.

21 interface. the D channel becomes available to a TMN local operator (outside to the SRA L equipment) which obviously has to use the proprietary protocol.811 protocol and it is available on two different electrical interfaces (X.General information SRA L 4. the IDU can be equipped with D Channel Distributor unit. By the software. if available. In the case of X. The D channel utilizes a proprietary protocol and it is usually used to ensure the carrying of the TMN information through one of the 2 Mbit/s streams managed by the SRA L equipment (the D channel is built-in the 2 Mbit/s stream by means of Add/Drop actions). SDH) to SRA L network TMN supervision center.6 Q channel (option) NOTE – The Q channel is available only if the IDU is equipped with Q-Adapter unit.. in such a way.ITU T Q. constituting the repetition of internal D channel of SRA L equipment. The IDU. which allow the connection of different SRA L equipments (e. when equipped with Q-Adapter Unit.8 Alarm and remote control external lines (option) NOTE – The alarm interface is available only if the IDU is equipped with Alarm unit or Alarm and Fan unit. a data channel for carrying the TMN information of a radio sub-network towards a supervision center. In alternative to Q-Adapter Unit.21 and 10BASE2) in order to allow two different types of electrical connections between the Q-Adapter unit and the supervision center. the auxiliary supply voltage allows a management of alarm criteria even should the main power supply be faulty 16/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. managed by the Controller unit. The IDU is provided with an alarm interface delivering to the outside some signal lines associated with the three main functions: – auxiliary supply voltage input port (function not strictly required for IDU standard operation. at the outside. The IDU makes available. the IDU is considered as DTE and the connector. one only Q-Adapter unit is required in a whole SRA L network. can be configured by the software through the Controller unit. This channel is made available through the Q-Adapter unit. 4. the IDU makes available two D channels named "external".g. the D channel can be addressed again on the output connector located on IDU.7 D channel (option) NOTE – The D channel is available only if the IDU is equipped with Q-Adapter unit or. in alternative with the D Channel Distributor unit. The Q channel utilizes the Rec. In this case. September 1999 . makes available to the outside a 64 kbit/s synchronous data channel (RS-485). located on IDU. 4.

switching commands. must have the same expansion structure of the EOW channel. utilized by SRA L equipment.9 EOW expansion channel (option) NOTE – The EOW channel expansions is available only if the IDU is equipped with EOW unit. consisting of different equipments which share the same EOW channel.not supplied as part of the equipment).10 Handset (option) NOTE – The access to the handset is available only if the IDU is equipped with EOW unit.. 4. 4. each equipment has a speech number which is only for the whole network and can be addressed by other network equipments. The IDU makes available. a speech channel in the standard 2-wire version for the connection to a handset the IDU local operator can use to speak with the ODU external operator (POE) and/or the operators of the other equipments connected to the same radio network. these systems. alarm of open door. – 4.SRA L General information – transparent carrying. at the outside.) sending of six output alarms relevant to the equipment status and of four output command lines relevant to the local Controller unit. of up to four alarm/command lines delivered to the outside (e.11 Monitoring of received RF power The ODU operator by means of a monitoring device (multimeter . etc. The IDU makes available to the outside two EOW channel expansion which can be utilized to connect the equipment EOW channel to two EOW channels of two radio equipments located in the same site. through a SRA L radio link. September 1999 17/34 . The EOW channel expansion allows to realize a network with very large daisy-chain structure. smoke alarm. The two channel expansions are of 6-wire type (4-wire speech + E&M signaling) or 4-wire with DTMF. however. 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. can measure the received radio signal field.g.

4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) and 8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) capacities. 8). September 1999 . The A/D-RPT configuration allows up to a 100% of the add/drop capacity for 2x2 and 4×2 Mbit/s capacities (2 TFM) and up to 50% of the add-drop capacity for 8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM). 5): (1+0) double terminal (see Fig. 4) are available for test purposes: – Local Loop-back (A) Each 2 Mbit/s tributary stream can be looped back on Base Band unit at line interface level.General information SRA L 5 LOOP-BACK The following loop-back functions (see Fig. 4 – Loop-back functions 6 CONFIGURATIONS The equipment configuration modes can be: – – – – – single terminal (see Fig. 7 and Fig. The (1+1) H/S configuration can be realised either with one antenna (see Fig. 8): (1+1) H/S terminal with frequency-diversity or polarization diversity protection (see Fig. 9): (1+1) FD/PD repeater with tributary Add/Drop (see Fig. 18/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. 6): 2×(1+0) terminal with Hot-standby protection (see Fig. – Fig. All the other configurations need two RTM units and two corresponding ODUs. The 2×(1+0) configuration can only be activated for 2×2 Mbit/s. allows the correct connection between two stations to be checked. 7) or with two antennas (see Fig. The single terminal configuration (1+0) needs only one RTM unit and the corresponding ODU. Up to a 100% of the add/drop capacity for 8×2 Mbit/s capacity (4TFM) and up to 50% of the add-drop capacity for 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM). Remote Loop-back (B) In this case. when activated. every tributary stream can be looped back on the remote station. This type of loop-back. 10): A/D-RPT.

September 1999 19/34 .SRA L General information (*)Optional (**)With Q-Adapter unit only Fig. 5 – SRA L equipment: (1+0) configuration (*)Optional (**)With Q-Adapter unit only Fig. 6 – SRA L equipment: 2×(1+0) configuration 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.

8 – SRA L equipment: (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration 20/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. 7 – SRA L equipment: (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration (*)Optional (**)With Q-Adapter unit only Fig.General information SRA L (*)Optional (**)With Q-Adapter unit only Fig. September 1999 .

September 1999 21/34 . 9 – SRA L equipment: (1+1) FD configuration (*)Optional (**)With Q-Adapter unit only Fig.SRA L General information (*)Optional (**)With Q-Adapter unit only Fig. 10 – SRA L equipment: A/D-RPT configuration 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.

As understandable from the diagram. when possible. Therefore these elements are built using simple and passive components.General information SRA L 7 PROTECTION The SRA L system protection in (1+1) configurations guarantees. the system reliability mainly depends on the reliability of the two terminal elements (splitter and switch). with a high MTBF. 11 shows the SRA L system protection general diagram where A and B substitute generic hardware RX functions and C and D substitute generic hardware TX functions. September 1999 . continuity of the connection between the two radio terminals when the following conditions occur: – – hardware failure link quality degradation. 22/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. Fig.

SRA L General information Fig. 11 – Protection general diagram 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. September 1999 23/34 .

Fig. The hitless switches protect against failures of the RF section and of the A sub-units while the RX hardware switches protect only against hardware failures of the B sub-units. September 1999 . this operation assures to the hitless switches the necessary bit to bit alignment for all the (1+1) configurations. The hitless switches are driven by a logic based on detected alarms and they allow an error free protection in the presence of some conditions. 12 shows the RX protection architecture. 24/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. Both RX sections receive the same aggregate signal.General information SRA L 7. When a unit containing one switch is not supplied. it controls the RX hardware switches of the RTM units.1 RX protection Inside RX the protection is managed by: – – hitless protection logic. the switch itself switches automatically on the disabled status in such a way to avoid interferences with the signal that is passing on the other route. it controls the hitless switches of the RTM units hardware protection logic.

September 1999 25/34 . 12 – RX protection 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.SRA L General information Fig.

The functioning of the TX hardware protection logic depends on the system configuration. September 1999 .General information SRA L 7. This configuration is not equipped with a priority unit. When a unit containing one switch is not supplied. Fig. such switches forward the same aggregate signal to the RF sections. the switch itself switches automatically on the disabled status in such a way to avoid interferences with the signal that is passing on the other route.2 TX protection Inside TX the protection is managed by the hardware protection logic controlling the TX hardware switches of the RTM units. the system switches from one unit to another one and the new unit remains active also after the suppression of the alarm causes (irreversible mode). 7. the protection is realised at base-band level by means of the TX hardware switches of the RTM units. 26/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.2.1 TX protection in (1+1) configuration at frequency/polarization diversity In (1+1) configuration at frequency/polarization diversity. 13 shows the architecture of the TX protection in (1+1) configuration at frequency diversity. the RF switches and the squelch of the RF transmitters of the ODUs. When an alarm occurs.

September 1999 27/34 .SRA L General information Fig. 13 – TX protection in frequency diversity configuration 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.

TX protection in (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby with RF switch and two antennas (refer to Fig. 16) The protection is realised by means of the squelch of the RF transmitters of the ODUs. In this configuration. Such an alarm defines the resetting modes of the protection logic: – if the TX PWR ALM alarm is active. The RF switch open. it is checked the status of the RF transmitter failure alarm (TX PWR ALM). If a local alarm occurs on ODU. then. – In (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby. When an alarm occurs. 14) The protection is realised by means of the RF switches of the ODUs. insert a decreasing caused by the insertion loss. the secondary line is coupled to the main one with a decreasing caused by the coupling loss (set via software CL = 10 dB). the system switches automatically on the main line. the priority line is always active. In this configuration. insert an additional decreasing caused by the insertion loss. In this configuration. – – – 28/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. the protection logic is in reversible mode. This configuration provides a main RTM-ODU line that has priority with respect to the secondary line. the commands for the RF switches and for the squelch of the RF transmitters are directly generated inside the ODUs. the protection is realised at RF level by means of the RF switches or by means of the squelch of the RF transmitters. 15) The protection is realised by means of the RF switches of the ODUs. The TX hardware switches of the RTM unit are not used. then. In this configuration. September 1999 . that is the secondary line remains operative till when an alarm is present on the main line. the system switches from the main line to the secondary one. the coupling loss is then null (set via software CL = 0 dB). Before executing the switching operation. that is the secondary line remains operative till when the operator does not force manually on line the main line (after having executed the removal of the alarm causes) if the TX PWR ALM alarm is deactivated. If no alarm has occurred or if alarms with equivalent seriousness have occurred on both lines (reversible mode). the secondary line is coupled to the main one with an attenuation caused by the coupling loss (set via software CL = 0 dB). The priority depends on the physical position of the RTM units.2 TX protection in (1+1) Hot-Standby configuration In (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby. no coupling exists between the two lines so it is inserted a decreasing on the secondary line (set via software CL = 15 dB).General information SRA L 7. The RF switch open. it is then checked the transmission RF power of the main line and of the secondary one. no coupling exists between the two lines. 17) The protection is realised by means of the squelch of the RF transmitters of the ODUs. TX protection in (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby without RF switch and with two antennas (refer to Fig. The following different cases of TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration are possible: – TX protection in (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby with RF switch and one antenna (refer to Fig.2. TX protection in (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby without RF switch and with one antenna (refer to Fig. the protection logic is in irreversible mode. When the alarm causes are removed.

This signal comes from the local logic and it is necessary to have the switching without priority in (1+1) configuration at frequency diversity Rem HW SW CMD: status signal of the remote system. the protection is realised by means of the control of the RX switches of the RTM units. In automatic functioning mode. – – It is possible to force manually the hardware protection logic by means of software presetting.SRA L General information 7. In RX.3 Hardware protection logic The hardware protection logic protects the system against hardware failures of the IDU and of the ODU as in TX as in RX. The hardware protection logic creates the following commands: – – – HW SW CMD: these commands control at the same time the TX and RX hardware switches of the RTM units RF SW CMD: these commands control the RF switches of the ODUs RF SQ CMD: these commands control the squelch of the RF transmitters of the ODUs. while in (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby the HW SW CMD command is used only in RX and not in TX. The forcing action status can be: – – – normality: no forcing action RTM unit 1 forced on line RTM unit 2 forced on line. in case of (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby with RF switches the squelch of the RF transmitters of the ODUs. the protection is realised by means of the control of: – – – the TX switches of the RTM units. it is used only the HW SW CMD command. It identifies the priority level of the unit in case of conflict. In TX. The RTM unit is doubled in such a way to keep the system functionality when a unit failure occurs or when the unit has to be replaced for maintenance. in case of (1+1) configuration at frequency diversity the RF switches of the ODUs. In (1+1) configuration at frequency diversity. 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. in case of (1+1) configuration Hot-Standby without RF switches. September 1999 29/34 . the hardware protection logic creates the switching commands according to the following signals: – – – – – Loc TX HW ALM: summarised alarm of the TX sections of the local ODU and of the local RTM unit Rem TX HW ALM: summarised alarm of the TX sections of the remote ODU and of the remote RTM unit Loc RX HW ALM: summarised alarm of the RX section of the local RTM unit Rem RX HW ALM: summarised alarm of the RX section of the remote RTM unit Loc HW SW CMD: status signal of the local system. This signal comes from the remote logic and it is necessary to have the switching without priority in (1+1) configuration at frequency diversity Slot Sense: signal based upon the physical position of the RTM unit.

It is possible to force manually the hitless protection logic by means of: – – the push-button present on the frontal panel of the Controller unit the software presetting.4 Hitless protection logic The hitless protection logic allows an error free protection in the RX section. In automatic functioning mode. The forcing action status can be: – – – – normality (no forcing action) channel 1 forced on line channel 2 forced on line channel 1 forced on RTM 1 and channel 2 forced on RTM 2 (only via software). the hitless protection logic creates the switching commands according to the following alarms of the local and remote radio channels: – – – – – – – – Loc ODU ALM: summarised alarm coming from the corresponding ODU Loc HL ALM: summarised alarm coming from the local RX hitless section Loc DEM ALM: summarised alarm coming from the local IF-DEM section Loc HIGH EW ALM: alarm of High Early Warning condition coming from the local FEC Loc LOW EW ALM: alarm of Low Early Warning condition coming from the local FEC Rem HIGH ALM: summarised alarm coming from the remote system. September 1999 . 30/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. In automatic functioning mode. The logic creates the HL SW CMD commands controlling the hitless switches of the RTM units.General information SRA L 7. The alarms are subdivided into different classes according to the seriousness level. it is the OR of the ODU ALM. the protection logic allows the passage of the channel with the least serious alarm. DEM ALM and HL ALM remote alarms Rem HIGH EW ALM: alarm of High Early Warning condition coming from the remote FEC Rem LOW EW ALM: alarm of Low Early Warning condition coming from the remote FEC.

SRA L General information Fig. 14 – TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration with RF switch and one antenna 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1. September 1999 31/34 .

September 1999 . 15 – TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration with RF switch and two antennas 32/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.General information SRA L Fig.

16 – TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration without RF switch and with one antenna 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.SRA L General information Fig. September 1999 33/34 .

September 1999 .General information SRA L FINE Fig. 17 – TX protection in Hot-Standby configuration without RF switch and with two antennas 34/34 53-001A8-100/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Technical characteristics 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.

Technical characteristics SRA L BLANK PAGE FINE 2/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

18 Handset channel5) . . 20 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . 18 User channel. . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY .5. . . . . . . . . . 5 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS . . . . . .4 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Receiver characteristics . . . . .3 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 D Channel2) . . . . . . .1 3 4 5 6 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 EOW expansion channel1) . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . 5 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Transmitter characteristics . . . . . 24 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Q Channel3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5.6 2. . . . . . . .SRA L Technical characteristics Contents 1 2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Characteristics of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . .7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 V bus. . . . . .1 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 ANTENNA CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Characteristics of channel auxiliary interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 2. .2 2.6 2. . . . . .2 2. . . . . . 20 Typical Consumptions. . . . . . . . . . . . .5. September 1999 3/30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Alarm interface characteristics1). . . . . . 17 PC channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 2. . . . . . . . . .5. . . . . . . . . . 20 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Fig. . 8 Mask of the RF signal for 2×2 Mbit/s capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Mask of the RF signal for 16×2 Mbit/s capacity (4TFM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for ODU . . . . . . . . 11 Block diagram of RX RF side . . . . . . . . 7 Fig. . . 10 Fig. 10 Mask of the RF signal for 4×2 Mbit/s capacity . 23 Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU-ODU storage. . . . . . 4 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Technical characteristics SRA L Illustrations Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Block diagram of TX RF side . . . . . 12 Shape of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface output signal . . . . . . . . . 17 Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Fig. 2 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . 5 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Fig. 23 4/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. . . . . . 8 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Mask of the RF signal for 8×2 Mbit/s capacity (2TFM & 4TFM). . . . . . . . . . . 22 Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU equipped with Alarm and Fan unit. . . . . September 1999 . .

15.1 General characteristics – – – – Modulation format Demodulation Transmission capacity Bit rate of the transmitted aggregate signal: • 2×2 Mbit/s • 4×2 Mbit/s • 8×2 Mbit/s • 16×2 Mbit/s RF band [GHz]: 7 GHz 7.. September 1999 5/30 .7 26 GHz 24. mechanical and environmental characteristics are set down of the SRA L digital radio equipment.. 2 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS 2.. 18 GHZ 17..10.2..6 10.7.864 Mbit/s 9.75) 28 MHz (27.75.7..39.5 23 GHz 21. the main electrical...5..5) _____________________________ 1) The 3CFIT32 modulation format is a proprietary modification of the GTFM format (Generalized Tamed Frequency Modulation) and it belongs to the CPFSK (Continuous Phase Frequency Shift Keying) modulation schemes family. 4×2 Mbit/s.456 Mbit/s 38..4.5 GHz 10.5 13 GHz 12.9.26.19.1...13.8.35 3CFIT321) or 4 level GTFM (16x2) differential with Viterbi decoding 2×2 Mbit/s.. 8×2..5 15 GHz 14.SRA L Technical characteristics 1 GENERAL In this document.. 16×2Mbit/s 4.728 Mbit/s 19.7 – 8 GHz 8.5.23..2.25 38 GHz 37...912 Mbit/s – Channel arrangement: • 2×2 Mbit/s • 4×2 Mbit/s • 8×2 Mbit/s • 16×2 Mbit/s 3.5 MHz 7 MHz 14 MHz (13. 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.

Technical characteristics SRA L – Nominal system gain (BER = 10-6)[dB]1): 7 GHz 2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 114. additional loss has to be considered due to the RF splitters.5 107.5 111.5 13 GHz 110.5 108.5 104.5 108.5 105.5 104.5 38 GHz 104.5 8 GHz 114.5 103.5 100.5 105.5 101.5 104.5 101. September 1999 .5 15 GHz 110 107 104 104 101 18 GHz 2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 107.5 100.5 95.5 98.5 _________________________________ 1) For equipments in (1+1) Hot-Standby 1 antenna configuration from 2. 6/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.5 GHz 110.5 dB.5 104.5 107.5 111.5 101.5 108.5 104.5 101.5 23 GHz 107 104 101 101 98 26 GHz 106.5 101.5 dB to 3.5 108.5 98.5 97. depending on RF band.5 10.5 98.

5 109.5 105.5 102.5 110.5 10.5 38 GHz 106.5 dB to 3.5 GHz 112.5 106.5 106.5 dB.5 110. depending on RF band. September 1999 7/30 .5 103.5 100.5 110.5 100.5 109 106 106.5 103.5 103. additional loss has to be considered due to the RF splitters.5 107.5 _________________________________ 1) For equipments in (1+1) Hot-Standby 1 antenna configuration from 2.SRA L Technical characteristics – Nominal system gain (BER = 10-3)[dB]1): 7 GHz 2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 116.5 102.5 15 GHz 112 109 106 106 103 18 GHz 2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 109.5 23 GHz 109 106 103 103 100 26 GHz 108.5 103.5 103.5 13 GHz 112. 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.5 99.5 113.5 106.5 8 GHz 116.5 110.5 97.5 107.5 100.5 113.

5 GHz 20 13 GHz 20 15 GHz 20 18 GHz PNOM [dBm] 18 23 GHz 18 26 GHz 18 38 GHz 17 8/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. the RF parameters have to be understood having been measured at point C' and valid for the temperature range defined in par. Fig.5 GHz ±91 13 GHz ±266 15 GHz ±315 ±336 ±420 ±490 ±644 ±714 ±728 18 GHz ±120 ±340 ±1010 ±1560 23 GHz ±1008 ±1200 ±1232 – 26 GHz ±1008 38 GHz ±1260 Tuning range: see "ODU frequency tables"of document "Equipment composition" 2. Unless otherwise stated. 1.2 Transmitter characteristics The following characteristics refer to points set down in Fig. 4. September 1999 .Technical characteristics SRA L Shifter frequency (Fs) [MHz]: 7 GHz ±154 ±161 ±245 ±148.5 8 GHz ±126 10. 1 – Block diagram of TX RF side – Nominal output power [dBm]: 7 GHz PNOM [dBm] 24 8 GHz 24 10.

2 see mask of Fig. 5 according to ITU-R SM 329 Rec..24 0.±2 26 GHz 0.......5 GHz 0....24 0.24 0. September 1999 9/30 .±2 18 GHz 0..20 0. 3 see mask of Fig...±2 15 GHz Attenuation value [dBm]: Accuracy [dB]1) – 0. with linear function.24 0.24 0......±2 8 GHz 0.....±2 38 GHz 0. 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1... 4 see mask of Fig... the tolerance changes.±2 Output power squelched condition mode ≤ -50 dBm in 1MHz BW up to 21.20 0.24 0..24 0.2 GHz ≤ -30 dBm in 1MHz BW from 21... SM 329 ≥ 15 dB – – ____________ 1) Varying the the attenuation...SRA L Technical characteristics – Output power regulation [dB]: 7 GHz Attenuation value [dBm]: Accuracy [dB]1) 0..2 GHz to110 GHz ±3 ppm 250 kHz – – – TX frequency tolerance Tuning step Output signal spectral power density: • 2×2 Mbit/s • 4×2 Mbit/s • 8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM & 4TFM) • 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) External spurious emission Return loss see mask of Fig.±2 10.±2 13 GHz 0...±2 23 GHz 0...

September 1999 .Technical characteristics SRA L Fig. 3 – Mask of the RF signal for 4×2 Mbit/s capacity 10/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. 2 – Mask of the RF signal for 2×2 Mbit/s capacity Fig.

5 – Mask of the RF signal for 16×2 Mbit/s capacity (4TFM) 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. 4 – Mask of the RF signal for 8×2 Mbit/s capacity (2TFM & 4TFM) Fig. September 1999 11/30 .SRA L Technical characteristics Fig.

Fig. input power for BER = 10-10 Max. input power to prevent from permanent damaging 1° IF RX frequency 2° IF RX frequency Image rejection -20 dBm -10 dBm 1310 MHz 70 MHz ≥ 90 dB 12/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. 6 – Block diagram of RX RF side – – – – – Max. September 1999 . 6. Unless otherwise stated. 4. the RF parameters have to be understood as measures at point C and valid for the temperature range defined in par.Technical characteristics SRA L 2.3 Receiver characteristics The following characteristics refer to the points set down in Fig.

5 -81.5 -84.5 -81.5 -84.5 GHz -90.5 -81. September 1999 13/30 .5 23 GHz -89 -86 -83 -83 -80 26 GHz -88.5 13 GHz -90.5 -81.5 -84.5 -79.5 -78.5 -84.5 -85.5 -84.5 38 GHz -87.5 15 GHz -90 -87 -84 -84 -81 18 GHz 2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM 8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) -89.5 -84.5 -83.5 -82.5 -81.5 -87.5 -87.5 -84.5 -87.5 -80.5 -84. BER=10-6) [dBm]: 7 GHz 2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) -90.SRA L Technical characteristics – Nominal threshold (at 25°C.5 -81.5 8 GHz -90.5 -87.5 -86.5 10.5 -83.5 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.5 -82.5 -84.

5 -86.5 -81.5 -83.5 23 GHz -91 -88 -85 -85 -82 26 GHz -90.5 82.5 -86.5 -86.5 -84.5 8 GHz -92.5 -78.5 10.5 -83.5 -87.5 -86.Technical characteristics SRA L – Nominal threshold (at 25°C.5 -88.5 -84.5 13 GHz -92.5 -86.5 -89.5 -83. September 1999 .5 -83.5 -86.5 -86.5 -89.5 14/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.5 -89. BER=10-3) [dBm]: 7 GHz 2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM 8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) -92.5 -81.5 -81.5 -84.5 -85.5 -89.5 -85.5 GHz -92.5 38 GHz -82.5 15 GHz -92 -89 -86 -86 -83 18 GHz 2×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 4×2 Mbit/s (2TFM) 8×2 Mbit/s (2TFM 8×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) 16×2 Mbit/s (4TFM) -91.5 -86.

the introduction of a single interfering signal does not cause a decrease of the threshold level greater than 1 dB. recording time: 48 hours for 2×2 Mbit/s (max. excluding the side frequencies of the wanted frequency up to twice the channel spacing.SRA L Technical characteristics – – – Background BER1) Sensitivity with co-channel interference2) Sensitivity with adjacent channel interference (single step)2) 3) ≤ 10-11 S/I ≥ 23 dB S/I ≥ 0 dB S/CW ≥ -30 dB – Sensitivity with spurious CW interference4) ___________ 1) Min. 2) For a receiver working at BER threshold 10-6 in absence of interferer signals.2×2 Mbit/s: 3.16×2 Mbit/s: 28 MHz (27.3 to 60 GHz.5 MHz . 10 errors). 10 errors). 10 errors). 24 hours for 4×2 Mbit/s (max. the introduction of a CW interfering signal on every frequency in the range 0. shall not result in a BER greater than 10-5. The measurement point is B.75 MHz) .8×2 Mbit/s: 14 MHz (13.4×2 Mbit/s: 7 MHz . 3) 4) 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. September 1999 15/30 . 12 hours for 8×2 Mbit/s (max. The single step spacings of adjacent channels are: .5 MHz) For a receiver working at BER threshold 10-6.

7 75 Ohm o 120 Ohm 2. September 1999 .4 Characteristics of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface The tributary interface can be at 75 Ohm or 120 Ohm.37 V 3V – 0 ± 0.2 to 3072 kHz ≥ 18 dB ≥ 24 dB ≥ 20 dB – – – – 16/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. for f = 51.Technical characteristics SRA L 2.237 V 0 ± 0.3 V 244 ns ≤ 5° ≥ 10 dB. peak-to-peak jitter of RX AIS signal Output return loss Input return loss: • f = 51 to 102 kHz • f = 102 to 2048 kHz • f = 2048 to 3072 kHz 2048 kbit/s ± 50 ppm HDB3 see Fig. – – – – – Bit rate Code Pulse shape Load impedance Nominal peak voltage of a mark (pulse): • 75 Ohm • 120 Ohm Nominal peak voltage of a "space" (no pulse) • 75 Ohm • 120 Ohm Nominal pulse length Max.

5 2. September 1999 17/30 . 7 – Shape of 2 Mbit/s tributary interface output signal 2. 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.5.1 Characteristics of channel auxiliary interfaces PC channel – – Channel type Electrical interface1) 19.SRA L Technical characteristics Fig.2 kbit/s asynchronous data channel RS-232C _________________ 1) The IDU is considered as DCE.

the SRA L equipment is considered as DTE. September 1999 .Technical characteristics SRA L 2.21 be utilized.11 2.2 V bus – – Channel type Electrical interface 128 kbit/s data bus with burst mode (HDLC frame) proprietary 2. 18/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.3 User channel – – Channel type1) Interfaccia elettrica 64 kbit/s synchronous data channel V.5. 4) The Q-Adapter unit makes available both interfaces.4 D Channel2) – – Channel type Electrical interface 64 kbit/s synchronous data channel RS-485 2.5.6 Handset channel5) – Number of expansions 2 Speech channel characteristics – – – – – – – – Connection type Input impedance Nominal load impedance Nominal input level (TX) Nominal output level (RX) Return loss as to 600 Ohm load Supply voltage output Loop current (OFF-HOOK) 2-wires 375 Ohm nominal 600 Ohm balanced 0 dBr -4 dBr ± 1 dB or -7 dBr ± 1 dB 18 dB (300 to 3400 Hz) -25 V ± 2 V ≥ 20 mA nominal (loop resistance 0 to 600 Ohm) _____________ 1) The user channel can be configured (by software) as codirectional or counter-directional.811 X. 3) Channel available only if the IDU is equipped with Q-Adapter unit.5. 5) Channel available only if the IDU is equipped with EOW unit.5.21 or Ethernet IEEE 802-3 (10 BASE2) 2.5 Q Channel3) – – Protocol Electrical interface4) Rec. ITU T Q.5. Should interface X. 2) Channel available only if the IDU is equipped with Q-Adapter unit or in alternative D Channel Distributor unit.

53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. delivered current • Sinking current in open conditions • Continuous applied voltage ≤ 30 Ohm ≤ -2 V 50 mA 80 mA ≤ Isource ≤ 100 mA -200 µA ≤ Isink ≤ 0 A ≤ -72 V ___________ 1) Channel available only if the IDU is equipped with EOW unit. September 1999 19/30 .5. • Residual voltage in closed conditions • Nominal current delivered in closed • Max.7 EOW expansion channel1) – Number of expansions 2 Speech signal characteristics – – – – – – Connection type Input/output impedance Nominal input level Nominal output level Return loss with 600 Ohm load Absolute group delay at min. group delay frequency (with -10 dBm0 input power) Idle channel noise (input/output port terminated at nominal impedance) Single frequency noise Isolation between input/output port (f ≤ 100 kHz) 4-wires (TX+RX) 600 Ohm balanced -10 dBr -10 dBr ± 1 dB ≥ 14 dB (300 to 3400 Hz) ≤ 600 µs ≤ -65 dBm0p ≤ -50 dBm0p ≥ 25 dB – – – E&M-wire circuits common characteristics – – – – – Operation type Activation condition Signalling frequency Duty cycle M-wire equivalent circuit: • Open circuit • Closed circuit disconnected loop ground/open circuit 10 Hz ± 2 Hz o 20 Hz ± 2 Hz 50%/50% o 60%/40% (-3 V to +2 V) battery with ≥ 60 kOhm series resistance (-3 V to +2 V) battery with ≥ 200 Ohm series resistance – E-wire circuit characteristics: • R(ON) max.SRA L Technical characteristics 2.

No sinking current is present at input port.7.4 V to -72 V from station batteries 100 V ≤2A ≤ 5 A with ODU pre-heather (-50°C option) 2.1 mA. should a -75 V voltage be applied to the output port in open state. load current (at -48 VDC nominal input voltage) -38. sinking current is ≤ 0. can be connected to IDU internal ground by a jumper. – 2. Every input port can be directly connected to every output port. The input port current fluctuation ranges between 1 and 15 mA. Output ports The following two states can be taken by each port of the output line: • Open output The equivalent input resistance to local ground is ≥ 1 MOhm. • Open input The port detects this condition should the input line be connected to a DC voltage generator in the range from -3 V to + 2 V through a ≥ 60 kOhm resistance.6 Alarm interface characteristics1) – Input ports The following two states can be taken by each port of the input line: • Grounded input The port detects this condition should the input line be connected to a DC voltage generator in the range from -3 V to +2 V through a 0 to 200 Ohm resistance. The output port ground is connected to +V AUX voltage which.Technical characteristics SRA L 2. • Grounded output The equivalent input resistance to the local ground is ≤ 25 Ohm for a ≤ 40 mA sinking current.1 Typical Consumptions – – – IDU full equipped ODU ODU with operating preheater 46. 20/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.7 Power supply characteristics – – – Power supply voltage Max.5 W 18 W 85 W _____________ 1) Interface available only if the IDU is equipped with the Alarm unit or Alarm and Fan unit. the max. permitted inverse continuous voltage Max. September 1999 .

it can be delivered with antenna. The ODU mechanical characteristics are: – – – – height width depth weight 119. September 1999 21/30 . 9 is valid. 11 is valid. for which the climatic diagram of Fig. by means of two different supporting brackets. as far as the IDU is concerned. For applications requiring.1 the temperature/humidity characteristics excepted. a wide temperature range.3 ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3. Class 1. (Feb. On customer request. for which the climatic diagram of Fig. 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. IDU meets the following ETSI classes: – – Transport Stationary utilization ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2. for which the climatic diagram of Fig.4 mm 266 mm 266 mm 6 kg 4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS The equipment complies with ETSI ETS 300 019 Rec. As far as the storage conditions are concerned. the temperature/humidity characteristics excepted.2. ODU meets the following ETSI classes: – – Transport Stationary utilization ETS 300 019-1-2 Class 2. for which the climatic diagram of Fig. the temperature/humidity characteristics excepted.3 ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 4. 10 is valid. an optional unit provided with fans can be utilized (Alarm and Fan unit) In this case. the above ETSI classes are still valid.SRA L Technical characteristics 3 MECHANICAL CHARACTERISTICS The IDU can be arranged for the location. 1992). The IDU mechanical characteristics are: – – – – height width depth weight (full equipped) 2 U (standard 19") 450 mm 240 mm 6 kg The ODU is arranged for pole mounting. 8 is valid.2 the temperature/humidity characteristics excepted. in standard ETSI or 19" racks. IDU and ODU meet ETSI ETS 300-019-1-1 REC.

9 – Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU equipped with Alarm and Fan unit 22/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. September 1999 . 8 – Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU Fig.Technical characteristics SRA L Fig.

SRA L Technical characteristics Fig. 11 –Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for IDU-ODU storage 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. September 1999 23/30 . 10 –Temperature/humidity climatic diagram for ODU Fig.

Fine adjustment: • Azimuth ±7° • Elevation -5° ÷ +50° o +5° ÷ -50° • Crossed polarization optimization ±5° 24/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. Class 4 Immunity against fast electric transients/bursts as per IEC 802-4. criterion 1 Immunity against fluctuations as per IEC 1000-4-5. according to hop length: 120 cm diam. September 1999 .Technical characteristics SRA L 5 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY The equipment complies with the requirements of ETSI ETS 300-385 Rec. Class 3. wind speed with assured operation Max. the polarization change takes place by rotating the center hub by 90°.. Class 2.namely: – – – – Radiation emission as per EN55022. antenna (slim antenna) 30 cm diam. The main antenna characteristics follow: – – – – – – Ambient temperature range Relative humidity Max. Every antenna is directly connected to the relevant antenna-ODU supporting frame. Class B Immunity against electrostatic discharges as per IEC 801-2. 6 ANTENNA CHARACTERISTICS – – – – – The antenna (optional) is available in the following different diameters. criterion 2. antenna (standard antenna) 60 cm diam. antenna (slim antenna) Every antenna type is equipped with single polarization center hub. for 50 to 115 mm diam. antenna (slim antenna) 24 cm diam. wind speed with assured antenna integrity Mounting -50 to +60°C 0 ÷ 100% 115 km/h 200 km/h pole mount.

5 GHz ≥ 40.5 MHz ≥ 64 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 32 dB 10.R.5 dBi at 7515 MHz ≥ 64 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 32 dB 8 GHz ≥ 37.5 GHz 10500 to 10700 13 GHz 12700 to 13250 15 GHz 14400 to 15350 – 18 GHz 17700 to 19700 23 GHz 21200 to 23600 26 GHz 24500 to 26500 38 GHz 37000 to 40000 120 cm reflector: 7 GHz Gain ≥ 36.W.17:1 (≥ 22.2 dBi at 10600 MHz ≥ 65 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 34 dB Front to back ratio Crossed polarization discrimination HPBW V.0 dB) WR112 (R84) 65 kg ≤ 2° 12' ≤1. September 1999 25/30 . ≤ 2° 24' ≤1.17:1 (≥ 22.17:1 (≥ 22.5 dBi at 8387.S.0 dB) WR112 (R84) 65 kg ≤ 1° 31' ≤1.0 dB) WR90 (R100) 65 kg Wave-guide type Weight ((1+0) antenna and supporting frame) 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.SRA L Technical characteristics – Frequency range [MHz]: 7 GHz 7125 to 7900 8 GHz 8275 to 8500 10.

17:1 (≥ 22.5 dBi at 18700 MHz ≥ 66 dB 180° ± 60° ≥ 32 dB 23 GHz ≥ 46.6 dBi at 12975 MHz ≥ 67 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 32 dB 15 GHz ≥ 42. September 1999 .R.S.0 dB) WR62 (R140) 65 kg ≤ 1° ≤ 1.0 dB) WR75 (R120) 65 kg ≤ 1° 12' ≤ 1. ≤ 1° 20' ≤ 1.Technical characteristics SRA L – 120 cm reflector: 13 GHz Gain ≥ 41.5 dBi at 14875 MHz ≥ 70 dB 180° ± 60° ≥ 32 dB 18 GHz ≥ 44.17:1 (≥ 22.W.0 dB) WR42 (R220) 65 kg Wave-guide type Weight ((1+0) antenna and supporting frame) 26/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.17:1 (≥ 22.2 dBi at 22400 MHz ≥ 72 dB 180° ± 60° ≥ 32 dB Front to back ratio Crossed polarization discrimination HPBW V.17:1 (≥ 22.0 dB) WR42 (R220) 65 kg ≤ 0° 48' ≤ 1.

SRA L Technical characteristics – 60 cm reflector: 10.2:1 (≥ 20.17:1 (≥ 22 dB) WR90 (R100) 28 kg ≤ 2° 32' ≤ 1.2:1 (≥ 20.5 dBi at 10600 MHz ≥ 60 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 34 dB 13 GHz ≥ 36.W.5 GHz Gain ≥ 34.8 dB) WR42 (R220) 28 kg Wave-guide type Weight ((1+0) antenna and supporting frame) 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.8 dB) WR62 (R140) 28 kg ≤ 1° 54' ≤ 1.9 dBi at 14875 MHz ≥ 64 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 35 dB 18 GHz ≥ 38.S.8 dB) WR42 (R220) 28 kg ≤ 1° 36' ≤ 1.3 dBi at 22400 MHz ≥ 66 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 32 dB Front to back ratio Crossed polarization discrimination HPBW V.R.2:1 (≥ 20. ≤ 2° 50' ≤ 1.9 dBi at 18700 MHz ≥ 66 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 35 dB 23 GHz ≥ 40.4 dBi at 12975 MHz ≥ 62 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 35 dB 15 GHz ≥ 36.17:1 (≥ 22 dB) WR75 (R120) 28 kg ≤ 2° 15' ≤ 1. September 1999 27/30 .

8 dB) WR42 (R220) 28 kg ≤ 1° ≤ 1.Technical characteristics SRA L – 60 cm reflector: 26 GHz Gain ≥ 40.W.5 dBi at 38500 MHz ≥ 62 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 32 dB Front to back ratio Crossed polarization discrimination HPBW V.R. ≤ 1° 24' ≤ 1.9 dBi at 25500 MHz ≥ 66 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 32 dB 38 GHz ≥ 44.2:1 (≥ 20.2:1 (≥ 20.S. September 1999 .8 dB) WR28 (R320) 28 kg Wave-guide type Weight ((1+0) antenna and supporting frame) 28/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.

2:1 (≥ 20.SRA L Technical characteristics – 30 cm reflector: 15 GHz Gain ≥ 31.2:1 (≥ 20.7 dBi at 18700 MHz ≥ 54 dB 180° ± 20° ≥ 32 dB 23 GHz ≥ 35.R.8 dB) WR42 (R220) 11 kg ≤ 2° 25' ≤ 1.2:1 (≥ 20.8 dB) WR28 (R320) 11 kg Wave-guide type Weight ((1+0) antenna and supporting frame) 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1. ≤ 4° ≤ 1.8 dB) WR42 (R220) 11 kg ≤ 1° 35' ≤ 1.5 dBi at 14875 MHz ≥ 52 dB 180° ± 20° ≥ 32 dB 18 GHz ≥ 33.8 dB) WR42 (R220) 11 kg ≤ 2° 45' ≤ 1.2:1 (≥ 20.W. September 1999 29/30 .3 dBi at 25500 MHz ≥ 62 dB 180° ± 70° ≥ 32 dB 38 GHz ≥ 39.4 dBi at 22400 MHz ≥ 61 dB 180° ± 20° ≥ 32 dB 26 GHz ≥ 36.9 dBi at 38500 MHz ≥ 64 dB 180° ± 80° ≥ 32 dB Front to back ratio Crossed polarization discrimination HPBW V.2:1 (≥ 20.8 dB) WR62 (R140) 11 kg ≤ 3° 30' ≤ 1.S.

8 dBi at 22400 MHz ≥ 57 dB 180° ± 70° ≥ 34 dB 26 GHz ≥ 32.3 dBi at 25500 MHz ≥ 58 dB 180° ± 70° ≥ 32 dB 38 GHz ≥ 36.1 dBi at 38500 MHz ≥ 62 dB 180° ± 70° ≥ 32 dB Front to back ratio Crossed polarization discrimination HPBW V.17:1 (≥ 22.Technical characteristics SRA L – 24 cm reflector: 23 GHz Gain ≥ 30.17:1 (≥ 22. September 1999 . ≤ 4° 10' ≤ 1.0 dB) WR42 (R220) 9 kg ≤ 2° 50' ≤ 1.R.17:1 (≥ 22.W.0 dB) WR28 (R320) 9 kg Wave-guide type Weight ((1+0) antenna and supporting frame) FINE 30/30 53-001A8-101/E Issue 1.S.0 dB) WR42 (R220) 9 kg ≤ 3° 40' ≤ 1.

September 1999 .SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Equipment composition 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

Equipment composition SRA L BLANK PAGE FINE 2/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

. . 9 Composition of SRA L/7 eq. . . . . . .4 2. . . 9 Composition of SRA L/8 eq.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 2. . . . .5 2. . . . . . . . . 15 Composition of SRA L/15 eq. . . . .. . . . .9 3 4 GENERAL . . . . September 1999 3/70 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P/N 732-001/07 and P/N 732-021/07 . 8 COMPOSITION OF SRA L EQUIPMENT . . . . .2. . . .2. . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . P/N 732-001/18 and P/N 732-021/18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . . . . .6 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .2. . . . . P/N 732-001/10 and P/N 732-021/10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Composition of SRA L/18 eq. . . . . . . . . . 21 Composition of SRA L/26 eq. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . 23 Composition of SRA L/38 eq. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . .SRA L Equipment composition &RQWHQWV 1 2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Composition of SRA L/13 eq. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Composition of SRA L/10 eq. . . . . . . . P/N 732-001/15 and P/N 732-021/15 . . . . . . . . . . . 35 ODU IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . 8 Composition of SRA L equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . P/N 732-001/23 and P/N 732-021/23 . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . P/N 732-001/26 and P/N 732-021/26 . . . . . . . . . . . . P/N 732-001/08 and P/N 732-021/08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 System configurations. . . . . .2. . P/N 732-001/13 and P/N 732-021/13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . . .1 2. . . . . . . . . . . P/N 732-001/38 and P/N 732-021/38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Composition of SRA L/23 eq. .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . .7 2. . . . . . . . 25 IDU COMPOSITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Fig. . . . . . . 2 Fig. 3 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . 1 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 (1+1) not integrated system with 1 antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 . . . . . . 28 2×(1+0) or A/D-RPT integrated system . . . . 6 Fig. .Equipment composition SRA L Illustrations Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 (1+1) not integrated system with 1 antenna. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 IDU composition (P/N 732-101/11) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Fig. 7 Fig. . . . . . single polarization . . . 31 (1+1) not integrated system with 2 antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 4/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue1. . 10 (1+0) integrated system . . . 37 IDU composition (P/N 732-101/01) . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 2×(1+0) or A/D-RPT not integrated system . . . . . . single polarization . 27 (1+0) not integrated system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 (1+1) integrated system with 2 antennas. . . . . . . . . single polarization . . . . . 9 Fig. . . double polarization. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . in 2×(1+0). . . . . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration . A/D-RPT. . . 14 Tab. . . . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration . . 8 Tab. . . . . . 23 SRA L/26 eq. . . . . . . . . . 12 SRA L/13 eq. . . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . in (1+0) configuration . . . . in (1+1) FD. in (1+1) FD. . . . in 2×(1+0). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in 2×(1+0). . . 6 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SRA L Equipment composition Tables Tab. . . . . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in (1+1) FD. . . . (1+1) FD. 20 Tab. 22 SRA L/23 in (1+1) FD. . . . . . 17 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . 16 SRA L/15 eq. . . 13 SRA L/13 eq. (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . 22 Tab. . . . . . 21 Tab. . . in (1+0) configuration . . . A/D-RPT. . . . . . 21 SRA L/23 eq. . . . in 2×(1+0). . 18 SRA L/18 eq. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Tab. . 25 SRA L/26 eq. . . . . . . . . . . . (1+1) FD. . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Tab. . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SRA L/10 eq. 10 SRA L/8 eq. . . . . . . 17 SRA L/18 eq. . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . in (1+1) FD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 SRA L/15 eq. . . . . . . . (1+1) FD. . . . . 16 Tab. . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . in (1+0) configuration . . . . . . . . . . 11 SRA L/13 eq. . . . . . . . . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration . 2 Tab. . . (1+1) FD. . 18 Tab. . . in (1+0) configuration . . . . . 9 System configurations for SRA L eq. A/D-RPT. . . . . . . . . . . . .(1+1) FD. . . . . . . . . . . . 8 SRA L/7 eq. . . . . . in (1+1) FD. in 2×(1+0). . . . . 19 SRA L/18 eq. . . (1+1) FD. . . 12 SRA L/8 eq. . 19 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . 13 SRA L/10 eq. 7 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . in (1+0) configuration . . . A/D-RPT. . in (1+0) configuration . (1+1) FD. . . . . . . . in 2×(1+0). 3 Tab. 23 Tab. . . . . 9 SRA L/7 eq. . . . . . A/D-RPT. A/D-RPT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 SRA L/23 eq. . . . . . . . . . . . in (1+0) configuration . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration . . . . . . . (1+1) FD. . . . . . 10 SRA L/7 eq. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Tab. . 22 Tab. . . . . . . . 14 Tab. . . . in 2×(1+0). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tab. September 1999 5/70 . in (1+0) configuration . . . . . A/D-RPT. . . . . . . . . . . 26 SRA L/38 eq. . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tab. . . in (1+0) configuration . . in (1+1) FD. . . . . . . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration . 4 Tab. . . . . . . . 15 SRA L/15 eq. 12 SRA L/10 eq. . . . . . . in 2×(1+0). . . . . . . . . 5 Tab. . . 25 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. . . . 16 Tab. (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . 24 SRA L/26 eq. (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in (1+1) FD. . A/D-RPT. (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration . 11 SRA L/8 eq. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . 28 SRA L/38 eq. . 30 IDU composition P/N 732-101/01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Tab. . . . . . . . . 58 6/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07C (continue) . . . . .08C P/N 732-221/08B. .08C P/N 732-221/08B. . . . . . . . 45 Tab. . . . . . . . .10C P/N 732-221/10B. . . . .15C 732-221/15B. . . . 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/15B.07C P/N 732-221/07B. . . . . . . . .07C (continue) .15C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10C . . 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B. . .10C P/N 732-221/10B. . . . . . . . . . . . . .07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07C P/N 732-221/07B. . 41 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B. . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Tab. . .7C). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .07C (continue) . . .15C P/N 732-221/15B. . 37 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/15B. . . 48 Tab. . . .08C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/7B. . . . . . . . . 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B. . . .13C . 32 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/08B.08C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Tab. . . . . September 1999 .07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10C (continue) . . .07C P/N 732-221/07B.Equipment composition SRA L Tab. . . . .08C (continue) . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 1 antenna configuration . . . . 26 Tab. . . . . . .08C (continue) . . . . . . . . . 32 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/08B. .15C . . . A/D-RPT. . . 44 Tab. . . . . . .07C (continue) . . . . . . . . 32 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/08B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Tab. . . . . . . . . . .08C P/N 732-221/08B. . . . . . . . . . . 27 SRA L/38 eq. . .07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/10B. . . . . . .07C P/N 732-221/07B. .07C P/N 732-221/07B. . . . . . . . . . . . . .07C P/N 732-221/07B. . . . . . . . . . . . in (1+1) FD. . . . . . . 34 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/13B. . . . . . . .7C P/N 732-221/7B. . . . . 29 IDU composition P/N 732-101/11. 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B. . . . . 40 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (1+1) FD. . . 51 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . in 2×(1+0). . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Tab. . . . . . 54 Tab. . . P/N 732-221/13B. . 56 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . .07C (continue) . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/10B. 36 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/15B. . . . . . . . . .13C . . . . . . . 57 Tab. . . . . . . 43 Tab. . . . . . 50 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . .07C P/N 732-221/07B. 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Tab. . . .08C P/N 732-221/08B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/08B. . . . . 35 Tab. . . . . . . . 31 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/07B. . . . . . . . 52 Tab. .15C 732-221/15B. . . (1+1) PD and (1+1) H/S 2 antennas configuration . . . . .07C P/N 732-221/07B. . . . . . 55 Tab. . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .18C (continue). 63 Tab. . . . . . .18C 732-221/18B. . . . . . 69 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. . . . . . . 37 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/15B. .18C 732-221/18B. . . . . . .18C 732-221/18B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23C 732-221/23B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18C 732-221/18B. . 38C P/N 732-221/38B. . . . 26C 732-221/26B. . . . 61 Tab. . . . . . . 67 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Tab. . . . 23C . . . .15C (continue). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/38B. . . . . . 60 Tab. . . . . . . . 39 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/18B. . . 62 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15C (continue). . . . . . .18C . . . . . . . . . 39 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/18B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/23B. . . . . . . 38 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/18B.SRA L Equipment composition Tab. . . 23C (continue) . . . 65 Tab. .18C (continue). . . 26C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/18B. 39 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/18B. . . . . . . . . . .18C (continue). . . . . 59 Tab. . . . . . 64 Tab. . . . . . . . . 41 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/26B. . . . . . . . . . 23C 732-221/23B. . . . . . 37 ODU frequency table P/N 732-201/15B. . . . . . . . September 1999 7/70 . 40 ODU frequency P/N 732-201/23B. . . . . . . .15C 732-221/15B. . . . . . . . . .18C 732-221/18B. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38C . . . . . . . .18C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15C 732-221/15B. . . . . . . .

8. is carried out by means of a coaxial cable. The connection between the indoor (IDU) assy. 5 and Fig. arranged for being installed in a 19" or ETSI rack. which form part of the SRA L equipment assemblies and are extractable from the assemblies themselves. The SRA L equipment. 8 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. 1 and shown in Fig.  &20326. 2 Fig. 7 Fig.21 2) 65$ / (48. from a structural viewpoint.SRA L Equipment composition  *(1(5$/ This document lists and shows the "main parts" the SRA L equipment consists of "Main parts" are those autonomous units.7. according to the configuration). Two possible installation modes of the antenna-ODU assembly are possible: – – integrated mode: ODU and antenna installed on the same supporting frame and directly connected separated mode: ODU and antenna installed on two different supporting frames and connected through connection in wave-guide. September 1999 8/70 . and one or two outdoor assemblies (ODU). single polarization (1+1) System 1 antenna. 6 Fig.30(17  6\VWHP FRQILJXUDWLRQV For the SRA L equipment the configurations (system type) are provided as listed in Tab. and the outdoor (ODU) assy. 1 and Fig. double polarization 5HI Fig. to Fig. the equipment is delivered with the antenna (one or two. comprises an indoor assembly (IDU). 1. single polarization (1+1) System 1 antenna. 7DE  ± 6\VWHP FRQILJXUDWLRQV IRU 65$ / HT 6\VWHP W\SH (1+0) 2×(1+0) A/D-RPT (1+1) H/S 2 antennas (1+1) FD 2 antennas (1+1) PD 2 antennas (1+1) FD 1 antenna (1+1) H/S 1 antenna (1+1) H/S 1 antenna (1+1) FD 1 antenna (1+1) PD 1 antenna 'HQRPLQDWLRQ (1+0) System 2×(1+0) System or Add/Drop repeater (1+1) System 2 antennas. 3 and Fig. 4 Fig. upon request. The ODU and the antenna are arranged for mounting on a special supporting frame fixed to the pole.

2. 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ .9 GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations. the SRA L/7 equipment composition (7.1 to 7. 3 and 4.Equipment composition SRA L   &RPSRVLWLRQ RI 65$ / HTXLSPHQW &RPSRVLWLRQ RI 65$ / HT 31  DQG 31  In Tab. Tab.

FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy. 1RWHV 1 1. (IDU . 3. (ODU . (ODU . the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. 9/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 . 4.4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy.4TFM) 732-221/07B.07C C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 1 601-400/53 E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/47 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 1 See doc.2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation.07C Outdoor assy. "Equipment installation" 1. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. 732-221/07C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C). 2. Along with the antenna. (IDU .2TFM) 1 732-201/07B. The P/N 732-201/7C.4 2 3 3 P/N in alternative.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ î .

 $'537 .

)' .

3' DQG .

3.4 B Outdoor assy. 732-221/07C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).2TFM) Outdoor assy. (ODU . (IDU . (ODU . 4. 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ . (IDU . The P/N 732-201/7C. the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. 2. Along with the antenna. +6  DQWHQQDV FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31 1RWHV  A Indoor assy. 07C C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 2 601-400/53 2 D/E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/47 3 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 2 See doc. 07C 1. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. "Equipment 3 installation" 1.4TFM) 732-101/11 2 732-201/07B. P/N in alternative.2TFM) 1 732-101/01 1 Indoor assy. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc.4TFM) 732-221/07B.

)' .

3' DQG .

(ODU . (IDU . September 1999 10/70 . (IDU . 2. 732-221/07C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).2TFM) 1 732-101/01 1 Indoor assy. Along with the antenna.3 B Outdoor assy. 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.2TFM) Outdoor assy. 07C C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 1 601-400/53 2 1 1 E ODU supporting frame for (1+1) 534-108/38 FD ODU supporting frame for (1+1) 534-108/31 H/S G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 2 See doc. The P/N 732-201/7C. +6  DQWHQQD FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ &RGH 1RWH  A Indoor assy. "Equipment cable installation" 1. the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame are delivered 3.4TFM) 732-221/07B. P/N in alternative. (ODU . 07C 1.4TFM) 732-101/11 2 732-201/07B.

6 and Tab. 7. 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ . Tab. 5. the SRA L/8 equipment composition (8.Equipment composition SRA L  &RPSRVLWLRQ RI 65$ / HT 31  DQG 31  In Tab.2 to 8.5GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations.

4. September 1999 . 08C Outdoor assy. (ODU .4TFM) 732-221/08B. Along with the antenna.2TFM) 1 732-201/08B.4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy. The P/N 732-201/08C. (IDU . 3. 2.2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy. the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. (ODU . FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy. "Equipment installation" 1. (IDU . 11/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. 08C C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 1 601-400/53 E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/47 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 1 See doc. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. 732-221/08C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).4 2 3 3 P/N in alternative. 1RWHV 1 1.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ î .

 $'537 .

)' .

3' DQG .

"Equipment installation" 1. 3.2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy. (IDU . (IDU . +6  DQWHQQDV FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy. 4. (ODU .2TFM) 2 732-201/08B.4TFM) 732-221/08B. The P/N 732-201/08C. 08C Outdoor assy.4 2 3 3 P/N in alternative. 1RWHV 1 1. 08C C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 2 601-400/53 D/E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/47 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 2 See doc. (ODU . 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ . 2. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered.4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. Along with the antenna. 732-221/08C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).

)' .

3' DQG .

the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame are delivered The P/N 732-201/08C.08C 601-400/53 534-108/39 534-108/32 See doc. 2. 732-221/08C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C). 4W\ 1 2 1 1 &RGH 732-101/01 732-101/11 732-201/08B. (ODU . (IDU . +6  DQWHQQD FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ  A Indoor assy.3 2 1 2 P/N in alternative.2TFM) Indoor assy.4TFM) B Outdoor assy. (IDU . (ODU . 3. Along with the antenna. 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 12/70 .2TFM) Outdoor assy. "Equipment installation" 1RWH 1 1.4TFM) C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm E ODU supporting frame for (1+1) FD ODU supporting frame for (1+1) H/S G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting cable 1.08C 732-221/08B.

Equipment composition SRA L  &RPSRVLWLRQ RI 65$ / HT 31  DQG 31  In Tab. Tab. 10.7GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations. 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ . 9 and Tab. the SRA L/10 eq. composition (10.5 to 10. 8.

Along with the antenna. (IDU .2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy.2TFM) 1 732-201/10B.10C Outdoor assy. 3. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy. The P/N 732-201/10C. "Equipment installation" 1. 1RWHV 1 1. 732-221/10C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C). September 1999 . (ODU . 4.4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy.10C C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 1 601-400/41 Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 601-400/38 E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/48 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 1 See doc. 2. (ODU .4 1.4TFM) 732-221/10B. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation.2 3 3 P/N in alternative. 13/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. (IDU .

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ î .

 $'537 .

)' .

3' DQG .

4TFM) 732-221/10B. Along with the antenna. (IDU . 1RWHV 1 1. 2. 4. (ODU .2TFM) 2 732-201/10B. +6  DQWHQQDV FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy.2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy.10C Outdoor assy. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ . (IDU . the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered.4 2 3 P/N in alternative. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc.4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy. (ODU . "Equipment installation" 1. The P/N 732-201/10C. 3.10C C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 2 601-400/38 D/E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/48 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 2 See doc. 732-221/10C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).

)' .

3' DQG .

732-221/10C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C). (IDU . 10C 732-221/10B. (ODU . "Equipment installation" See doc. Along with the antenna. (IDU . "Equipment installation" 1RWH 1 1.2TFM) Indoor assy. the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame are delivered The P/N 732-201/10C. +6  DQWHQQD FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ  A Indoor assy.4TFM) C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm E ODU supporting frame for (1+1) H/S G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting cable K Kit for ODU separated mount 1. September 1999 14/70 .3 2 1 P/N in alternative.2TFM) Outdoor assy. 4W\ 1 2 1 1 2 2 &RGH 732-101/01 732-101/11 732-201/10B. 2. 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. 3. 10C 601-400/38 534-108/40 See doc.4TFM) B Outdoor assy. (ODU .

Tab.Equipment composition SRA L  &RPSRVLWLRQ RI 65$ / HT 31  DQG 31  In Tab. the SRA L/13 equipment composition (12. 11. 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ .75 to 13. 12 and Tab.25 GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations. 13.

"Equipment installation" 1. The P/N 732-201/13C. 3. 15/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy. 13C Outdoor assy. the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. (IDU . 2. 4. September 1999 . 1RWHV 1 1. (IDU . 13C C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 1 601-400/42 Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 601-400/32 Antenna ∅ = 30 cm 601-400/31 E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/49 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 1 See doc.4 1. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. Along with the antenna. FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy. 732-221/13C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).2TFM) 1 732-201/13B.4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy. (ODU .4TFM) 732-221/13B. (ODU . Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation.2 3 3 P/N in alternative.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ î .

 $'537 .

)' .

3' DQG .

7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ .2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy. 13C Outdoor assy.4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. (ODU . (ODU . Along with the antenna. The P/N 732-201/13C. 13C C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 2 601-400/42 Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 601-400/32 Antenna ∅ = 30 cm 601-400/31 D/E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/49 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 2 See doc.4TFM) 732-221/13B. 1RWHV 1 1.4 1. (IDU . 4.2 3 3 P/N in alternative. the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. 732-221/13C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).2TFM) 2 732-201/13B. (IDU . 3. "Equipment installation" 1. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. 2. +6  DQWHQQDV FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI ILJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy.

)' .

3' DQG .

September 1999 16/70 . 13C 601-400/42 601-400/32 601-400/31 534-108/41 See doc. 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. (ODU . 4W\ 1 2 1 2 2 &RGH 732-101/01 732-101/11 732-201/13B. Along with the antenna.2TFM) Outdoor assy. (IDU . (IDU . 13C 732-221/13B. "Equipment installation" 1RWH 1 1. 3. the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame are delivered The P/N 732-201/13C. 732-221/13C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C). 2.3 1.4TFM) B Outdoor assy. (ODU . +6  DQWHQQD FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ  A Indoor assy.2TFM) Indoor assy.4TFM) C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm Antenna ∅ = 60 cm Antenna ∅ = 30 cm E ODU supporting frame for (1+1) H/S G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting cable 1.2 P/N in alternative.

16. Tab.Equipment composition SRA L  &RPSRVLWLRQ RI 65$ / HT 31  DQG 31  In Tab. 14. the SRA L/15 equipment composition (14. 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ .35GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations.5 to 15. 15 and Tab.

15C C Antenna ∅ = 120 cm 1 601-400/43 Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 601-403/01 Antenna ∅ = 30 cm 601-402/01 E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/50 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 1 See doc. 732-221/15C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C). Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. (ODU .2 3 3 P/N in alternative. "Equipment installation" 1. 4. (IDU . the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered.2TFM) 1 732-201/15B. 1RWHV 1 1. The P/N 732-201/15C. Along with the antenna. 2. (ODU . 15C Outdoor assy. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. (IDU .4 1. 3.4TFM) 732-221/15B. September 1999 .4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy. 17/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy.2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ î .

 $'537 .

)' .

3' DQG .

1RWHV 1 1. 4.4 1. 732-221/15C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C) 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ . (ODU .4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy.2 3 3 P/N in alternative. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. Along with the antenna. (IDU . Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation.2TFM) 2 732-201/15B. +6  DQWHQQDV FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy. the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered.2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy. 3. "Equipment installation" 1. 15C C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 2 601-403/01 Antenna ∅ = 30 cm 601-402/01 D/E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/50 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 2 See doc. 2. 15C Outdoor assy.4TFM) 732-221/15B. (ODU . The P/N 732-201/15C. (IDU .

)' .

3' DQG .

September 1999 18/70 . 15C 601-403/01 534-108/42 See doc. (IDU . 2. +6  DQWHQQD FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ  A Indoor assy.4TFM) B Outdoor assy. 732-221/15C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).4TFM) C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm E ODU supporting frame for (1+1) H/S G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting cable 1.2TFM) Indoor assy. the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame are delivered The P/N 732-201/15C. (ODU . 15C 732-221/15B. "Equipment installation" 1RWH 1 1. (IDU . Along with the antenna.2TFM) Outdoor assy. (ODU . 3. 4W\ 1 2 1 1 2 &RGH 732-101/01 732-101/11 732-201/15B. 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.3 2 P/N in alternative.

7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ .Equipment composition SRA L  &RPSRVLWLRQ RI 65$ / HT 31  DQG 31  In Tab.7 to 19. the SRA L/18 equipment composition (17. 18 and Tab. Tab. 17.7 GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations. 19.

732-221/18C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C) 19/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. (ODU . the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc.4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy. 2.4TFM) 732-221/18B.4 1.2 3 4 P/N in alternative. "Equipment installation" 1. FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy. September 1999 . 4. The P/N 732-201/18C. Along with the antenna. 1RWHV 1 1. 3. (IDU . (IDU . 18C C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 1 601-403/02 Antenna ∅ = 30 cm 601-402/02 E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/51 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 1 See doc. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. 18C Outdoor assy.2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy. (ODU .2TFM) 1 732-201/18B.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ î .

 $'537 .

)' .

3' DQG .

(IDU . The P/N 732-201/18C. 2. 18C 601-403/02 601-402/02 534-108/51 See doc.4TFM) Outdoor assy. +6  DQWHQQDV FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ  A B C E G K 1. Along with the antenna.4 1. (IDU . 3. (ODU .2 3 3 P/N in alternative. the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. 18C 732-221/18B.2TFM) Outdoor assy. "Equipment installation" See doc. 732-221/18C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C). 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ . 4.2TFM) Indoor assy. "Equipment installation" 1RWHV 1 1. 'HQRPLQDWLRQ Indoor assy.4TFM) Antenna ∅ = 60 cm Antenna ∅ = 30 cm ODU supporting frame IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting cable Kit for ODU separated mount 4W\ 1 2 2 2 2 2 31 732-101/01 732-101/11 732-201/18B. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. (ODU .

)' .

3' DQG .

2TFM) Indoor assy. 4W\ 1 2 2 1 2 &RGH 732-101/01 732-101/11 732-201/18B. Along with the antenna.4TFM) C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm Antenna ∅ = 30 cm E ODU supporting frame for (1+1) H/S G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting cable 1. September 1999 20/70 . the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame are delivered The P/N 732-201/18C. 18C 601-403/02 601-402/02 534-108/43 See doc. (ODU . (IDU . (IDU .2TFM) Outdoor assy. +6  DQWHQQD FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ  A Indoor assy.2 1 P/N in alternative. 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. 3. (ODU . 732-221/18C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C). 2.4TFM) B Outdoor assy. 18C 732-221/18B. "Equipment installation" 1RWH 1 1 1.

21 and Tab. 22. 20.2 to 23. the SRA L/23 equipment composition (21.6 GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations. Tab.Equipment composition SRA L  &RPSRVLWLRQ RI 65$ / HT 31  DQG 31  In Tab. 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ .

732-221/23C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C). (IDU . 23C Outdoor assy.4 1.2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy.2TFM) 1 732-201/23B. 21/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.4TFM) 732-221/23B. 23C C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 1 601-403/03 Antenna ∅ = 30 cm 601-402/03 Antenna ∅ = 24 cm 601-401/01 E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/52 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 1 See doc. "Equipment installation" 1. (ODU .2 3 3 P/N in alternative. the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. Along with the antenna. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. 3. (ODU . 4. The P/N 732-201/23C. 2. (IDU . September 1999 . 1RWHV 1 1. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy.4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ î .

 $'537 .

)' .

3' DQG .

(IDU . Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation.4TFM) Antenna ∅ = 60 cm Antenna ∅ = 30 cm Antenna ∅ = 24 cm ODU supporting frame IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting cable Kit for ODU separated mount 4W\ 1 2 2 2 1 1 31 732-101/01 732-101/11 732-201/23B. 7DE  ± 65$ / LQ .4TFM) Outdoor assy. 23C 732-221/23B. 23C 601-403/03 601-402/03 601-401/01 534-108/52 See doc. Along with the antenna.2 3 3 P/N in alternative. "Equipment installation" 1RWHV 1 1. 4. The P/N 732-201/23C. (ODU .4 1. 2. (IDU . (ODU . +6  DQWHQQDV FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI  A B C D/E G K 1. 3. 'HQRPLQDWLRQ Indoor assy. "Equipment installation" See doc. 732-221/23C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).2TFM) Outdoor assy.2TFM) Indoor assy. the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered.

)' .

3' DQG .

+6  DQWHQQD FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ  A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM) Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM) B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM) Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM) C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm Antenna ∅ = 30 cm E ODU supporting frame for (1+1) H/S G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting cable 1. 2. 3. 4W\ 1 2 2 1 2 &RGH 732-101/01 732-101/11 732-201/23B, 23C 732-221/23B, 23C 601-403/03 601-402/03 534-108/44 See doc. "Equipment installation" 1RWH 1 1,3 1,2

P/N in alternative. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame are delivered The P/N 732-201/23C, 732-221/23C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).

53-001A8-102/E Issue 1, September 1999

22/70

Equipment composition

SRA L 

&RPSRVLWLRQ RI 65$ / HT 31  DQG 31 
In Tab. 23, Tab. 24 and Tab. 25, the SRA L/26 equipment composition (24.5 to 26.5GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations. 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ 

FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM) 1 732-201/26B,26C Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM) 732-221/26B,26C C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 1 601-403/04 Antenna ∅ = 30 cm 601-402/04 Antenna ∅ = 24 cm 601-401/02 E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/53 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 1 See doc. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment installation" 1. 2. 3. 4. 1RWHV 1 1,4 1,2 3

3

P/N in alternative. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. The P/N 732-201/26C, 732-221/26C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).

23/70

53-001A8-102/E Issue 1, September 1999

SRA L

Equipment composition

7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ î 

 $'537 

)' 

3' DQG 

+6  DQWHQQDV FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM) 2 732-201/26B,26C Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM) 732-221/26B,26C C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 2 601-403/04 Antenna ∅ = 30 cm 601-402/04 Antenna ∅ = 24 cm 601-401/02 E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/53 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 1 See doc. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment installation" 1. 2. 3. 4. 1RWHV 1 1,4 1,2 3

3

P/N in alternative. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. The P/N 732-201/26C, 732-221/26C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).

7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ 

)' 

3' DQG .

+6  DQWHQQD FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ  A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM) Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM) B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM) Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM) C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm Antenna ∅ = 30 cm E ODU supporting frame G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting cable 1. 2. 3. 4W\ 1 2 1 1 2 &RGH 732-101/01 732-101/11 732-201/26B,26C 732-221/26B,26C 601-403/04 601-402/04 534-108/45 See doc. "Equipment installation" 1RWH 1 1,3 1,2

P/N in alternative. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame are delivered The P/N 732-201/26C, 732-221/26C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).

53-001A8-102/E Issue 1, September 1999

24/70

Equipment composition

SRA L 

&RPSRVLWLRQ RI 65$ / HT 31  DQG 31 
In Tab. 26, Tab. 27 and Tab. 28, the SRA L/38 equipment composition (37.5 to 39.5 GHz) is set down for the different provided configurations. 7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ 

FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM) 1 732-201/38B,38C Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM) 732-221/38B,38C C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 1 601-403/06 Antenna ∅ = 30 cm 601-402/06 Antenna ∅ = 24 cm 601-401/04 E ODU supporting frame 1 534-108/55 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 1 See doc. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 1 See doc. "Equipment installation" 1. 2. 3. 4. 1RWHV 1 1,4 1,2 3

P/N in alternative. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. The P/N 732-201/38C, 732-221/38C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).

25/70

53-001A8-102/E Issue 1, September 1999

SRA L

Equipment composition

7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ î 

 $'537 

)' 

3' DQG 

+6  DQWHQQDV FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ 4W\ 31  A Indoor assy. (IDU - 2TFM) 1 732-101/01 Indoor assy. (IDU - 4TFM) 732-101/11 B Outdoor assy. (ODU - 2TFM) 2 732-201/38B,38C Outdoor assy. (ODU - 4TFM) 732-221/38B,38C C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm 2 601-403/06 Antenna ∅ = 30 cm 601-402/06 Antenna ∅ = 24 cm 601-401/04 E ODU supporting frame 2 534-108/55 G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting 2 See doc. "Equipment cable installation" K Kit for ODU separated mount 2 See doc. "Equipment installation" 1. 2. 3. 4. 1RWHV 1 1,4 1,2 3

3

P/N in alternative. Along with the antenna, the pole fixing accessories and antenna-ODU supporting frame are delivered. Provided for the pole installation of the ODU in case of ODU-antenna separated installation. The P/N 732-201/38C, 732-221/38C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C).

7DE  ± 65$ / HT LQ 

)' 

3' DQG .

2TFM) Outdoor assy. (IDU . +6  DQWHQQD FRQILJXUDWLRQ 5HI )LJ 'HQRPLQDWLRQ  A Indoor assy. 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. (ODU .4TFM) B Outdoor assy.3 1.2TFM) Indoor assy. 38C 732-221/38B. the pole fixing accessories and antenna supporting frame are delivered The P/N 732-201/38C. Along with the antenna. 4W\ 1 2 1 1 2 &RGH 732-101/01 732-101/11 732-201/38B.4TFM) C Antenna ∅ = 60 cm Antenna ∅ = 30 cm Antenna ∅ = 24 cm E ODU supporting frame for (1+1) H/S G IDU-ODU coaxial interconnecting cable 1.2 P/N in alternative. 732-221/38C refer to ODU with pre-heater (to be used for operating temperatures ranging from -50°C to +55°C). (ODU . "Equipment installation" 1RWH 1 1. 3. 2. 38C 601-403/06 601-402/06 601-401/04 534-108/46 See doc. (IDU . September 1999 26/70 .

Equipment composition SRA L )LJ  ± .

September 1999 . LQWHJUDWHG V\VWHP 27/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

SRA L Equipment composition )LJ  ± .

September 1999 28/70 . QRW LQWHJUDWHG V\VWHP 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

Equipment composition SRA L )LJ  ± î .

RU $'537 LQWHJUDWHG V\VWHP 29/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

SRA L Equipment composition )LJ  ± î .

September 1999 30/70 . RU $'537 QRW LQWHJUDWHG V\VWHP 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

Equipment composition SRA L )LJ  ± .

September 1999 . LQWHJUDWHG V\VWHP ZLWK  DQWHQQDV VLQJOH SRODUL]DWLRQ 31/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

SRA L Equipment composition )LJ  ± .

September 1999 32/70 . QRW LQWHJUDWHG V\VWHP ZLWK  DQWHQQDV VLQJOH SRODUL]DWLRQ 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

Equipment composition SRA L )LJ  ± .

QRW LQWHJUDWHG V\VWHP ZLWK  DQWHQQD VLQJOH SRODUL]DWLRQ 33/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

SRA L Equipment composition )LJ  ± .

QRW LQWHJUDWHG V\VWHP ZLWK  DQWHQQD GRXEOH SRODUL]DWLRQ 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 34/70 .

consist of a wired sub-rack .P/N 628-586/04. the Alarm and Fan unit (P/N 614-041/11) has to be installed only for application where a wide working temperature range is expected (-5° to +55°C).Equipment composition SRA L  . and Fig. Alarm unit and Alarm and Fan unit are optional units in alternative each other. 3.where all the plug-in units are housed. 7 1. 6. Q-Adapter units and D Channel Distributor unit are optional units in alternative each other. 7 3 1 4 4 3. a special cover (P/N 332-308/42) is delivered. The sub-rack is delivered with two types of brackets to allow to be secured to 19" or ETSI racks. in this configuration a special cover is installed (P/N 332-308/41). Optional unit and handset. the reverse is not allowed. Units provided with pre-installed software. 29.'8 FRPSRVLWLRQ 31  5HI )LJ  A B C D E F 'HQRPLQDWLRQ Wired sub-rack RTM 16×2 Mbit/s unit RTM 16×2 Mbit/s unit Controller unit 16x2 Mbit/s 75/120 Ohm Tributary unit EOW unit Handset Q-Adapter unit D channel distributor Alarm unit Alarm and Fan unit 31 628-586/04 612-314/15 612-314/15E 612-314/15 612-314/15E 634-001/68_XXX 612-404/11 612-910/21 634-901/03 634-001/69_XXX 615-105/08 614-041/01 614-041/11 1RWHV 1. P/N in alternative each other.21 The IDU assy. Tab.'8 &20326. should the unit not be installed. 9. 10 7DE  ± . 2.7.P/N 732-101/11 (4 TFM modulation) and P/N 732-101/01 (2 TFM modulation) . 5. with reference to Fig. 7. should the unit not be installed. September 1999 . . 2. 4. 35/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.5 5 6 G H 1. The IDU composition is set down in Tab. The 612-314/15E units can be used as spare parts of 614-314/15 ones. a special cover (P/N 332-308/43) is delivered. 30. Unit not equipped in (1+0) configuration. the last three characters of the code ("XXX") identify the unit software downloaded by the factory before shipment of the unit (see OMN Manual). P/N 628-586/01 .

5. P/N in alternative each other.9 3. should the unit not be installed. the Alarm and Fan unit (P/N 614-041/11) has to be installed only for application where a wide working temperature range is expected (-5° to +55°C).11 4. September 1999 36/70 . Unit not equipped in (1+0) configuration. 2.SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± . 02 (612-314/11. 10. Alarm unit and Alarm and Fan unit are optional units in alternative each other. The new unit can be used as spare part of the previous one and vice-versa. The P/N 634-001/69 can be used as spare part of the previous P/N 634-001/66. which is no more available. 4. P/N 612-404/02 is available only for failed units replacement or in-field maintenance of past orders. The unit 612-404/01 can be used as spare part of the previous P/N 612-404/04 and vice-versa (P/N 612-404/04 is no more available for new orders. The unit 634-001/68 replaces the previous code 634-001/65 which is no more available. Optional unit and handset. 11. 7. replaced by 612-404/01). 8.9 1. The two units are completely equivalent. The unit 612-314/03 (612-314/13) can be used as spare part of previous codes 612-314/01.12).5 5 6 G H 1. Q-Adapter units and D Channel Distributor unit are optional units in alternative each other. Units provided with pre-installed software. The P/N 612-910/21 replaces the previous P/N 612-910/20. 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. the last three characters of the code ("XXX") identify the unit software (see OMN Manual). a special cover (P/N 332-308/43) is delivered. 6.10 4 3. which is no more available. a special cover (P/N 332-308/42) is delivered.8 7.'8 FRPSRVLWLRQ 31  5HI )LJ  A B C D E F 'HQRPLQDWLRQ Wired sub-rack RTM 4×2 Mbit/s unit RTM 8×2 Mbit/s unit RTM 4×2 Mbit/s unit RTM 8×2 Mbit/s unit Controller unit 2 Mbit/s 75/120 Ohm Tributary unit EOW unit Handset Q-Adapter unit D channel distributor Alarm unit Alarm and Fan unit 31 628-586/01 612-314/03 612-314/13 612-314/03 612-314/13 634-001/68_XXX 612-404/01 612-404/02 612-910/21 634-901/03 634-001/69_XXX 615-105/08 614-041/01 614-041/11 1RWHV 1. should the unit not be installed. which are no more available. It is no more available for future orders.2. 3. and can be used as spare parts each other. 9. in this configuration a special cover is installed (P/N 332-308/41).

'8 FRPSRVLWLRQ 31 .Equipment composition SRA L )LJ  ± .

September 1999 . 37/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

'8 FRPSRVLWLRQ 31 .SRA L Equipment composition )LJ  ± .

September 1999 38/70 . 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

127( ± 2'8 31V GHILQHG DERYH UHSODFH WKH SUHYLRXV 31V . concerning the RF frequency (operating frequency band within the whole RF range). to Tab.&$7. 31. 42 the frequency tables are shown. In Tab. Adjustment and composition of ODU RF units depend on the working RF frequency range. DQG FDQ EH XVHG DV VSDUH SDUWV RI WKRVH 31V ZKHUH 32( FRQQHFWLRQ WR .21 The ODU assy.. The ODU is available in the following versions: – – – – P/N 732-201/XXB: P/N 732-221/XXB: P/N 732-201/XXC: P/N 732-221/XXC: ODU without pre-heater (2 TFM modulation) ODU without pre-heater (4 TFM modulation) ODU with pre-heater (2 TFM modulation) ODU with pre-heater (4 TFM modulation) The ODU versions (732-201/XXC and 732-221/XXC ) arranged with pre-heater have to be utilized when an extended operating temperature range is required (from -50°C to +55°C). inside which both RF modules (depending of the operating range) and IF and power supply modules (common in all RF range) are housed. arranged for pole fixing. Besides. can be set with or without pre-heater.'(17.).'8 (2: LV QRW UHTXLUHG VHH 32( GHVFULSWLRQ. the ODU assy.Equipment composition SRA L  2'8 . the second one (3 characters) is the customizing encoding. The ODU identification P/N comprises two field: the first one (11 characters) is the equipment P/N. comprises a hermetic container.

'8 (2: XQLW. 7KH RQO\ UHOHYDQW GLIIHUHQFH EHWZHHQ WKH WZR 2'8 YHUVLRQV LV WKDW WKH QHZ RQHV SURYLGH VLPSOHU 32( FRQQHFWRU ZKLFK GRHVQ¶W SHUPLW SKRQH FDOOV EHWZHHQ .

September 1999 . DQG 2'8 39/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %&.

2'8 31 732-201/07B001 732-201/07C001 732-221/07B001 732-221/07C001 732-201/07B002 732-201/07C002 732-221/07B002 732-221/07C002 732-201/07B003 732-201/07C003 732-221/07B003 732-221/07C003 732-201/07B004 732-201/07C004 732-221/07B004 732-221/07C004 732-201/07B005 732-201/07C005 732-221/07B005 732-221/07C005 732-201/07B006 732-201/07C006 732-221/07B006 732-221/07C006 732-201/07B007 732-201/07C007 732-221/07B007 732-221/07C007 732-201/07B008 732-201/07C008 732-221/07B008 732-221/07C008 732-201/07B009 732-201/07C009 732-221/07B009 732-221/07C009 732-201/07B010 732-201/07C010 732-221/07B010 732-221/07C010 )UHT 5. 0+].

7484 7645.7470 7603.....7477 7624.. 7428..7645 )UHT 7.7463 7582.7631 7491.7659 7596..7638 7589......7491 7666...7680 7603..7624 7470.7505 7442... 0+]..7463 7428....7547 7456....7638 7512....7526 7499.....7617 7582.....7484 7435..7617 7449.7701 7610.....

.7638 7589.7463 7603..7463 7428.7526 7449............7617 7582.7701 7610...7659 7596..7645 7512.7491 -154 +154 -154 +154 -154 +154 -154 +154 -154 +154 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+]..7638 7491...7547 7456.7484 7666..7624 7449....7484 7435...7470 7624.7617 7428...... 7582..7505 7442.7477 7645..7631 7470.......7680 7603...

53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 40/70 .

Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

0+]. 2'8 31 732-201/07B011 732-201/07C011 732-221/07B011 732-221/07C011 732-201/07B012 732-201/07C012 732-221/07B012 732-221/07C012 732-221/07B013 732-221/07C013 732-221/07B014 732-221/07C014 732-221/07B015 732-221/07C015 732-221/07B016 732-221/07C016 732-221/07B017 732-221/07C017 732-221/07B018 732-221/07C018 732-221/07B019 732-221/07C019 732-221/07B020 732-221/07C020 732-221/07B021 732-221/07C021 732-221/07B022 732-221/07C022 732-221/07B023 732-221/07C023 732-221/07B024 732-221/07C024 732-221/07B025 732-221/07C025 732-221/07B026 732-221/07C026 )UHT 5.

..7722 7617.. 7533... 0+].7505 )UHT 7.7652 7470.7568 7463.....7498 7687..

.7498 7624.. 7687..7568 7463....7722 7617.7659 -154 +154 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+].....7652 7533.

.7673 7484.7694 7505.7526 7652......7505 7631.......7519 7638....7547 41/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1..7680 7491...7526 7645.7533 7505.7673 7491.......7540 7659.........7680 7498.7687 7470...7512 7638. September 1999 .....7659 7477..7547 7666..7666 7484.7687 7498.7666 7477.7519 7645.7701 7512...7701 7659....7533 7652....7694 7512...7540 7666. +154 -154 +154 -154 +154 -154 +154 -154 +154 -154 +154 -154 +154 -154 7624..7512 7631..

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

2'8 31 732-221/07B027 732-221/07C027 732-221/07B028 732-221/07C028 732-221/07B029 732-221/07C029 732-221/07B030 732-221/07C030 732-221/07B031 732-221/07C031 732-221/07B032 732-221/07C032 732-201/07B101 732-201/07C101 732-221/07B101 732-221/07C101 732-201/07B102 732-201/07C102 732-221/07B102 732-221/07C102 732-201/07B103 732-201/07C103 732-221/07B103 732-221/07C103 732-201/07B104 732-201/07C104 732-221/07B104 732-221/07C104 732-201/07B105 732-201/07C105 732-221/07B105 732-221/07C105 732-201/07B106 732-201/07C106 732-221/07B106 732-221/07C106 732-201/07B107 732-201/07C107 732-221/07B107 732-221/07C107 )UHT 5. 0+].

.7341.7180.7554 7673..7159.. 0+].5 7285..7362.5 7292.5 7166...5....7722 7124....5 7187.5.5..5.7166.5.... 7519...5 7124.5.7561 7680.5 7131..7708 7526..7334..5 7285..7180..5.7320.5 7299.7173..5..5...7715 7533..5...7222.5 )UHT 7.7320.5 7145.7568 7687..5..7159..5......5 7327.5 7138.5.5 7145..7327.7201.5 7306..5.

5.5..7708 7519..5.5 7124.. 7673..5...7341.7173.....5 7131....7362.7320...5.5 7145.7159..7180.7320.5..5 7306.5..7715 7526..5 7124.5....7722 7533..5.5.5 7292.5 7166.7201.7383.5..5 7306.7568 7285..5 7138.5.5 7299..5 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+].5...5 7285..7334...7554 7680..7166.7561 7687.5 7348.....7159..7341..5 7327...5.7327.

September 1999 42/70 . +154 -154 +154 -154 +154 -154 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

7501.5 7466..5.5...5 7585.5 7229.5.7215...5 7424...5 7187.7348...7187.5.....5....7348..5 7341...5 7466.7208..5...7215.5..7425.7620.5.7243.5.5..5..7662..5 7229.5...7194.5.7459.7480..7194..5 7445.5 7627..5..5 7159..5.5..5..5 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 43/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 .5 7166.7264..5 7173..7369.5...5..5.5.5 7180...7222.7243....5..5.7264...5 7369.5 7390.7187.7341.7383..5 7152.5 7320..7362.5 7606.5 7159..5..5 7334.7404....5..7459.7201.5.5.5.5 7152...7501...7425.5 7424.5.5 7341..7662...5.. 732-201/07B108 732-201/07C108 732-221/07B108 732-221/07C108 732-201/07B109 732-201/07C109 732-221/07B109 732-221/07C109 732-201/07B110 732-201/07C110 732-221/07B110 732-221/07C110 732-201/07B111 732-201/07C111 732-221/07B111 732-221/07C111 732-201/07B112 732-201/07C112 732-221/07B112 732-221/07C112 732-201/07B113 732-201/07C113 732-221/07B113 732-221/07C113 732-201/07B114 732-201/07C114 732-221/07B114 732-221/07C114 732-201/07B115 732-201/07C115 732-221/07B115 732-221/07C115 732-201/07B116 732-201/07C116 732-221/07B116 732-221/07C116 732-201/07B117 732-201/07C117 732-221/07B117 732-221/07C117 732-201/07B118 732-201/07C118 732-221/07B118 732-221/07C118 7348..7355.7362.7369...7480.5.5..7404.5 7145.7641.5 7585....7641.5.5..5.5 7208.7620.7201.7376.5 7320.5.5 7327.7355.5.5 7390.5.5 7369.5 7166.5 7306.7180.....5 7180.5 7173.5 7606.5 7313.5...5 7327..5..5.5 7334.5..5.....7208.5..5 7627..5 7208.7376.5 7445.5 7313..

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

5 7529.7704.5 7383.5.7543.5 7376.5.5.5 7369.....7411.5.7229.5.5 7348..5....5...5...5 7369.7522..7390.5 7362.5.7264.7222....5 7194.....7425.. September 1999 44/70 .5..5.7397.7725.7397.5 7648..5 7222.5 7508......5 7201.5 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 7208.7522..5.5 7487.5..5.5 7355..5.7257.5 7648...7236...7383.7522.5.5.5 7362.5 7529..5.7404.5 7208.7418...5 7690..7411.5 7376...7243..5 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1...7383.5...5 7669.7683...5.5.5 7390..5 7229.7404....5. 732-201/07B119 732-201/07C119 732-221/07B119 732-221/07C119 732-201/07B120 732-201/07C120 732-221/07B120 732-221/07C120 732-201/07B121 732-201/07C121 732-221/07B121 732-221/07C121 732-201/07B122 732-201/07C122 732-221/07B122 732-221/07C122 732-201/07B123 732-201/07C123 732-221/07B123 732-221/07C123 732-201/07B124 732-201/07C124 732-221/07B124 732-221/07C124 732-221/07B125 732-221/07C125 732-221/07B126 732-221/07C126 732-221/07B127 732-221/07C127 732-221/07B128 732-221/07C128 732-221/07B129 732-221/07C129 732-221/07B130 732-221/07C130 732-221/07B131 732-221/07C131 732-221/07B132 732-221/07C132 732-221/07B133 732-221/07C133 7487..7264...5 7215.7564..7250.5 7201.5.5..5.5 7669.7390.7620.5 7355.5 7390.5 7508.5.7725..5 7222..5....5.7257.5.7250....7459...5.5 7383.5.5.5..7564...7704..5.5 7424..5 7585...7683..7243.7236..5.5 7229...5 7187.5.7543..5.7425.5.7418..5 7194.5 7215..5.5.5 7487.5 7348.7229..5.5..5 7690...

Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

5.5 7641.7508...7515.7676.5.7466..5 7606...5..5.7508.. 732-221/07B134 732-221/07C134 732-221/07B135 732-221/07C135 732-221/07B136 732-221/07C136 732-221/07B137 732-221/07C137 732-221/07B138 732-221/07C138 732-221/07B139 732-221/07C139 732-221/07B140 732-221/07C140 732-221/07B141 732-221/07C141 732-221/07B142 732-221/07C142 732-221/07B143 732-221/07C143 732-221/07B144 732-221/07C144 732-221/07B145 732-221/07C145 732-221/07B146 732-221/07C146 732-221/07B147 732-221/07C147 732-221/07B148 732-221/07C148 732-221/07B149 732-221/07C149 732-221/07B150 732-221/07C150 732-221/07B151 732-221/07C151 7585.5 7480.5....7634...5 7466....5...5.....5.7480.5.5 7613.7648..5 7480.5..5 7634.5. September 1999 .7662..5 7459.5 7606....7494.7459.7466.5..5 7592.5 7478...7655.5.5 7641.7473.7487.5 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 45/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.5 7445..5 7627.5 7599.5 7473.5 7438..5...5 7459.5.7669..5 7620.5 7620.7522...5 7627.5..5..5.7627.5 7473..5...7627..7480.5 7452.5 7634..5....7648.5.7494.5.5 7431.7669.7501..7515....5 7466.5.5..5.5.5 7613...5 7648.7634..7662....5.5.7501.7676.5 7424.5 7592.7655.5...5 7431...7641.5...5....7487.5 7452..5.7473..5.5.7683.7641.5.5 7599..5 7445.5.7620.5 7438...

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

..7550.5..5.5 7522.7718.7704.5..7564...7536.7543..5 7522..5 7683.7557....7729 7673.5..7543.5.5.7757 7494.5 7501.5 7662.5 7515.5.5....5..5..5.5...7729 7470...7771 7701..5 7508.5 7428..7512 -245 +245 -245 +245 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 +161 -161 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.7697.7484 7673..7697. 732-221/07B154 732-221/07C154 732-221/07B155 732-221/07C155 732-221/07B156 732-221/07C156 732-221/07B157 732-221/07C157 732-221/07B158 732-221/07C158 732-221/07B159 732-221/07C159 732-221/07B160 732-221/07C160 732-221/07B161 732-221/07C161 732-221/07B162 732-221/07C162 732-221/07B163 732-221/07C163 732-221/07B164 732-221/07C164 732-201/07B201 732-201/07C201 732-221/07B201 732-221/07C201 732-201/07B202 732-201/07C202 732-221/07B202 732-221/07C202 732-201/07B203 732-201/07C203 732-221/07B203 732-221/07C203 732-201/07B204 732-201/07C204 732-221/07B204 732-221/07C204 7655..5 7690.7704..5.7718.....7557..7484 7428...5 7515.5 7508.7526 7456..5 7662....7690..5.. September 1999 46/70 ..7729 7673.5.5 7673.5 7690.5..5 7669.5.7757 7470....5...5 7529..5 7529..7536...5.5..7725.5 7669.7729 7428.7529..5.7484 7428....7711...7771 7701.7484 7715.7564.....5 7501.7711.5..7526 7456...5 7676.....5 7676..7550......7512 7715.5 7683.7725...

Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

2'8 31 732-201/07B205 732-201/07C205 732-221/07B205 732-221/07C205 732-201/07B206 732-201/07C206 732-221/07B206 732-221/07C206 732-201/07B207 732-201/07C207 732-221/07B207 732-221/07C207 732-201/07B208 732-201/07C208 732-221/07B208 732-221/07C208 732-201/07B209 732-201/07C209 732-221/07B209 732-221/07C209 732-201/07B210 732-201/07C210 732-221/07B210 732-221/07C210 732-221/07B211 732-221/07C211 732-221/07B212 732-221/07C212 732-221/07B213 732-221/07C213 732-221/07B214 732-221/07C214 )UHT 5. 0+].

7568 7799...7855 7757..7897 7785.. 0+].7610 7512.7596 7841.......7785 7554. 7512...7540 7757.7813 7729....7813 7596..7652 7540.7568 7484........7841 )UHT 7..

7813 7729.7855 7757. 7757....7568 7841..7610 7512.....7813 7554.7785 7512....7841 7596.7568 7484....7596 -245 +245 -245 +245 -245 +245 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+]..7540 7799...7897 7785..7652 7540.......

.7624 7841..7869 7596.7869 7568...7624 7813...7652 +245 -245 +245 -245 47/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. 7568.. September 1999 .7652 7841.7897 7813.7897 7596..........

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

5 -148..5.7826..5 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1..7933..7954..5 7778.....7954.5...7961....5..5 7792....7826...5 7898.7813 7926...5.7820 7933.7792 7940.5 7898..7820 7940...7792 7919....5....7954..5 +148.5 7771..7785 7750.5 7764.7799 7940..7975 7912.5..5 -148.5 7764..7954..7947..5 7905...5 7791..7799 -148..5..5....5 +148.5 -148.7785 7919...5 7940..5 7898.7806 7926..7947..5.7968..7806 7919.5 7771.5 +148.5..7806 7757..7933.7813 7933......5 +148.5....7826..7968.5 7785.5 7750..5 -148.5..7826..7785 7750..7975 7792..5.5.5 7905.5 +148... 732-201/07B301 732-201/07C301 732-221/07B301 732-221/07C301 732-201/07B302 732-201/07C302 732-221/07B302 732-221/07C302 732-201/07B303 732-201/07C303 732-221/07B303 732-221/07C303 732-201/07B304 732-201/07C304 732-221/07B304 732-221/07C304 732-201/07B305 732-201/07C305 732-221/07B305 732-221/07C305 732-201/07B306 732-201/07C306 732-221/07B306 732-221/07C306 732-221/07B307 732-221/07C307 732-221/07B308 732-221/07C308 732-221/07B309 732-221/07C309 732-221/07B310 732-221/07C310 732-221/07B311 732-221/07C311 732-221/07B312 732-221/07C312 732-221/07B313 732-221/07C313 732-221/07B314 732-221/07C314 7750.7933..7961.5 +148.7975 7912... September 1999 48/70 ..5...5 +148.5 7791..5.5 7785.7940..7933.5 -148.7785 7898.5.5 7771..5 -148.5.7806 7757.5 7778.7975 7919..5.5.5 7771.7940.

0+].Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& 2'8 31 732-201/08B001 732-201/08C001 732-221/08B001 732-221/08C001 732-201/08B002 732-201/08C002 732-221/08B002 732-221/08C002 732-201/08B003 732-201/08C003 732-221/08B003 732-221/08C003 732-201/08B004 732-201/08C004 732-221/08B004 732-221/08C004 732-201/08B005 732-201/08C005 732-221/08B005 732-221/08C005 732-201/08B006 732-201/08C006 732-221/08B006 732-221/08C006 732-201/08B007 732-201/08C007 732-221/08B007 732-221/08C007 732-201/08B008 732-201/08C008 732-221/08B008 732-221/08C008 732-201/08B009 732-201/08C009 732-221/08B009 732-221/08C009 732-201/08B010 732-201/08C010 732-221/08B010 732-221/08C010 )UHT 5.

5 8331...5.5 8282. 8275.5 8429.8457.8443..5 8429.5 8289.8450.5.8359.8471...8331...5..5..5..5...8324.5.5.5 8317.8464.5.5 8415.8317.5 8415..5 8408..5.8443..5.8338...5 8289..8345.5.5.8303.5.5 8296....8457.5 8401.. 0+].5 8303.8429..5 8457.8310.5.5 8422.....5 8401...5....5 )UHT 7.5 8443.5.5 8275...8485..8331.8317.5...8436...5.5..5 8303.

.8345..5..5.8317.5...8436.5 8289..8359..8303.5 8408.5...5 8317.5..5 8275.5 8443.5.8331..5...5.5 8289.8457..5 8331.5 8429..5.....8450.5 8457.8310.....5 8415.8443..5 8296.5.5 8415..5 8275.5 8282..8331.5 8303.. 8401.5...8443.8485..5.8457..5 8401.5.8464..5 8422...5..5.8338.5...5.8317.8429..5 8429.8324..5 -126 +126 -126 +126 -126 +126 -126 +126 -126 +126 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+].5 8303.8471.5.5..5.

September 1999 . 49/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

...8373.5.5.5.8471..5..5.5..5 8450.5 8450..8373.8499..8492.8499..5.5 8443..5 8345.8345.5 8324.....5..5...5..5 8331..8366..5.5 8450.5..5.5.8492.8478.8478.5..5 8352.5...5 8464...5...5..8366..8373.5 -126 +126 8317.8485.5 8324.5 8457.8485..8373.5...5 8457.5....5.5.8366.5.5 8310..8373.....5 8352.5 8324.5 8331.8345.5 8317. 732-201/08B011 732-201/08C011 732-221/08B011 732-221/08C011 732-201/08B012 732-201/08C012 732-221/08B012 732-221/08C012 732-221/08B013 732-221/08C013 732-221/08B014 732-221/08C014 732-221/08B015 732-221/08C015 732-221/08B016 732-221/08C016 732-221/08B017 732-221/08C017 732-221/08B018 732-221/08C018 732-221/08B019 732-221/08C019 732-221/08B020 732-221/08C020 732-221/08B 732-221/08C 732-221/08B 732-221/08C 732-221/08B 732-221/08C 732-221/08B 732-221/08C 732-221/08B 732-221/08C 732-221/08B 732-221/08C 8345.5.8352.5.8373.5 8331....8499..5..8492....5 8471.5 8310.5.5.5 8443.........5.... September 1999 50/70 .5.8359.8359..5 8457....5....8492.5 8457.8485..5.8359.5 8352.5 +126 -126 +126 -126 +126 -126 +126 -126 +126 -126 +126 -126 +126 -126 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.5 8464.5.8352..8471.8499.5 8436.8366.5 8331.5 8464.5 8464.8499.5 8436.5 8352.8359.5.5 8471..8485.5 8324.5.5 8450.5.8499...

Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

5 8289.5 8408....5 8401.5.5..8429.8443.5 +126 -126 +126 -126 +126 -126 +126 -126 +119 -119 +119 -119 +119 -119 +119 -119 51/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.5 8450..8366.5..5 8450..8331. 732-201/08B011 732-201/08C011 732-221/08B011 732-221/08C011 732-201/08B012 732-201/08C012 732-221/08B012 732-221/08C012 732-221/08B013 732-221/08C013 732-221/08B014 732-221/08C014 732-221/08B015 732-221/08C015 732-221/08B016 732-221/08C016 732-221/08B017 732-221/08C017 732-221/08B018 732-221/08C018 732-221/08B019 732-221/08C019 732-221/08B020 732-221/08C020 732-221/08B101 732-221/08C101 732-221/08B102 732-221/08C102 732-221/08B103 732-221/08C103 732-221/08B104 732-221/08C104 732-221/08B105 732-221/08C105 732-221/08B106 732-221/08C106 732-221/08B107 732-221/08C107 732-221/08B108 732-221/08C108 8345.5 8443.5.5..8352...5.5 8296.5..5.5.....8499.5 8394.5..5... September 1999 .5 8289...5 8310...5 8457.....5.5.5..8310..5 8310..8436.8359...5 8317.5.5 8324.8324.8373.8499...5.5..8373.8450..8485.8436..5 8394.8471.5 -126 +126 8317...8324.8485.8499.5 8275..5 8282..5 8282.5 8443..5 8471.8492..8499.8478.8366..5 8296.8352....5.5..8366.5 8436.5..5....5 8464.5..5.8310..8492.5...5 8436...5.8373...5 8352.5..5 8324....5.8331.5 8331.5 8352.5...8499..5.5 8408...5....5 8415.5 8415..8478.8429.8345.5 8275...5..8471..5 8457.5 8401.5 8464.5.5..5 8345.5..5.5..5 8471.5.8373.8359.8450.5..8317.5.8345.5.5 8331.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

.. September 1999 52/70 .5 8436.5.8373.5.5 8331.5 8450.8492...8352.8499..8478.8366....5.8359..5 8464..5 8443.5 8310.8457.5 8317. 732-221/08B109 732-221/08C109 732-221/08B110 732-221/08C110 732-221/08B111 732-221/08C111 732-221/08B112 732-221/08C112 732-221/08B113 732-221/08C113 732-221/08B114 732-221/08C114 732-221/08B115 732-221/08C115 732-221/08B116 732-221/08C116 732-221/08B117 732-221/08C117 732-221/08B118 732-221/08C118 732-221/08B119 732-221/08C119 732-221/08B120 732-221/08C120 732-221/08B121 732-221/08C121 732-221/08B122 732-221/08C122 8303.8359.5..5 8464.8464.5..5.5.8373..5 8317.5 8338.5....8492.8457.5 8338..5.8380.5 8422.5 8324...8345.8366.5.5...5.5 8436....8485......5 8352.5....5.5 +119 -119 +119 -119 +119 -119 +119 -119 +119 -119 +119 -119 +119 -119 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.5.5.5 8429.5 8457.5 8450..5.8471.8485...8464.5 8442..5 8443.8373....5 8331...5 8324..8345.8471....5 8303.5.5 8345.5..5....5...5.5.5.5.5 8457.8338..5.84990..8478.5 8310.5.5...8338..5 8429.8352.

Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& 2'8 31 732-201/10B001 732-201/10C001 732-221/10B001 732-221/10C001 732-201/10B002 732-201/10C002 732-221/10B002 732-221/10C002 732-201/10B003 732-201/10C003 732-201/10B003 732-201/10C003 732-201/10B004 732-201/10C004 732-221/10B004 732-221/10C004 732-201/10B005 732-201/10C005 732-221/10B005 732-221/10C005 732-201/10B006 732-201/10C006 732-221/10B006 732-221/10C006 732-201/10B007 732-201/10C007 732-221/10B007 732-221/10C007 732-201/10B008 732-201/10C008 732-201/10B008 732-201/10C008 732-201/10B009 732-201/10C009 732-221/10B009 732-221/10C009 732-201/10B010 732-201/10C010 732-221/10B010 732-221/10C010 )UHT 5. 0+].

.10651 )UHT 7...10630 10525..10532 10588..10581 10525......10637 10539......10539 10504...10553 10630.10567 10518......10616 10588.10560 10644.10658 10609.10539 10602...10672 10616. 0+]........10553 10511.10630 10595.10644 10602..10644 10553.......10525 10497..10623 10511..10546 10616. 10497.

...10651 10553....10658 10609....10560 -91 +91 -91 +91 -91 +91 -91 +91 -91 +91 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+].10630 10511.... 10588.10630 10595...10567 10518.....10644 10539....10553 10511....10581 10525..10532 10602.10539 10616...10637 10525...10533 10644..10644 10602.10616 10588.......10623 10497.10672 10616..10546 10630...10525 10497.10539 10504..

September 1999 . 53/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& FRQWLQXH.

..........10595 10651.10567 -91 +91 10539.10588 10644....10686 10630...10581 10637...10679 10553..10588 10651.10672 10553..10581 10644.10595 10532.10665 10539..10574 10630.10595 +91 -91 +91 -91 +91 -91 +91 -91 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1....10686 10623...10686 10623.10574 10637...... 732-201/10B011 732-201/10C011 732-221/10B011 732-221/10C011 732-201/10B012 732-201/10C012 732-221/10B012 732-221/10C012 732-221/10B013 732-221/10C013 732-221/10B014 732-221/10C014 732-221/10B015 732-221/10C015 732-221/10B016 732-221/10C016 732-221/10B017 732-221/10C017 732-221/10B018 732-221/10C018 732-221/10B019 732-221/10C019 732-221/10B020 732-221/10C020 10567.10595 10532...10658 10658...10658 10567.10567 10658..10686 10560..10665 10546.. September 1999 54/70 ..10672 10546.....10679 10560.......

Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& 2'8 31 732-201/13B001 732-201/13C001 732-221/13B001 732-221/13C001 732-201/13B002 732-201/13C002 732-221/13B002 732-221/13C002 732-201/13B003 732-201/13C003 732-221/13B003 732-221/13C003 732-201/13B004 732-201/13C004 732-221/13B004 732-221/13C004 732-201/13B005 732-201/13C005 732-221/13B005 732-221/13C005 732-201/13B006 732-201/13C006 732-221/13B006 732-221/13C006 732-201/13B007 732-201/13C007 732-221/13B007 732-221/13C007 732-201/13B008 732-201/13C008 732-221/13B008 732-221/13C008 732-221/13B009 732-221/13C009 732-221/13B010 732-221/13C010 732-221/13B011 732-221/13C011 732-221/13B012 732-221/13C012 )UHT 5. 0+].

.. 0+]..12984 12852...13137 13050...13182 )UHT 7...13194 13084... 12750..13080 12807...12916 13187.....13250 13118...12871 12784.12848 13073....12928 12818.12882 13130.12814 12750..13148 12921...13114 12864...13080 13016..12814 13016....

.13194 13084.12871 12784...12984 12852.12848 13130.13114 12807.13137 13050..........13080 13016..13080 12750.13182 12921.12871 12818.....13250 13118.. 13016..12916 -266 +266 -266 +266 -266 +266 -266 +266 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+].12882 13187..........12814 13073...12814 12750.13148 12807...

September 1999 ....13250 13152.13216 12920......12984 13186...13216 12886.12950 13186..13250 12920.....12984 +266 -266 +266 -266 55/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. 12886..12950 13152.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  31 %& 2'8 31 732-201/15B001 732-201/15C001 732-221/15B001 732-221/15C001 732-201/15B002 732-201/15C002 732-221/15B002 732-221/15C002 732-201/15B003 732-201/15C003 732-221/15B003 732-221/15C003 732-201/15B004 732-201/15C004 732-221/15B004 732-221/15C004 732-201/15B005 732-201/15C005 732-201/15B005 732-201/15C005 732-201/15B006 732-201/15C006 732-221/15B006 732-221/15C006 732-201/15B007 732-201/15C007 732-221/15B007 732-221/15C007 732-201/15B008 732-201/15C008 732-221/15B008 732-221/15C008 732-221/15B009 732-221/15C009 732-221/15B010 732-221/15C010 732-221/15B011 732-221/15C011 732-221/15B012 732-221/15C012 )UHT 5. 0+].

..15092 14978... 0+]....14773 15085.14679 14595...15015 14931...15169 15025...15062 14749...15109 14826.......14756 14642-14726 15008.14833 14689.... 14595...14820 15162.15246 15072....15015 14672.14910 14736..14679 14931.15156 )UHT 7.

14833 14689...15169 15025..14773 15162....14820 -336 +336 -336 +336 -336 +336 -336 +336 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+]..14679 14595..15246 15072......14910 14736.15092 14978..14679 15008...15156 14826.15062 14672......14726 15085......15015 14595..15109 14749.. 14931.14756 14642....15015 14931..

15203 14826....15246 15119..14867 15119.....15246 14826........14867 15162..14910 +336 -336 +336 -336 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.14910 15162. 14783. September 1999 56/70 .15203 14783.

0+].Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  %& 2'8 31 732-201/15B101 732-201/15C101 732-221/15B101 732-221/15C101 732-201/15B102 732-201/15C102 732-221/15B102 732-221/15C102 732-201/15B103 732-201/15C103 732-221/15B103 732-221/15C103 732-201/15B104 732-201/15A104 732-221/15B104 732-221/15C104 732-201/15B105 732-201/15C105 732-221/15B105 732-221/15C105 732-201/15B106 732-201/15C106 732-221/15B106 732-221/15C106 732-201/15B107 732-201/15C107 732-221/15B107 732-221/15C107 732-201/15B108 732-201/15C108 732-221/15B108 732-221/15C108 732-221/15B109 732-221/15C109 732-221/15B110 732-221/15C110 )UHT 5.

.15272 )UHT 7.......14852 15244....14615 14500.14773 15136....14723 14579..15114 14716...14615 14920.15251 15078..15350 15157..15035 14920.14694 15028.15193 14824.....15143 14999......15035 14608. 14500.14831 14658....14930 14737.. 0+]..

.14831 14658...........14615 14500. 14920.....14930 14737.14694 15136.15035 14500..15035 14920..14773 15244..15193 14716..15350 15157.14615 15028..14723 14579.15272 14824......14852 -420 +420 -420 +420 -420 +420 -420 +420 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+].15251 15078......15114 14608.15143 14999...

15350 15235.14930 15235. September 1999 .14930 +420 -420 57/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1... 14815.15350 14815.......

0+].SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  %& 2'8 31 732-201/15B201 732-201/15C201 732-221/15B201 732-221/15C201 732-201/15B202 732-201/15C202 732-221/15B202 732-221/15C202 732-201/15B301 732-201/15C301 732-221/15B301 732-221/15C301 732-201/15B302 732-201/15C302 732-221/15B302 732-221/15C302 732-201/15B401 732-201/15C401 732-221/15B401 732-221/15C401 732-201/15B402 732-201/15C402 732-201/15B402 732-201/15C402 )UHT 5.

...14620 15144..14631 14504...15264 14504..15345 15218...15345 14501..14620 15229..14620 14500... 0+].14631 15218.15348 )UHT 7....15348 15229.... 14500...15264 15144.14620 14501....

.....14631 14504...14620 -728 +728 -714 +714 -644 +644 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+].15264 14500... 15144.....14620 14501.15264 15144...15348 14501..14620 15218...14620 14500.15345 14504..15348 15229.15345 15218.....14631 15229..

September 1999 58/70 . 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  %& FRQWLQXH.

2'8 31 732-201/15B501 732-201/15C501 732-221/15B501 732-221/15C501 732-201/15B502 732-201/15C502 732-221/15B502 732-221/15C502 732-201/15B503 732-201/15C503 732-221/15B503 732-221/15C503 732-201/15B504 732-201/15C504 732-221/15B504 732-221/15C504 732-201/15B505 732-201/15C505 732-221/15B505 732-221/15C505 732-201/15B506 732-201/15C506 732-221/15B506 732-221/15C506 732-201/15B507 732-201/15C507 732-221/15B507 732-221/15C507 732-201/15B508 732-201/15C508 732-221/15B508 732-221/15C508 732-221/15B509 732-221/15C509 732-221/15B510 732-221/15C510 )UHT 5. 0+].

14746 14571...14858 14655..15012 14893.. 0+].14522 14403.15236 15061.... 14403.15180 14739...15348 15145.14606 15005...15124 14977.15096 14627..........14690 15117.14522 14893..14774 15229....15012 14515...14634 14487.......15264 )UHT 7.

15096 14515.15012 14403.14690 15229...14774 -490 -490 +490 -490 +490 -490 +490 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+]....14522 15005.14858 14655..14522 14403.14606 15117......15124 14977.15348 15145..14746 14571.. 14893...15236 15061.15012 14893....15264 14739....14634 14487..........15180 14627...

15348 15229... +490 14739.15348 14739..... September 1999 ..14858 15229..14858 +490 -490 59/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  %& FRQWLQXH.

0+]. 2'8 31 732-201/15B601 732-201/15C601 732-221/15B601 732-221/15C601 732-201/15B602 732-201/15C602 732-221/15B602 732-221/15C602 732-201/15B603 732-201/15C603 732-221/15B603 732-221/15C603 732-201/15B604 732-201/15C604 732-221/15B604 732-221/15C604 732-201/15B605 732-201/15C605 732-221/15B605 732-221/15C605 732-201/15B606 732-201/15C606 732-221/15B606 732-221/15C606 732-201/15B607 732-201/15C607 732-221/15B607 732-221/15C607 732-201/15B608 732-201/15C608 732-221/15B608 732-221/15C608 732-221/15B609 732-221/15C609 732-221/15B610 732-221/15C610 )UHT 5.

14810 15081.15229 15097........15125 14836... 0+]...14706 14941...14844 14730....15021 14696.14914 14782..14758 15011...15089 14993....14704 14626.15177 )UHT 7...14862 15151....15019 14941.... 14626.15073 14766..15159 15045.14774 14678..

14914 14782......14810 15151.15159 14678....14705 15011......15125 14766.14862 -315 +315 -315 +315 -315 +315 -315 +315 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+]..14884 14730..14774 15045.15177 14836...15021 14626..15073 15081.. 14941...15019 14941...15089 14993...14758 14696.15229 15097......14704 14626...

15229 14834. September 1999 60/70 .14914 +315 -315 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.14914 15149.. 14834....15229 15149.....

Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  %& 2'8 31 732-201/18B001 732-201/18C001 732-221/18B001 732-221/18C001 732-201/18B002 732-201/18C002 732-221/18B002 732-221/18C002 732-201/18B003 732-201/18C003 732-221/18B003 732-221/18C003 732-201/18B004 732-201/18C004 732-221/18B004 732-221/18C004 732-201/18B005 732-201/18C005 732-221/18B005 732-221/18C005 732-201/18B006 732-201/18C006 732-221/18B006 732-221/18C006 732-221/18B007 732-221/18C007 732-221/18B008 732-221/18C008 732-201/18B101 732-201/18C101 732-221/18B101 732-221/18C101 732-201/18B102 732-201/18C102 732-221/18B102 732-221/18C102 732-201/18B103 732-201/18C103 732-221/18B103 732-221/18C103 )UHT 5. 0+].

....19111 )UHT 7.18771 19077...19084 18969. 0+]...18825 18683...19057 18737........18663 18575..19003 18915..18663 18915.18717 18996.19165 19023..18744 18629... 18575...19003 18656.

18744 18629..18771 -340 +340 -340 +340 -340 +340 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+]..19084 18969.18663 18575..18663 18996.19111 18737..18717 19077.19057 18656.19003 18575........19003 18915.. 18915..........19165 19023.18825 18683....

...18966 18710...18825 19077...5 +340 -340 +1010 -1010 +1010 61/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.18825 18710.19165 18737.19149..17956 17700.19165 17700....17956 18957...5 19077..5.18966 17947... 18737.5....18139.. September 1999 ..18966 18710..19212 18893..17956 18710....18202 17883.17956 17700.....18966 17700...

0+].SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  %& 2'8 31 732-201/18B104 732-201/18C104 732-221/18B104 732-221/18C104 732-201/18B105 732-201/18C105 732-221/18B105 732-221/18C105 732-201/18B106 732-201/18C106 732-221/18B106 732-221/18C106 732-201/18B107 732-201/18C107 732-221/18B107 732-221/18C107 732-201/18B108 732-201/18C108 732-221/18B108 732-221/18C108 732-201/18B201 732-201/18C201 732-221/18B201 732-221/18C201 732-201/18B202 732-201/18C202 732-221/18B202 732-221/18C202 732-201/18B203 732-201/18C203 732-221/18B203 732-221/18C203 732-201/18B204 732-201/18C204 732-221/18B204 732-221/18C204 732-201/18B205 732-201/18C205 732-221/18B205 732-221/18C205 )UHT 5.

19459 19077..19700 19260....5 19452...18739 18615.19212 18893..5.18749 18705.18690 18250.5 18195..18613 18699. 0+]..18506.....18647 18591.18323 19205....18619 18717.5.. 18957.5...18733 18597....5 18579....18731 18699.19149..19516..19333 18442.....18629 18586...18611 18579......18625 )UHT 7...18449 18067.

18739 18597.19516..18745 +120 -120 +120 -120 +120 -1010 +1010 -1010 +1010 -1010 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+].18733 18579..5 18442... 17947..5.18767 18711.......18449 18067...5 19205..18749 18705.19700 19260.5 18699.18619 18735..18629 18586.19459 19077.5....18613 18717.18202 17883....18323 19452...5...18731 18699..19333 18195.....18690 18250.........18139...18611 18579.18506.

September 1999 62/70 . 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

Equipment composition

SRA L

7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  %& FRQWLQXH

2'8 31 732-201/18B206 732-201/18C206 732-221/18B206 732-221/18C206 732-201/18B207 732-201/18C207 732-221/18B207 732-221/18C207 732-201/18B208 732-201/18C208 732-221/18B208 732-221/18C208 732-201/18B209 732-201/18C209 732-221/18B209 732-221/18C209 732-201/18B210 732-201/18C210 732-221/18B210 732-221/18C210 732-201/18B211 732-201/18C211 732-221/18B211 732-221/18C211 732-201/18B212 732-201/18C212 732-221/18B212 732-221/18C212 732-221/18B213 732-221/18C213 732-221/18B214 732-221/18C214 732-221/18B215 732-221/18C215 732-221/18B216 732-221/18C216 732-221/18B217 732-221/18C217 )UHT 5; 0+]

18735...18767 18711...18745 18633...18665 18597...18631 18753...18785 18717...18751 18651...18683 18603...18637 18771...18803 18723...18757 18669...18701 18609...18643 18789...18821 18729...18763 )UHT 7; 0+]

18615...18647 18591...18625 18753...18785 18717...18751 18633...18665 18597...18631 18771...18803 18723...18757 18651...18683 18603...18637 18789...18821 18729...18763 18669...18701 18609...18643 -120 +120 -120 +120 -120 +120 -120 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+]

18615...18649 18735...18769 18621...18655 18741...18775 18627...18661

18735...18769 18615...18649 18741...18775 18621...18655 18747...18781

+120 -120 +120 -120 +120

63/70

53-001A8-102/E Issue 1, September 1999

SRA L

Equipment composition

7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  %& FRQWLQXH

2'8 31 732-221/18B218 732-221/18C218 732-221/18B219 732-221/18C219 732-221/18B220 732-221/18C220 732-221/18B221 732-221/18C221 732-221/18B222 732-221/18C222 732-221/18B223 732-221/18C223 732-221/18B224 732-221/18C224 732-221/18B225 732-221/18C225 732-221/18B226 732-221/18C226 732-221/18B227 732-221/18C227 732-221/18B228 732-221/18C228 732-221/18B229 732-221/18C229 732-221/18B230 732-221/18C230 732-221/18B231 732-221/18C231 732-221/18B232 732-221/18C232 )UHT 5; 0+]

18747...18781 18633...18667 18753...18787 18639...18673 18759...18793 18645...18679 18765...18799 18651...18685 18771...18805 18657...18691 18777...18811 18663...18697 18783...18817 18669...18703 18789...18823 )UHT 7; 0+]

18627...18661 18753...18787 18633...18667 18759...18793 18639...18673 18765...18799 18645...18679 18771...18805 18651...18685 18777...18811 18657...18691 18783...18817 18663...18697 18789...18823 18669...18703 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+]

-120 +120 -120 +120 -120 +120 -120 +120 -120 +120 -120 +120 -120 +120 -120 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 64/70 .

Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 %&  %& FRQWLQXH.

2'8 31 732-201/18B301 732-201/18C301 732-221/18B301 732-221/18C301 732-201/18B302 732-201/18C302 732-221/18B302 732-221/18C302 732-201/18B303 732-201/18C303 732-221/18B303 732-221/18C303 732-201/18B304 732-201/18C304 732-221/18B304 732-221/18C304 )UHT 5. 0+].

..18134 19487.19487 19266...18134 17906.19694 )UHT 7. 17706.19494 17927.19694 19466.17927 17706....17934 19266....... 0+]....

. 19266.....17927 17706..19694 17927..19694 19466...19494 17706..17934 19487.....18134 17906...19487 19266.18134 -1560 +1560 -1560 +1560 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+].

65/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 % &  % & 2'8 31 732-201/23B001 732-201/23C001 732-221/23B001 732-221/23C001 732-201/23B002 732-201/23C002 732-221/23B002 732-221/23C002 732-201/23B003 732-201/23C003 732-221/23B003 732-221/23C003 732-201/23B004 732-201/23C004 732-221/23B004 732-221/23C004 732-201/23B101 732-201/23C101 732-221/23B101 732-221/23C101 732-201/23B102 732-201/23C102 732-221/23B102 732-221/23C102 732-201/23B103 732-201/23C103 732-221/23B103 732-221/23C103 732-201/23B104 732-201/23C104 732-221/23B104 732-221/23C104 732-201/23B105 732-201/23C105 732-221/23B105 732-221/23C105 732-201/23B106 732-201/23C106 732-221/23B106 732-221/23C106 )UHT 5. 0+].

..23608 23294.22083 23006...21798 22719.21781 21485.22314 23008....23315 )UHT 7..22600 22286......22294 22000.23322 22287...23013 22717.22600 23295.21494 21200.... 0+]. 22000.......23302 23008.....23314 23002.......23608 21200.21513 22432.22726 22432.22082 21770..22745 21487.....23030 21774..

..23314 23002..22600 22432......23030 21487..22083 -1232 +1232 -1232 +1232 -1232 +1232 -1008 +1008 -1008 +1008 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+]....21781 21485.22600 22286..21513 22719...21798 23006.23302 23008.23608 22287.....22314 23295...22745 21200..22726 22432...22294 22000...23013 22717..23315 21774..23322 22000....21494 21200.23608 23294...... 23008...22082 21770...

53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 66/70 .

Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ 31 % &  % & FRQWLQXH.

2'8 31 732-201/23B107 732-201/23C107 732-221/23B107 732-221/23C107 732-201/23B108 732-201/23C108 732-221/23B108 732-221/23C108 732-201/23B201 732-201/23C201 732-221/23B201 732-221/23C201 732-201/23B202 732-201/23C202 732-221/23B202 732-221/23C202 732-201/23B203 732-201/23C203 732-221/23B203 732-221/23C203 732-201/23B204 732-201/23C204 732-221/23B204 732-221/23C204 732-201/23B205 732-201/23C205 732-221/23B205 732-221/23C205 732-201/23B206 732-201/23C206 732-221/23B206 732-221/23C206 732-201/23B207 732-201/23C207 732-221/23B207 732-221/23C207 732-201/23B208 732-201/23C208 732-221/23B208 732-221/23C208 )UHT 5. 0+].

.23014 21780..23600 21200...22721 21497.23307 22074..21515 21200..23009 22693... 0+].....23600 )UHT 7...21809 21493..23601 23287....22715 22400..22369 22055......22400 23274.21521 22400.22404 22079..23302 22986..21814 22697...23600 23279. 22075..22368 23307.22102 21786.........22107 22980....

.....22715 22400.23600 23279..22369 22055.21814 22980....21521 22697.22102 21786..21515 21200...23302 22986.23600 22074...22107 23274.23307 21780....22368 22400.22721 21200..23014 21497......22400 -1200 +1200 -1200 +1200 -1200 +1200 -1200 +1200 -1232 +1232 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+]..........23009 22693..22404 22079.21809 21493.23601 23287..23600 22075..... 23307...

67/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

0+].SRA L Equipment composition 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 % &  % & 2'8 31 732-201/26B001 732-201/26C001 732-221/26B001 732-221/26C001 732-201/26B002 732-201/26C002 732-221/26B002 732-221/26C002 732-201/26B003 732-201/26C003 732-221/26B003 732-221/26C003 732-201/26B004 732-201/26C004 732-221/26B004 732-221/26C004 732-201/26B005 732-201/26C005 732-221/26B005 732-221/26C005 732-201/26B006 732-201/26C006 732-221/26B006 732-221/26C006 )UHT 5.

25445 25129....25445 26138...25157 25851. 0+].25144 24839.... 24549.24857 24549.25865 25557.....26453 26137..26453 )UHT 7.......26152 25847....24867 25557...25875 24843.26165 25130.

..26165 24843.....26152 25847.25875 24549..26453 25130..25445 -1008 +1008 -1008 +1008 -1008 +1008 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+].25445 25129. 25557....24857 24549.....26453 26137..24867 25851..25144 24839...25865 25557..25157 26138.....

53-001A8-102/E Issue 1. September 1999 68/70 .

0+].Equipment composition SRA L 7DE  ± 2'8 IUHTXHQF\ WDEOH 31 % &  31 % & 2'8 31 732-201/38B001 732-201/38C001 732-221/38B001 732-221/38C001 732-201/38B002 732-201/38C002 732-221/38B002 732-221/38C002 732-201/38B003 732-201/38C003 732-221/38B003 732-221/38C003 732-201/38B004 732-201/38C004 732-221/38B004 732-221/38C004 732-201/38B005 732-201/38C005 732-221/38B005 732-221/38C005 732-201/38B006 732-201/38C006 732-221/38B006 732-221/38C006 )UHT 5.

39074 37798.. 37058.38698 38318....38178 39058.......39438 )UHT 7.37811 37422..37438 37058..38710 37431......37814 38691.. 0+]...37450 38318..38178 37786...39438 39046.39071 38682..

.39438 37798...38178 -1260 +1260 -1260 +1260 -1260 +1260 6KLIWHU IUHT 0+].39438 39046..37814 39058...37450 38691.........37438 37058...38698 38318..... 38318...38710 37058.39071 38682.38178 37786.37811 37422...39074 37431.

September 1999 . 69/70 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

September 1999 70/70 .SRA L Equipment composition BLANK PAGE FINE 53-001A8-102/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Control and check devices 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1.

Control and check devices SRA L BLANK PAGE 2/14 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

. . . . . . . . . . . .2 3. .2 3 3. . . .1 2. .1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 CONTROL AND CHECK DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LEDs and display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ODU restart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RX channel automatic/manual selection in protected configuration . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alarm storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display . . . . . . .3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment switching-on/off. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OPERATING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power-on switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SRA L Control and check devices Contents 1 2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . Switches and push-buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Push-buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 GENERAL . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . . . . . . 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 13 13 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . .4 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of the service telephone channel. . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . September 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 IDU front view (fully equipped) . . .Control and check devices SRA L Illustrations Fig. . . . 7 4/14 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1. . . .

. . . . . September 1999 5/14 . .SRA L Control and check devices Tables Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 IDU push-buttons . . . . . . . . . . . 2 IDU LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1. 1 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 1 shows the IDU front panel where all the control and check devices are located. the only operational procedures on the equipment are: – – – – – equipment turning on/off automatic/manual selection of the radio channel ((1+1) configurations only) alarm storage ODU restart use of the service telephone channel (should IDU be equipped with EOW unit). September 1999 . The PC connection to the equipment can also be made the equipment being active. it is necessary to connect the PC to “PC” connector of the Controller unit. The equipment configuration and control are carried out via software through a PC either in local mode or in remote one. In local mode.Control and check devices SRA L 1 GENERAL This document describes all the operational procedures that can be carried out by means of the control and check devices located on IDU front panel. The equipment operation is almost fully automatic: consequently. 6/14 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1.

SRA L Control and check devices P/N 732-101/01 P/N 732-101/11 (*) (**) Optional Not present in case of (1+0) configuration Fig. September 1999 7/14 . 1 – IDU front view (fully equipped) 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1.

received power) and -30 dBm (max. September 1999 .1 LEDs and display LED In Tab.. received power) with nominal indication accuracy. 8/14 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1. all the push-buttons. the LEDs are described. identified by wording "RCV FIELD". 1. named POWER ON/OFF. are described. Up to real received signal power -20 dBm the equipments works correctly with BER ≤ 10-10.2 Display On RTM unit front panel (see Fig. for the displaying (in dBm) of the RF signal level present at the input of the corresponding ODU assy.2 2. a 2-digit display is located. 1. 2. 1).1.1. the value power indication accurancy makes worse since the ODU RX RF chain saturates and so prevents the equipment damaging limiting the signal level. 1.1 2. is located on 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit front panel (see Fig. The displayed value on "RCV FIELD" display of RTM unit ranges between -91 dBm (min. located on IDU front panel. should the received power exceeds the maximum threshold. Should the received power be below the minimum threshold.2. with reference to Fig. Instead. 2. 2. located on IDU. 2.2 Push-buttons In Tab.2.Control and check devices SRA L 2 CONTROL AND CHECK DEVICES 2. with reference to Fig. 1) and it is used to turn on (position ON) or off (position OFF) the whole SRA L equipment (IDU and ODU).1 Switches and push-buttons Power-on switch This switch. number "-99" is displayed.

Not urgent alarm active. the loop-back is active).SRA L Control and check devices Tab. Indicates which RTM unit is operating in (1+1) configuration. the LED is always on. Channel 1 currently utilized. the hitless switching can operate (signifiant only in (1+1) configuration). In 2×(1+0) configuration. The possible cause is: ODU cable short-circuit. 1 – IDU LEDs Unit LED acronym Colour RED RED RED Description Unit internal general alarm.. Radio system abnormal operation. The possible causes are: cable interruption/ disconnection. consequently. the unit is currently operating by utilizing the channel 2. ODU general alarm. In (1+0) configuration. Channel 2 currently utilized. September 1999 9/14 . IF cable overload. Indicative alarm. Hitless switching operational. AIS for backing input signal). one of the "urgent" alarms of the equipment is active. an alarm is active the origin of which is probably due to a cause external to the local equipment (e. Unit internal general alarm.g. ODU absence/open circuit. an alarm is active the origin of which is inside RTM unit. Urgent alarm active. the hitless elastic memory is aligned and. an alarm is active ("urgent" or "not urgent") the cause of which is inside the local equipment (IDU or ODU). the SRA L system is in test or manual/software forcing condition (e. IF cable underload. an error rate is detected of the whole radio channel higher than the 10-3 limit. the equipment alarm status has been acknowledged and LED "∑" has been reset.g. the current load on IF interface is too low. (continue) ∆\ ODU ALM OPEN CABLE ODU OVL ON LINE RTM CH1 CH2 ALIGN RED GREEN YELLOW YELLOW GREEN BER RED ∆\ ABN RED YELLOW URG NURG CONTROLLER IND RED RED YELLOW INT RED MEM RED 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1. Acknowledgement active. an alarm is active inside ODU. the unit is currently operating by utilizing the channel 1. Internal alarm active. an alarm is active the origin of which is inside the Controller unit. the current load on IF interface is too high. one of the "not urgent" alarms of the equipment is active. High BER. both LEDs of two RTM units are on.

Equipment turned-on. one of the equipment alarms is present or became active after the last acknowledgement. the EOW channel of the radio sub-system is currently utilized in conference mode. an alarm is active the origin of which is inside the Q-Adapter unit.Control and check devices SRA L Tab. permitted limit (+70°C).for the sub-network 1 is currently available (see doc. an alarm is active the origin of which is inside the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit. The EOW channel. the IDU inside temperature exceeds the max. the communication channel is active between the Q-Adapter unit and the TMN supervisory center. The EOW channel is currently available only for the ODU of the sub-networks for 2 according to "LINE 1" or "LINE 2" LED is lighting up. September 1999 . "Use of the service telephone channel").for the sub-network 2 is currently available (see doc. Channel 2 forced on line (automatic selection criteria excluded and hitless RX switch forced on 2). 1 – IDU LEDs (continue) Unit LED acronym ∑ CH1 CH2 Colour RED RED RED RED GREEN Description Summary alarm. General alarm inside the unit. General alarm inside the unit. The connection towards supervisory center is active. Conference mode active. the EOW channel is currently used by an operator. General alarm inside the unit. the equipment supply voltage has been applied through "POWER" switch. EOW channel busy. "Use of the service telephone channel"). The EOW channel. Temperature alarm. an alarm is active the origin of which is inside EOW unit. Channel 1 forced on line (automatic selection criteria excluded and hitless RX switch forced on 1). CONTROLLER ∆\ LINE 1 LINE 2 EOW ODU GREEN GREEN BUSY CONF GREEN GREEN RED GREEN ∆\ Q-ADAPTER OS LINK ALARM/ ALARM AND FAN 2 Mbit/s TRIBUTARY ∆\ TEMP - RED YELLOW GREEN 10/14 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1.

1). the power is definitely cut. "LINE 2" and ODU located on EOW unit (see Tab. 3-position toggle type push-button: channel 1 forced on line (LED "CH1" ON). In the case of automatic channel selection. For P/N 732-101/11. after a short circuit condition is detected at IF interface. "RIEP" line can be used to signal the activation of any alarm of SRA L equipment after the last storage. The current presetting of "SEL" push-button is signaled by the green LEDs "CH1" and "CH2" of the Controller unit (see Tab. 1). radio sub-network 2 connected to local EOW channel. In this way. RTM MEM SEL CONTROLLER ODU CALL SEL EOW (*) Only available for P/N 732-101/01. a trial is automatically executed to restore the ODU power supply. 2 – IDU push-buttons Unit Acronym ODU RESTART (*) Description Momentary type push-button. The current status of the push-button is signaled by three LEDs "LINE 1". the automatic selection criteria can be excluded and one of the two channels can be manually forced on line. this causes the "MEM" line activation and "RIEP" line deactivation. it determines the current alarm status acknowledgement. 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1. 3-position toggle type push-button: radio sub-network 1 connected to local EOW channel. The ODU power supply control circuit is located in the BB-MODEM unit and it sees to cut the supply voltage to ODU should an excessive current load be detected for more than 20 ms. independently of the alarm status. This condition can be acknowledged by pressing push-button "MEM". after a delay of 50 ms. it causes the activation of POE ringing bell signaling to the external operator that a telephone call is active from IDU to ODU. on line channel automatic selection (no LEDs ON). The ODU power supply can be only restored by pressing "ODU RESTART" push-button or by turning off and then turning on the SRA L equipment (by means of "POWER ON/OFF" switch). due to the automatic start-up procedure following the SRA L equipment turning-on by means of "POWER" switch. two channels are simultaneously available but one at a time only is utilized (the on line channel). automatic ODU power supply reconnection is continuously performed every 15 sec (approx). the choice of the on line channel is based on the alarm status of the two channels. local EOW channel connected to ODUs. By "SEL" push-button. The push-button is operational in 2×(1+0) configuration only while. For the (1+1) protected configuration. Both the methods reset the overload detection function but they have different restoring times. "MEM" and "RIEP" lines of "ALARMS" connector are utilized to provide a general information concerning the SRA L equipment operating status. Only an EOW at a time is available on IDU front panel: "SEL" push-button is used to select the line currently connected to EOW channel of the local radio equipment. when pressed. in all the other configurations. if pressed longer than 50 ms.SRA L Control and check devices Tab. September 1999 11/14 . "RIEP" line is active if at least one of equipment alarms is active. channel 2 forced on line (LED "CH2" ON). Should the overload condition subsist. if pressed longer than 50 ms. The push-button allows to force the hitless RX protection logic. Momentary type push-button. Momentary type push-button. it determines the forced restart of ODU power supply. its actuation has no influence.

corresponding to the channel forced on line. “URG” and "∑". in the case of manual selection. The "SEL" push-button has no influence in all other system configurations (2×(1+0).2 RX channel automatic/manual selection in protected configuration By push-button "SEL" of the Controller unit. in the case of (1+1) configuration. the hitless RX protection logic. (1+0). NOTE – Before switching-on the equipment. the green LEDs "CH1" and "CH2" are off. the main power supply line from the station battery has to be energized in this case the following LEDs of the control unit are on: “INT”. is lit. signaling the equipment supply voltage is applied and correct. 12/14 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1. it is possible to force manually.1 Equipment switching-on/off The equipment switching-on is controlled by setting to ON the lever switch "POWER ON/OFF" of the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit and by checking the relevant green LED turns on.Control and check devices SRA L 3 OPERATING PROCEDURES 3. The equipment switching-off is controlled by setting to OFF the lever switch "POWER ON/OFF" and by checking the relevant signaling green LED turns off. The "SEL" push-button is a 3-position toggle type: – – – channel automatic selection (normal condition) manual forcing on line of channel 1 manual forcing on line of channel 2. September 1999 . the yellow LED "MEM". In the case of automatic selection. this last LED turns on again should a new equipment alarm occur after the last storage. turns on and red LED "∑" turns off. By pressing the "MEM" push-button. A/D-RPT).3 Alarm storage By pressing "MEM" push-button of the Controller unit. the green LED ("CH1" or "CH2"). on the Controller unit. it is possible to store the current summarized alarm status (red LED "∑" on). 3. 3.

signaled by the lighting up of LED "ODU OVL". 1 and Tab. 3. For the use of the service telephone channel. The operational functions relevant to the service telephone channel are performed through the DTMF handset and the relevant command/check devices on EOW unit front panel (see Tab. of the corresponding RTM unit.5 Use of the service telephone channel The service telephone channel is available only if the IDU is equipped with EOW unit. after a short circuit condition is detected at IF interface. As far as the use procedure is concerned of the service telephone channel. 1). September 1999 13/14 . (*) Only available for P/N 732-101/01.4 ODU restart (*) In condition of permanent ODU overload. has to be pressed. For P/N 732-101/11. "ODU RESTART" push-button. located on EOW unit front panel (see Fig. 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1. the allotted DTMF handset has to be connected to the special jack BANTAM type. To restore the ODU power supply.SRA L Control and check devices 3. automatic ODU power supply reconnection is continuously performed every 15 sec (approx). on the corresponding RTM unit the ODU power supply is automatically switched off. refer to the relevant document ("Use of the service telephone channel"). 2).

Control and check devices SRA L FINE BLANK PAGE 14/14 53-001A8-103/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

September 1999 .SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Use of the service telephone channel 53-001A8-104/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .Use of the service telephone channel SRA L BLANK PAGE 2/16 53-001A8-104/E Issue 1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Selective call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Access modes to the service network. . . . . . . 9 Line seizure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Control and call tones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 3. . . 11 Multiple selective call . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Inclusion function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Omnibus call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 53-001A8-104/E Issue 1. . . .3.1 3. . . . 6 COMPOSITION OF THE SERVICE TELEPHONE CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SRA L Use of the service telephone channel Contents 1 2 3 3. . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . .6 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 3. . . . 9 Call . . . . . . . . . 15 EOW unit alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . .1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 3.2 3. . . . . . 13 Local call . . . 7 USE OF THE SERVICE TELEPHONE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Connection type . . . . . . . . . 14 DTMF signaling codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 3. . .

. . 3 Fig. . . . . . . . . . .Use of the service telephone channel SRA L Illustrations Fig. . . . . . . 7 DTFM handset . . . 6 EOW unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 4/16 53-001A8-104/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 DTMF handset connection to EOW unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 . . . . . 1 Fig. . . 4 Principle diagram of the service telephone channel. . . . .

. . .SRA L Use of the service telephone channel Tables Tab. . . . . . . . 9 POL LEDs upon multiple selective call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Tab. . . . . . 3 POL LEDs of area indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 53-001A8-104/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Tab. . . . . . . . . September 1999 5/16 . . . . . . . 12 POL LEDs upon omnibus call .

Fig. 1 – Principle diagram of the service telephone channel 6/16 53-001A8-104/E Issue 1. the service telephone interfaces the keyboard handset with DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) signaling type and. the operator post gets access to side 1 EOW byte and side 2 EOW byte without being necessary to duplicate the unit. to the 4-wire + E&M extension output and to ODU user. In relation with a generic equipment. The principle diagram of the service telephone channel is shown in Fig. switching and restitution circuits of the speech and signaling signal. The EOW unit includes the following devices: – – – – conversion and branching conversation DTMF and E&M signaling management of the local communication from/to ODU. on the other side.Use of the service telephone channel SRA L 1 GENERAL This document gives the instruction for the use of the service telephone channel installed in the SRA L radio system digital low capacity. In the systems where two separate multiplexing sections (side 1 and side 2) are available. 1. branching. On one side. to the Local Operator Post (POL). the association. the speech signal can be addressed to the line aggregate. The service telephone allows the access to the service speech channel of SRA L system by using byte EOW inside the Base Band frame. All the performances of the service telephone channel are kept also in absence of the network controller unit. September 1999 .

SRA L

Use of the service telephone channel

2 COMPOSITION OF THE SERVICE TELEPHONE CHANNEL
The service telephone channel comprises: – – EOW unit (Engineering Order Wire), P/N 612-901/21 (see Fig. 2) (*) DTMF handset, P/N 634-901/02 (see Fig. 3).

EOW unit is arranged for installation to IDU; Fig. 4 shows the location of EOW unit in IDU sub-rack. The DTMF hand set is provided with a 2 m long extension.

Fig. 2 – EOW unit front view

Fig. 3 – DTFM handset (*) For P/N 732-101/01, the P/N 612-901/21 replaces the P/N 612-901/20 previously used. The new P/N can be used as spare part of the old one and vice-versa.

53-001A8-104/E Issue 1, September 1999

7/16

Use of the service telephone channel

SRA L

3 USE OF THE SERVICE TELEPHONE SET
3.1 Connection type
The involved sections are those of line and the local ones towards ODU and they are distinguished each other both as speech and as signaling. The IDU user gets access to the service telephone channel through the 2-wire standard telephone interface, using the jack BANTAM, located on the EOW front panel (see Fig. 4). The ODU user gets access to the service telephone channel by means of a dedicated portable system (POE), through which it can carry out the utmost part of the executable functions even if the associated IDU post is unmanned (see document "Use of POE"). The service telephone set allows the following connection types for stations belonging to the same service network: – – – – between any two stations between a station and all the other ones between a station (IDU) and its external operator post (ODU) (*) between two ODUs in conference with the corresponding IDU (*).

Two telephone service extensions are available (4-wire interface + E&M) for the line telephone channel.

Fig. 4 – DTMF handset connection to EOW unit

(*)

IDU-ODU and ODU-IDU calls are possible only if ODU P/N is 732-201/XX ODU P/N 732-201/XXB, C are not connected to EOW.

8/16

53-001A8-104/E Issue 1, September 1999

SRA L

Use of the service telephone channel

3.2

Access modes to the service network
Two different calling areas are available: – – an area relevant to the multiplexing section of the aggregate signal (line area) an area relevant to the connection section with ODU (local area). *

The POL, if free, is connected in automatic mode to the calling section upon receiving the call. In call phase, the service area choice is manually performed, by means of "SEL" push-button (see Fig. 2). This selection, that can be carried out the handset being hung-up, is signaled by LEDs (see Tab. 2). Tab. 1 – POL LEDs of area indication Selection Line 1 ((2+0) system) Line 2 ((2+0) system) Line 1 and 2 ((1+1) system) ODU 1 ((2+0) system) ODU 2 ((2+0) system) LED LINE1 ON OFF ON ON OFF LED LINE2 OFF ON ON OFF ON LED ODU OFF OFF OFF ON ON NOTES ODU 1 in conference on line 1 ODU 2 in conference on line 2 ODU 1 and ODU 2 in conference on line Upon unhooking, seizure to ODU 1 takes place but not towards line 1 Upon unhooking, seizure to ODU 2 takes place but not towards line 2

ON = LED steady lit; OFF = LED off

3.3

Call
The service channel provides a calling system on line with signaling in band (DTMF type, as per CCITT Rec. Q.23) and a dedicated calling system to the local area. The following operational actions are possible: – – – selective and omnibus call on line multiple selective call (max. 3 users), executable only from IDU dedicated call to/from ODU with/without line area seizure.

The EOW unit (see Fig. 2) is provided with the required devices for the call generation, sending, reception and detection. The call sending takes place through the handset keyboard towards the line area, through push-button "ODU-CALL" towards the local area.

(*)

IDU-ODU and ODU-IDU calls are possible only if ODU P/N is 732-201/XX ODU P/N 732-201/XXB, C are not connected to EOW.

53-001A8-104/E Issue 1, September 1999

9/16

Use of the service telephone channel

SRA L

The address assignment is the same for IDU user and ODU user of every single station, and can be realized both locally (through the PC) and by the management center (through the Q interface). The possible address include the digit pairs ranging between "10" and "99"; the digit pairs ranging between "01" and "09" are reserved to the manager for external addressing functions to the POL. To maintain the compatibility towards PDH networks of the previous generation (which can be interfaced through 4-wire + E&M extensions), the symbol "*" has to precede the station digits relevant to those equipments. The same procedures has to be carried out should the interface be wanted to networks equipped with POLs, using numbering systems with more than two digits.

3.3.1

Line seizure
The seizure of the line area by IDU user takes place automatically at handset unhooking. In this conditions, the ODU is set to conference mode and the ODU user gets the speech inclusion upon unhooking. The IDU user receives, the line being free, the free tone or, otherwise, the busy tone. In the first case, the LED "BUSY" turns on in all the stations and the other users receives the busy tone upon unhooking. If, within 30 s ± 5%, the calling user does not select any user, the line is automatically disengaged and LED "BUSY" turns off on all POLs: the calling user, in this case, receives the busy tone and, in order to make a new call, it must release the line previously selected and seize it again. In the case of automatic disengagement of the line, it is in any case possible to address a call to the user having previously seized the line, even if the handset has not been hung-up. In this case, the called user, for answering, must hang-up and unhook the handset. The local area seizure (towards ODU) takes place automatically upon unhooking by the user which does not receive, in this case, the control tone as far as the ODU status is concerned. Should an user be engaged in an area (line or local) and want to seize another area, it must release the line previously seized (hanging-up the handset), perform the selection by push-button "SEL" and then the seizure. The line seizure end takes place when the calling or called user hangs up the handset; the other one receives the busy tone. The line seizure end, by one user at least, allows the reception of the call of both the users to be enabled.

3.3.2

Selective call
In the case of selective call, the call itself can be addressed to any user of the line by dialing a pre-fixed digit pair ranging from "10" and "99", by means of the DTMF handset, both from IDU and ODU. Each service telephone, after the reception of the first digit pair, inhibits the knowledge of further numeric digits. The dialing having been made, the calling user receives the "call control" tone from the called user. The reception of the call causes, on the operator post of the called user, the activation of the ringing bell and the blinking of "BUSY" LED. The unhooking by the called user causes: – the sending of the answer code on line

10/16

53-001A8-104/E Issue 1, September 1999

SRA L

Use of the service telephone channel

– –

locally, the deactivation of the ringing bell, of the sending of the call control tone and the steady lighting-up of LED "BUSY" the activation of the speech connection.

If, within a time ranging between 60 s ± 5% the calling user does not receive the answer code from the called user, the seizure end code is generated with the extinction of all "BUSY" LEDs, reception of the busy tone and deactivation of the ringing bell of the called user; the calling user, however, is enabled to the reception of calls. The calling user has to release and seize again the line to be able to call again. The line seizure end, by one user at least, allows the reception of the call of both the users to be enabled. The reception of the answer code by the calling user causes: – – the inhibition of the 60 s timer the activation of the speech connection.

The line seizure end takes place when the calling or called user hooks on the handset: the other user will receive the busy tone. The line seizure end, by one user at least, allows the reception of the call of both the users to be enabled. Should the POL of an IDU user, being in local conversation to ODU, be reached by an omnibus call coming from the line, it will store this condition by having the line LED blinking. On the next hanging-up, the user, now considered free, can manually select the line to insert in the omnibus conversation. Some special functions are provided which are executable by the IDU user only; the inclusion function and the multiple selective call.

3.3.2.1

Inclusion function
A selective call between two users of the line must be confidential. However, an IDU user, not engaged in that call, can perform the speech bidirectional insertion in the conversation in progress by keeping push-button "SEL" pressed; its insertion is signaled on line by a permanent inclusion tone its insertion is signaled on line by a permanent inclusion tone so that the reservedness of the selective conversation. The exclusion from the insertion occurs on releasing the push-button or on hanging-up the handset. The inclusion of the external operator in a conversation involving the internal post and vice versa is always possible; in such a case, the inclusion tone is not generated.

53-001A8-104/E Issue 1, September 1999

11/16

Use of the service telephone channel

SRA L

3.3.2.2

Multiple selective call
During a selective conversation between two users, one of them can make another call to a third user thus performing the function of multiple selective call. By pressing and releasing the push-button "SEL", it locally enables the lighting up of LED "CONF" and send on line the presetting code relevant to the multiple selective call (DTMF "D" code). The speech connection between the two users is provisionally interrupted until the emission of the second dialing digit. Besides, the calling user, after having preset the line for the multiple selective call, can annul it before the third user answers, by pressing and releasing push-button "SEL". At digit or answer time-out expiring, the calling user automatically sends on line the "C" code (which takes also the function of annulment of call and of presetting to the multiple selective call), bringing back the line in the condition of selective conversation in progress. If, during the multiple selective conversation, one of the two users of the original selective call should press and release push-button "SEL" (sending of DTMF "D" code), this will annul the added conversation by bringing the line back to the presetting condition to the multiple selective call (this in order to limit to three the maximum number of users). The evolution of POL LED, in the case of selective and multiple selective call, is shown in Tab. 2. Tab. 2 – POL LEDs upon multiple selective call Calling user Situation and status Called user answering Called user not answering

BUSY CONF BUSY CONF BUSY CONF (green) (yellow) (green) (yellow) (green) (yellow) ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON LAMP ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON LAMP ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Line seizure Selective call Answer to selective call Inclusion in selective call Presetting to added call End of dialing added call Answer to added call Hanging-up of added user Hanging-up of calling user

10 Hanging-up of called user

BL = LED blinking; ON = LED on; OFF = LED off

12/16

53-001A8-104/E Issue 1, September 1999

SRA L

Use of the service telephone channel

3.3.3

Omnibus call
In the case of omnibus call, the call can be addressed to all the users of the chosen service area by dialing, with DTMF handset, the fixed number "00". The dialing having been made, the calling user receives the call control tone, locally generated. Should the call reach a station already engaged on a local area, it will not generate the busy tone. The reception of the call automatically connects all the free POLs to the line with the blinking of LEDs "BUSY" and "CONF" and the activation of the ringing bell. On the POLs, engaged in local area, the omnibus call status in progress is signaled by the blinking of area led and the ringing bell is not activated. If within a time ranging between 60 s ± 5% no called user answers, the local deactivation of the ringing bell takes place as well as the steady lighting up of LEDs "BUSY" and the permanent blinking of LEDs "CONF". Besides, the calling user generates the seizure end code of the line (the LEDs turn off), receives the busy tone but it is enabled to call reception; to make a call, the user must hang-up the handset and seize again the line. The unhooking of at least one of the called users causes: – locally, the deactivation of the ringing bell, the steady lighting-up of "BUSY" LED (only in the station having answered to the call) and the sending to the calling user of the answer code the activation of the speech connection.

The reception of the answer code by the calling user causes locally: – – – the interruption of the local "call control" tone generation the interruption of 60 s timer the activation of speech connection.

On all the connected LOPs, which have not answered to the call, LED "BUSY" and "CONF" continue blinking and the ringing bell will be kept active for 60 s ± 5% starting form the call beginning. On the POLs which are not connected because engaged on a local area, the ringing bell is not activated but the line led will blink until the end of the conversation. On expiring of the mentioned time, the ringing bells will be locally deactivated on all the connected POLs that have not answered to the call and LEDs "BUSY" will light steady and LEDs "CONF" will blink. The LED evolution on IDU, in the case of omnibus call, is shown in Tab. 3.

53-001A8-104/E Issue 1, September 1999

13/16

Use of the service telephone channel

SRA L

Tab. 3 – POL LEDs upon omnibus call Calling user Situation and status Called user answering Called user not answering

BUSY CONF BUSY CONF BUSY CONF (green) (yellow) (green) (yellow) (green) (yellow) ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON LAMP ON ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF LAMP LAMP ON LAMP ON LAMP LAMP OFF ON LAMP LAMP LAMP ON ON ON ON OFF OFF LAMP LAMP LAMP LAMP LAMP LAMP LAMP OFF

1 Line seizure 2 Omnibus call 3 T < 60 sec An answer at least 4 T < 60 sec Inclusion of called user 5 T > 60 sec An answer at least 6 T > 60 sec Inclusion of called user 7 Exclusion of included user 8 Hanging-up of calling user 9 Hanging-up of called user

BL = LED blinking; ON = LED on; OFF = LED off

3.3.4

Local call
The local call is the one between the IDU and ODU users and viceversa without involving the line. An user performing a selective call from the line destined to the equipment engaged in a local call or conversation receives, in this case, the busy tone. The local call from IDU to ODU is made, after selecting the local area, by pressing the dedicated call push-button "ODU CALL" and by waiting the speech inclusion of the ODU user which does not send the call control tone. On ODU equipment, the ringing bell is activated for all the time the push-button is pressed. The local call from ODU to IDU is made by pressing the call push-button located on POE and by waiting the speech inclusion of IDU user which do not send the call control tone. Instead, the ODU user automatically obtains the speech inclusion on unhooking the handset if the IDU user is already engaged in a conversation towards the line area. At the end of the conversation, the actual annulment of the conversation is obtained on IDU user hanging-up, being impossible to point out the ODU user handset status by the controller of EOW unit.

14/16

53-001A8-104/E Issue 1, September 1999

SRA L

Use of the service telephone channel

3.4

DTMF signaling codes
The DTMF codes sent on line complies with CCITT Rec. Q.22 and Q.23. EOW unit is able to generate and knowledge A, B, C and D DTMF codes to perform the following functions: – – – – DTMF A code: line seizure DTMF B code: line seizure end or line reset DTMF C code: answer to call and reset of the call and of the presetting to multiple selective call TMF D code: presetting to multiple selective call and clearance of the added conversation in progress.

3.5

Control and call tones
The control and call tones have the following characteristics: – – – – – – – free tone: continuous 450 Hz tone busy tone: 450 Hz tone with 0.2 s signal and 0.2 s pause times control tone: 450 Hz with of 0.8 s signal and 2.4 s pause times inclusion tone: 450 Hz with of 0.2 - 0.2 - 0.2 - 1 s signal and pause times ringing bell command for the selective and multiple selective call: 0.8 s signal and 2.4 s pause times ringing bell command for omnibus call: 0.8 s signal and 0.8 s pause times ringing bell command for local call: manual signal time for calls from IDU to ODU or 0.8 s signal and 0.8 s pause times for cells from ODU to IDU.

3.6

EOW unit alarm
EOW unit is provided with a red LED signaling that the unit is defective or is in a self-test phase at turning-on. The unit has to be considered defective even when it does not answer to the interrogations of the main controller.

53-001A8-104/E Issue 1, September 1999

15/16

Use of the service telephone channel SRA L FINE BLANK PAGE 16/16 53-001A8-104/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

September 1999 .SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Equipment installation 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .Equipment installation SRA L BLANK PAGE FINE 2/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 6. . . .8 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SRA L Equipment installation Contents 1 2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 ∅20/30 cm slim antennas . . . .3 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 4. . . . . . . . .7 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna assembling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ∅30/60 cm STANDARD ANTENNA INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . Strutting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Antenna installation offset right side . . .4 6 6. . .6 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 3. . . . . . . . . . . 7 ∅20/30 cm SLIM ANTENNA INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 m STANDARD ANTENNA INSTALLATION . . . 11 O-rings . . 15 ∅60 cm SLIM ANTENNA INSTALLATION . . . . . . .4 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 6. . . .2 2. . 10 Overall size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solution with flexible waveguide “horizontal” polarization. . . . . . . . .7 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Pole mounting of antenna support . . . . . . Elevation and azimuth adjustment . . . . . .1 2. . . . . .8 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation and azimuth adjustment . . .6 2. . . .2 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polarization plane adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . ∅30/60 cm standard antennas . . . . . . . . . . Antenna for offset right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pole mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frame arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View with ODU 1+0 integrated system . . . . .4 3. . . . .1 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna for offset right side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ∅1. . . . . . . . . . . . Pole mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 6. Overal size .1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1+0 SLIM NOT INTEGRATED SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna for offset left side (standard delivery) . . . . . . . . . . 16 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 34 35 39 42 43 43 44 45 46 47 48 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Polarization adjustment. . . . . . O-rings . . . . . . . . . 13 View with ODU 1+0 integrated system . . . .9 5 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 3.7 4. . . . . . . . .2m standard antennas . ∅1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ∅60 cm slim antennas . .6 4. . .9 4 4. .6 3. View with ODU 1+0 integrated system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Elevation and azimuth adjustment . . . Polarization adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polarization adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overall size . . . . . . . . 8 Antenna installation offset left side . .3 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna for offset left side (standard delivery) . . . . . . . Slim 1+0 frame and flexible waveguide versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Solution with flexible waveguide “vertical” polarization (standard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/96 . . .

65 Solution with elliptical waveguide “Vertical” polarization (standard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Andrew and RFS-Kabelmetal sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Overall size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Solution with elliptical waveguide “Horizontal” polarization . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 11. . . . . . . . . 93 IDU installation . . . . . 58 1+1 frame and flexible waveguide versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 10. . . . . . .2 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 11. . . .1 11. . . . . . . .4 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 . . . . .2 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 7 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Frame arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 11. . . 78 “Rx field measure” connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 7. . . . . . . . . . . .5 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . slim 1+0 frame with ∅20/30 slim antenna. . . . . . 82 Fixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Dimensions . . . . . . . 80 Tipical connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 “Horizontal” polarization application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 12. . . . . . . . . . . . 55 O-rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 8 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 OUTDOOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Frame arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . .7 8. 79 1/4” COAXIAL CABLE . . 56 1+1 FRAME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Overall size. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 ODU dimensions . . . . . . 80 Connection on ODU side . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 Overall size. . . . 76 Outdoor assembly versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Overall size. . . . 51 Solution with flexible wave guide “horizontal” polarization .3 10 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Solution with flexible waveguide “vertical” polarization (standard). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 IDU sub-rack arrangement for ETSI rack. . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 4/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 10. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 11 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Rack assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Solution with flexible wave guide “vertical” polarization (standard) . . . . . . . .1 11. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 10. . 81 Grounding connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Standard 1+0 frame and flexible wave guide versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 11. . . . . . . . . . . . .1 8. . . 83 Fixing for Andrew cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4. 60 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 12. . . . . . . 61 O-rings . . . 50 1+0 NOT INTEGRATED STANDARD SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 8. . . 1 + 1 frame with ∅ 60 cm antenna . . . . . slim 1+0 with ∅60 cm slim antenna . . .7 12 12. . . . 1+1 frame with ∅20/30 cm antenna . . . . 86 Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Solution with flexible waveguide “horizontal” polarization (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 11. .3 7. . . .1 9. . . . 87 IDU INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 8. . 64 NOT-INTEGRATED SYSTEM . .8 9 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 IDU sub-rack arrangement for 19" rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Installation accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 “Vertical” polarization application (standard) . . . . . . . . . 75 Assembly on support frame . . . . . . . . . .4. . . . .4 8. . . . . . . . 84 Fixing for RFS-Kabelmetal cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Elliptical flexible waveguide and connector/accessory versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Equipment installation SRA L 6. . . . . . . . . . . . .5 8. . . . . . . .

. . 95 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . September 1999 5/96 . . . . . . . . .SRA L Equipment installation 13 INSTALLATION OF IDU OPTIONAL UNITS . . . . .

. . . . . . . 1 Fixing kit code 332-308/34 . . . . . . . . . . . .Equipment installation SRA L Tables Tab. . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 . . 91 6/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . .

while lifting the antenna and/or the outdoor pole supporting frame. CAUTION – During the installation.1 ∅20/30 cm slim antennas FREQUENCY BAND (GHz) 15 18 23 ANTENNA DIAMETER (cm) 30 30 20 30 26 20 30 38 20 30 P/N FEEDER FLANGE 601-402/01 601-402/02 601-401/01 601-402/03 601-401/02 601-402/04 601-401/04 601-402/06 PBR 140 PBR 220 PBR 220 PBR 220 PBR 320 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. the area has to be suitably delimited or signaled according to regulations in force. 2 ∅20/30 cm SLIM ANTENNA INSTALLATION 2.SRA L Equipment installation 1 GENERAL In this document all the operations are described. safety bolts. all the required safeties. it is strictly forbidden to stand or transit in the area below. according to the regulations in force. required for the mechanical installation of SRA L equipments. – For the operations to be realized outside on antenna. frame. etc. against accidental falls of the operators have to be observed like the presence ot railings. ODU. September 1999 7/96 .

Equipment installation SRA L 2.2 Pole mounting of antenna support "ATTENTION" – INSTALL FIRST THE SAFETY COLLAR 8/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

3 Antenna installation offset left side 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.SRA L Equipment installation 2. September 1999 9/96 .

Equipment installation SRA L 2. September 1999 .4 Antenna installation offset right side 10/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

September 1999 11/96 .SRA L Equipment installation 2.5 Overall size THE DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS (mm) 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

Equipment installation SRA L 2.6 O-rings (*) THE O-RINGS ARE SUPPLIED WITH THE ANTENNA 12/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

SRA L Equipment installation 2.7 Polarization adjustment 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 13/96 .

September 1999 .8 View with ODU 1+0 integrated system FOR THE ODU INSTALLATION SEE PAR.Equipment installation SRA L 2. 10 14/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

SRA L Equipment installation 2. September 1999 15/96 .9 Elevation and azimuth adjustment 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

Equipment installation SRA L 3 ∅60 cm SLIM ANTENNA INSTALLATION 3.1 ∅60 cm slim antennas FREQUENCY BAND (GHz) 15 18 23 26 38 P/N FEEDER FLANGE 601-403/01 601-403/02 601-403/03 601-403/04 601-403/06 PBR 140 PBR 220 PBR 220 PBR 220 PBR 320 16/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

3. SEE PAR.2 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.2 Antenna for offset left side (standard delivery) WHEN IS REQUEST THE OFFSET RIGHT SIDE.SRA L Equipment installation 3. September 1999 17/96 .

Equipment installation SRA L 3. September 1999 .3 Antenna for offset right side 18/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

SRA L Equipment installation 3. September 1999 19/96 .4 Pole mounting 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

Equipment installation SRA L 3.5 Overall size THE DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS (mm) 20/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

SRA L Equipment installation 3.6 O-rings (*) THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH THE ANTENNA 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 21/96 .

September 1999 .7 Polarization adjustment 22/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Equipment installation SRA L 3.

10 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.8 View with ODU 1+0 integrated system FOR THE ODU INSTALLATION REFERS TO PAR.SRA L Equipment installation 3. September 1999 23/96 .

September 1999 .9 Elevation and azimuth adjustment 24/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Equipment installation SRA L 3.

5 13 ANTENNA DIAMETER (cm) 60 30 60 15 30 60 18 30 60 23 30 60 26 30 60 38 30 60 P/N ANTENNA FEEDER FLANGE 601-400/38 601-400/31 601-400/32 601-400/26 601-400/25 601-400/28 601-400/27 601-400/33 601-400/34 601-400/35 601-400/44 601-400/29 601-400/46 PBR 100 PBR 120 PBR 140 PBR 220 PBR 220 PBR 220 PBR 320 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.SRA L Equipment installation 4 ∅30/60 cm STANDARD INSTALLATION 4. September 1999 25/96 .1 ∅30/60 cm standard antennas FREQUENCY BAND (GHz) 10.

September 1999 . 4.2 Antenna for offset left side (standard delivery) WHEN IS REQUEST THE OFFSET RIGHT SIDE. SEE PAR.Equipment installation SRA L 4.3 26/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

September 1999 27/96 .3 Antenna for offset right side 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.SRA L Equipment installation 4.

4 Pole mounting 28/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 .Equipment installation SRA L 4.

September 1999 29/96 .SRA L Equipment installation 4.5 Overal size THE DIMENSIONS ARE IN MILLIMETERS (mm) 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

Equipment installation SRA L 4.6 O-rings (*) THE RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH THE ANTENNA 30/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

SRA L Equipment installation 4.7 Polarization adjustment 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 31/96 .

8 View with ODU 1+0 integrated system FOR THE ODU INSTALLATION REFERS TO PAR. September 1999 . 10 32/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Equipment installation SRA L 4.

September 1999 33/96 .9 Elevation and azimuth adjustment 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.SRA L Equipment installation 4.

2m standard antennas FREQUENCY BAND (GHz) 7 8 10. September 1999 .2 m STANDARD INSTALLATION 5.Equipment installation SRA L 5 ∅1.5 13 15 18 23 P/N FEEDER FLANGE ANTENNA 601-400/53 601-400/53 601-400/41 601-400/42 601-400/43 601-400/51 601-400/52 PDR 84 PDR 84 PBR 100 PBR 120 PBR 140 PBR 220 PBR 220 34/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.1 ∅1.

September 1999 35/96 .SRA L Equipment installation 5. Install the 4 threaded rods M20 following the sequence indication of (B). Install the frame having care to pIace the hole for ground connection towards "down". NOTE – The threaded rods shall be screwed in for at least 30mm.2 Antenna assembling Place the antenna reflector on a flat surface and separate the reflector rim from the ground by means of 3 lugs (A). B A 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

The conductive ring (see item 2) is already glued to the feed flange. September 1999 .Equipment installation SRA L D C Install the feed following the sequence indication of (D) and keeping the antenna reflector as shown in (C). (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) Flat head screw 3x10 Conductive ring Feed O-ring M6 Nut. washer. spring washer Feed support Knurled screw M6 Ground connection 36/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

SRA L Equipment installation The radome can be found in its carton pipe. springs and V-shaped rods (item 6 of (E)) into the corresponding holes available on the L-shaped aluminium ring (item 7) as shown in (E). Hook the pulling items to the V-shaped rods and gradually screw-in the nuts having cared to distribute the pulling force among the pulling items. Place all the pulling items consisting of hooks. washers. E 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 37/96 . The radome can be fully stretched as the spring length is reduced by about 1/3 of its free length. Place the fabric over the antenna aperture and insert the V-shaped rods into the eyelets available on the radome.

(2). September 1999 . WARNING – The bolts fixing the strut pos.Equipment installation SRA L Insert the collar pos. CAUTION – Apply the pressurization gradually to reach the specified value. (3) to the frame and the tower must be loosened. 38/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. (1) on the pole. Lift the antenna with balancing rope near the pole and fasten it with U-bolts pos. Fasten the strut to the frame and to the tower.

then tighten the above 6 nuts.SRA L Equipment installation 5. 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. loosen the 6 nuts (see item 1).3 Polarization plane adjustment For polarization plane adjustment. September 1999 39/96 . turn the feed clockwise or counterwise together with the device till the best position is reached.

(B) (D) (Do not lock) Unscrew completely the joints of the rod pos. Unscrew completely the joints of the rod pos. (B) (C) (D). (B) until the Rx signal is maximized.Equipment installation SRA L CAUTION – For antenna panning use three threaded bars only. (A). During the alignment let loose the nuts of the lateral strut pos. September 1999 . Azimuth coarse adjustment (±20°) Untighten the nuts of the U-bolts pos. 40/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. Lock all the nuts. Azimuth fine adjustment (±5°) Tighten manually the joints of the rods pos. Screw unscrew alternatively the joints of the rod pos. Tighten the nuts. (2). It must be fastened just at the end of the steering operation. (C) until the Rx signal is maximized. (D) (C). Tighten manually nuts pos. (A). Move manually the antenna until the received signal is maximized. the fourth one must be loose all the time. Screw unscrew alternatively the joints of the rod pos. (3). Zenith fine adjustment (±20°) Tighten manually (do not lock) the spherical joints of the adjustment rods pos.

(D) until the Rx signal is maximized. Unscrew completely the joints of the rod pos. Lock all the nuts. (A) (C). Counter Clockwise Adjustment Tighten manually (do not lock) the spherical joints of the adjustment rods pos. (B). (A). Screw the joints of the rod pos. 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. Screw the joints of the rod pos.(C) until the Rx signal is maximized.SRA L Equipment installation NOTE – With zenith adjustment of ±20° the procedure for azimuth adjustment is the following: Clockwise Adjustment Tighten manually (do not lock) the spherical joints of the adjustment rods pos. (B)(D). September 1999 41/96 . Lock all the nuts. Unscrew completely the joints of the rod pos.

4 Strutting DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm) 42/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Equipment installation SRA L 5. September 1999 .

1 Solution with flexible waveguide “vertical” polarization (standard) (*) (**) (***) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR.SRA L Equipment installation 6 1+0 SLIM NOT INTEGRATED SYSTEM 6. 6.3 THIS POLE FIXING IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE L = 1 Mt ONLY THESE BENDS ARE INCLUDED IN THE SLIM 1+0 FRAME FOR THE OVERALL SIZE SEE PAR. 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 43/96 . 6. 6.8.7 AND PAR.

Equipment installation SRA L 6.7 AND PAR.2 Solution with flexible waveguide “horizontal” polarization (*) (**) (***) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE par.8. September 1999 .3 THIS POLE FIXING IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE L = 1 Mt ONLY THESE BENDS ARE INCLUDED IN THE SLIM 1+0 FRAME FOR THE OVERALL SIZE SEE PAR. 44/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. 6. 6. 6.

OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE) DIAMETERS UP TO 4 ft THIS FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS DIAMETERS AFTER 1. September 1999 45/96 .2 m. = 1000 mm) • • 504-692/71 (UDR-PDR 84) 504-692/71 (UDR-PDR 84) 504-719/62 (UBR-PBR 100) 597-523/95 (UDR-PDR 84) 597-523/95 (UDR-PDR 84) 597-523/96 (UBR-PBR 100) 597-523/97 (UBR-PBR 120) 597-523/98 (UBR-PBR 140) 597-523/99 (UBR-PBR 220) 597-523/99 (UBR-PBR 220) 597-523/99 (UBR-PBR 220) 7 8 10.3 Slim 1+0 frame and flexible waveguide versions FREQUENCY BAND (GHz) P/N SLIM 1+0 FRAME 534-108/47 534-108/47 534-108/48 P/N FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE P/N P/N TWIST ••• 504-631/21 (UDR-PDR 84) 504-631/21 (UDR-PDR 84) 504-656/51K (UBR-PBR 100) 504-656/52K (UBR-PBR 120) 504-656/53K (UBR-PBR 140) 504-656/54K (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/55K (UBR-PBR 320) FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE KIT (L. OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE) DIAMETERS AFTER 4 ft THIS TWIST IS OPTIONAL.SRA L Equipment installation 6. = 600 mm) • (L. USED FOR “HORIZONTAL” POLARIZATION APPLICATION •• ••• 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.2 m.5 13 534-108/49 504-719/54 (UBR-PBR 120) 15 534-108/50 504-719/56 (UBR-PBR 140) 18 534-108/51 504-719/58 (UBR-PBR 220) 23 534-108/52 504-719/58 (UBR-PBR 220) 26 534-108/53 504-719/58 (UBR-PBR 220) 38 534-108/55 504-719/64 (UBR-PBR 320) • THIS FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS DIAMETERS UP TO 1.

September 1999 .4 Frame arrangement "ATTENTION" – INSTALL FIRST THE SAFETY COLLAR 46/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Equipment installation SRA L 6.

5 Dimensions OVERALL DIMENSION INCLUDING ODU DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm) 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 47/96 .SRA L Equipment installation 6.

Equipment installation SRA L 6.6 O-rings (*) THE O-RING ARE DELIVERED WITH SLIM 1+0 FRAME 48/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

slim 1+0 frame with ∅20/30 slim antenna DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm) 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.7 Overall size.SRA L Equipment installation 6. September 1999 49/96 .

September 1999 .Equipment installation SRA L 6. slim 1+0 with ∅60 cm slim antenna DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm) 50/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.8 Overall size.

7.SRA L Equipment installation 7 1+0 NOT INTEGRATED STANDARD SYSTEM 7. September 1999 51/96 .3 THIS POLE FIXING FOR WAVEGUIDE IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE L=1000 mm ONLY THESE ACCESSORIES ARE INCLUDED IN THE STANDARD 1+0 FRAME 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.1 Solution with flexible waveguide “vertical” polarization (standard) (*) (**) (***) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR.

September 1999 .2 Solution with flexible wave guide “horizontal” polarization (*) (**) (***) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR.Equipment installation SRA L 7. 7.3 THIS POLE FIXING FOR WAVEGUIDE IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE L=1000 mm ONLY THESE ACCESSORIES ARE INCLUDED IN THE STANDARD 1+0 FRAME 52/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

3 Standard 1+0 frame and flexible wave guide versions FREQUENCY BAND (GHz) 7 8 10. OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE) DIAMETERS AFTER 4 ft. September 1999 53/96 . = 600 mm) • (L. THIS FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS DIAMETERS AFTER 1. OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE) DIAMETERS UP TO 4 ft.2m.SRA L Equipment installation 7. THIS TWIST IS OPTIONAL.2m.5 13 15 18 23 26 38 P/N P/N P/N P/N TWIST ••• 504-631/21 (UBR-PBR 84) 504-631/21 (UBR-PBR 84) 504-656/51K (UBR-PBR 100) 504-656/52K (UBR-PBR 120) 504-656/53K (UBR-PBR 140) 504-656/54K (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/55K (UBR-PBR 320) STANDARD FLEXIBLE WAVE FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE GUIDE KIT 1+0 FRAME (L. = 1000 mm) • • 534-108/29 534-108/30 534-108/23 534-108/11 534-108/13 534-108/15 534-108/17 534-108/19 534-108/21 504-692/71 (UBR-PBR 84) 504-692/71 (UBR-PBR 84) 504-719/62 (UBR-PBR 100) 504-719/54 (UBR-PBR 120) 504-719/56 (UBR-PBR 140) 504-719/58 (UBR-PBR 220) 504-719/58 (UBR-PBR 220) 504-719/58 (UBR-PBR 220) 504-719/64 (UBR-PBR 320) • 597-523/95 (UBR-PBR 84) 597-523/95 (UBR-PBR 84) 597-523/96 (UBR-PBR 100) 597-523/97 (UBR-PBR 120) 597-523/98 (UBR-PBR 140) 597-523/99 (UBR-PBR 220) 597-523/99 (UBR-PBR 220) 597-523/99 (UBR-PBR 220) THIS FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS DIAMETERS UP TO 1. IS USED FOR THE “HORIZONTAL” POLARIZATION ONLY •• ••• 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

4 Frame arrangement 54/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Equipment installation SRA L 7. September 1999 .

September 1999 55/96 .SRA L Equipment installation 7.5 Dimensions DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm) 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .Equipment installation SRA L 7.6 O-rings (*) THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH STANDARD 1+0 FRAME 56/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

8 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. 8. 8.SRA L Equipment installation 8 1+1 FRAME 8.7 AND PAR. 8. September 1999 57/96 .3 THIS POLE FIXING IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE L=1 mt ONLY THIS BEND IS INCLUDED IN THE 1+1 FRAME FOR THE OVERALL SIZE SEE PAR.1 Solution with flexible wave guide “vertical” polarization (standard) (*) (**) (***) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR.

8.7 AND PAR. 8.8 58/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 . 8.Equipment installation SRA L 8.3 THIS POLE FIXING IS DELIVERED WITH FLEXIBLE WAVE GUIDE L=1 mt ONLY THIS BEND IS INCLUDED IN THE 1+1 FRAME FOR THE POLE ENGUMBERED SEE PAR.2 Solution with flexible waveguide “horizontal” polarization (optional) (*) (**) (***) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR.

USED FOR “HORIZONTAL” POLARIZATION APPLICATION •• ••• 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.SRA L Equipment installation 8. = 1000 mm) •• 597-523/95 (UDR-PDR 84) 597-523/95 (UDR-PDR 84) 597-523/96 (UBR-PBR 100) 597-523/97 (UBR-PBR 120) 597-523/98 (UBR-PBR 140) 597-523/99 (UBR-PBR 220) 597-523/99 (UBR-PBR 220) 597-523/99 (UBR-PBR 220) P/N TWIST ••• 1+1 1+1 FREQUENCY HOT-STANDBY FRAME DIV. OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE) DIAMETERS UP TO 4 ft THIS FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS DIAMETERS AFTER 1.TY FRAME 534-108/38 534-108/39 534-108/31 534-108/32 534-108/40 534-108/41 534-108/42 534-108/43 534-108/44 534-108/45 534-108/46 7 8 10. September 1999 59/96 .2 m.3 FREQUENCY BAND (GHz) 1+1 frame and flexible waveguide versions P/N P/N P/N FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE (L.2 m. OR ANDREW ANTENNAS (VALULINE) DIAMETERS AFTER 4 ft THIS TWIST IS OPTIONAL.5 13 15 18 23 26 38 504-631/21 (UDR-PDR 84) 504-631/21 (UDR-PDR 84) 504-656/51K (UBR-PBR 100) 504-656/52K (UBR-PBR 120) 504-656/53K (UBR-PBR 140) 504-656/54K (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/55K (UBR-PBR 320) THIS FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE IS USED WITH ITALTEL ANTENNAS DIAMETERS UP TO 1. = 600 mm) • 504-692/71 (UDR-PDR 84) 504-692/71 (UDR-PDR 84) 504-719/62 (UBR-PBR 100) 504-719/54 (UBR-PBR 120) 504-719/56 (UBR-PBR 140) 504-719/58 (UBR-PBR 220) 504-719/58 (UBR-PBR 220) 504-719/58 (UBR-PBR 220) 504-719/64 (UBR-PBR 320) • P/N FLEXIBLE WAVEGUIDE KIT (L.

4 Frame arrangement "ATTENTION" – INSTALL FIRST THE SAFETY COLLAR 60/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Equipment installation SRA L 8. September 1999 .

SRA L Equipment installation 8.5 Dimensions OVERALL DIMENSION INCLUDING ODU’S DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm) 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 61/96 .

6 O-rings (*) THE O-RINGS ARE DELIVERED WITH 1+1 FRAME 62/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 .Equipment installation SRA L 8.

SRA L Equipment installation 8.7 Overall size. 1+1 frame with ∅20/30 cm antenna DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm) 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 63/96 .

Equipment installation SRA L 8. September 1999 .8 Overall size. 1 + 1 frame with ∅ 60 cm antenna DIMENSIONS IN MILLIMETERS (mm) 64/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

September 1999 65/96 .SRA L Equipment installation 9 NOT-INTEGRATED SYSTEM 9. 9.1 Solution with elliptical waveguide “Vertical” polarization (standard) (*) (**) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR.3 THESE ACCESORIES ARE INCLUDED IN THE ODU SUPPORTING FRAME 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .3 THESE ACCESORIES ARE INCLUDED IN THE ODU SUPPORTING FRAME 66/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. 9.2 Solution with polarization elliptical waveguide “Horizontal” (*) (**) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR.Equipment installation SRA L 9.

ty 2 NOTE 2 a b c d e f g1 g2 504-237/87 N° 2 NOTE 3 308-005/16 N° 1 333-031/73 332-005/21 165-005/19 IN EMISSION 332-202/87 N° N° N° N° N° 2 3 3 3 3 OPTIONAL. N° N° N° Q.3 Elliptical flexible waveguide and connector/accessory versions – 7 GHz ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-750) ITEM DESCRIPTION ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 64-71) ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 77-71W) ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) P/N 127-042/05 IN EMISSION Unit Mt. September 1999 67/96 . USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY A TWIST (UDR-PDR 84) 504-631/21 N° 1 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. Mt.ty NOTE 1-2 NOTE 1-3 NOTE 1 NOTE 1-2 NOTE 1-3 1a 1b 2 3a 3b 165-005/84 165-005/69 165-005/70 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-778SR) ITEM DESCRIPTION WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR EWP 64-71 (PDR 84) WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR EWP 77-71W (PDR 84) PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UDR-UDR 84) GROUNDING KIT WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 62) RUBBER BUSH (∅ 62) RUBBER BUSH (∅ 62) P/N IN EMISSION Unit N° Q.SRA L Equipment installation 9.

USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY A TWIST (UDR-PDR 84) 504-631/21 N° 1 NOTE 1 = QUANTITY TO BE DEFINED AS PER PLANT REQUIREMENTS NOTE 2 = FOR 7.ty NOTE 1 NOTE 1 NOTE 1 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-779SR) ITEM a b DESCRIPTION WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PDR 84) PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UDR-UDR 84) GROUNDING KIT WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅62) RUBBER BUSH (∅ 62) P/N 504-237/87 308-005/16 Unit N° N° Q.7-7 (SHIFTER 148.4-7. September 1999 .ty 2 1 c d e f 333-031/73 332-005/21 165-005/19 332-202/87 N° N° N° N° 2 3 3 3 OPTIONAL.4-7.5 MHz) 68/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Equipment installation SRA L – 8 GHz ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-758) ITEM 1 2 3 DESCRIPTION ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 77-77) ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) P/N 127-042/06 165-005/84 165-005/70 Unit Mt.1-7.9 GHz (SHIFTER 245 MHz) and 7. N° N° Q.7 GHz (SHIFTER 154 MHz) CHANNELINGS NOTE 3 = FOR 7.4 GHz (SHIFTER 161 MHz) and 7.

September 1999 69/96 . N° N° Q. USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY A TWIST (UBR-PBR 100) 504-656/51K N° 1 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.ty NOTE 1 NOTE 1 NOTE 1 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-780SR) ITEM a b DESCRIPTION WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 100) PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR 100) GROUNDING KIT WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 38) RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) P/N 504-238/27 308-005/23 Unit N° N° Q.SRA L Equipment installation – 10 GHz ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-762) ITEM 1 2 3 DESCRIPTION ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 90-107) ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) P/N 127-042/07 165-005/84 165-005/71 Unit Mt.ty 2 1 c d e f 333-031/74 332-005/21 165-005/17 332-202/81 N° N° N° N° 2 3 3 3 OPTIONAL.

ty 2 1 c d e f 333-031/74 332-005/21 165-005/17 332-202/83 N° N° N° N° 2 3 3 3 OPTIONAL.ty NOTE 1 NOTE 1 NOTE 1 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-781SR) ITEM a b DESCRIPTION WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 120) PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR 120) GROUNDING KIT WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 38) RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) P/N 504-238/26 308-005/24 Unit N° N° Q. USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY A TWIST (UBR-PBR 120) 504-656/52K N° 1 NOTE 1 = QUANTITY TO BE DEFINED AS PER PLANT REQUIREMENTS 70/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. N° N° Q. September 1999 .Equipment installation SRA L – 13 GHz ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-766) ITEM 1 2 3 DESCRIPTION ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 127) ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) P/N 127-042/08 165-005/84 165-005/72 Unit Mt.

September 1999 71/96 .ty 2 1 c d e f 333-031/74 332-005/21 165-005/17 332-202/82 N° N° N° N° 2 3 3 3 OPTIONAL. USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY A TWIST (UBR-PBR 140) 504-656/53K N° 1 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.ty NOTE 1 NOTE 1 NOTE 1 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-782SR) ITEM a b DESCRIPTION WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 140) PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR 140) GROUNDING KIT WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 38) RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) P/N 504-238/96 308-005/22 Unit N° N° Q.SRA L Equipment installation – 15 GHz ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-767) ITEM 1 2 3 DESCRIPTION ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 132) ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) P/N 127-042/09 165-005/84 165-005/72 Unit Mt. N° N° Q.

Equipment installation SRA L – 18 GHz ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-768) ITEM 1 2 3 DESCRIPTION ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 180) ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs) WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) P/N 127-042/10 165-005/84 165-005/74 Unit Mt. September 1999 . N° N° Q. USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY A TWIST (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K N° 1 NOTE 1 = QUANTITY TO BE DEFINED AS PER PLANT REQUIREMENTS 72/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.ty 2 1 c d e f 333-031/75 332-005/21 165-005/17 332-202/84 N° N° N° N° 2 3 3 3 OPTIONAL.ty NOTE 1 NOTE 1 NOTE 1 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-783SR) ITEM a b DESCRIPTION WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 220) PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR 220) GROUNDING KIT WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 38) RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) P/N 504-238/94 308-005/21 Unit N° N° Q.

SRA L Equipment installation – 23 GHz ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-769) ITEM 1 2 3 DESCRIPTION ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 220) ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcsz) WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) P/N 127-042/11 165-005/84 165-005/74 Unit Mt. September 1999 73/96 . USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY A TWIST (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K N° 1 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.ty NOTE 1 NOTE 1 NOTE 1 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-784SR) ITEM a b DESCRIPTION WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 220) PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR 220) GROUNDING KIT WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT UNIVERSAL CLAMP (∅ 38) RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) P/N 504-238/92 308-005/21 Unit N° N° Q. N° N° Q.ty 2 1 c d e f 333-031/75 332-005/21 165-005/17 332-202/85 N° N° N° N° 2 3 3 3 OPTIONAL.

ty NOTE 1 NOTE 1 NOTE 1 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES (31263-785SR) ITEM a b DESCRIPTION WAVE GUIDE CONNECTOR (PBR 220) PRESSURIZATION WINDOW (UBR-UBR 220) GROUNDING KIT WAVE GUIDE SUPPORT UNIVERSAL CLAMP(∅ 38) RUBBER BUSH (∅ 38) P/N 504-238/95 308-005/21 Unit N° N° Q. USE FOR HORIZONTAL POLARIZATION ONLY A TWIST (UBR-PBR 220) 504-656/54K N° 1 NOTE 1 = QUANTITY TO BE DEFINED AS PER PLANT REQUIREMENTS 74/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Equipment installation SRA L – 26 GHz ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (31263-771) ITEM 1 2 3 DESCRIPTION ELLIPTICAL WAVE GUIDE (EWP 240) ADAPTER FOR ANGULAR (10pcs WAVE GUIDE CLAMP (10pcs) P/N 127-042/13 165-005/84 165-005/74 Unit Mt. September 1999 .ty 2 1 c d e f 333-031/75 332-005/21 165-005/17 332-202/89 N° N° N° N° 2 3 3 3 OPTIONAL. N° N° Q.

September 1999 75/96 .1 Assembly on support frame 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.SRA L Equipment installation 10 OUTDOOR ASSEMBLY 10.

September 1999 .Equipment installation SRA L 10.2 ODU dimensions WEIGHT OF THE OUTDOOR ASSEMBLY = 6 Kg 76/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

26C UBR 220 * 07C to 38C Version with Heater.13C 732-221/13B .10C UBR 100 119/126 732-201/08B .08C 732-221/08B .6) 26 (24.23C UBR 220 336 / 420 / 490 / 644 / 714 / 728 340 / 1010 732-201/15B .5 to 26.7 to 19.68) 13 (12.13C UBR 120 91 732-201/10B .2 to 23.26C 732-221/26B .3 Outdoor assembly versions FREQUENC Y BAND (GHz) 7 (7.10C 732-221/10B .07C 16x2 Mb/s 732-221/07B .1 to7.18C UBR 220 732-201/26B .5 (10.5) 1260 732-201/38B .7) 23 (21.5 to 10.5) 38 (37.35) 18 (17.5 to 15.9) 8 (8.25) 15 (14.15C 732-221/15B .75 to 13.SRA L Equipment installation 10.15C UBR 140 266 732-201/13B .08C UDR 84 FREQUENCY SHIFTER (MHz) 154 / 161 /245 P/N (*) 8x2 Mb/s 732-201/07B .07C FEEDER FLANGE UDR 84 732-201/18B .2 to 8.18C 732-221/18B . order for environmental temperature range: -50° to +55° C (Standard -30° to +55° C) 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.38C 732-221/38B .38C UBR 320 1008 / 1200 / 1232 1008 732-201/23B . September 1999 77/96 .0 to 39.23C 732-221/23B .5) 10.

Equipment installation SRA L 10. September 1999 . THE IN/OUT CABLE CONNECTOR IS AT BOTTOM 78/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.4 “Vertical” polarization application (standard) NOTE = FOR “VERTICAL” POLARISED APPLICATION. THE IN/OUT CABLE CONNECTOR IS ON RIGHT HAND SIDE 10.5 “Horizontal” polarization application NOTE = FOR “HORIZONTAL” POLARISED APPLICATION.

6 “Rx field measure” connector (*) THIS “FX FIELD MEASURE” CONNECTOR IS THE TEST POINT FOR THE CONNECTION OF A VOLT METER DURING THE ANTENNA ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 79/96 .SRA L Equipment installation 10.

1 Tipical connection NOTE = THE MAX LENGHT OF ONE IDU/ODU CONNECTION IS 400 mt 80/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Equipment installation SRA L 11 1/4” COAXIAL CABLE 11. September 1999 .

SRA L Equipment installation 11. 11.2 Connection on ODU side (*) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. September 1999 81/96 .6 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

Equipment installation SRA L 11. 11. September 1999 .3 Grounding connections (*) (**) (***) (****) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. 597-524/61.6 REFER TO par..86..62) 82/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.4 FOR THE FIXING PROCEDURE OF THE 1/4” COAXIAL CABLE N°2 GROUNDING KITS ARE A STANDARD SOLUTION FOR A 1/4” COAXIAL CABLE PATH ≤ 50 m THIS CABLE IS INCLUDED INTO THE INSTALLATION MATERIAL KIT (597-523/58. 11.

1 AND PAR.4. 11.4.4 Fixing (*) (**) THIS IS THE STANDARD SOLUTION THE INSTALLATION KIT (314-205/76). 11.2 FOR THE CODES.SRA L Equipment installation 11. 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. REFER TO PAR. September 1999 83/96 . PROVIDED WITH THE EXTERNAL CONNECTION ACCESSORIES (597-524/10)INCLUDED 50 CABLE TIE OPTIONAL MATERIAL RELEVANT TO ALTERNATIVE SOLUTIONS TO BE ADOPTED ACCORDING TO THE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.

FLAT CABLE CLAMP for LADDER. IMC 3043VIPA (**) MATERIAL TO BE DEFINED 84/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Equipment installation SRA L 11.5 87.5 57. ROD CABLE CLAMP for LADDER. September 1999 . FLAT CABLE CLAMP for LADDER. FLAT CABLE CLAMP for LADDER. ANGULAR 1/4” CABLE No. ANGULAR CABLE CLAMP for WALL/POLE (*) CABLE CLAMP for WALL/POLE (*) IMC 5010VIPA 2 10-11 22 121 IMC 5025VIPA (**) 1 2 10-11 10-11 (*) for WALL-FASTENING: USE SCREW ANCHOR M5 Cod. ROD CABLE CLAMP for LADDER.5 92 P/N DESCRIPTION 332-202/71 332-202/72 332-202/74 332-202/75 IMC 5009VIPA CABLE CLAMP for LADDER.4. ANGULAR CABLE CLAMP for LADDER.2 Fixing for RFS-Kabelmetal cable 1/4” CABLE No. 165-010/08 for ø 83 ÷ 120 POLE INSTALLATION: USE METALLIC CABLE TIE Cod. ROD CABLE CLAMP for LADDER. ANGULAR CABLE CLAMP for LADDER. 1 2 1 2 1 DIMENSIONS D mm 10-11 10-11 10-11 10-11 10-11 L mm 22 22 22 22 22 H mm 73 102 58.5 78 91 11. ROD CABLE CLAMP for LADDER. FLAT CABLE CLAMP for LADDER.1 Fixing for Andrew cable DIMENSIONS P/N (**) (**) (**) (**) (**) (**) DESCRIPTION CABLE CLAMP for LADDER. 1 2 1 2 1 2 D mm 8-9 8-9 8-9 8-9 8-9 8-9 L mm 12 12 12 12 12 12 H mm 59 72 44.4.

September 1999 85/96 . 11. 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.SRA L Equipment installation 11. IN CASE OF 1+0 CONFIGURATION ONLY ONE IN/OUT CONNECTION IS PRESENT (*) (**) (***) FOR THE P/N OF THESE ACCESSORIES SEE PAR. PROVIDED WITH EXTERNAL CONNECTION ACCESSORIES (597-524/10). THIS COAXIAL CABLE FIXING BRACKET IS INCLUDED IN THE EXTERNAL CONNECTION ACCESSORIES (597-524/10).5 Rack assembly THE FIGURE SHOWS A SYSTEM IN 1+1 OR 2×(1+0) OR ADD DROP CONFIGURATION.6 THIS “OSM/N” COAXIAL TAIL IS CONTAINED IN THE BB ACCESSORIES (332-005/49).

Nr. Nr. NOTE 1 104-009/33 1/4” CuH .TY Mt. P/N DESCRIPTION LDF1RN-50 UNIT Q.6 Andrew and RFS-Kabelmetal sets Andrew SET ITEM 1.50 Ω COAXIAL CABLE (314-327/79)* 597-523/94B 1/4” COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES (597-523/94)* 155 010 35 155 010 16 155 096 02 158 910 37 1 COAX N-PLUG 90° COAX N-PLUG GROUNDING KIT (421-008/24) (421-008/23) (333-031/80) 1 1 2 FOR THE ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS SEE “CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY” DOCUMENT • • • The Andrew and RFS-Kabelmetal material sets are alternative to each other The above listed quantities are relevant to one IDU/ODU connection NOTE 1 = The max length of one IDU/ODU connection is 400 Mt.TY Mt. 2. (standard delivery is 30 Mt. NOTE 1 104-009/42 1/4” LDF1RN . P/N DESCRIPTION 152 156 11 UNIT Q. 2.) * Commercial reference code 86/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.50 W (314-327/79)* 597-523/94A 1/4” COAX CABLE ACCESSORIES (597-523/94)* L1PNM-H L1PNR-HC 223158 597-523/94A 1 COAX N-PLUG 90° COAX N-PLUG GROUNDING KIT (421-008/86) (421-008/84) (333-032/15) 1 1 2 FOR THE ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS SEE “CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY” DOUMENT OR RFS-Kabelmetal SET ITEM 1.Equipment installation SRA L 11. September 1999 .

09 38 76 15 (30) 91 1.4 0.7 Characteristics 1.25 / + 60 (°C) . (typical) (kg) (N • m) (N) (kg/mm) (m) 0.33 1. Bending Radius Min. Standard Hanger Spacing (kg/m) single bend (mm) repeated bends (mm) Min.10 / + 60 Recommended Temperature for Installation Recommended Storage for Installation Operating Temperature (°C) .6 6.13 40 120 650 - Weight Min. Construction Characteristics ANDREW Inner Conductor Dielectric Outer Conductor Standard Jacket Diameter (mm) Diameter (mm) Diameter (mm) Diameter (mm) 2.0 7.7 9 RFS-Kabelmetal 2.SRA L Equipment installation 11. Bending Radius Number of Bends Tensile Strength Bending Moment Max.5 3.4 6. September 1999 87/96 .0 2.5 10.7 7. Tensile Force Crush Strength Max.30 / + 80 - (°C) .30 / + 80 - 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. Range of Temperature ANDREW RFS-Kabelmetal . Mechanical Characteristics ANDREW RFS-Kabelmetal 0.

1 5.33 2200 0.15 3.9 4.5 - Characteristics Impedance Relative Propagation Velocity Capacitance Maximun Operating Frequency Cut-off Frequency Peak RF Voltage Rating Peak Power Rating DC Resistance : Inner Conductor DC Resistance : Outer Conductor DC Breakdown Inductance (Ω) (%) (pF/m) (Mhz) (Mhz) (kV) (kW) (Ω/km) (Ω/km) (V) (µH/m) 50 87 76.83 6.1 3. September 1999 .Equipment installation SRA L 4. Electrical Characteristics ANDREW RFS-Kabelmetal 50 82 82 3000 18700 0.1 12.19 88/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.8 15800 1.

89 37.42 12.6 9.4 13. September 1999 89/96 .13 21.1 7.73 17.94 10.77 29.08 5.32 2.1 23. ambient temperature 24°C ANDREW 10 MHz 30 MHz 100 MHz 150 MHz 200 MHz 300 MHz 450 MHz 600 MHz 824 MHz 894 MHz 900 MHz 960 MHz 1000 MHz 1500 MHz 1700 MHz 1800 MHz 2000 MHz 2300 MHz 3000 MHz 4000 MHz 6000 MHz 10000 MHz 2.43 13.7 18.22 8.38 20.3 4.SRA L Equipment installation 5.1 27.94 51.15 18. (dB/100m) Standard conditions : VSWR 1.0 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.20 4. Attenuation.0 .36 12.72 RFS-Kabelmetal 1.3 6.92 13.2 20.03 7.

644 0. ANDREW 10 MHz 30 MHz 100 MHz 150 MHz 200 MHz 300 MHz 450 MHz 600 MHz 824 MHz 894 MHz 900 MHz 960 MHz 1000 MHz 1500 MHz 1700 MHz 1800 MHz 2000 MHz 2300 MHz 3000 MHz 4000 MHz 6000 MHz 10000 MHz 3.95 0.4 2.294 0.221 - 90/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.32 0.871 0.756 0.62 0.51 1. September 1999 .413 0.618 0.51 1.477 0.43 0.38 1.07 0. ambient temperature 40°C .77 0.448 0.579 0.185 RFS-Kabelmetal 4.Equipment installation SRA L 6.36 0. kW Standard conditions : VSWR 1.0 .585 0.257 0. inner conductor temperature 100°C .385 0.292 0.85 1. Average Power Rating.239 0.

In Tab. 1 – Fixing kit code 332-308/34 Code 232-168/62 232-168/63 232-168/64 266-200/44 204-364/07D 216-21/469 Denomination Brackets for 19" rack Right bracket for ETSI rack Left bracket for ETSI rack Rubber foot Screw M4×8 hex. The IDU is delivered already assembled.SRA L Equipment installation 12 IDU INSTALLATION The IDU can be arranged for installation both on ETSI and 19" racks.ty 2 1 1 4 4 1 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. September 1999 91/96 . four rubber feet to be applied to the IDU base.1 Installation accessories The IDU sub-rack P/N 628-585/01 is delivered with especial fixing kit code 332-308/34. IDU sub-rack has to be arranged for the rack type (ETSI or 19") and then the identification plate has to be applied to the left bracket. are included. NOTE – The IDU can be installed on a desk. to this purpose in the installation kit code 332-308/34. 12. with the units inserted. Before starting with the installation. in this case. 1 the list and description is set down of the accessories contained in the fixing kit. Tab. i. by means of two different types of brackets.e. the identification plate has to be applied to the sub-rack upper panel. head Sticker 4×20 Q.

install on the side panels. hex.Left bracket for ETSI 2 .2 IDU sub-rack arrangement for ETSI rack – In the sub-rack front part (4).Right bracket for ETSI 3 . September 1999 .Equipment installation SRA L 12. delivered with the sub-rack. by means of the relevant two fixing screws (3).Screw M4×8. the two brackets (1-2) for ETSI rack. 1 . head 4 . 1).Sub-rack NB: Items 1 to 3 are contained in the fixing kit. 92/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. code 332-308/34 (see Tab.

by means of the relevant two fixing screws (2).4 IDU installation – – – Insert IDU (1) in the relevant housing of the rack Screw down the four screws (2) fixing the IDU (1). Fix the support of the coaxial cables (3) to the frame. September 1999 93/96 . 1 .Sub-rack NB: Items 1-2 are contained in the fixing kit.Screw M4×8. 1).Bracket for 19" 2 . code 332-308/34 (see Tab.3 IDU sub-rack arrangement for 19" rack – In the sub-rack front part (3). screwing the two relevant fixing screws (4). install on the side panels. the two brackets (1) for 19" rack. 12. hex.SRA L Equipment installation 12. 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. delivered with the sub-rack. head 3 .

Coaxial cable fixing bracket (*) 4 . 94/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.Screw (*) This coaxial fixing bracket is included in the external connection accessories (597-524/10).Equipment installation SRA L 1 .IDU 2 . September 1999 .Screw 3 .

WARNING NOTE – When a optional unit installation is realized after the equipment commissioning. For the installation of an optional unit. EOW unit. Q-Adapter unit.SRA L Equipment installation 13 INSTALLATION OF IDU OPTIONAL UNITS Optional units (Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit. This could cause a damage to IDU back-plane or to unit back-connector. before activating the optional unit operation: • update through the local or remote PC. Insert the unit (3) in the relevant housing. should a certain resistance be found. with control and configuration software. the equipment configuration (see software OMN Manual) • carry out the relevant electrical connections (see doc. "External connections"). September 1999 95/96 . – While inserting the unit. 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1. Screw down the two unit fixing screws (1). pay attention not to force excessively on the unit. D Channel Distributor unit) can be installed on IDU during the first installation phase (if not already present) or afterwards. act as follows: – – – Back off the two fixing screws (1) of the covering panel (2) relevant to the housing where the unit has to be installed. The installation procedure is the same for all the optional units.

Cover 3 .Screw 2 .COVER REMOVAL B .Unit A . September 1999 .Equipment installation SRA L 1 .UNIT INSTALLATION FINE 96/96 53-001A8-200/E Issue 1.

SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Presettings 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

Presettings SRA L BLANK PAGE 2/14 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

. . . . . . . . . . . . DC ground presetting for transmission tributaries (P/N 612-404/04) . . . . . . . . . .4 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SRA L Presettings Contents 1 2 2.3 2. . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 HARDWARE PRESETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 7 8 8 9 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . Presetting of +V AUX local ground connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75/120 Ohm tributary interface presetting (P/N 612-404/01) . . . . . . . . . . System configuration presetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/14 . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . 13 4/14 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1. . 10 75 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout P/N 523-404/76. . . . . . . September 1999 . . . . . . 2 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Fig. . . . .P/N 523-404/78 . . . . . . . . . . 11 75/120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout P/N 523-407/62 . . . . .Presettings SRA L Illustrations Fig. . . .P/N 523-405/59 . . 3 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . 12 Alarm Interface sub-unit layout . 4 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout . .

. . . . . . . . . . 2 Tab. . . . . . September 1999 5/14 . 3 Location of 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit jumpers/microswitches for system configuration presetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Location of 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit DC ground presetting for transmission tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Tab. . . . . 9 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Presetting jumper position of Alarm Interface sub-unit for +V AUX local ground connection . . . . . .SRA L Presettings Tables Tab. . . . . . . . .

6/14 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1. the equipment has to be activated (in local mode the PC can be connected to IDU in any moment). As far as the software presettings are concerned. Two presetting types are possible: – hardware presettings: performed by means of jumpers/microswitches directly in the units cards. 2) draw in IDU the unit. – The utmost part of the hardware presettings are carried out at factory and they must never be changed in order not to jeopardize the equipment correct operation. To execute a hardware presetting. act as follows: – – – draw out from IDU the involved unit execute the relevant hardware presetting (see par. for carrying out the presettings relevant to the equipment expected operating modes. refer to the software OMN Manual. in this case. the equipment has to be deactivated for getting access to the units for their execution software presettings: performed by means of a PC (in local or remote mode) with dedicated software. if necessary. September 1999 .Presettings SRA L 1 GENERAL This document contains the instruction for checking and. NOTE – The hardware presettings have to be carried out with the equipment deactivated. in this case. The hardware presettings described in this document are the only ones that can be carried out on installation.

the different presetting jumper/microswitch configurations are set down. the presetting jumpers/microswitches are located: – – – in the case of 120 Ohm interface: in the 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit 523-404/78 in the case of 75 Ohm interface: in the 75 Ohm Tributary sub-unit 523-404/76 in the case of 75/120 Ohm interface: in the 75/120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit 523-407/62.SRA L Presettings 2 HARDWARE PRESETTINGS 2. which have to be jointly set. Two different presetting jumper/microswitch configurations are possible: – – 2×(1+0)/AD-RPT configuration (1+1) configuration. 1. 2) NB: Jumpers XM1A to XM2B configure the tributary streams. 2×2 Mbit/s and 4×2 Mbit/s Sub-unit Jumpers (1+1) or (1+0) Closed Open 2×(1+0) or Add/Drop Open Closed 8×2 Mbit/s (1+1) or (1+0) Closed Open Add/Drop 75/120 Ohm Tributary P/N 523-407/62 (see Fig. configure the User channel. Tab. Fig. In the case of (1+0) configuration.1 System configuration presetting According to the system configuration. Fig. 75 Ohm Tributary sub-unit P/N 523-404/76 and 75/120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit P/N 523-407/62. the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit is delivered with the jumpers preset as for (1+1) configuration. 3) XM1A-B-C XM2A-B-C Open Closed 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1. respectively. In Tab. 3 show the layouts of 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit P/N 523-404/78. where the presetting jumpers/microswitches are pointed out. 1) or 75 Ohm Tributary P/N 523-404/76 (cfr. 1 – Location of 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit jumpers/microswitches for system configuration presetting Jumpers/ microswitches XM1A XM1B8 XM2A8 XM2B8 I1 2×(1+0)/AD-RPT configuration Open Open Closed Closed OFF (1+1) or (1+0) configuration Closed Closed Open Open ON Sub-unit 120 Ohm Tributary P/N 523-404/78 (see Fig. 1. Fig. September 1999 7/14 . 2 and Fig. The jumpers of microswitch I1. the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit has to be suitably preset.

Tab. the jumpers are located on 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit P/N 523-404/78. where the presetting jumpers are pointed out. September 1999 . The 75 Ohm tributaries can be available on transmission side with DC grounding of cable shield. Unless the customer presents a specific request.Presettings SRA L 2. 3).2 DC ground presetting (P/N 612-404/04) for transmission tributaries The 120 Ohm tributaries can be available on transmission side by means of jumper presetting either with or without DC ground of the shield wire. The several presetting jumper configurations are set down in Tab. Jumper TR1-TR2 TR2-TR3 TR4-TR5 TR5-TR6 TR7-TR8 TR8-TR9 TR10-TR11 TR11-TR12 TR13-TR14 TR14-TR15 TR16-TR17 TR17-TR18 TR19-TR20 TR20-TR21 TR22-TR23 TR23-TR24 Tributaries without DC ground Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Tributaries with DC ground Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Open Closed Sub-unit TX11 TX21 TX31 120 Ohm Tributary P/N 523-404/78 (see Fig. 1 shows the layout of 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit P/N 523-404/78. 2. 1) TX41 TX12 TX22 TX32 TX42 2. 8/14 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1. Fig.3 75/120 Ohm tributary interface presetting (P/N 612-404/01) The TR18 jumper of the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (P/N 612-404/01) must be on B position (see Fig. the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit is delivered with jumpers preset for transmission tributaries with DC ground. 2 – Location of 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit DC ground presetting for transmission tributaries TX trib.

4 Presetting of +V AUX local (P/N 614-041/01 and 614-041/11) ground connection The V AUX voltage positive pole. September 1999 9/14 . Usually. 4) * The jumper SZ1 3-6 must always be closed. A) SZ1 2-7 (pos. Tab. The line of the +V AUX signal can be optionally used also to provide an output a +5 V. the Alarm Interface sub-unit is delivered with the jumper preset in such way to realize the connection of +V AUX voltage. Tributary interface Tab. 4 shows the layout of Alarm sub-unit P/N 523-405/59 where the presetting jumpers are pointed out.SRA L Presettings 2. B) +V AUX connected to local ground (default) Open Closed OUT +5 V Closed Open Sub-unit Alarm Interface P/N 523-405/59 (see Fig. 3 indicates the different configuration of the presetting jumper. Fig. 3 – Presetting jumper position of Alarm Interface sub-unit for +V AUX local ground connection Jumper (*) SZ1 1-8 (pos. 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1. is connected to the IDU internal ground.

1 – 120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout .Presettings SRA L Fig. September 1999 .P/N 523-404/78 10/14 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1.

SRA L Presettings Fig. September 1999 11/14 . 2 – 75 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout P/N 523-404/76 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1.

Presettings SRA L Fig. September 1999 . 3 – 75/120 Ohm Tributary sub-unit layout P/N 523-407/62 12/14 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1.

September 1999 13/14 .P/N 523-405/59 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1.SRA L Presettings Fig. 4 – Alarm Interface sub-unit layout .

Presettings SRA L BLANK PAGE FINE 14/14 53-001A8-500/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

SRA L Low capacity digital radio system External connections 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

External connections SRA L BLANK PAGE FINE 2/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

. . . . . . . 48 POE connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Q channel connection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . 17 75/120 Ohm 16¥2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/11) . . . . . 6 Power supply connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 IDU EXTERNAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 V bus connection . . 47 Antenna connection . . . . . .2 2. . . . . 35 D/D1-D2 channel connection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10 3 3. . . . . 21 PC channel (F interface) connection. . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . .7 2. . 44 EOW expansion channel connection (optional) .3 2. . . . . . .2 4 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . . . . . . .1 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Handset connection (optional) . . . . . . . . . .1 2. . . . 45 IDU-ODU IF INTERCONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 2. . . . . . .8 2. . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2. . . 51 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/02) (²) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 2.2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. 12 75/120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Alarm connection (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SRA L External connections &RQWHQWV 1 2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 2 Mbit/s tributary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary connection (P/N 612-404/04) (²) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2.9 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 EXTERNAL CONNECTION ACCESSORIES . . . . . . . . . .3 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 User channel connection . . . . . . . .6 2. . . .

. . . . . 24 IDU front view (fully equipped) . 13 Fig. . . . . 22 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Fig. . . . . . . . 46 View of ODU external connection elements. . . 11 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . 22 F interface (PC) . .64 kbit/s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Fig. 12 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . . . . . . . 34 User channel interface . . . . .128 kbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .P/N 732-101/01. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .RS232C . . . . . . . . . . . 43 View of handset jack . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Fig. . . . . . . . 19 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 kbit/s: accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Q(X. . . . . . . . . . . . 28 V bus interface . . . 18 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . . . . 1 Fig. . . . 21 Fig. . . . . 36 D/D1-D2 data channel interface . . . 30 System alarm restitution and external alarm input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 D/D1-D2 data channel interface . . . . . . 10 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . . . . .64 kbit/s . . . . . . September 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 4/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . 8 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21) interface . . . 4 Fig. . . . . . . 44 EOW expansion channel interface. . . . . . . . . . 8 75 Ohm plug and coaxial cable for 2 Mbit/s tributaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . 16 Fig. . . . . . . 6 IDU front view (fully equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributary interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 "PS1" and "PS2" power supply connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 V bus interface .External connections SRA L Illustrations Fig. . . . . . . . . 47 Front view of POE connector . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 V bus interface . . . . 2 Fig. . .64 kbit/s: connections . . . . . . 41 Q(10BASE) interface . . . . . . . . 6 Fig. . 18 Fig. . . . . . . . . . 12 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Fig.P/N 732-101/11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128 kbit/s: connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 "ALARMS" connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Tab. . . . . . . . . 23 CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 9-16 (120 Ohm) . . . . . . . . . . 44 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Tab. . . . . . . 7 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Tab. . . . . . . . . 22 V bus daisy-chain kit P/N 597-524/09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 "Q(X. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Tab. . . . . . . . 3 Tab. 13 "V" connector pin-out . . . 19 “2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8” connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Tab. . 27 120 Ohm electrical material set . . . . 12 "PC" connector pin-out . . . . 45 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Tab. . . . . . . .16x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-524/62) . . . . . . . 15 "USER" connector pin-out. . . . . . . . .8x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-523/85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 POE connector pin-out . 19 "EOW EXP" connector pin-out . .SRA L External connections Tables Tab. . . 4 Tab. . 35 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 75 Ohm electrical material set . . . . . . . . . . 10 CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 1-8 (75 Ohm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Tab. . . . . . 15 "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8" connector pin-out (not standard numbering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Tab. . . . 54 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 External connection accessories P/N 597-524/10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 2 Mbit/s tributary numbering . . . . . . . . September 1999 5/56 . . . .8x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-523/86) . 8 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Tab. . . . . . 25 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" connector pin-out (standard numbering) 13 "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8" connector pin-out (standard numbering) 14 "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" connector pin-out (not standard numbering) . . . . . . . . . . 16 “2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4”connector pin-out . . . . . . . 25 120 Ohm electrical material set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Handset jack pin-out . . . .16x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-524/61) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 9-16 (75 Ohm). . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 RFS-Kabelmetal coaxial cable and accessories. . . . . . . . . . . 16 "D"/"D1"-"D2" connector pin-out . . . 56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. . . . . . 20 CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 1-8 (120 Ohm) . . . . . . . . 27 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Tab. . 6 Tab. . . . . . . .21)" connector pin-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 75 Ohm electrical material set . . 23 Andrew coaxial cable and accessories . . . . . . . 51 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Tab. . . . . 2 Tab. . . . . . . . . . . .

216 All the connectors for IDU external connections are located on the front panel of the units the assembly consists of (see Fig.  . 2): (*) Optional (**) Not present in (1+0) configuration )LJ  ± . 1 and Fig.'8 (.'8 IURQW YLHZ IXOO\ HTXLSSHG.7(51$/ &211(&7.External connections SRA L  *(1(5$/ This document deals with the description of the external electrical connections of SRA L radio equipment.

September 1999 .  31  6/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.

'8 IURQW YLHZ IXOO\ HTXLSSHG.SRA L External connections (*) Optional (**) Not present in (1+0) configuration )LJ  ± .

 31   3RZHU VXSSO\ FRQQHFWLRQV For the connection of the supply voltage -48 V/-64 V (delivered by the station batteries) of the SRA L equipment. 2). 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. Two connectors are available to allow the redundancy of the main power supply. identified by wording "PS1" and "PS2" (see Fig. September 1999 7/56 . is provided with two 3-poles sub-D-3W3 connectors. 1 and Fig. the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (see Fig. 3).

External connections SRA L 127( ± 7KH SRVLWLYH SROH RI WKH SRZHU VXSSO\ YROWDJH IURP EDWWHU\ %$77(5<.

(***) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/85.'8 LQQHU JURXQG LQ VXFK D ZD\ WR DOORZ WKH 2'8 SRZHU VXSSO\LQJ E\ PHDQV RI WKH . 597-524/61. )LJ  ± 36 DQG 36 SRZHU VXSSO\ FRQQHFWRUV 8/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1..86. LV QHFHVVDULO\ FRQQHFWHG WR . (**) When ODU with operating pre-heater..62). September 1999 . "Connector assembling". for mounting see doc.) FRD[LDO FDEOH RQO\ (*) These accessories are contained in the power supply accessories (332-005/28). provided with external connection accessories (597-524/10).

1. are available. According to the combination between system software and the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit P/N 612-404/02 and 612-404/04. according to IDU outfit (see Fig. 2): – – – – 75 Ohm interface: for unit P/N 612-404/02 (IDU P/N 732-101/01 only) * 120 Ohm interface: for unit P/N 612-404/04 (IDU P/N 732-101/01 only) * * 75/120 Ohm interface: for unit P/N 612-404/01 (IDU P/N 732-101/11 only) 75/120 Ohm interface: for unit P/N 612-404/11 (IDU P/N 732-101/11 only). 1 – 2 Mbit/s tributary numbering 6RIWZDUH YHUVLRQ 695  695  DQG IROORZLQJ RQHV  0ELWV 7ULEXWDU\ XQLW 31  RU .SRA L External connections   0ELWV WULEXWDU\ FRQQHFWLRQ For the 2 Mbit/s Tributary units. 1 and Fig. Tab. two different numberings of the tributaries to connector are possible. as set down in the following Tab. in alternative. 75 Ohm and 120 Ohm interfaces.

It cannot be associated to new orders (it is replaced by P/N 612-404/01) ** The unit has been replaced by P/N 612-404/01 for both spare parts and new orders. 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. Issue 009 and previous ones Issue 010 and following ones STANDARD numbering NOT STANDARD numbering NOT STANDARD numbering STANDARD numbering * The unit is available only as a replacement of units installed in field. September 1999 9/56 .

External connections SRA L   2KP  0ELWV WULEXWDU\ FRQQHFWLRQ 31 .

•.

)LJ  ±  2KP SOXJ DQG FRD[LDO FDEOH IRU  0ELWV WULEXWDULHV • The unit is available only as a replacement of units installed in field. subdivided into eight pairs TX and RX. September 1999 . the 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (see Fig. one pair for every 2 Mbit/s I/O tributary. "Connector assembling". It cannot be associated to new orders (it is replaced by P/N 612-404/01) 10/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. For the connection of 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributaries. (*) These connectors are included in the external connection accessories (597-524/10). The function of each coaxial connector is set down in Fig. (**) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/86). for mounting see doc. 1) is provided with sixteen 1. 4 shows the plug and the coaxial cable for 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s connectors. 5. Fig.4 coaxial connectors.0/2.

SRA L External connections $.

%. are associated with the four tributary streams of the second system. numbered 5 to 8. 6WDQGDUG QXPEHULQJ (*) For 2×(1+0) system configuration. the TX and RX connector pairs.

RX are the ones in opposite direction. September 1999 11/56 . )LJ  ±  2KP  0ELWV WULEXWDU\ LQWHUIDFH 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 1RW 6WDQGDUG QXPEHULQJ NB: TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment.

External connections SRA L   2KP  0ELWV WULEXWDU\ FRQQHFWLRQ 31 .

•.

(**) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/85). either for standard and not standard numbering. identified by wording "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" and "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8" (see Fig. 1) is provided with two 25-poles sub-D connectors. 3. Tab. provided with external connection accessories (597-524/10). 4 and Tab. According to the system configuration (1+0) or 2×(1+0) the channels associated with connector "5-8" can be numbered from 5 to 8 or from 1 to 4. 6. 6). September 1999 . the 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (see Fig. the pin-out is set down of "1-4" and "5-8" connectors. for mounting see doc. 12/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 5. For the connection of 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributares. (*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 25C (332-005/50). with reference to Fig. "Connector assembling". )LJ  ±  2KP  0ELWV WULEXWDU\ LQWHUIDFH • The unit has been replaced by P/N 612-404/01 for both spare parts and new orders. Tab. In Tab. 2.

2 – "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" connector pin-out (standard numbering) 3. 4 Ground of RX side of channel No. September 1999 13/56 . 1 .*1$/ Not utilized GND (optional) RX41-a TX41-a GND (optional) RX31-a TX31-a GND (optional) RX21-a TX21-a GND (optional) RX11-a TX11-a GND RX41-b TX41-b GND RX31-b TX31-b GND RX21-b TX21-b GND RX11-b TX11-b direction. 4 Positive side of RX pair of channel No.21 Ground of TX side of channel No. 2 Ground of RX side of channel No. 4 Negative side of TX pair of channel No. '(6&5.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 NB 6. 1 Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 4 Ground of TX side of channel No. RX are the ones in opposite 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 3 Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 1 Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 2 Negative side of TX pair of channel No.SRA L External connections Tab. 4 Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 2 Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 3 Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 3 Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 3 Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 1 Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 3 Ground of TX side of channel No.TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment. 4 Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 3 Ground of RX side of channel No. 1 Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 2 Ground of TX side of channel No. 2 Positive side of TX pair of channel No.37. 2 Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 1 Ground of RX side of channel No.

3 – "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8" connector pin-out (standard numbering) 3. 7 (3) TX32-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 7 (3) TX32-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 7 (3) RX32-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 8 (4) GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 8 (4) GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 5 (1) GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 8 (4) TX42-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 8 (4) TX42-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 5 (1) TX12-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 14/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 6 (2) RX22-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 6 (2) TX22-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 8 (4) RX42-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 6 (2) GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 7 (3) GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No.External connections SRA L Tab.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 NB  6. 8 (4) RX42-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No.*1$/ '(6&5. RX are the ones in opposite direction. 6 (2) RX22-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 6 (2) TX22-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 5 (1) RX12-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 5 (1) RX12-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. September 1999 . 6 (2) GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 5 (1) TX12-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No.37.21 Not utilized GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 7 (3) GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 7 (3) RX32-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 5 (1) TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment.

1 line 1 TX11-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 2 line 1 RX21-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 3 line 1 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. RX are the ones in opposite direction. 4 line 1 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 2 line 1 TX21-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 4 line 1 RX41-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No.*1$/ '(6&5. 1 line 1 GND Ground of RX side of channel No.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 NB  6. 1 line 1 RX11-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 3 line 1 TX31-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 1 line 1 TX11-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 2 line 1 TX21-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.37. 4 – "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" connector pin-out (not standard numbering) 3. September 1999 15/56 . 4 line 1 TX41-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 2 line 1 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 2 line 1 RX21-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 4 line 1 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 1 line 1 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No.21 Not utilized GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 3 line 1 TX31-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No.SRA L External connections Tab. 4 line 1 RX41-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 3 line 1 RX31-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 3 line 1 RX31-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 2 line 1 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 4 line 1 TX41-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 3 line 1 TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment. 1 line 1 RX11-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No.

1 line 2 TX12-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 4 line 2 RX42-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 3 line 2 TX32-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 16/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 4 line 2 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. September 1999 .1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 NB  6.37. 2 line 2 RX22-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 1 line 2 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 2 line 2 TX22-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 3 line 2 GND Ground of RX side of channel No. 3 line 2 TX32-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 1 line 2 RX12-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 2 line 2 GND Ground of RX side of channel No.*1$/ '(6&5. 4 line 2 TX42-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 4 line 2 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 5 – "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8" connector pin-out (not standard numbering) 3. 1 line 2 TX12-a Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 4 line 2 TX42-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 2 line 2 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. RX are the ones in opposite direction. 3 line 2 RX32-a Negative side of RX pair of channel No.21 Not utilized GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 1 line 2 GND (optional) Ground of TX side of channel No. 2 line 2 RX22-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 3 line 2 RX32-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No.External connections SRA L Tab. 4 line 2 RX42-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 2 line 2 TX22-b Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 3 line 2 TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment. 1 line 2 RX12-b Positive side of RX pair of channel No.

SRA L External connections   2KP  0ELWV WULEXWDU\ FRQQHFWLRQ 31 .

with reference to Fig. "Connector assembling". provided with external connection accessories (597-524/10). 8. identified by wording "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4" and "2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8" (see Fig. for mounting see doc. the 75/120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (see Fig. (**) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/85). (*) )LJ  ±  2KP  0ELWV WULEXWDU\ LQWHUIDFH 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 7. the pin-out is set down of "1-4" and "5-8" connectors. For the connection of 75/120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributares. These accessories are contained in the sub-D 25C (332-055/50). In Tab. 7 and Fig. September 1999 17/56 . 1) is provided with two 25-poles sub-D connectors. 6 and Tab. 7).

(**) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/86). for mounting see doc. September 1999 .External connections SRA L (*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 25C (332-055/50). "Connector assembling". )LJ  ±  2KP  0ELWV WULEXWDU\ LQWHUIDFH 18/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. provided with external connection accessories (597-524/10).

1 Not utilized RX ground of the channel No. 1 Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 4 TX coax coax hot side of the channel No. September 1999 19/56 . 4 Shield wire* RX coax hot side of the channel No. 4 Not utilized Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 2 Positive side of RX pair of channel No.21 Configuration Not utilized TX ground of the channel No. 3 TX coax hot side of the channel No. 2 TX ground of the channel No. 2 Negative side of RX pair of channel No.Used when cables other than P/N 106-041/23 are chosen. 2 Shield wire* RX coax hot side of the channel No.37. 6 – “2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 1-4”connector pin-out 3. 4 Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 2 Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 1 Not utilized Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 4 TX ground of the channel No.*1$/ ADAPT (IN)-(75 Ohm) ADAPT (IN)-(120 Ohm) TX-41-a-(75 Ohm) TX-41-a-(120 Ohm) RX-41-a-(75 Ohm) RX-41-a-(120 Ohm) TX-41-a-(75 Ohm) TX-41-a-(120 Ohm) TX-31-a-(75 Ohm) TX-31-a-(120 Ohm) RX-31-a-(75 Ohm) RX-31-a-(120 Ohm) TX-31-a-(75 Ohm) TX-31-a-(120 Ohm) TX-21-a-(75 Ohm) TX-21-a-(120 Ohm) RX-21-a-(75 Ohm) RX-21-a-(120 Ohm) TX-21-a-(75 Ohm) TX-21-a-(120 Ohm) TX-11-a-(75 Ohm) TX-11-a-(120 Ohm) RX-11-a-(75 Ohm) RX-11-a-(120 Ohm) TX-11-a-(75 Ohm) TX-11-a-(120 Ohm) GND RX-41-b-(75 Ohm) RX-41-b-(120 Ohm) TX-41-b-(75 Ohm) TX-41-b-(120 Ohm) GND RX-31-b-(75 Ohm) RX-31-b-(120 Ohm) TX-31-b-(75 Ohm) TX-31-b-(120 Ohm) GND RX-21-B-(75 Ohm) RX-21-B-(120 Ohm) TX-21-B-(75 Ohm) TX-21-B-(120 Ohm) GND RX-11-a-(75 Ohm) RX-11-a-(120 Ohm) TX-11-a-(75 Ohm) TX-11-a-(120 Ohm) '(6&5. 4 Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 1 TX coax hot side of the channel No. 2 Not utilized RX ground of the channel No. 3 Shield wire* RX coax hot side of the channel No. 4 Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 1 Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 1 TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment. 2 TX coax hot side of the channel No. 3 Not utilized RX ground of the channel No. RX are the ones in opposite direction * .SRA L External connections Tab. 2 Not utilized Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 3 Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 3 Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 1 Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 1 Shield wire* RX coax hot side of the channel No. 3 Not utilized Negative side of TX pair of channel No. which require single twisted pair shielding 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 3 TX ground of the channel No.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 NB  6. 4 Not utilized RX ground of the channel No. 3 Negative side of RX pair of channel No.

1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 NB  6. 8 Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 7 Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 8 TX hot side of the channel No.Used when cables other than P/N 106-041/23 are chosen. September 1999 . 6 Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 8 Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 7 Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 6 Not utilized RX ground of the channel No. 5 Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 7 – “2 Mbit/s I/O TRIBUTARIES 5-8” connector pin-out 3. 5 Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 8 TX ground of the channel No. 7 TX ground of the channel No. 5 TX hot side of the channel No. 6 Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 6 TX ground of the channel No. which require single twisted pair shielding 20/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 7 Not utilized RX ground of the channel No. 8 Not utilized RX ground of the channel No. 6 TX hot side of the channel No. 7 Shield wire* RX hot side of the channel No. 5 Not utilized RX ground of the channel No. 7 Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 6 Positive side of TX pair of channel No. 5 TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment.*1$/ ADAPT (IN)-(75 Ohm) ADAPT (IN)-(120 Ohm) TX-41-a-(75 Ohm) TX-41-a-(120 Ohm) RX-41-a-(75 Ohm) RX-41-a-(120 Ohm) TX-41-a-(75 Ohm) TX-41-a-(120 Ohm) TX-31-a-(75 Ohm) TX-31-a-(120 Ohm) RX-31-a-(75 Ohm) RX-31-a-(120 Ohm) TX-31-a-(75 Ohm) TX-31-a-(120 Ohm) TX-21-a-(75 Ohm) TX-21-a-(120 Ohm) RX-21-a-(75 Ohm) RX-21-a-(120 Ohm) TX-21-a-(75 Ohm) TX-21-a-(120 Ohm) TX-11-a-(75 Ohm) TX-11-a-(120 Ohm) RX-11-a-(75 Ohm) RX-11-a-(120 Ohm) TX-11-a-(75 Ohm) TX-11-a-(120 Ohm) GND RX-41-b-(75 Ohm) RX-41-b-(120 Ohm) TX-41-b-(75 Ohm) TX-41-b-(120 Ohm) GND RX-31-b-(75 Ohm) RX-31-b-(120 Ohm) TX-31-b-(75 Ohm) TX-31-b-(120 Ohm) GND RX-21-B-(75 Ohm) RX-21-B-(120 Ohm) TX-21-B-(75 Ohm) TX-21-B-(120 Ohm) GND RX-11-a-(75 Ohm) RX-11-a-(120 Ohm) TX-11-a-(75 Ohm) TX-11-a-(120 Ohm) '(6&5. 7 TX hot side of the channel No.External connections SRA L Tab. RX are the ones in opposite direction * . 7 Not utilized Negative side of TX pair of channel No.21 Configuration Not utilized TX ground of the channel No. 6 Not utilized Negative side of RX pair of channel No. 8 Not utilized Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 8 Shield wire* RX hot side of the channel No. 5 Not utilized Negative side of TX pair of channel No. 8 Positive side of RX pair of channel No. 6 Shield wire* RX hot side of the channel No. 5 Shield wire* RX hot side of the channel No.37. 5 Positive side of RX pair of channel No.

SRA L External connections   2KP × 0ELWV WULEXWDU\ FRQQHFWLRQ 31 .

identified by wording "2 Mbit/s 1-8" and "2 Mbit/s 9-16" (see Fig. For the connection of 75/120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s tributares. (**) This cable is not included in the installation materials. )LJ  ±  2KP  0ELWV WULEXWDU\ LQWHUIDFH 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 8 and Tab. for mounting see doc. 2) is provided with two 50-poles sub-D connectors. (*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 50C (332-055/57). 10. the 75/120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (see Fig. 9. the pin-out is set down of "1-8" and "9-16" connectors. 9 and Fig. with reference to Fig. "Connector assembling". September 1999 21/56 . 9) In Tab. provided with external connection accessories (597-524/10).

provided with external connection accessories (597-524/10). September 1999 . (**) This cable is not included in the installation materials. "Connector assembling".External connections SRA L (*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 50C (332-055/57). for mounting see doc. )LJ  ±  2KP  0ELWV WULEXWDU\ LQWHUIDFH 22/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.

40. RX are the ones in opposite direction 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 39. 35. 49 50 GND NB TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment. 46.SRA L External connections Tab. 44. 43. September 1999 23/56 . 38. 8 – CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 1-8 (120 Ohm) PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 ADAPT Floating 2 TX6-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 6 3 RX6-a Received tributary channel No 6 4 TX5-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 5 5 RX5-a Received tributary channel No 5 6 TX8-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 8 7 RX8-a Received tributary channel No 8 8 TX7-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 7 9 RX7-a Received tributary channel No 7 10 TX2-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 2 11 RX2-a Received tributary channel No 2 12 TX1-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 1 13 RX1-a Received tributary channel No 1 14 TX4-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 4 15 RX4-a Received tributary channel No 4 16 TX3-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 3 17 RX3-a Received tributary channel No 3 18 TX6-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 6 19 RX6-b Received tributary channel No 6 20 TX5-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 5 21 RX5-b Received tributary channel No 5 22 TX8-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 8 23 RX8-b Received tributary channel No 8 24 TX7-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 7 25 RX7-b Received tributary channel No 7 26 TX2-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 2 27 RX2-b Received tributary channel No 2 28 TX1-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 1 29 RX1-b Received tributary channel No 1 30 TX4-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 4 31 RX4-b Received tributary channel No 4 32 TX3-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 3 33 RX3-b Received tributary channel No 3 36. Not utilized (do not connect!!) 48. 37. 34. 45. 42. 47. 41.

48. 47. 42. 37. 46. 44. 9 – CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 9-16 (120 Ohm) PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 ADAPT Floating 2 TX14-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 14 3 RX14-a Received tributary channel No 14 4 TX13-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 13 5 RX13-a Received tributary channel No 13 6 TX16-a Trasmitted tributary channel No 16 7 RX16 -a Received tributary channel No 16 8 TX15 -a Trasmitted tributary channel No 15 9 RX15 -a Received tributary channel No 15 10 TX10 -a Trasmitted tributary channel No 10 11 RX10 -a Received tributary channel No 10 12 TX9 -a Trasmitted tributary channel No 9 13 RX9 -a Received tributary channel No 9 14 TX12 -a Trasmitted tributary channel No 12 15 RX12 -a Received tributary channel No 12 16 TX11 -a Trasmitted tributary channel No 11 17 RX11 -a Received tributary channel No 11 18 TX14 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 14 19 RX14 -b Received tributary channel No 14 20 TX13 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 13 21 RX13 -b Received tributary channel No 13 22 TX16 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 16 23 RX16 -b Received tributary channel No 16 24 TX15 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 15 25 RX15 -b Received tributary channel No 15 26 TX10 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 10 27 RX10 -b Received tributary channel No 10 28 TX9 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 9 29 RX9 -b Received tributary channel No 9 30 TX12 -b Trasmitted tributary channel No 12 31 RX12 -b Received tributary channel No 12 32 TX11-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 11 33 RX11-b Received tributary channel No 11 Not utilized (do not connect!!) 34. 38. 35. RX are the ones in opposite direction 24/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. September 1999 .External connections SRA L Tab. 39. 41. 43. 40. 36. 49 50 GND NB TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment.

signal 26 TX2-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 2 .SRA L External connections Tab.ground * 37 RX5-c Received tributary channel No 5 .signal 29 RX1-b Received tributary channel No 1 .ground * 42 TX2-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 2 . September 1999 25/56 .ground * 43 RX2-c Received tributary channel No 2 .ground * 48 TX3-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 3 .ground * 44 TX1-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 1 .signal 23 RX8-b Received tributary channel No 8 .signal 22 TX8-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 8 .ground * 47 RX4-c Received tributary channel No 4 .signal 25 RX7-b Received tributary channel No 7 .ground * 35 RX6-c Received tributary channel No 6 .ground * 45 RX1-c Received tributary channel No 1 .ground * 40 TX7-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 7 .signal 20 TX5-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 5 .signal 34 TX6-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 6 .signal 24 TX7-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 7 .signal 30 TX4-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 4 .signal 33 RX3-b Received tributary channel No 3 . RX are the ones in opposite direction * These pins must be wired to pin 50.signal 21 RX5-b Received tributary channel No 5 .ground * 39 RX8-c Received tributary channel No 8 .ground * 49 RX3-c Received tributary channel No 3 .ground * 41 RX7-c Received tributary channel No 7 .signal 27 RX2-b Received tributary channel No 2 .ground * 46 TX4-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 4 .ground * 50 GND NB TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment.signal 31 RX4-b Received tributary channel No 4 . 10 – CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributaries 1-8 (75 Ohm) PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 ADAPT Grounded cable * 2 to 17 Not utilized 18 TX6-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 6 . 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.signal 19 RX6-b Received tributary channel No 6 .signal 32 TX3-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 3 .signal 28 TX1-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 1 .ground * 38 TX8-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 8 .ground * 36 TX5-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 5 .

ground * 43 RX10-c Received tributary channel No 10 .ground * 35 RX14-c Received tributary channel No 14 .ground * 42 TX10-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 10 .ground * 45 RX9-c Received tributary channel No 9 .ground * 41 RX15-c Received tributary channel No 15 . 26/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.signal 28 TX9-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 9 .signal 32 TX11-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 11 .ground * 40 TX15-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 15 .signal 23 RX16-b Received tributary channel No 16 .signal 20 TX13-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 13 . September 1999 .signal 21 RX13-b Received tributary channel No 13 .ground * 37 RX13-c Received tributary channel No 13 .signal 31 RX12-b Received tributary channel No 12 .ground * 39 RX16-c Received tributary channel No 16 .ground * 44 TX9-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 9 .signal 27 RX10-b Received tributary channel No 10 .ground * 36 TX13-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 13 .signal 26 TX10-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 10 .ground * 47 RX12-c Received tributary channel No 12 . RX are the ones in opposite direction * These pins must be wired to pin 50.signal 24 TX15-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 15 .ground * 49 RX11-c Received tributary channel No 11 .signal 30 TX12-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 12 .signal 29 RX9-b Received tributary channel No 9 .signal 22 TX16-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 16 .ground * 50 GND NB TX are the input signals to SRA L equipment.ground * 46 TX12-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 12 .ground * 38 TX16-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 16 .ground * 48 TX11-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 11 .signal 34 TX14-c Trasmitted tributary channel No 14 .External connections SRA L Tab. 11 – CONNECTOR PIN IDENTIFICATION for tributarie s 9-16 (75 Ohm) PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 ADAPT Grounded cable * 2-17 Not utilized 18 TX14-b Trasmitted tributary channel No 14 .signal 33 RX11-b Received tributary channel No 11 .signal 19 RX14-b Received tributary channel No 14 .signal 25 RX15-b Received tributary channel No 15 .

SRA L External connections  3& FKDQQHO ) LQWHUIDFH.

FRQQHFWLRQ For the connection to an external PC. the Controller unit (see Fig.1 1 2 3 4 5 6. In Tab.5(&7. 11). which corresponds to the RS-232 standard one for DCE since the IDU is considered as DCE.*1$/ Not utilized PC-RXD PC-TXD PC-DTR GND 0($1. 12.1* Received Data Transmitted Data Data Transmit Ready Cable local ground connected to IDU internal ground Data Set Ready Request To Send Clear To Send '. 11. 1 and Fig. identified by wording "PC" (see Fig. Tab. the "PC" connector pin-out is set down. 12 – "PC" connector pin-out 3. 2) is provided with a 9-pole female sub-D connector. with reference to Fig.21 .

g. OUT IN IN 6 PC-DSR OUT 7 PC-RTS IN 8 PC-CTS OUT 9 Not utilized (*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e.. OUT means signal outgoing from IDU. )LJ  ± ) LQWHUIDFH 3&.

September 1999 27/56 .  56& 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.

the Controller unit (see Fig. 127( ± 7KH LQWHUFRQQHFWLRQ RQ 9 EXV IRU WKH &RQWUROOHU XQLW LV FDUULHG RXW E\ PHDQV RI D  2KP WZLVWHGSDLU FDEOH PD[ OHQJWK  P. 1 and Fig. identified by wording "V" (see Fig.External connections SRA L  9 EXV FRQQHFWLRQ For the connection of V bus. 12). 2) is provided with a 9-pole female sub-D connector.

13.5(&7. In Tab. Tab.1* '. with reference to Fig. 14 shows the available accessories for the execution of the connections on V bus. 12.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6.21 .*1$/ Not utilized Not utilized Not utilized Not utilized Not utilized Not utilized Not utilized V-D-a 0($1. 7KH 9 EXV FDEOH PXVW EH FRUUHFWO\ WHUPLQDWHG E\ WZR  2KP2KP WHUPLQDWLRQV PRXQWHG DW WKH WZR HQGV RI WKH FDEOH Fig. 13 – "V" connector pin-out 3. Fig. 13 shows an example of connections on V bus. the pin-out is set down of "V" connector of the Controller unit.

September 1999 . OUT means signal outgoing from IDU.. Negative side of balanced pair of IN/OUT bidirectional data line IN/OUT 9 V-D-b Positive side of balanced pair of bidirectional data line (*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to thw IDU: e.g. )LJ  ± 9 EXV LQWHUIDFH   NELWV 28/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.

14. For this interconnection cable (314-327/90) see Fig. 14. )LJ  ± 9 EXV LQWHUIDFH   NELWV FRQQHFWLRQV 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. September 1999 29/56 .SRA L External connections 1 2 3 For these termination 120 Ohm connectors (314-327/88) see Fig.

September 1999 . )LJ  ± 9 EXV LQWHUIDFH   NELWV DFFHVVRULHV 30/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.External connections SRA L (*) These accessories are included in the daisy-chain kit (597-524/09).

SRA L External connections  $ODUP FRQQHFWLRQ RSWLRQDO.

127( ± 7KH DODUP LQWHUIDFH LV DYDLODEOH RQO\ LI WKH . 15). female sub-D connector. 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. with reference to Fig. 2) (according to the unit installed in IDU) is provided with a 25-pole. September 1999 31/56 . 15. 14. identified by wording "ALARMS" (see Fig. the "ALARMS" connector pin-out is set down. 1 and Fig. In Tab.'8 LV HTXLSSHG ZLWK $ODUP XQLW RU $ODUP DQG )DQ XQLW For the alarm connection. the Alarm unit or the Alarm and Fan unit (see Fig.

trasmitted to SRA L remote equipment Cable local ground. 14 – "ALARMS" connector pin-out 3.External connections SRA L Tab.5(&7.1* Lack of battery redundancy Urgent alarm activation Activation of an equipment internal alarm Activation of an external alarm (EXT) Activation of an external alarm (ODU) Carried signal output 1.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 6.*1$/ ORBAT URG INT ALM-OUT1 ALM-OUT3 CEN-OUT1 CEN-OUT3 CEN-IN1 CEN-IN3 ALIM OFF MEM CALL -VAUX ANDBAT NURG IND ALM-OUT2 ALM-OUT4 CEN-OUT2 CEN-OUT4 CEN-IN2 CEN-IN4 GND RIEP 0($1. trasmitted to SRA L remote equipment Carried signal input 4. received by SRA L remote equipment Carried signal output 4. trasmitted to SRA L remote equipment Carried signal input 3.21 . connected to IDU internal ground Report of alarm general status of SRA L equipment (summary alarm) Positive side of the auxiliary battery '. received by SRA L remote equipment Carried signal input 1. received by SRA L remote equipment Carried signal output 3. received by SRA L remote equipment Carried signal input 2. trasmitted to SRA L remote equipment Report of general power supply switch status Report of IDU alarm storage push-button status Report of local telephone call presence Negative side of the auxiliary battery Lack of both main batteries Non urgent alarm activation Abnormal SRA L equipment operation Activation of an external alarm (TEST) Activation of an external alarm (IDU) Carried signal output 2.

g. OUT means signal outgoing from IDU. 32/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. (•) The pin can be configured using internal jumpers (see Presettings) in order to provide a +5V/100 mA power supply to the outside (fuse protected). OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN OUT OUT OUT IN OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT IN IN OUT IN (OUT) +VAUX (+5 V) (**) (•) (*) The signal transmission direction is referred to IDU: e. (**) The positive side of the auxiliary battery is connected to IDU internal ground.. September 1999 .

≥ 60 KOhm GND CONDITION = -3 to +2 Vdc. 0 to 200 Ohm 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.SRA L External connections ELETRICAL DEFINITIONS OUT = OUTPUT PORT OPEN CONDITION = ≥ 1MOhm to IDU GND GND CONDITION = ≤ 25 Ohm to IDU GND IN = INPUT PORT OPEN CONDITION = -3 to +2 Vdc. September 1999 33/56 .

September 1999 . provided with external connection accessories (597-524/10). 597-524/61. (**) This cable is included in the installation materials (597-523/85. "Connector assembling".External connections SRA L (*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 25C accessories (332-055/50). for mounting see doc... )LJ  ± 6\VWHP DODUP UHVWLWXWLRQ DQG H[WHUQDO DODUP LQSXW 34/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.62).86.

1 1 2 6. identified by wording "USER" (see Fig. 15.SRA L External connections  8VHU FKDQQHO FRQQHFWLRQ For the connection of the user channel. female. connected to IDU internal ground Positive side of counter-directional clock balanced pair associated with transmitted signal Positive side of codirectional clock balanced pair associated with transmitted signal Positive side of clock balanced pair associated with received signal Positive side of the transmitted data balanced pair '.*1$/ GND TXUCKCN-a 0($1.5(&7. with reference to Fig. the RTM unit (see Fig. 15 – "USER" connector pin-out 3. In Tab. 16).1* Cable local ground. 1 and Fig. sub-D connector. connected to IDU internal ground Negative side of counter-directional clock balanced pair associated with transmitted signal Negative side of codirectional clock balanced pair associated with transmitted signal Negative side of clock balanced pair associated with received signal Negative side of the transmitted data balanced pair Negative side of the received data balanced pair Ground connection for cable shield. the "USER" connector pin-out is set down.21 . Tab. 16. 2) is provided with a 15-pole.

53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. September 1999 35/56 . OUT means signal outgoing from IDU.. OUT 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 TXUCKCD-a RXUCK-a TXUD-a Not utilized RXUD-a GND (Shield) Not utilized TXUCKCN-b IN OUT IN OUT OUT 11 12 13 14 15 (*) TXUCKCD-b RXUCK-b TXUD-b Not utilized RXUD-b IN OUT IN Positive side of the received data balanced OUT pair The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e.g.

September 1999 .External connections SRA L (*) These accessories are contained in the BB accessories (332-055/49). "Connector assembling". provided with external connection accessories (597-524/10). for mounting see doc. (**) This cable is not included in the installation materials )LJ  ± 8VHU FKDQQHO LQWHUIDFH   NELWV 36/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.

SRA L External connections  ''' FKDQQHO FRQQHFWLRQ RSWLRQDO.

with reference to Fig. In Tab.1* Negative side of received data balanced pair Negative side of transmitted data balanced pair Negative side of clock balanced pair associated with transmitted data Negative side of clock balanced pair associated with received data Cable local ground. 127( ± 7KH ' FKDQQHO LV RQO\ DYDLODEOH VKRXOG . 17. equipped with optional D Channel For the connection of D channel (see Fig. the "D"/"D1"-"D2" connector pin-out is set down. Tab.'8 EH HTXLSSHG ZLWK 4$GDSWHU XQLW RU LQ DOWHUQDWLYH ZLWK ' &KDQQHO 'LVWULEXWRU XQLW VXLWDEO\ SUHVHW According to IDU equipment. 16. Fig.*1$/ D-DRX-a D-DTX-a D-CKTX-a D-CKRX-a GND D-DRX-b 0($1. 1 and Fig.5(&7. 1). the D channel connection concern: – – internal D channel: IDU equipped with optional Q-Adapter unit (see Fig. 2) two D channels defined "external": IDU Distributor unit (see Fig. 16 – "D"/"D1"-"D2" connector pin-out 3.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 6.21 . connected to IDU internal ground Positive side of received data balanced pair '. 17). 18 shows an example of connections by means of D/D1-D2 channel. there are available the 9-pole female sub-D connectors identified by "D" character (Q-Adapter unit) or "D1" and "D2" ones (D Channel Distributor unit).

g. OUT means signal outgoing from IDU. 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.. September 1999 37/56 . OUT (D1/D2-IN) IN (D1/D2-OUT) OUT (D1/D2-IN) OUT (D1/D2-IN) OUT (D1/D2-IN) 7 D-DTX-b Positive side of transmitted data balanced IN pair (D1/D2-OUT) 8 D-CKTX-b Positive side of clock balanced pair OUT associated with transmitted data (D1/D2-IN) 9 D-CKRX-b Positive side of clock balanced pair OUT associated with received data (D1/D2-IN) (*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e.

)LJ  ± ''' GDWD FKDQQHO LQWHUIDFH   NELWV 38/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. It is replaced with P/N 634-001/69.External connections SRA L (*) These accessories are contained in the sub-D 9C accessories (332-055/29). "Connector assembling". for mounting see doc. September 1999 . provided with external connection accessories (597-524/10). (**) This cable is not included in the installation materials (•) P/N 634-001/66 is no more available for both spare parts and for new orders.

SRA L External connections )LJ  ± ''' GDWD FKDQQHO LQWHUIDFH   NELWV FRQQHFWLRQV 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. September 1999 39/56 .

External connections SRA L  4 FKDQQHO FRQQHFWLRQ RSWLRQDO.

21 and 10BASE2. sub-D connector. For this reason.21)" (see Fig. 40/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 19) 10BASE2 interface: 50 Ohm. male. the "Q (X. 20). BNC coaxial connector. the Q-Adapter unit is provided with two connectors: – – X. In Tab. with reference to Fig. 17. identified by wording "Q(X.'8 EH HTXLSSHG ZLWK 4$GDSWHU XQLW The Q channel is available on two different electrical interfaces: X. 127( ± 7KH 4 FKDQQHO LV RQO\ DYDLODEOH VKRXOG .21 interface: 15-pole. identified by wording "Q(10BASE2)" (see Fig. September 1999 .21)" connector pin-out is set down. 18.

(**) This cable is not included in the installation materials )LJ  ± 4 .SRA L External connections (*) These accessories are contained in the Q-Adapter unit kit (597-523/39). "Connector assembling".. for mounting see doc. provided with external connection accessories (597-524/10).

September 1999 41/56 . LQWHUIDFH 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.

21 connection indication line Positive side of input clock balanced pair (common for transmission and reception) Positive side of clock balanced pair to transmitter input '.5(&7.21 protocol control line Negative side of received data balanced pair Negative side of balanced pair of X.External connections SRA L Tab.21)" connector pin-out 3.21 .1 6.21 connection indication line Negative side of input clock balanced pair (common for transmission and reception) Negative side of clock balanced pair to transmitter input IDU local ground Positive side of transmitted data balanced pair Positive side of balanced pair of X. 17 – "Q(X.*1$/ 1 Shield 2 T(A) 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 (*) C(A) R(A) I(A) S(A) X(A) (**) GND T(B) C(B) R(B) I(B) S(B) X(B) (**) Not connected 0($1.21 protocol control line Positive side of received data balanced pair Positive side of balanced pair of X.1* Cable shield: usually is left open Negative side of transmitted data balanced pair Negative side of balanced pair of X.

Pins 7 and 14 of X. 42/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.g. "Q(X. September 1999 . For X. the utilization of the byte synchronization line is not monitoring for X.21 standard. In any case.21 standard. It is the clock input to SRA L equipment from an external equipment which can be used by the Q-Adapter unit to synchronize the TX data stream in order to allow different transmission rates between the transmitted and received data.21 standard are usually dedicated to byte synchronization by means of B(A)-B(B) balanced pair.21)" connector can be configured through the Controller unit.. (**) The balanced pair X(A)/X(B) does not fully comply with X. OUT OUT IN IN IN IN OUT OUT IN IN IN IN The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e. OUT means signal outgoing from IDU.21 standard. the receiver and transmitter data transmission rate is equal and the common clock line is provided by S(A)-S(B) balanced pair.

"Connector assembling". provided with external connection accessories (597-524/10). for mounting see doc.SRA L External connections These accessories are contained in the Q-Adapter unit kit (597-523/39). (**) This cable is not included in the installation materials (*) )LJ  ± 4 %$6(.

LQWHUIDFH 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. September 1999 43/56 .

External connections SRA L  +DQGVHW FRQQHFWLRQ RSWLRQDO.

5(&7. Tab. 21. 18. EOW unit (see Fig. 2) is provided with a jack (see Fig.21 . In Tab. 1 and Fig.1* '. 21). the handset jack pin-out is set down. 127( ± 7KH VHUYLFH WHOHSKRQH FKDQQHO LV RQO\ DYDLODEOH VKRXOG . 18 – Handset jack pin-out 0($1. with reference to Fig.'8 EH HTXLSSHG ZLWK (2: XQLW For the connection of the handset.

OUT means signal outgoing from IDU.*1$/ T )LJ  ± 9LHZ RI KDQGVHW MDFN 44/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.g. 3. September 1999 . Red wire of the telephone twisted pair IN/OUT (NEUTRIX jack type) or battery positive line (A&C type jack) 2 R Black wire of the telephone twisted pair IN/OUT (NEUTRIX type jack) or battery negative line (A&C type jack) 3 S Shield connected to IDU internal ground (*) The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e.1 1 6..

SRA L External connections  (2: H[SDQVLRQ FKDQQHO FRQQHFWLRQ RSWLRQDO.

22). In Tab. 19 – "EOW EXP" connector pin-out 3.21 . 19. 127( ± 7KH VHUYLFH WHOHRKRQH FKDQQHO LV RQO\ DYDLODEOH VKRXOG . female µD connectors. identified by wording “EOW EXP” (see Fig. 22.5(&7. EOW unit (see Fig. 1 and Fig. Tab.1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 (*) 6. "EOW EXP" connector pin-out is set down. 2) is provided with two 9+9 (18)-pole. with reference to Fig.1* '.*1$/ 0($1.'8 EH HTXLSSHG ZLWK (2: XQLW For the EOW expansion channel. Two connectors are required to realize EOW channel daisy-chain structure.

2 IN Not connected Not connected R2BIN Wire "b" of input audio signal for exp. 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. don’t connect this wire. OUT means signal outgoing from IDU. 2 IN T2BOUT Wire "b" of output audio signal for exp. R1AIN Wire "a" of input audio signal for exp. 1 IN T1AOUT Wire "a" of output audio signal for exp. 1 OUT S1MIN (**) M input signal for exp. 2 OUT S2EOUT (**) E input signal for exp.. 1 OUT Not connected R2AIN Wire "a" of input audio signal for exp. 2 OUT Not connected The signal transmission direction is referred as to the IDU: e.g. 1 IN Not connected Not connected R1BIN Wire "b" of input audio signal for exp. 1 OUT S1EOUT (**) E input signal for exp. 2 OUT S2MIN (**) M input signal for exp. 1 IN T1BOUT Wire "b" of output audio signal for exp. 2 IN T2AOUT Wire "a" of output audio signal for exp. September 1999 45/56 . (**) For the use of keyboard handset with DMTF signaling.

)LJ  ± (2: H[SDQVLRQ FKDQQHO LQWHUIDFH 46/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. September 1999 .External connections SRA L (*) This EOW cable is included in the external connection accessories (597-524/10).

September 1999 47/56 .17(5&211(&7. )LJ  ± 9LHZ RI 2'8 H[WHUQDO FRQQHFWLRQ HOHPHQWV 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 23 shows the ODU external connection elements.'82'8 .) .21 Fig.SRA L External connections  .

External connections SRA L  $QWHQQD FRQQHFWLRQ For the wave-guide connection to the antenna. the ODU is provided with following flange/wave-guide:  *+] )ODQJH:DYHJXLGH W\SH UDR 84  *+] UDR 84  *+] UBR 100  *+] UBR 120 )ODQJH:DYHJXLGH W\SH  *+] UBR 140  *+] UBR 220  *+] UBR 220  *+] UBR 220  *+] UBR 320 127( ± .Q .

+RW6WDQGE\  DQWHQQD FRQILJXUDWLRQ WKH 2'8V DUH GLUHFWO\ FRQQHFWHG WR WKH DQWHQQD E\ PHDQV RI IOH[LEOH ZDYHJXLGHV RI .

+RW6WDQGE\ NLW 5) VSOLWWHU.

 48/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

20. the ODU is provided with a 19-pin. )LJ  ± )URQW YLHZ RI 32( FRQQHFWRU 127( ± 7KH 32( GHVFULEHG LQWR WKLV GRFXPHQW FDQ EH XVHG RQO\ ZLWK 2'8 ZLWK 31 . 23 and Fig.. $OO WKH RWKHU 2'8V 31 .% & DQG .SRA L External connections  32( FRQQHFWLRQ For the connection to POE.% &. In Tab.. the connector pin-out is set down. provided with protective cover.. 24). with reference to Fig. 23. hermetic circular connector (see Fig.

DUH QRW SURYLGHG ZLWK PXOWLSRODU FRQQHFWRU RU LI VXFK D FRQQHFWRU LV SUHVHQW IRU LQVWDQFH % & DQG  % &.

 LW LV QRW ZLUHG LQVLGH ZLWK WKH H[FHSWLRQ RI WKH ZLUH WKDW FDUULHV WKH $*& YROWDJH IRU WKH UHFHLYHG ILHOG %HVLGHV LW LV SUHVHQW D %1& WKDW DOORZV WKH $*& PHDVXUHPHQW RI WKH UHFHLYHG ILOHG 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. September 1999 49/56 .

5 V to -1 V = -90 to -20 dB aprox) Call signal from ODU operator to local IDU operator Call signal from IDU operator to local ODU operator Call signal local ODU/remote equipment Positive side of clock balanced pair associated with transmitted data (counter-directional interface) Positive side of clock balanced pair associated with received data (codirectional interface) Positive side of received data balanced pair (from IDU) '. 20 – POE connector pin-out 3.1 A B C 6.External connections SRA L Tab.21 .5(&7.*1$/ DTTX-P DTTX-N CKTX-N 0($1.1* Positive side of transmitted data balanced pair (to IDU) Negative side of transmitted data balanced pair (to IDU) Negative side of clock balanced pair associated with transmitted data (counter-directional interface) Negative side of clock balanced pair associated with received data (codirectional interface) Negative side of received data balanced pair (from IDU) +5 V supply voltage Negative side of POE power supply battery voltage Received signal level indication (-4.

September 1999 . IN IN OUT D CKRX-N OUT E F G H J K L M N P DTRX-N VCC Not connected -VB Not connected RX PWR IDU-CALL IDU-RING LOCAL CKTX-P OUT OUT OUT OUT IN OUT IN OUT R CKRX-P OUT S T U V (*) DTRX-P Not connected TXPWRALM GND OUT RF power alarm signaling OUT Connection to ODU general ground and positive side of battery voltage The signal transmission direction is referred as to the ODU: e. 50/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.. OUT means signal outgoing from ODU.g.

21 $&&(6625. Tab. September 1999 51/56 . 21.SRA L External connections  (. small. 23. Tab.'8 JURXQGLQJ $ODUPV  570  XQLW (continue) 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. 25 and Tab.WHP  &RG  422-060/16 422-027/31 422-027/35 422-030/92 422-059/16 147-016/02 216-21/469   422-030/83 422-062/61 422-059/16 147-016/02 216-21/469  422-030/92 422-062/86 422-059/16 314-327/91 147-016/04 216-21/469 'HVFULSWLRQ 3RZHU VXSSO\ DFFHVVRULHV Female connector Female contact Male contact Shield shell for 15C conn. 26. Locking screw Polyt. sack Label %% DFFHVVRULHV Shield shell for 25C conn. 22. sack Label 4W\  2 4 2 2 4 1 1   1 1 2 1 1  1 1 2 1 1 1 )XQFWLRQ 3RZHU VXSSO\   . Tab. 24.7(51$/ &211(&7. 25C male sub-connector Locking screw Polyt. 21 – External connection accessories P/N 597-524/10 . Tab. the SRA L equipment is provided with the accessories listed in Tab. sack Label *URXQG FDEOH 6XE' & DFFHVVRULHV Shield shell for 25C conn.(6 For the execution of the external connections. 25C male sub-connector Locking screw “OSM/N” coaxial tail Polyt. Tab. small.

21 – External connection accessories P/N 597-524/10 (continue) .WHP  31  'HVFULSWLRQ %% DFFHVVRULHV 4W\  )XQFWLRQ 570  XQLW RQO\  RU [ .External connections SRA L Tab.

RU $GG 'URS.

9C male sub-connector Locking screw Polyt. sack Label 2 2 2 2 2  2 2 2 1 1 ' &KDQQHO 'LVWULEXWRU XQLW (continue) 52/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.   422-030/92 422-062/86 422-059/16 314-327/91 147-016/04 216-21/469   Shield shell for 15C conn. 15C male sub-connector Locking screw "OSM/N" coaxial tail Polyt. sack Label 6XE' & DFFHVVRULHV Shield shell for 9C conn. 50C male sub-connector Locking screw Polyt. sack Label (2: FDEOH 6XE' & DFFHVVRULHV 1 1 2 1 1 1   (2: XQLW 7ULE [  0ELWV VWUHDPV  422-030/83 422-062/61 422-059/16 147-016/02 216-21/469  Shield shell for 25C conn. 25C male sub-connector Locking screw Polyt. September 1999 . sack Label 6XE' & DFFHVVRULHV 2 2 2 2 2  7ULE [  0ELWV VWUHDPV  422-058/81 422-062/89 422-059/16 147-016/13 216-21/469  422-030/91 422-062/60 422-059/16 147-016/13 216-21/469 Shield shell for 50C conn.

BNC adapter BNC coax. 50 Ohm 50 Ohm BNC flyng plug Box .SRA L External connections Tab.QVWDOODWLRQ NLW ø 2. 10-52 PIR/15-25 LEG/320-39 BM/80-631 BM80649 RIB/5732-6 22 RIB/125-6 RIB/175-6 RIB/5588-6 RIB/5739-1 040 RIB/125-10 RIB/175-10 RIB/5588-1 0 LEG/31916 TEC/402 PL/40   'HVFULSWLRQ .2 shrink tubing PVC adhes tape Cable TIE for internal inst.6-5. 9C male sub-connector Locking screw T coax.4 tube term. ø 6. 15C female sub-connector Locking screw Shield shell for 9C conn.WHP  31  422-030/92 422-062/64 422-059/16 422-030/91 422-062/60 422-059/16 421-009/93 421-009/96 421-009/21 147-016/13  MOD. for 25 mm2 Inox steel screw M6×22 Inox steel washer ø 6 Inox steel spring washer ø 6 Inox steel hex stail M6 Inox steel screw M10×40 Inox steel washer ø 10 Inox steel spring washer ø 10 Inox steel hex stail M10 Cable TIE for external inst. for 25 mm2 ø 13 tube term.2 FDEOH IL[LQJ. 21 – External connection accessories P/N 597-524/10 (continue) .LW IRU 4$GDSWHU XQLW Shield shell for 15C conn. Adhes tape for coaxial cable Antistatic bacs &RD[LDO FDEOH IL[LQJ EUDFNHW %R[ 4W<  1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 1  1m 1 50 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 50 1 1   )XQFWLRQ 4$GDSWHU XQLW    . terminat.

53-001A8-201/E Issue 1. September 1999 53/56 .

September 1999 . 2. 3 1. 22 – V bus daisy-chain kit P/N 597-524/09 . 23 – Andrew coaxial cable and accessories . 2 The Andrew and Kabelmetal coaxial cable are alternative to each other.WHP 1 2 31 104-009/33 597-523/94 421-008/24 421-008/23 333-031/80 1) 2) 3) 'HVFULSWLRQ CF 1/4 Cu2Y . 3 1. 2 Tab. 54/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.50 Ohm coaxial cable 1/4” coaxial cable accessories N type coaxial plug L1PNM-H N 90° N type coaxial plug L1PNR-HC 223158 Grounding Kit 4W\ m 1 1 1 2 1RWHV 1. 24 – RFS-Kabelmetal coaxial cable and accessories . The quantities refer to single IDU/ODU Connection The length of one IDU/ODU connection is at the maximum 400 m (standard delivery is 30 m).50 Ohm coaxial cable 1/4” coaxial cable accessories N type coaxial plug 155 010 35 90° N type coaxial plug L1PNR-HC 223158 Grounding Kit 4W\ m 1 1 1 2 1RWHV 1.WHP 1 2 31 314-327/79 597-523/94 421-008/86 421-008/84 333-032/15 'HVFULSWLRQ CF 1/4” LDF1RN .WHP 1 2 3 4 31 314-327/88 314-327/89 314-327/90 350-001/08 'HVFULSWLRQ 120 Ohm termination connector (male) 120 Ohm termination connector (female) Interconnection cable (male/female/male) Box 4W\ 1 1 1 1 Tab.External connections SRA L Tab. 2.

To be used for the connections from the alarms distributor to "ALARMS" connectors available on the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (standard L = 15 m for SRA L).8x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-523/85) . IF coaxial cable and ODU (standard L = 20 m for SRA L). To be used for the connections from the 120 Ohm .5 mm bipolar shielded cable YE-GR PVC 1×25 mm2 grounding cable 8 pair double shield cable 13 pair double shield cable 2 1RWHV 1 2 3 4 2) 3) 4) To be used for the connections from the power supply distributor to "PS1" and "PS2" connectors available on the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for SRA L).SRA L External connections Tab. To be used for the connections from the alarms distributor to "ALARMS" connectors available on the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (standard L = 15 m for SRA L).9) 13 pair double shield cable 1RWHV 1 2 3 4 2) 3) 4) To be used for the connections from the power supply distributor to "PS1" and "PS2" connectors available on the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for SRA L).2 Mbit/s streams distributor to "1"-"4" and "5"-"8" connectors available on the 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for SRA L).2 Mbit/s streams distributor to "1"-"8" connectors available on the 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for SRA L). Tab.WHP 1 2 3 4 1) 31 105-013/02 103-037/60 104-041/23 106-001/62 'HVFULSWLRQ 2×1. 26 – 75 Ohm electrical material set .WHP 1 2 3 4 1) 31 105-013/02 103-037/60 104-041/22 106-001/62 'HVFULSWLRQ 2×1. To be used for the connections from the station earthing system to rack. 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.4-1.5 mm2 bipolar shielded cable YE-GR PVC 1×25 mm2 grounding cable 75 Ohm coaxial cable TCE 2HH2 8(0. September 1999 55/56 . To be used for the connections from the station earthing system to rack. To be used for the connections from the 75 Ohm .8x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-523/86) . 25 – 120 Ohm electrical material set . IF coaxial cable and ODU (standard L = 20 m for SRA L).

± . To be used for the connections from the station earthing system to rack.16x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-524/61) .External connections SRA L Tab.2 Mbit/s streams distributor to "1"-"8" and "9"-"16" connectors available on the 120 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for SRA L). 27 – 120 Ohm electrical material set . To be used for the connections from the alarms distributor to "ALARMS" connectors available on the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (standard L = 15 m for SRA L). IF coaxial cable and ODU (standard L = 20 m for SRA L).WHP 1 2 3 4 1) 31 105-013/02 103-037/60 (*) 106-001/62 'HVFULSWLRQ 2×1. To be used for the connections from the 120 Ohm .5 mm bipolar shielded cable YE-GR PVC 1×25 mm2 grounding cable 16 pair double shield cable 13 pair double shield cable 2 1RWHV 1 2 3 4 2) 3) 4) To be used for the connections from the power supply distributor to "PS1" and "PS2" connectors available on the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for SRA L).

0& 4. 28 – 75 Ohm electrical material set . 31 .4-1.9) 13 pair double shield cable 1RWHV 1 2 3 4 2) 3) 4) To be used for the connections from the power supply distributor to "PS1" and "PS2" connectors available on the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for SRA L).16x2 Mbit/s (P/N 597-524/62) .3$ 127( Tab.WHP 1 2 3 4 1) 31 105-013/02 103-037/60 104-041/23 106-001/62 'HVFULSWLRQ 2×1. September 1999 . IF coaxial cable and ODU (standard L = 20 m for SRA L).5 mm2 bipolar shielded cable YE-GR PVC 1×25 mm2 grounding cable 75 Ohm coaxial cable TCE 2HH2 16 (0. To be used for the connections from the alarms distributor to "ALARMS" connectors available on the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (standard L = 15 m for SRA L). To be used for the connections from the station earthing system to rack.2 Mbit/s streams distributor to "1"-"8" connectors available on the 75 Ohm 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit (standard L = 2×15 m for SRA L). To be used for the connections from the 75 Ohm . FINE 56/56 53-001A8-201/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Connector assembling 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .Connector assembling SRA L BLANK PAGE 2/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.

. . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 KABELMETAL COAXIAL N-PLUG (421-008/24) AND COAXIAL N90°. .86.89) WITH 75 Ohm MULTICOAXIAL CABLE (104-102/22. . .61. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/62 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 KABELMETAL GROUNDING KIT (333-031/80) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS .64. . . . 5 SHIELD SHELL 9-15-25-50 PIN CONNECTOR (422-030/90-93) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . .. . . . . 14 METALLIC SHELL (422-030/83 and 422-058/81) . . . .23) . . . . . . . . . 34 COAXIAL PLUG L1PNM-H (421-008/86) . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 422-027/31-35) WITH BIPOLAR SHIELDED 2x1. . . . . . . . . . . 10 SUB-D 9-15-25-50 CONTACTS CONNECTOR (422-062/60. . . . . . . . . . . .86. . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 BNC COAXIAL PLUG (421-009/21) FOR ETH 3120 50 OHM COAXIAL CABLE (104-013/01) .50 CONTACTS CONNECTOR (422-062/61. . . . . . . . 5 SELF-LOCKING COAXIAL PLUG (421-015/60) FOR 75 OHM COAXIAL CABLE (104-102/21-22) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . .89) WITH MULTIPAIRS CABLE (METALLIC SHELL) . .SRA L Connector assembling Contents 1 2 3 4 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 31 ANDREW COAXIAL 90° N-PLUG (421-008/84) MOUNTING INSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . 51 CRIMP TOOL (323-003/19) FOR POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR (422-060/16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 SUB-D 25.. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 ANDREW GROUNDING KIT (333-032/15) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 mmq POWER SUPPLY CABLE (105-013/02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SHIELD SHELL 9-15-25-50 PIN CONNECTOR (422-062/60. . . . . . . . 422-027/31-35) .89) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS WITH MULTIPAIRS CABLE . . .(421-008/23) PLUG ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR (422-060/16. . . . . . . . . . . .64. . . . . . .61.

. . . . . . . . .Connector assembling SRA L Illustrations Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Andrew coaxial 90° N-plug. . . 5 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 . . . . . . . . . 16 Power supply connector. . . . . . . . . . 2 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Andrew coaxial N-plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Fig. . . . . . . 20 Kabelmetal coaxial plugs . 3 Fig. . . . . . . . 6 Dimensions of 9-15-25-50 contact connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Dimensions of metallic shell. . . . . . . . 7 Dimensions of 9-15-25-50 contact connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Fig. . . . . . 4 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Andrew grounding kit . . . . . . . 51 4/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. . .

arrage the braid on plug body and push the ferrule until it rests against the plug and crimp by crimping tool. 2.SRA L Connector assembling 1 GENERAL This document provides useful information for the installation personnel about the cable installation and the connector assembling. Introduce the dielectric central conductor until resting. Insert the ferrule over the cable and cut the cable sheat. Introduce the central onductor in the coaxial plug until the central conductor blocks. 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. dielectric and central conductor accoring to the measurement indicated here below. crimp by crimping tool. September 1999 5/62 . braid. 3. 2 SELF-LOCKING COAXIAL PLUG (421-015/60) FOR 75 OHM COAXIAL CABLE (104-102/21-22) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS PROCEDURE: 1.

52 67.41 C 25 33. B 31.62 53. PIN CONTACT 9 15 25 50 DIMENSIONS max. 1 – Dimensions of 9-15-25-50 contact connectors 6/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. F 8 9 11 14.9 P/N 422-030/91 422-030/92 422-030/93 422-030/90 Fig.3 47 61. 1 shows the connector dimensions.4 44.3 37 51.5 max.1 D 16.3 23.3 E 23.30 39. September 1999 .5 30.Connector assembling SRA L 3 SHIELD SHELL 9-15-25-50 PIN CONNECTOR (422-030/90-93) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS Fig. A 15 15 15 19 max.

53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Fit both (cable and connector) into the shell and position the cable ring in its appropriate seat. September 1999 7/62 .SRA L Connector assembling PROCEDURE: 1.

Each shell is equipped with two different cable clamps. 4-6 6-8 5-8 8-10 5-8.5 (*) A = small B = large 8/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Choose the more suitable for the size of the cable and discard the other one in accordance with the table below. September 1999 .Connector assembling SRA L 2. Fix the cable clamp with the three screws supplied.5 8. P/N SHELL 422-030/91 422-030/92 422-030/93 422-030/90 PIN CONTACT 9 15 25 50 CABLE CLAMP (*) A B A B A B A B CABLE DIAM.5-11 9-1 12-14.

SRA L Connector assembling 3. Fit the two fixing screws in the appropriate seats of the shell. 4. 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Close the two halves of the shell by pressing them together with a hand press. September 1999 9/62 .

. 2. September 1999 .. 10/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.89) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS WITH MULTIPAIRS CABLE PROCEDURE: 1. 3.64. Place the contact ring against the contact bush. Remove the sheat to a lenght suitable for the dimensions of the ferrule. 4.. Position the cable-ring at the distance shown in the figure. Insert the cable throught the cable-ring and through the contact bush.Connector assembling SRA L 4 SHIELD SHELL 9-15-25-50 PIN CONNECTOR (422-062/60..61.86.

7. Connect the cable to the connector. 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.SRA L Connector assembling 5. September 1999 11/62 . For the double shield cable. Fit both (cable and connector) into the shell and position the cable ring in its appropriate seat. Cut the metal ribbon to completely free the twisted pairs. 6. cut the metal braid and the ground wire to a lenght of 9/10 mm and bend them back the contact ring.

Connector assembling SRA L 5 SUB-D 9-15-25-50 CONTACTS CONNECTOR (422-062/60.64. 12/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Position the cable-ring at the distance shown in the figure.89) WITH MULTIPAIRS CABLE (METALLIC SHELL) PROCEDURE: 1.. Insert the cable throught the cable-ring. cut the metal braid and the ground wire to a lenght of 9/10 mm and bend them back the contact ring. For the double shield cable.. 2. 3.86.. 4.61. Remove the sheat to a lenght suitable for the dimensions of the ferrule. Cut the metal ribbon to completely free the twisted pairs.. September 1999 .

SRA L Connector assembling 5. Fit both (cable and connector) into the shell and position the cable ring in its appropriate seat. Connect the cable to the connector. 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. 6. September 1999 13/62 .

89) WITH 75 Ohm MULTICOAXIAL CABLE (104-102/22. the DIELECTRIC and the CENTRAL CONDUCTOR of all the eight single cables according to the measures pointed out here below.50 CONTACTS CONNECTOR (422-062/61..Connector assembling SRA L 6 SUB-D 25. 2. September 1999 . Trim the SHEATH. as pointed out here below.. * = Dimension to be used for the 8 coax cable (104-102/22) ** = Dimension to be used for the 16 coax cable (104-102/23) 14/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Heat the heatshrink sleeve ensuring that it adheres well on the inner and outer sheaths. the BRAID.23) PROCEDURE: 1. 3. Insert the HEATSHRINK SLEEVE with length 40 mm on the cable and trim the OUTER SHEATH according to the measures pointed out here below.. Position the HEATSHRINK SLEEVE on the OUTER SHEATH and on the INNER ones.

SRA L Connector assembling 4. 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. as pointed out at point 7. Pay maximum attention to connect all the BRAIDS of the single cables to the cable clamp of the shell itself. Insert the cable and the connector into the shielded shell. Use a piece of the central conductor to execute the ground inner connections. September 1999 15/62 . Connect the cable to the connector. 5.

1 C ±0.8 D ±0.4 18.Connector assembling SRA L 7 METALLIC SHELL (422-030/83 and 422-058/81) Fig.5 F Max 11.3 15.3 28 42 B ±0.3 45 48 E ±0. P/N 422-030/83 422-058/81 CONTACTS N° 25 50 A ±0.3 54 67. 2 shows the connector dimensions.3 47 61. 2 – Dimensions of metallic shell 16/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.3 15 Fig. September 1999 .

53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Fit both (cable and connector) into the shell and position the cable ring in its appropriate seat. September 1999 17/62 . Fix the CABLE CLAMP with the two screws supplied.SRA L Connector assembling PROCEDURE: 1. 2.

Close the two HALVES OF THE SHELL by pressing them together with a hand press 18/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.Connector assembling SRA L 3. Fit the two FIXING SCREWS in the appropriate seats of the shell. September 1999 . 4.

September 1999 19/62 .SRA L Connector assembling 5. Fix the two halves of the shell inserting and screwing a screw on both sides into the proper available seats 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.

422-027/31-35) WITH BIPOLAR SHIELDED 2x1. 3 – Power supply connector 20/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. 3 shows the parts composing the power supply connector. September 1999 .Connector assembling SRA L 8 POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR (422-060/16. Fig.5 mmq POWER SUPPLY CABLE (105-013/02) Fig.

SRA L Connector assembling PROCEDURE: 1. Remove the sheat to a lenght suitable for the dimensions of the ferrule. September 1999 21/62 . Position the cable-ring at the distance shown in the figure. 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Insert the cable throught the cable-ring and through the contact bush. Place the contact ring against the contact bush. 4. 3. 2.

September 1999 . 7.Connector assembling SRA L 5. 6. Insert the contact with the 1-brand cable set to pos. 22/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Unsheath the two wires as shown on the drawing. “A3”. 8. Insert the two unsheathed wires into the female contacts (422-027/31) as shown on the drawing and crimp them with the crimp tool. (323-003/15). as certain that the contacts are securely snap-fastened into position. “A1” and the contact with the 2-brand cable set to pos. Cut the METAL BRAID to a length of 9-10 mm and bend it back to cover the CONTACT RING.

10. cable and connector) into the shielded shell (see par. “A2”.e. Insert the male contact (422-027/35) with no wire crimped into pos. 3). September 1999 23/62 . 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Insert the whole (i.SRA L Connector assembling 9.

Connector assembling SRA L 9 BNC COAXIAL PLUG (421-009/21) FOR ETH 3120 50 OHM COAXIAL CABLE (104-013/01) 24/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

Braid. arrange the Braid on Plug Body and push the Ferrule until it rests against the plug and crimp by Crimp Tool (236-100/15) 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Introduce the dielectric Central Conductor until resting. Introduce the Central Conductor in the BNC Coaxial Plug until the central Conductor blocks.SRA L Connector assembling PROCEDURE: 1. Insert the Ferrule over the cable and cut the cable Sheath. crimp by Crimp Tool (236-100/15) 3. September 1999 25/62 . Dielectric and Central Conductor according to the measurements indicated here below 2.

4 shows the parts composing the Kabelmetal coaxial N/N90° plugs.Connector assembling SRA L 10 KABELMETAL COAXIAL N-PLUG (421-008/24) AND COAXIAL N90°(421-008/23) PLUG ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS Fig. Fig. 4 – Kabelmetal coaxial plugs 26/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

SRA L Connector assembling PROCEDURE: 1. 4. Trim the cable in a right angle to the cable longitudinal axis. 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Insert the O-RING (1) on the cable. Insert the CABLE-CLAMP (2) on the cable until to reach the perfect contact on the SHEATH and on the O-RING (1). 3. Let the CABLE-CLAMP lightly sliding in the opposite direction of the insertion. September 1999 27/62 . Position it into the last valley of the corrugated shield. Trim the cable SHEATH according to the measure pointed out here below. **Warning** Do not strain the cable during the trimming operation. 2. until the CLAMPING TEETH enter the first corrugation valley. 5.

check that the ending part of the not removed corrugated shield creates a supporting lip on the clamping teeth. 7. Remove the visible CORRUGATED SHIELD by means of cutting nippers and pliers. to reach directly the correct trimming of the shield. 28/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. 8. September 1999 . Apply a rotation force through wich it is possible using as a reference the connector CABLE-CLAMP and paying the maximum attention. After having removed the visible corrugated shield.Connector assembling SRA L 6. Let the CABLE-CLAMP lightly sliding over the CLAMPING TEETH until to reach the contact.

Trim the CENTRAL CONDUCTOR according to the measure pointed out here below. Apply a rotation force by means of cutting nippers and chamfer the trimming edge by means of a file. 11. September 1999 29/62 . 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. 10.SRA L Connector assembling 9. Insert the CENTRAL BODY (3) until to reach the contact with the CABLE-CLAMP (2). Remove the visible DIELECTRIC and if it is necessary clean the central conductor from dielectric residues.

wrapping the PVC ADHES TAPE over the ADHES TAPE FOR COAXIAL CABLE. Pay particular **ATTENTION** to keep at rest the CENTRAL BODY (3) and to let rotating the CABLE-CLAMP (2) only. September 1999 . 14. and besides to put on at least by a half tape width. 30/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. To repeat the operation of item "13" with the PVC ADHES TAPE (PIR/15-25) supplied with INSTALLATION KIT (314-205/76). To tape the 90° N COAXIAL PLUG and the COAXIAL CABLE with the ADHES TAPE FOR COAXIAL. CABLE (TEC/402) supplied with INSTALLATION KIT (314-205/76). in advance take care to heat and to tight the ADHES TAPE FOR COAXIAL CABLE. in order to assure a complete tightly.Connector assembling SRA L 12. 13. First of all wrap the ADHES TAPE FOR COAXIAL CABLE to the CABLE. Screw together the CENTRAL BODY (3) and the CABLE-CLAMP (2) (The tightening torque is about 8 Nm).

September 1999 31/62 .Butyl sealing compound 4 .Self bonding tape 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.Earthing clamp 2 .Clamp lining 3 .SRA L Connector assembling 11 KABELMETAL GROUNDING KIT (333-031/80) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS THE KIT CONTAINS : 1 .

Clean the plastic jacket at the desired earthing point and cut out a strip of approx 26 mm. 2. tight to the cable and earthing clamp. Press carefully all compound edges together. 32/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.Connector assembling SRA L PROCEDURE: 1. ATTENTION ! Install EARTHING KIT only the cable runs straight. Remove both layers of paper from the butyl sealing compound (3) and form it equilateral around the cable and earthing clamp. Push the earthing clamp (1) over the linings and screw togheter. September 1999 . Push the clamp lining (2) on the outer conductor. 3.

Wrap the two 8 cm strips in a parallel overlapping fashion over the compound on cable and earthing outlet. Fold on of the overlapping edges in front of and the other one behind the earthing outlet. around the earthing outlet. Press and farm it tightly to cable and earthing clamp. 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. wrap now the 5 cm strip overlapping onto the compound edge.SRA L Connector assembling 4. 6. Cut from the self bonding tape (4) two strips of each 8 cm and one strip of 5 cm. Wrap thigt the remaining tape over the uncovered part of the compound and make sure that the tape overlapps the compound on the cable at least by a half tape width. 5. September 1999 33/62 .

O-ring E .Connector B . September 1999 .Heat-shrink tube F . 5 shows the parts composing the Andrew coaxial 90° N-plug.O-ring D .Trim gauge Fig. 5 – Andrew coaxial 90° N-plug 34/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.Adhesive G . A .Connector assembling SRA L 12 ANDREW COAXIAL 90° N-PLUG (421-008/84) MOUNTING INSTRUCTION Fig.Clamping nut C .

Cut the CABLE JACKET for a lenght of 32 mm 3. September 1999 35/62 . Insert on the shield the O-RING (C). apply on the ring the SILICONE GREASE (F). Cut the cable into the CORRUGATION VALLEY 2. Do not touch the grease with fingers 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.SRA L Connector assembling PROCEDURE: 1.

Cut. by means of a FINE-TOOTHED SAW. September 1999 .Connector assembling SRA L 4. Insert the CLAMPING NUT (B) on the cable till to touch the O-RING (C) 5. THE METALLIC SHIELD at the base of the CLAMPING NUT. 36/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.

SRA L Connector assembling 6. 7. September 1999 37/62 . In the same position described at the preceding point engrave the DIELECTRIC MATERIAL by means of a cutter and remove it. Insert the tip of a knife between the FOAM and the OUTER CONDUCTOR of the cable and separate them so that the OUTER CONDUCTOR touch the CLAMPING NUT 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.

Remove the TRIM GAUGE and deburr the INNER CONDUCTOR with a file and let at sight a part of it with lenght 9mm 38/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Cut the INNER CONDUCTOR 9. Place the TRIM GAUGE (G) over the INNER CONDUCTOR and against the CLAMPING NUT. September 1999 .Connector assembling SRA L 8.

Insert the OUTER BODY (A) on the CLAMPING NUT (B).SRA L Connector assembling 10. September 1999 39/62 . 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Lubricate the O-RING by means of the SILICONE (F) and insert the O-RING on the CLAMPING NUT. Do not touch the SILICONE with fingers. 11.

September 1999 .Connector assembling SRA L 12. Keeping stopped the 1/2" WRENCH on the CLAMPING NUT. rotate clockwise the 9/16 WRENCH on the OUTER BODY (Force = 5-6 Nm) 40/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.

14.SRA L Connector assembling 13. in advance take care to heat and to tight the ADHES TAPE FOR COAXIAL CONNECTOR. 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. First of all wrap the ADHES TAPE FOR COAXIAL CONNECTOR to the CABLE. To repeat the operation of item "13" with the PVC ADHES TAPE (PIR/15-25) supplied with Installation Kit (314-205/76). wrapping the PVC ADHES TAPE over the ADHES TAPE for COAXIAL CONNECTOR . and besides to put on at least by a half tape width. in order to assure a complete tightly. To tape the 90° N-PLUG and the COAXIAL CABLE with the ADHES TAPE FOR COAXIAL CONNECTOR (TEC/402) supplied with INSTALLATION KIT (314-205/76). September 1999 41/62 .

O-ring E .Connector assembling SRA L 13 COAXIAL PLUG L1PNM-H (421-008/86) Fig.Trim gauge Fig.Heat-shrink tube F . A .Connector B .Clamping nut C .O-ring D . September 1999 .Adhesive G . 6 shows the parts composing the coaxial N-plug. 6 – Andrew coaxial N-plug 42/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.

Cut the CABLE JACKET for a lenght of 32 mm 3. September 1999 43/62 . Insert on the shield the O-RING (C) apply on the ring the SILICONE GREASE (F) Do not touch the grease with fingers 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Cut the cable into the CORRUGATION VALLEY 2.SRA L Connector assembling PROCEDURE: 1.

September 1999 . 44/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.Connector assembling SRA L 4. THE METALLIC SHIELD at the base of the CLAMPING NUT. Cut. by means of a FINE-TOOTHED SAW. Insert the CLAMPING NUT (B) on the cable till to touch the O-RING (C) 5.

In the same position described at the preceding point engrave the DIELECTRIC MATERIAL by means of a cutter and remove it 7. Insert the tip of a knife between the FOAM and the OUTER CONDUCTOR of the cable and separate them so that the OUTER CONDUCTOR touch the CLAMPING NUT 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.SRA L Connector assembling 6. September 1999 45/62 .

Remove the TRIM GAUGE and deburr the INNER CONDUCTOR with a file 46/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.Connector assembling SRA L 8. September 1999 . Place the TRIM GAUGE (G) over the INNER CONDUCTOR and against the CLAMP NUT. Cut the INNER CONDUCTOR 9.

September 1999 47/62 . Slide the INNER CONNECTOR onto the CONDUCTOR 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.SRA L Connector assembling 10.

Solder the INNER CONNECTOR in place using the solder hole provided 48/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. September 1999 . Insert the SPACING GAUGE (E) to properly position the INNER CONNECTOR during assembly 12.Connector assembling SRA L 11.

Add the bigger O-RING (D) to the CLAMPING NUT.SRA L Connector assembling 13. Apply a thin coating of silicone grease to the outer surface of the O-RING. Keep all the CLAMPING NUT threads free of grease. 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Shave off any excess solder or flux residue with a knife or buff it carefully 14. September 1999 49/62 .

Connector assembling SRA L 15. September 1999 . Hold the CLAMPING NUT and turn only the OUTER BODY (connector) (Force = 5.5 Nm) 50/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.4 ± 0. Thread the OUTER BODY (A) onto the CLAMPING NUT (B).

Cable ties I .SRA L Connector assembling 14 ANDREW GROUNDING KIT ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTIONS Fig.Conductive grease Fig.Flat washer F .Lock washer G .Butyl rubber tape C .Nut E . (333-032/15) A . 7 shows the parts composing the Andrew grounding kit. 7 – Andrew grounding kit 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.Bolt D .Electrical tape H . September 1999 51/62 .Ground wire B .

). position the ground strap on the transmission line and mark the location. Remove 63 mm of jacket for attachment of the ground strap. September 1999 . etc. Then.Connector assembling SRA L PROCEDURE: 1. 52/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Position the ground wire terminal (if attached) to the attachment point (bus bar.

SRA L Connector assembling 2. September 1999 53/62 . 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Cut off a piece of butyl rubber tape 76 mm long and wrap it around the ground wire near the ground strap.

4. Wrap the ground strap around the conductor so that the appropriate slot is exposed. Install the cables ties in the proper slots according to the type of cable. September 1999 .Connector assembling SRA L 3. 54/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.

SRA L Connector assembling 5. – Do not rotate or otherwise move the ground strap after tightening. September 1999 55/62 . Tighten the cables ties with pliers and cut off the excess. WARNING 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.

56/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. September 1999 .Connector assembling SRA L 6. Press and form butyl rubber tape on the entire ground wire to the jacket of cable or waveguide.

Cut off a piece of butyl rubber tape 76 mm long and fold it twice to make a small square. Press and form this tape onto the flange of the ground strap. 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.SRA L Connector assembling 7. September 1999 57/62 .

Starting at the bottom.Connector assembling SRA L 8. wrap the butyl rubber tape over the entire connection in a half-width. Squeeze the tape along its edges to form it to the connection. 58/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. overlapping pattern. stretching the tape as you wrap. September 1999 . Continue upward to a point 25 mm above the ground strap.

SRA L Connector assembling 9. and overlap the tape at half-width. below the butyl rubber tape. Stretch the tape enough to avoid forming wrinkles. September 1999 59/62 . 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Wrap five layers of electrical tape over the entire connection so that each layer extends 25 mm beyond the ends of the previous tape layer. Reverse wrapping directions at the end of each layer. Start wrapping at the bottom.

September 1999 .Connector assembling SRA L 10. 60/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. Do not stretch the tape for the last two turns of the fifth layer to avoid unraveling because of tension on the adhesive. Tightly squezee the completed wrapping with both hands to ensure that the layers are secure.

September 1999 61/62 . 422-027/31-35) THE SPECIAL TOOL CONSISTS OF ONE CRIMP TOOL AND TWO MATRIX * WARNING * = ONE TOOL FOR EACH INSTALLATION TEAM HAS TO BE SUPPLIED 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1.SRA L Connector assembling 15 CRIMP TOOL (323-003/19) FOR POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR (422-060/16.

Connector assembling SRA L * WARNING * = ONE TOOL FOR EACH INSTALLATION TEAM HAS TO BE SUPPLIED FINE 62/62 53-001A8-202/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Activation 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

September 1999 .Activation SRA L BLANK PAGE FINE 2/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1.

. . . .2 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . 6) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fine adjustment in azimuth . . . . . 11 12 12 13 13 13 14 14 20 21 FINAL CHECKS .2. . 6 PRELIMINARY CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . 4) . . . . .3 5. . . Adjustment between -5° and +50° (see Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1. . . . . 22 Alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 5. . .2. . . . . . . . . . . Standard antenna adjustment. . . . 10 START-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Alignment procedure. . .3 5. . . . . .2 5. . .SRA L Activation Contents 1 2 3 4 5 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/26 . . Elevation and azimuth adjustment for slim antenna ∅20/30 cm.4 6 6. . . . . . . . . . Fine adjustment in elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 5. . .2 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . Crossed polarization optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 ALIGNMENT . . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Elevation and azimuth adjustment for slim antenna ∅60 cm . .1 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjustment between +5° and -50° (see Fig. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 and Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 5. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Fig. . . . . . . . . . 7 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Standard antenna: fine adjustment in elevation between +5° and -50° . 4 Fig. . . . . . 17 Standard antenna: fine adjustment in azimuth. . . . . . . . 9 Standard antenna: fine adjustment in elevation between +5° and -50° . 8 IDU P/N 732-101/01 front view (fully equipped). 2 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Standard antenna: presetting for adjustment in elevation between +5° and -50° . 1 Fig. . . 8 ODU external view . . . . . . 6 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 IDU P/N 732-101/11 front view (fully equipped). . . . . . . . .Activation SRA L Illustrations Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 4/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. 5 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Standard antenna in (1+0): crossed polarization optimization . . . . September 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .SRA L Activation Tables Tab. . . 24 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. . September 1999 5/26 . . . 1 LED lighting up status in normal operating conditions . . .

2. and Fig. LEDs. after removing the protective cover (see document "External connections"). An external device (multimeter) can be used by the external operator to obtain the measurement of the received power field. Fig. the equipment having been assembled (see document "Equipment installation). 1. utilized during the activation phase. 6/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. are pointed out. This device. address to the factory. Fig. commands and test points. when utilized.Activation SRA L 1 GENERAL This document describes the actions to be carried out for setting the equipment to work. NOTE – Should doubts arise while executing the activation actions (especially as far as the antenna alignment is concerned). ODU where all the connectors. 3 show the external views of IDU. the hardware presettings (see document "Presettings") and the external connections (see document "External connections") performed. has to be plugged in the ODU special connector (BNC type). September 1999 .

SRA L Activation (*) (**) Optional Not present in (1 + 0) configuration Fig. September 1999 7/26 . 1 – IDU P/N 732-101/01 front view (fully equipped) 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1.

September 1999 . 2 – IDU P/N 732-101/11 front view (fully equipped) 8/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1.Activation SRA L (*) (**) Optional Not present in (1 + 0) configuration Fig.

September 1999 9/26 .SRA L Activation Fig. 3 – ODU external view 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1.

3 START-UP WARNING – To ensure the operators' safety. it is necessary to execute the relevant presettings in the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit according to instructions set down in document "Presettings". consequently. according to the requirements of the specific utilization configuration. Check the wave-guide connections between the antenna and ODU have been carried out. check the following IDU LEDs are off: • red LEDs "∆\". the equipment consists of. Check all the IDU external connections are made. the following preliminary checks have to be performed: – Before supplying the equipment check that the equipment (IDU and ODU) is connected to the protection ground. Check that. leds "INT". WARNING – Should the equipment configuration be modified on field. Such a connection has not to be removed or damaged. "URG" and "∑" are lit. To activate the equipment. only the input relevant to "PS1" connector has to be utilized. In such a case. Check the IDU is correctly equipped. according to the requirements of the specific utilization configuration (see the document "Equipment composition"). act as follows: – – – – – Apply the voltage to the power supply line from station batteries. September 1999 . are tested and adjusted in the factory. make sure that no operator is facing the antenna when the equipment is activated. "IND" of Controller unit 10/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. no checks are required on these units during installation. Set to "ON" the main switch "POWER" of the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit.Activation SRA L 2 PRELIMINARY CHECKS All the units. "INT". – – – Check the IF connection is made between IDU and each ODU. Before activating the equipment. Check the IDU is connected in redundant way to the power supply line from the station battery ("PS1" and "PS2" connectors of 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit). "NURG" and yellow LEDs "ABN". Check the green LED is lit on the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit. on the Controller unit. At initialization phase end (display of RTM unit lit). – – WARNING – The IDU can be connected to the power supply line of the station batteries even in non redundant way.

5 ALIGNMENT WARNING – The antenna alignment is indispensable to ensure the equipment correct operation and to make reliable the radio link towards the remote terminal.SRA L Activation • • • • red LEDs "OPEN CABLE". "∆\". 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. it is necessary. according to the system outfit and configuration and the customer operational requirements. In local mode. the red LED "URG". Should the software configuration have been already executed at factory under customer request. September 1999 11/26 . It can therefore be conected to the PC only using the localne. the mentioned LED is off. in any case. to check it before the equipment utilization to ensure a correct and reliable operation. For the use of the configuration software. The alignment procedure consists in positioning the antenna according to the maximum field direction. it is necessary to software configure both the radio link and the equipment. 4 SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION Before the operational use of the equipment. remote terminal activated). NOTE – In this phase. "BER" of RTM unit red LED "∆\" and yellow LED "TEMP" of Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (if equipped) red LED "∆\" of EOW unit (if equipped) red LED "∆\" of Q-Adapter unit (if equipped). is not significant since it can be lit on account of the misalignment of the corresponding antenna and/or the deactivation of the corresponding remote terminal. "ODU OVL". refer to the software OMN Manual. The status of the other LEDs located on the IDU front panel is not significant since it depends on equipment operating conditions. WARNING – The first setting of the TCP/IP connection parameters must be executed in local mode. In operating conditions (equipment activated. This procedure can be directly performed by ODU operator. either in local way or in remote way. The software configuration can be carried out. insulating the equipment from the rest of the network or of the link. The equipment comes with default TCP/IP address and netmask set. of Controller unit. on which the special software is loaded.map IP map (see OMN Manual for details). the service PC has to be plugged in the "PC" connector of the Controller unit (see document "External connections"). antenna aligned. through a PC.

The antenna adjusting procedures are here below described. Up to real received signal power -20 dBm the equipments works correctly with BER ≤ 10-10.).5 V (-90 dBm approx. – – NOTE 5. where the adjusting devices are located. Sensitivity is 0. Besides. – If necessary. act as follows: – – – Check the antenna is positioned in accordance with the specified coordinates for the site both on local terminal and remote terminal. The RF received power analog indication ranges between -5 V (maximum power) and -0. of the RTM unit (digital indication in dBm) and on multimeter. 5. it is necessary that the value on "RCV FIELD" display of RTM unit ranges between -91 dBm (min.2). – The centering procedure has to be made on every terminal at least twice alternatively.2 Standard antenna adjustment The antenna adjustments are carried out in the same way for all the system configurations.1 Alignment procedure For the antenna alignment. before the final positioning. Should the received power be below the minimum threshold. Instead.5V/decade. Execute the centering procedure also in the remote terminal. received power) with nominal indication accuracy. number "-99" is displayed. Carry out the antenna centering by the fine adjustment in azimuth and elevation (see par. remove the protective cover to get access to the connector. the value power indication accurancy makes worse since the ODU Rx RF chain saturates and so prevents the equipment damaging limiting the signal level.Activation SRA L 5. in order to position the antenna in correspondence of the maximum value of the received power. received power) and -30 dBm (max. with reference to (1+0) configuration. execute the optimization by means of the crossed polarization on both the local and remote terminal. September 1999 . Check the local terminal and the remote one are activated (see par. 3). since the antenna supporting frame. NOTE – The antenna adjustments have to be carried out with the local and remote terminals activated and operating. 12/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. the RF received power can be measured by applying an analog voltmeter to the relevant test point of AUX connector in this case. approx. should the received power exceeds the maximum threshold. is always the same. – For the correct equipment operation. Set the equipment for the received power measurement. The reading of the RF received power can be made either on the "RCV FIELD" display.

September 1999 13/26 .SRA L Activation 5. rotated by 180°.1.2. – 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. Act on the elevation adjusting screw (2): • clockwise (A): up • counterclockwise (B): down. 5): – – – – – Remove the three screws (1) and the relevant washers (2-3) and nuts (4) blocking the elevation on the antenna supporting frame. Mount the antenna adjusting screw (2).1 Fine adjustment in elevation The antenna. 6. 6) Prior to proceed.1. On procedure completion. according to its arrangement. NOTE – The antenna is always delivered with the supporting frame arranged for left pole mounting and for elevation adjustment between +5° and -50°.2 Adjustment between -5° and +50° (see Fig. This is valid for both the antenna mounting modes (right hand and left hand pole). in the lower part of the antenna supporting frame and screw down the two fixing screws (7) by relevant washers (8). Screw down the three blocking elevation screws (1) with relevant washers (2-3) and nuts (4) in the new position. can be fine adjusted in elevation between: – – +5° and -50°: adjusting screw in upper position -5° and +50°: adjusting screw in lower position.1 Adjustment between +5° and -50° (see Fig.. Act on the elevation adjusting screw (2): • clockwise (A): up • counterclockwise (B): down. by acting as follows (refer to Fig. The frame having been arranged. Move each blocking elevation screw (1) to the opposed end of the relevant slot (5). screw down the three screws (1) blocking the elevation on the antenna supporting frame. with reference to Fig. it is necessary to arrange the antenna supporting frame for the adjustment between -5° and +50°. proceed to the adjustment in elevation between -5° and +50°. tighten the three screws (1) blocking the elevation on the antenna supporting frame. acting as follows: – – Loosen the three screws (1) blocking the elevation on the antenna supporting frame. 5 and Fig. Take away the elevation adjusting screw (6) by backing off the two fixing screws (7) and the relevant washers (8). 5.2. – 5.2. At the end of the action. 4) – – Loosen the three screws (1) blocking the elevation on the antenna supporting frame.

3 Crossed polarization optimization For the crossed polarization optimization. act as follows (refer to Fig.2. a fine adjustment between ±5° is possible on every antenna. On procedure completion. – 14/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. September 1999 . tighten the four screws (1) blocking the antenna on its supporting frame.Activation SRA L 5. 8): – – Loosen the four screws (1) blocking the antenna on it supporting frame.2. 7): – – Loosen the nuts (1) securing the two upper U-bolts (2) Act on azimuth adjusting screw (3): • clockwise (A) • counterclockwise (B) On procedure completion. To adjust in azimuth the antenna. tighten the nuts (1) fixing the two upper U-bolts (2). To execute this procedure act as follows (refer to Fig. – 5.2 Fine adjustment in azimuth The antenna can be adjusted in azimuth between ±7°. Act on one of the two screws (2-3) for crossed polarization adjustment: • upper screw (2): adjustment from 0° to -5° • lower screw (3): adjustment from 0° to +5°.

head screw 2 .Elevation adjusting screw Fig.SRA L Activation 1 . 4 – Standard antenna: fine adjustment in elevation between +5° and -50° 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. September 1999 15/26 .M10×30 hex.

Hexagonal nut 5 .Slot 6 .Screw 8 .Elevation adjusting screw 7 .Washer Fig.Activation SRA L 1 .Flat washer 3 . head screw 2 .Spring washer 4 . 5 – Standard antenna: presetting for adjustment in elevation between +5° and -50° 16/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. September 1999 .M10×30 hex.

September 1999 17/26 .TE M10×30 hex. head screw 2 .SRA L Activation 1 . 6 – Standard antenna: fine adjustment in elevation between +5° and -50° 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1.Elevation adjusting screw Fig.

Activation SRA L 1 .Azimuth adjusting screw Fig. September 1999 .Hex.U-bolt 3 . 7 – Standard antenna: fine adjustment in azimuth 18/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. nut 2 .

head screw. head screw 2 . adjustment from 0° to -5° 3 .M6×40 hex.M6×40 hex. 8 – Standard antenna in (1+0): crossed polarization optimization 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. September 1999 19/26 .M8×20 hex.SRA L Activation 1 . adjustment from 0° to +5° Fig. head screw.

9 – Slim antenna ∅20/30 cm: adjustment in elevation and azimuth 20/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. September 1999 .Activation SRA L 5.3 Elevation and azimuth adjustment for slim antenna ∅20/30 cm Fig.

September 1999 21/26 .4 Elevation and azimuth adjustment for slim antenna ∅60 cm Fig. 10 – Slim antenna ∅60 cm: adjustment in elevation and azimuth 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1.SRA L Activation 5.

– For the correct equipment operation. it is necessary that the value on "RCV FIELD" display of RTM unit ranges between -91 dBm (min. the lighting up status of the other LEDs must comply with the operational condition (see Tab. received power value) is displayed. the value power indication accurancy makes worse since the ODU Rx RF chain saturates and so prevents the equipment damaging limiting the signal level. Should the received power be below the minimum threshold. NOTE The equipment operating status could be verified through the PC. 22/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. Check on "RCV FIELD" display of every RTM unit. A malfunction is signaled: – – by the alarm/status LEDs installed on the front panel of the IDU units and by resuming optical indications of rack alarm by software through the alarm signallings displayed on the PC or on the supervision system. 1 the status is indicated of the signaling LEDs.Activation SRA L 6 FINAL CHECKS The antennas having been aligned. 6. a value ranging between -91 dBm (min. on the rack top all the alarm signaling red LEDs off. September 1999 . number "-99" is displayed. 1). 1) in conditions of normal operation. Instead. on IDU front panel green LED on. located on IDU front panel. the following checks have to be carried out with both the local and remote terminals activated: – – Check all the red and yellow LEDs of IDU alarm signaling are off. via software (see software OMN Manual). received power) with accuracy ±2 dB. In Tab. received power) and -30 dBm (max.1 Normal operating conditions The equipment normal operating conditions are pointed out by: – – – – – – alarm signaling red lamp (if present) off. Up to real received signal power -20 dBm the equipments works correctly with BER ≤ 10-11. absence of alarm signaling via software. in the status expected for the current operating condition of the equipment transmitted and received RF power at nominal values. signaling the supply voltage presence. should the received power exceeds the maximum threshold. received power value) and -30 dBm (max. located on the front panel of IDU (see Fig. on 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit front panel all the other signaling LED.

sometimes.g. fault on remote terminal. 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1. the cause may be an external abnormal operation of the equipment (e. The summary alarm signalings are also returned to the outside by Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (if equipped). September 1999 23/26 .SRA L Activation 6. by an alarm signaling via software. 1). etc.).. An equipment alarm condition can be pointed out: – – – by the lighting up of an alarm red/yellow LED on the front panel of the faulty part and by the lighting up of the red summary lamp (if present) on the rack top by the incorrect lighting up status of a green/yellow LED on IDU front panel (see Tab.2 Alarm conditions An alarm condition usually indicates a fault in one of the equipment assemblies (IDU and/or ODU).

September 1999 . in case of radio channel automatic selection – ON. otherwise. 1 – LED lighting up status in normal operating conditions Unit LED Colour Red Yellow Red Red Yellow Red Yellow OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Significant only in (1+1) configuration: – OFF. the LED corresponding to the active radio channel forced manually ∑ CH1 and CH2 Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (optional) 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit Q-Adapter unit (optional) Red Green Red Yellow Green Red Green Red Green Green Green Green (continue) The lighting up status depends on the operational status of the service telephone channel (see document "Use of the service telephone channel" of the OMN Manual) OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON should the connection be active to the TMN supervisory center. it must be OFF OFF Status ∆\ ABN URG NURG IND Controller unit INT MEM ∆\ TEMP - ∆\ OS LINK ∆\ EOW unit (optional) LINE 1 and LINE 2 ODU BUSY CONF 24/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1.Activation SRA L Tab.

significant only in (1+1) configuration OFF The LED corresponding to the active radio channel is ON ON For (1+1) configuration. 1 – LED lighting up status in normal operating conditions (continue) Unità LED Colour Red Red Red Red Green Red Yellow Green OFF OFF OFF OFF ON. September 1999 25/26 .SRA L Activation Tab. the LED corresponding to the active RTM is ON Status ∆\ ODU ALM OPEN CABLE ODU OVL RTM unit ALIGN BER CH1 and CH2 ON LINE 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .Activation SRA L BLANK PAGE FINE 26/26 53-001A8-501/E Issue 1.

SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Use of POE 53-001A8-300/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

Use of POE SRA L BLANK PAGE 2/10 53-001A8-300/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 GENERAL . . . . . . .SRA L Use of POE Contents 1 2 3 4 4. . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 V BAT measurement. . 8 OPERATING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 4. . . . . . 10 Measurement of +5 V and V BAT . . . . 7 CONTROL AND CHECK DEVICES . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Received power measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 +5 V measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 POE connection to ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3. . . . .1 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 53-001A8-300/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 4. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/10 . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 POE COMPOSITION . .2 4. . . . . . .2. . . . . . . . . . 10 Measurement with POE instrument . . .3 4. . . . . . . . . 10 Use of the service telephone channel. . . . . 10 Measurement with external voltmeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 4/10 53-001A8-300/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . 4 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 POE-ODU interconnection cable . . . . . 5 POE block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 POE control and check devices . . . . . . . . . .Use of POE SRA L Illustrations Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 . . . . . . . . . 3 Fig. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 POE unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Fig. . . . . 1 Fig. . 7 DTFM handset . . . . . . . . .

. . September 1998 5/10 . . . . . . . . . . . 8 53-001A1-300/E Issue 1. . . 1 POE control and check devices . . . . . . . . . . . .SRA L Use of POE Tables Tab. . . . . . . . .

C) are not provided with multipolar connector or if such a connector is present (for instance 732-201/07B. can be used only with ODU with P/N 732-201/XX. it is present a BNC that allows the AGC measurement of the received filed. C and 732-221/XXB. allows the communication functions between the operators located in the several stations of the radio system. 1. All the other ODUs (P/N 732-201/XXB. C). it is not wired inside with the exception of the wire that carries the AGC voltage for the received field. in combination with the EOW unit of IDU. Fig.Use of POE SRA L 1 GENERAL This documents instructs about the use of the External Operator Post (POE). 1 – POE block diagram NOTE – The POE. described into this document. The POE block diagram is shown in Fig. in particular allows: – – – the conversation between stations the local conversation between the internal operator (IDU) and the external one (ODU) of the same station the conversation between remote operators and the conference among the operators of the radio system. Besides. the POE allows the following checks to be performed concerning the correct operation of ODU: – – – – check of the correct operation of ODU internal power supply check of the presence of the battery voltage supplying the ODU measurement of the received field power signaling of RF transmitter correct operation. The POE. C and 732-201/08 B. utilized in the SRA L low-capacity radio system. September 1999 . The POE utilizes a DTMF type handset. Besides the communication functions. 6/10 53-001A8-300/E Issue 1. The POE is utilized by the external operator (ODU) during the phase of equipment setting to work.

2 – POE unit Fig.SRA L Use of POE 2 POE COMPOSITION The POE. September 1999 7/10 . consists of: – – – – POE unit. P/N 634-901/02 (see Fig. The DTMF handset is provided with a 2 m long extension. P/N 314-184/70 (see Fig. P/N 630-202/18 (see Fig. 3 – DTFM handset 53-001A8-300/E Issue 1. P/N 609-004/11. 2) DTMF handset. Fig. 4) bag for the transport and keeping of the accessories. 3) cable for the connection to ODU.

1 – POE control and check devices Pos. September 1999 . with reference to Fig. (Continued) 2 3 4 LED (red) Bipolar test point 2-position switch 6 Momentary type push-button Vbat 8/10 53-001A8-300/E Issue 1. 5. in Fig. When pressed. the measurement of the received power or of the ODU voltages (+5 V/V BAT). Tab.Use of POE SRA L Fig. The push-button is operational the switch "TEST" being set to "-5V/Vbat" position. 1. It selects the type of measurement to be carried out with the unit instrument: – pos. all POE control and check devices are described. "-5V/Vbat": measurement of +5 V/ V BAT – pos. the measurement of +5 V (delivered by the ODU internal power supply) is performed by the instrument. 5 Momentary type push-button -5V When pressed. 5 1 Type Measurement instrument Acronym Function It allows. 4 – POE-ODU interconnection cable 3 CONTROL AND CHECK DEVICES In Tab. "RX POWER": measurement of the received power. TX AMP ALM RX POWER TEST When lit. It allows the measurement of the received power by an external voltmeter. The push-button is operational the switch "TEST" being set to "-5V/Vbat" position. the measurement of the battery voltage feeding the ODU is performed by the instrument. it signal the RF transmitter alarm activation. according to the position of switch "TEST". located on POE unit front panel.

to this purpose. September 1999 9/10 . it causes a local call to IDU to be sent. 8 Fig. it determines the seizure of the telephone channel for the conversation with the remote operator. sub-D type connector. 5 7 Type Momentary type push-button 2-position Switch Acronym INDOOR CALL LINE ENG. 4. it has to be connected to ODU through the special allotted cable (see Fig. the POE is provided with a 15-pole. 4). female. 5 – POE control and check devices 4 OPERATING PROCEDURES NOTE – For the location of the control and check devices. in Fig. When actuated (ON). Function When pressed. The POE in not provided with switching-on/off devices since it is directly fed by the battery voltage (V BAT) delivered by ODU. 5. refer to Fig.SRA L Use of POE Tab. 1 – POE control and check devices Pos. 53-001A8-300/E Issue 1.1 POE connection to ODU To have the POE in operational status.

1 Measurement with POE instrument – – Set switch "TEST" to "RX POWER" position.Use of POE SRA L 4. 4. As far as the use procedures are concerned of the service telephone channel.2. received power). 1. connect the DTMF handset to the jack on POE front panel (see Fig.3. FINE 10/10 53-001A8-300/E Issue 1.4 Use of the service telephone channel The service telephone channel is available only if IDU is equipped with EOW unit.2 Measurement with external voltmeter By a cable provided with plug and banana plug. 4. 4. Press push-button "-5V" and check the instrument pointer moves to green field. connect a voltmeter to the bipolar measurement point "RX POWER". Read the measured value (by marks) on the instrument. 4. The indication is approximately set to mark No. 4. received power) and -5 V (max. To preset the POE to the use of the service telephone channel.5 V (min. located on POE unit front panel (see Tab. with a sensitivity of about 10 dB for mark. The operational functions relevant to the service telephone channel are realized on POE through the DTMF handset and the relevant control/check devices. 4. Press push-button "Vbat" and check the instrument pointer moves to green field.1 +5 V measurement – – Set switch "TEST" to "-5V/Vbat" position. the received signal being -90 dBm.3.2 V BAT measurement – – Set switch "TEST" to "-5V/Vbat" position. September 1999 . 5).3 Measurement of +5 V and V BAT The ODU voltages measurement is carried out through the POE instrument.2 Received power measurement The received power measurement can be performed either with the POE measurement instrument or an external voltmeter. refer to the relevant document "Use of the service telephone channel" of the OMN manual.2. Read on the voltmeter the measured value which should range between -0. 1). POE unit is provided with a ringing bell for the signaling of the local call in progress from IDU.

September 1999 .SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Periodical controls and equipment operating check 53-001A8-301/E Issue 1.

Periodical controls and equipment operating check SRA L BLANK PAGE 2/8 53-001A8-301/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

. . . . . . . . . 5 EQUIPMENT OPERATING CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SRA L Periodical controls and equipment operating check Contents 1 2 3 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 53-001A8-301/E Issue 1.2 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 PERIODICAL CONTROLS .1 3. . . . . September 1999 3/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Alarm conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . 7 4/8 53-001A8-301/E Issue 1. . . September 1999 . 1 LED lighting up status in normal operating conditions . . . . . . . . .Periodical controls and equipment operating check SRA L Tables Tab. .

in the status expected for the current operating condition of the equipment transmitted and received RF power at nominal values absence of alarm signaling via software value displayed on “RCV FIELD” display of every RTM unit. 2 PERIODICAL CONTROLS The only periodical controls to be executed on the equipment are the following ones: – – – – visual control of the equipment integrity with possible cleaning procedure of the equipment itself check of the power supply voltage value. 3 EQUIPMENT OPERATING CHECK The equipment operating status can be checked in every moment by means of a service PC equipped with a control and configuration software (refer to the software OMN Manual).SRA L Periodical controls and equipment operating check 1 GENERAL Subject document describes the controls to be executed on the equipment to verify and check its correct functioning. 3. received power value) and -30 dBm (max. 53-001A8-301/E Issue 1. on the rack front top all the alarm signaling red LEDs off. on 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit front panel all the other signaling LED. located on IDU front panel. in case of RF connections with elliptic wave guide. received value). such a value is ranging between -91 dBm (min.1 Normal operating conditions The equipment normal operating conditions are pointed out by: – – – – – – – alarm signaling red lamp off. signaling the supply voltage presence. such a value must be comprised into the defined limits (±20% of the nominal value) software check of the RF RX power yearly cleaning and new pressurization of the wave guide. September 1999 5/8 . on IDU front panel green LED on.

Up to real received signal power -20 dBm the equipments works correctly with BER ≤ 10-10. number "-99" is displayed. received power) and -30 dBm (max. should the received power exceeds the maximum threshold. received power) with accuracy ±2 dB. 1 the status is indicated of the signaling LEDs. Should the received power be below the minimum threshold.Periodical controls and equipment operating check SRA L NOTE – For the correct equipment operation. Instead. September 1999 . 6/8 53-001A8-301/E Issue 1. it is necessary that the value on "RCV FIELD" display of RTM unit ranges between -91 dBm (min. the value power indication accurancy makes worse since the ODU RX RF chain saturates and so prevents the equipment damaging limiting the signal level. In Tab. located on the front panel of IDU in conditions of normal operation.

it must be ON should an alarm condition have been memorized OFF Significant only in (1+1) configuration: – OFF.SRA L Periodical controls and equipment operating check Tab. September 1999 7/8 . in case of radio channel automatic selection – ON. the LED corresponding to the on line RX channel forced manually Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (optional) 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit Q-Adapter unit (optional) Status ∆\ ABN URG NURG IND INT Controller unit MEM ∑ CH1 and CH2 ∆\ TEMP - Red Yellow Green Red Green Red Green Green Green Green Red Red Red Red Green Red Yellow Green ON OFF ON OFF ON should the connection be active to the TMN supervisory center. significant only in (1+1) configuration OFF The LED corresponding to the on line channel is ON ON 53-001A8-301/E Issue 1. it must be OFF OFF ∆\ OS LINK ∆\ EOW unit (optional) LINE 1 and LINE 2 ODU BUSY CONF The lighting up status depends on the operational status of the service telephone channel (see document "Use of the service telephone channel") ∆\ ODU ALM OPEN CABLE RTM unit ODU OVL ALIGN BER CH1 and CH2 ON LINE OFF OFF OFF OFF ON. otherwise. 1 – LED lighting up status in normal operating conditions Unit LED Colour Red Yellow Red Red Yellow Red Yellow Red Green OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF.

An equipment alarm condition can be pointed out: – – – by the lighting up of an alarm red/yellow LED on the front panel of the faulty part and by the lighting up of the red summary lamp (if present) on the rack top by the incorrect lighting up status of a green/yellow LED on IDU front panel by an alarm signaling via software. September 1999 . the cause may be an external abnormal operation of the equipment (e. The summary alarm signalings are also returned to the outside by Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit (if equipped).. fault on remote terminal.). FINE 8/8 53-001A8-301/E Issue 1. sometimes.g.2 Alarm conditions An alarm condition usually indicates a fault in one of the equipment assemblies (IDU and/or ODU).Periodical controls and equipment operating check SRA L 3. etc.

September 1999 .SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Troubleshooting 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1.

September 1999 .Troubleshooting SRA L BLANK PAGE 2/14 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1.

.1 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Unit connection status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Alarm events on 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF PC .SRA L Troubleshooting &RQWHQWV 1 2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Alarm events on Q-Adapter unit . . . . . . . .6 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Alarm events on RTM unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 2. .7 2. . . . . . 13 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF LEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 2. . . . . 12 Alarm events on EOW unit . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/14 . . 4 System alarm events . . 6 Alarm events on ODU . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9 3 GENERAL . . . . 11 Alarm events on Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit . . . . . . . . 9 Alarm events on Controller unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

The firmware version is then equivalent with the one of the Controller unit. For such a purpose here below there is the detailed description of all the alarm signals available via software. In the MISMATCH status. September 1999 . the slave unit is in the correct slot according to the provided configuration and it communicates correctly with the Controller unit. 2. If an alarm occurs on both the power supply lines. In DISCONNECTED and CONNECTED statuses.Troubleshooting SRA L 1 GENERAL Subject documents contents the guide lines to be followed when an alarm condition occurs to reach a quick identification of the alarm cause and then to reset the equipment correct functioning. is absent at input. provided by the station batteries. the slave unit is present into the slot but it does not correspond to what is provided by the current configuration or the firmware version is not equivalent with the one of the Controller unit. The SRA L is provided with a redundant power supply. In the ON LINE status. 2 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF PC The operator can check the presence of an alarm and detect its causes by means of the control and configuration software. 2.1 Unit connection status The connection statuses between the Controller unit and the slave units are the following ones: – – – – DISCONNECTED CONNECTED ON LINE MISMATCH. the slave unit is considered as extracted (also if the unit is inserted into the equipment and it is not able to communicate correctly with the Controller unit).2 System alarm events – Battery power supply alarm (PWR SUPPLY ALM) The power supply voltage. completed with the indication of the probable causes and with the advice of the possible remedies. there is the functionality loss of the equipment. Then it is possible the presence of errors caused by the discordance between the equipping status set by the operator and the physical one of the equipment. An alarm signal is present for each of the two power supply lines. 4/14 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. The signalling of the connection status is automatically updated by the Controller unit while the equipping setting of the units is executed via software by the operator.

To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to detect the alarm root that has caused the signal intervention and to proceed according to such a root. The alarm does not cause then an immediate out of order status for the equipment. In presence of manual forcing before proceeding to the alarm root individuation. The alarm is the summarization result of the ODU CARD FAIL. via radio. RTM CARD FAIL. via software. September 1999 5/14 . The presence of an alarm signals the failure of the connected function to the subject alarm line. in presence of manual forcing (hardware or software) or of serious alarm on the standby RX channel.g. it is necessary to remove the forcing action or forcing the other channel On Line. CABLE ALM and IN TRIB ALM serious alarms. ODU TX ALM. ODU RX ALM. RX On Line channel alarm (RX onL CH ALM) A serious alarm has occurred on RX On Line channel preventing its correct functioning.SRA L Troubleshooting – Power supply configuration error from battery 2 (PS2 CONFIG) It is possible. CABLE ALM. LOF. The alarm is the summarization result of the ODU CARD FAIL.). Remote alarms (REM LINE ALM) The SRA L receives from the remote station the four lines (LINE 1 to LINE 4) relevant to the station external alarms. to disable the second power supply line of the equipment. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to detect the alarm root that has caused the signal intervention and to proceed according to such a root. fume presence. Such a line assures the power supply redundancy. of station alarms (e. ALIGN ALM and LINK ERR serious alarms. This event causes the possible loss of some configuration data as a consequence of a power supply absence. It is not longer assured the correct service restarting after a power supply interruption. External alarms (EXT LINE ALM) Four alarm lines (LINE 1 to LINE 4) are available at connector for the transparent transport. BER ≥ 10-3. open door. RTM CARD FAIL. The alarm signals the presence at input of power supply on the second line if the second line itself has been disabled. – – 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. RX PWR ALM. In presence of manual forcing before proceeding to the alarm root individuation. IF-DEM ALM. etc. TX On Line channel alarm (TX onL CH ALM) A serious alarm has occurred on TX On Line channel preventing its correct functioning. it is necessary to remove the forcing action or forcing the other channel On Line. MOD ALM. in presence of manual forcing (software) or of serious alarm on the standby TX channel. The presence of an alarm signals the failure of the connected function to the subject alarm line on the remote station. OUT TRIB ALM. – – – Back-plane EEPROM failure (EEPROM BACK-PLANE ALM) The back-plane EEPROM is out of order.

September 1999 . it is necessary to execute the unit replacement. The received signal has an extremely bad quality. – Unit failure (CARD FAIL) The RTM unit is out of order.Troubleshooting SRA L 2. Demodulator/IF section alarm (IF-DEM ALM) The Demodulator sub-unit inside the RTM unit is out of order. May be the static delay parameter must be changed (see OMN manual) or RF signal is not available for one of the RTM units. it is necessary to execute the unit replacement. The alarm presence causes the AIS insertion (it can not be deactivated via software) at tributary side for the aggregate signal. two successive thresholds (approximately Low = 10-7 to 10-6 and High = 10-4 to 10-3) are set via hardware (such thresholds can no be modified) corresponding to the LOW EW and HIGH EW events. To reset the correct functioning. it causes the loss of switching capacity of the hitless switch.3 Alarm events on RTM unit NOTE – In (1+1) configuration. To reset the correct functioning. – – – – Hitless logic alignment alarm (ALIGN ALM) The RTM unit has detected a misalignment gap between the two channels higher than the one that the unit is able to recover by means of its own elastic memory. it is necessary to execute the unit replacement. The effect on the equipment functioning is not immediate but only of potential danger. The alarm presence causes the AIS insertion (it can not be deactivated via software) at tributary side for the aggregate signal. It is likely be caused by remote failures or by transmission anomalies. By means of this error degree. BER ≥ 10-3 (HIGH BER) The calculated BER downstream the switching has reached a threshold of 10-3. The CARD FAIL alarm masks the following alarms: • IF-DEM ALM • LOF • HIGH EW • LOW EW • ALIGN ALM • HIGH BER • LINK ID ERR • FERF • OUT TRIB ALM To reset the correct functioning. Modulator alarm (MOD ALM) The Modulator sub-unit inside the RTM unit is out of order. “Early warning low” and “early warning high” condition (LOW EW and HIGH EW) The SRA L allows to calculate the error degree according to the errors of the error correction coding. The error detectable on the connector as a consequence of the forwarded correction pulses is respectively about 10-11 (currently it can not be detected) and – 6/14 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. the service is assured by the other RTM unit. if an alarm occurs on a RTM unit.

The RTM unit controls if the ID value present inside the received signal correspond to the value expected to be received (RX link ID code). Alarm on the input tributaries (TRIB IN ALM) The input signal (LOS) at tributary side is not present or an overflow of the input buffer has occurred. Link identification code error (LINK ID ERR) The radio path (hop) realised with SRA L equipment receives an identification code (Link ID). For each available tributary. Such codes are valid respectively in transmission mode and in reception one. These two alarms. as the fading or the bad weather. A single two-way radio path receives two numeric identification codes (ranging between 0 and 15): • TX link ID code • RX link ID code. The alarm presence. It could be caused by failures into the remote system or by transmission anomalies and. Such code defines the “colour” of the path. September 1999 7/14 . relevant to the reception side. The alarm presence causes the AIS insertion (it can not be deactivated via software) at tributary side for the aggregate signal. but it means with a great probability that it has occurred a failure into the remote transmission system or a temporary transmission anomaly. are typically caused by anomalies of the transmitting device. caused by LOS. The creation speed and the disappearing one can be very high because the calculation of the error degree is very quick. The alarm does not automatically underline the failure of the RTM unit. It is necessary an intervention on the field and/or an evaluation of the possible alarms present on the connected ODU. The alarm presence causes the AIS insertion (it can not be deactivated via software) at tributary side for the aggregate signal. – – 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. it is present an alarm line.SRA L Troubleshooting 10-6. if the two values are different. by a failure of the demodulator. Instead if the alarm cause is the buffer overflow. the AIS insertion can be disabled via software. causes the AIS insertion (it can not be deactivated via software) at radio side only for the tributary under alarm. It is necessary an intervention on the field and/or an evaluation of the possible alarms present on the output of the connected system at tributary side. only with a very low probability. – Loss on aggregate signal (LOF) An alignment loss has occurred of the frame at line side. the alarm is generated.

AIS on the input tributaries (TRIB IN AIS) It is detected the AIS presence on one of the input tributaries. Cable alarm (CABLE ALM) A failure is present in the connection between ODU and RTM unit. Therefore in this case. AIS is inserted on the aggregate signal. September 1999 . It is necessary an intervention on the field and/or an evaluation of the possible alarms on the output of the connected system at tributary side. It is highly probable that a failure has occurred on the cable. It is necessary a field intervention and/or an evaluation of the possible alarms present upstream the output at tributary side. it is then highly possible a failure of the RTM unit. Such a station reacts forwarding back the FEBE signal (Far End Block Error). – – – – – – 8/14 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. Such a station reacts forwarding back the FERF signal (Far End Receive Failure). it is necessary to disconnect the input signal or to set again the tributary. It is necessary an intervention on the field and/or an evaluation of the possible alarms on the output of the connected system at tributary side. It is necessary an intervention on the field. the probability that the alarm is generated for transmission errors is very low. The alarm signals the presence of input signal on one tributary that has been disabled. the probability that the alarm is generated for transmission errors is very low. Tributary configuration alarm (TRIB CONF ALM) The RTM unit allows to set the tributary number really used in such a way to realised not completely equipped equipment.Troubleshooting SRA L – Alarm on the output tributaries (TRIB OUT ALM) The output signal at tributary side is not present. If the operator wants or not to transport the signal. it is much less probable that a failure has occurred on the cable interface circuits of the ODU and of the RTM unit. Reception failure on remote terminal (FERF) The radio signal is not correctly received by the remote station. This alarm can be caused by failures of the equipment output section at radio side. Block error on remote terminal (FEBE) The radio signal is not correctly received by the remote station. it is present an alarm line. HDB3 code error on the input tributaries (TRIB IN HDB3 CODE ERR) It is detected an HDB3 code error on one of the input tributaries. This alarm can be caused by failures of the equipment output section at radio side. For each available tributary.

TX power alarm (TX PWR ALM) A too high decrease of transmission power has occurred. there is the alarm reset after a relatively short time (depending on the atmospheric conditions). Loss of IF TX signal (TX IF ALM) An inner sensor detects the loss of the signal at intermediate frequency (IF) transporting the signal in TX at radio side. The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report of the transmission and reception alarms of the ODU. the service is assured by the other ODU. The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report of the transmission alarms of the ODU. for example.SRA L Troubleshooting 2. of the alarms relevant to transmission on the remote equipment. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement. In case of alarm caused by bad weather (fading). TX local oscillator failure (TX LO ALM) The local oscillator used for transmission inside the ODU is out of order. RX power alarm (RX PWR ALM) At input of the reception demodulator unit. The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report of the transmission alarms of the ODU. – Unit failure (CARD FAIL) The ODU is out of order. The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report of the reception alarms of the ODU. The event can be caused. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement. Then to be able to distinguish between the other causes. September 1999 9/14 .4 Alarm events on ODU NOTE – In (1+1) configuration if an alarm has occurred on one ODU. RX local oscillator failure (RX LO ALM) The local oscillator used for reception inside the ODU is out of order. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement. ODU power supply alarm (POWER ALM) The ODU power supply voltage is not present. – – – – – – 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. at network level. by anomalies of the transmitting device or by failures into the remote system. The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report of the transmission alarms of the ODU. the alarm is activated according to the not sufficient value of the received power. it is necessary to check on the field the possible presence on the local equipment of the alarms relevant to the signal reception and. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement. it is signalled the loss of the RX RF signal.

The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report of the reception alarms of the ODU. RX ODU section alarm (ODU RX ALM) A malfunction has occurred into the RX section of the ODU. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement. Wrong frequency plan (FREQ PLAN FAIL) There is a wrong correspondence between the set parameters into the frequency plan and the ones of the transceiver system (ODU) at disposal. Suppression of the transmission on progress (SQUELCH TX) It is a status signal (it is not an alarm one) signalling the squelch on progress on the ODU of the transmission signal. The alarm is the result of the summarising of the RX LO ALM. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement. The alarm is summarised into the CARD FAIL alarm of the ODU and into the report of the reception alarms of the ODU. The alarm is the result of the summarising of the TX IF ALM. TX LO ALM) or by a command automatically created by the system TX protection logic or by a software command. It can be caused by a wrong functioning of the TX chain (e. The alarm presence causes the AIS insertion (it can not be disabled via software) at tributary side for the aggregate signal. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement. POWER ALM and PS ALM alarms of the ODU. It is necessary to define again the frequency plan. IF SYN ALM. TX ODU section alarm (ODU TX ALM) A malfunction has occurred into the TX section of the ODU.Troubleshooting SRA L – IF RX synthesizer failure (IF SYN ALM) The local oscillator used for reception inside the ODU for the RF/IF connection is out of order.g. RX receiver failure (RX FAIL) The receiver of the ODU is out of order. TX LO ALM. RX FAIL and PS ALM alarms of the ODU. September 1999 . – – – – – 10/14 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the ODU replacement.

the Controller unit is not able to read the configuration from the other memories present inside the equipment for the redundancy among the Controller unit EEPROM and the back-plane EEPROM.SRA L Troubleshooting 2.6 Alarm events on 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit – Unit failure (CARD FAIL) The 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit is out of order. – 2. The status of all the equipment units is considered unknown (unknown). September 1999 11/14 .5 Alarm events on Controller unit – Unit failure (CARD FAIL) The Controller unit is out of order. Therefore. This event prevents the interfacing operation at tributary side of the equipment. Then the failure has influence upon the tele-control possibility and upon the operations executed by a local PC. if the system restarts after a power supply absence condition. The service is assured also with a Controller unit out of order or absent. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the unit replacement. This event causes only that the Controller unit can not save the configuration into the not volatile memory. 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. EEPROM failure (CONTROLLER EEPROM ALM) The EEPROM of the Controller unit is out of order. It does not cause neither an out of order condition for the equipment not that the Controller unit does not execute its functions. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the unit replacement.

To reset the correct functioning it is an intervention on the field. September 1999 . To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the unit replacement. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to check the wear of the fans (if present). To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the Alarm and Fans unit replacement. but it reduced only the possibility of tele-control operations. on the other hand it is necessary an intervention on the field. – The fan alarms are present only with equipment provided with Alarm and Fan unit. Fan alarms (FAN ALM) One fan of the Alarm and Fan unit is out of order. This event prevents the possibility of the Controller unit to detect the failures signalled by the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit. The failure has not an immediate influence on the service but it can cause an excessive increase of the IDU inner temperature and then it can cause a subsequent malfunctioning of the equipment.7 Alarm events on Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit – Unit failure (CARD FAIL) The Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit is out of order. 12/14 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. IDU overtemperature alarm (OVER TEMP ALM) It has been exceeded the maximum temperature threshold compatible with the correct functioning of the IDU also if there is the presence of the fans (in case of Alarm and Fan unit). – – – NOTE Two alarms are available.Troubleshooting SRA L 2. one for each fan: • fan 1 alarm (FAN 1 ALM) • fan 2 alarm (FAN 2 ALM). The failure does not affect the service. IDU undertemperature alarm (UNDER TEMP ALM) It has been exceeded the minimum temperature threshold compatible with the correct functioning of the IDU.

This event prevents the phonic communicaton service provided by the unit itself.9 Alarm events on Q-Adapter unit – Unit failure (CARD FAIL) The Q-Adapter unit is out of order. September 1999 13/14 . Loss of TX/RX clock for radio link (CH TXCK.8 Alarm events on EOW unit – Unit failure (CARD FAIL) The EOW unit is out of order. – The alarms relevant to line ODU 2 are present only in 2×(1+0) and A/D-RPT configuration. It does not cause neither an out of order condition for the equipment not that the Q-Adapter unit does not execute its functions.SRA L Troubleshooting 2. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the unit replacement. EEPROM failure (Q-ADAPTER EEPROM ALM) The EEPROM of the Q-Adapter unit is out of order. ODU RXCK LOS) The EOW unit manages a 64 kbit/s channel for the phonic communication (by means of POL) between the station operator (POL) and the external one (POE). NOTE 2.POE link (ODU TXCK LOS. To reset the correct functioning it is necessary to execute the unit replacement. – 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. CH RXCH LOS) The EOW unit manages a 64 kbit/s channel for the phonic communication (by means of POL) between two stations connected by means of radio link. This event causes only that the Q-Adapter unit can not save the configuration into the not volatile memory. – NOTE – Loss of TX/RX clock for POL . Four alarms are available to signal the loss of synchronism (coming from the corresponding RTM unit) for each line and for each direction: • TX clock loss line 1 (CHN1 TXCK LOS) • RX clock loss line 1 (CHN1 RXCK LOS) • TX clock loss line 2 (CHN2 TXCK LOS) • RX clock loss line 2 (CHN2 RXCK LOS). such a channel is placed near the antenna. Four alarms are available to signal the loss of synchronism (coming from the corresponding RTM unit) for each line and for each direction: • TX clock loss line ODU 1 (ODU1 TXCK LOS) • RX clock loss line ODU 1 (ODU1 RXCK LOS) • TX clock loss line ODU 2 (ODU2 TXCK LOS) • RX clock loss line ODU 2 (ODU2 RXCK LOS). This event prevents the gateway service between the protocol used into the supervision system and the TCP/IP one used into the SRA L radio network. – The alarms relevant to line 2 are present only in 2×(1+0) and A/D-RPT configuration.

∑ alarms -99 dBm received field (reading on RCV FIELD display) URG/NURG. INT. ∑ alarms Nominal received field (from -40 up to -60 dBm) (reading on RCV FIELD display) NURG alarms Nominal received field (from -40 up to -60 dBm) (reading on RCV FIELD display) NURG alarms Low received field (from -80 up to -90 dBm) (reading on RCV FIELD display) IND. Alarm status on equipment URG/NURG. ∑ alarms Nominal received field (from -40 up to -60 dBm) (reading on RCV FIELD display) • • • • EEPROM fault Second present power supply line (redundant line) but not enabled through software Troubles in the reception chain of the remote unit or no one enabled tributary on the remote unit HW/SW forcements in the protected systems Test conditions for software loop ABN. ∑ alarms Low received field (from -80 up to -90 dBm) (reading on RCV FIELD display) • • • • • • • • • • • • URG/NURG.Troubleshooting SRA L 3 TROUBLESHOOTING BY MEANS OF LEDS The aim of this troubleshooting is the one to provide to un operator/installer. not equipped with PC with control and configuration software. September 1999 . some advices about how to detect possible troubles from the equipment alarms. MEM alarms • • FINE 14/14 53-001A8-502/E Issue 1. external or deriving interference troubles URG/NURG. INT alarms IND alarms • • • • • Possible causes Wrong line-up on radio hop ODU squelch (system activation OFF) Wrong set frequency (widely external from the allowed channel) Absence of 2 Mbit/s signal on enabled tributaries Wrong set frequency (external from the allowed channel) Interference from next radio hop Reception troubles of a chain of the protected system Absence of 2 Mbit/s signal on enabled tributaries Incompatibility at radio hop level (ASIC or wrong capacity) Wrong set frequency (external from the allowed channel) Interference from next radio hop Reception troubles of a chain of the protected system Fault on one IDU unit Fault on the ODU transceiving chain Troubles on the IDU-ODU connection Power supply Second power supply line (redundant line) enabled without input power supply from battery Line-up not complying to the hop calculation.

SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Replacement procedures 53-001A8-302/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

Replacement procedures SRA L BLANK PAGE 2/8 53-001A8-302/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 FINAL OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 53-001A8-302/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . 5 ODU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OF THE IDU UNITS . . .SRA L Replacement procedures Contents 1 2 3 4 GENERAL . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . September 1999 . . 1 Replacement of an IDU plug-in unit . . . . . . .Replacement procedures SRA L Illustrations Fig. . . . 6 4/8 53-001A8-302/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . .

the connection cables present on the front part. of the Controller unit or of the Alarm/Alarm and Fan unit. All the IDU units are plug-in type ones. it is necessary to check that the spare part unit has the same hardware presettings of the one to be replaced (refer to document “Presettings”. NOTE – The replacement of an IDU unit. An excessive forcing action can cause a failure on the IDU back-plane or on the unit bottom connector. on the interested unit. 2 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OF THE IDU UNITS After having detected the failure unit. it is necessary to pay maximum attention avoiding to force excessively the unit. to execute their replacement. with the exception of the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit. it is necessary to verify that the alarm condition has been removed and then the equipment correct functioning has been reset.SRA L Replacement procedures 1 GENERAL Subject document describes the replacement procedures of the failure unit with the corresponding spare part one. September 1999 5/8 . WARNING – In case of replacement of the 2 Mbit/s Tributary unit. if it is present a particular resistance. Screw down the two fixing screws of the unit placed on its front part. it is necessary to execute the following procedure according to Fig. At the end of the replacement procedure. During the insertion phase into the IDU sub-rack. – 53-001A8-302/E Issue 1. that is without turning off the equipment. Extract the unit pulling it outside. can be executed with “hot” equipment. 1: – – – Plug out. it is necessary to execute its replacement with a spare part one with the same code.

September 1999 .Replacement procedures SRA L Fig. 1 – Replacement of an IDU plug-in unit 6/8 53-001A8-302/E Issue 1.

: 732-221/15_XXXY). September 1999 7/8 . “Equipment installation”). Specific spare parts are not provided for the ODU. For the replacement procedure of the ODU execute in a reverse order the installation procedure (refer to the doc.SRA L Replacement procedures 3 ODU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE NOTE – To execute the ODU replacement procedure it is not necessary to turn off the equipmnent. Then it is necessary to check that the spare ODU has the same code of the ODU to be replaced. identifying the ODU personalization. Then if an ODU failure occurs. 53-001A8-302/E Issue 1. it is necessary to replace the ODU with a spare one having the same code. WARNING – Every ODU is marked with a code having an extended part composed by four digits (eg.

FINE 8/8 53-001A8-302/E Issue 1. if it is necessary check that the alarm condition has been removed and then that the equipment is in normal functioning conditions check that the unit is correctly detected by the software and that it is On Line.Replacement procedures SRA L 4 FINAL OPERATIONS At the end of the failure unit replacement procedure. it is necessary to: – – – reset the service. September 1999 .

SRA L Low capacity digital radio system Symbols and abbreviations 53-001A8-151/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

Symbols and abbreviations SRA L BLANK PAGE 2/8 53-001A8-151/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

. . . . . . . . . . . September 1999 3/8 . . . . . . . . . . 5 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .SRA L Symbols and abbreviations Contents 1 2 3 GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . 6 53-001A1-151/E Issue 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SIMBOLS UTILIZED IN THE FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . September 1999 . . . . . . . 5 4/8 53-001A1-151/E Issue 1. . . . . . . .Symbols and abbreviations SRA L Tables Tab. . . . 1 Symbols utilized in the figures . . . . . . . . . . . .

the list and the meaning of the different symbols. 1. 2 SIMBOLS UTILIZED IN THE FIGURES In Tab. September 1999 5/8 . are summarized and described in this document. utilized in the figures of this manual.SRA L Symbols and abbreviations 1 GENERAL All the symbols and abbreviations. are set down. Tab. 1 – Symbols utilized in the figures Symbol Meaning Antenna Splitter Switch Handset Radio transmission Personal Computer RF coupler 53-001A8-151/E Issue 1. utilized in the manual.

September 1999 .Symbols and abbreviations SRA L 3 LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS A/D-RPT AC AGC ALM ATPC AUX BB BER BSC BTS CH CMD CPFSK CW D/A DC DCE DEM DTE DTMF EM EN EOW ESDS EXT FD FEC FSK GA GND GTFM H H/S HDB3 HDLC HL HW I/O IC ID IDU IF IN IND INT ITMN L LCTI LSI Add/Drop Repeater Alternating Current Automatic Gain Control Alarm Automatic Transmit Power Control Auxiliary Base Band Bit Error Rate Basic Station Center Basic Terminal Station Channel Command Continuous Phase Frequency Shift Keying Continous wave Digital/Analog Direct Current Data Circuit-terminating Equipment Demodulator Data Terminal Equipment Dual Tone Multi Frequency ElectroMagnetic Enable Engineering Order Wire Electro Static Discharge Sensitive External Frequency Diversity Forward Error Corrector Frequency Shift Keying Gate Array Ground Generalized Tamed Frequency Modulation High Hot-Standby High Density Bipolar 3 High Data Link Control Hitless Hardware Input/Output Integrated Circuit Identifier Indoor Unit Intermediate Frequency Input Indicative Internal Installation Test Manual Low Local Terminal Interface Large Scale Integration 6/8 53-001A8-151/E Issue 1.

SRA L Symbols and abbreviations MEM MOD MSC MTTR NE NRZ NURG ODU OMC OSI OUT OW PC PDH POH PLL POE POL RF RIEP RS RTM RX S/I SAW SRA L SW TCP/IP TFM TMN TRIB TS TX UHF URG VCO Memorization Modulator Mobile Service switching Center Mean Time To Repair Network Element Not Return-to-Zero Not Urgent Outdoor Unit Operation & Maintenance Center Open System Interconnection Output Overflow Personal Computer Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Path OverHead Phase Lock Loop External operator post Local operator post Radio Frequency Recapitulary Reed Solomon Radio Transport Module Reception Sensitivity/Interference Surface Acoustic Wave Siemens radio access at low capacity Software Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Tamed Frequency Modulation Telecommunications Management Network Tributary Service telephone Transmission Ultra High Frequency Urgent Voltage Controlled Oscillator 53-001A8-151/E Issue 1. September 1999 7/8 .

Symbols and abbreviations SRA L BLANK PAGE FINE 8/8 53-001A8-151/E Issue 1. September 1999 .

.

PRINTED in ITALY .